*«■%* Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1830, by Benjamin Franklin Fisk, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. FISK'S GREEK GRAMMAR. The requisites in a Manual of Grammar, are simplicity and lucidness of arrangement, condensation of thought, and accuracy of principle and expres- sion. These requisites Mr. Fisk. appears to have attained in a considerable degree in his Greek Grammar, of which we have expressed approbation by introducing it into our School. Forrest and Wyckoff, Principals of Collegiate School, New York City. New York, October 3d, 1843. I have used for several years Fisk's Greek Grammar, and I regard it among the best, and perhaps the best, now used in our Schools. Pupils instructed in it, encounter less difficulty than in others. E. H. Jenny, A. M., Principal of" New York Institute." New York, October, 1843. Mr. R. S. Davis, — I have examined Fisk's Greek Grammar, published by yourself. To all who will take the trouble to examine it, its own intrinsic merit will be its best recommendation. The Syntax I regard as decidedly superior. The rules are peculiarly clear and comprehensive, thereby relieving the student from a heavy tax upon his time and memory, to which he would otherwise be subjected, and from which, perhaps, he is not equally free in the use of any other work of the kind. C. Tracy, Principal of Select English and Classical School. New York City, October 28th, 1843. Recommendations fully concurring with the above opinions, have been received from the following gentlemen, among many others, who have recently adopted this Grammar in preference to any other. James N. McElligatt, Principal of the Mechanics' Society School, New York. Wm. A. Taylor, " " All Saints Parochial School, " Moore and Fish, " " the New England School, " Charles W. Feeks, " " Classical and English School, u Washington King, " " " " " J. Jay Gre enough, " " Select School, A. Jones Sexton, " " " " J. B. Kidder, " " " " " From Benjamin Greenleaf, Esq., author of the National Arithmetic, etc. Bradford, (Mass.,) Teacher's Seminary, October 16th, 1843. — For several years past, I have used Fisk's Greek Grammar in my seminary. I consider it a work of superior merit. It is well arranged ; and the rules are clear and per- spicuous. It is, in my opinion, better adapted to initiate pupils into the idiom of the Greek language, than any other treatise of the kind, that I have ex- amined. Fisk's Greek Exercises should be used in connexion with the Grammar. A work of this kind has long been needed. It is a production of great merit. Yours respectfully, Benjamin Greenleaf. O* Fisk's Greek Grammar is used in Harvard University, and in many other Collegiate and Academic Institutions, in various parts of the United States. PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. Perhaps no elementary work has so long and so justly- been the subject of complaint, as the grammars employed for the purpose of introducing beginners into a knowledge of the Greek language. Those most esteemed for copiousness and methodical arrangement, fail either by the omission of much important matter, or by the incommodious disposition and defective exemplification of what they contain. With the hope of remedying these faults the following vork was undertaken, the extreme difficulty of which the compiler was by no means aware of; but he soon discovered that, without a familiar acquaintance with the principal writers of the Greek language, and whatever has been published to elucidate them, no one could be qualified to compose a full, clear, and accurate system of its grammar, wherein the rules and observations should be properly ex- emplified, and their respective importance attached to them ; and accordingly, with a labor to be appreciated by those only who are conversant with such studies (to say nothing of extraneous impediments of no ordinary character), he collected and perused every work which seemed likely to afford any thing of service to his undertaking. In particular he read over all the more popular Greek authors, most of them many times, especially those from Homer to Demosthenes, as also their different commentators, besides having constant recourse to the invaluable lexicons and indexes of single authors by Damm, Seberus, Schweig- IV PREFACE. haeuser, Sturze, Schleusner, Sanxay, Beck, Reiske, and others. He also availed himself of the labors of Vigerus, Hoogeveen, Bos, Fischer, Matthias, Buttmann, and the other grammarians before the public, with the principal general lexicons, from the smallest up to the voluminous one of Stephanus. In perusing these works, all of which were constantly before him, he copied whatever might be of use in any part of the grammar, and thus accumulated a mass of materials, from which he was enabled to deduce the general principles of the language, with the particular ob- servations and exceptions, and to illustrate them by a selec- tion from a large number of the most pertinent examples that are to be found in all the Greek writers. And here he would observe, without further acknowledgment, that he has borrowed from other grammarians whatever answered his purpose, retaining their language wherever greater clearness would not be produced by an alteration of it. The parts preceding the Syntax required less attention than most of the others ; nevertheless much pains have been bestowed on these, and it is hoped that many deficiencies have been supplied, and that the whole has been consider- ably simplified. The modern division of nouns into three declensions was adopted, because it appeared most con- venient, and had in its favor the suffrages of nearly all the later grammarians ; but as the ancient division is preferred by many, and as a knowledge of it is necessary in perusing those writings in which it is exclusively referred to, this also is subjoined in a smaller character. It was discovered that when baryton verbs are divided into four conjugations, the rules concerning them are far less complex than when they are reduced to one. The tenses universally called the perfect and pluperfect middle, until they were lately trans- ferred by the German grammarians to the active voice, under PREFACE. the denomination of the second perfect and second plu- perfect, are here retained in the middle voice ; because the advantage of a more philosophical classification, even if it be incontestably so, seemed not in this case a sufficient rea- son for disturbing the nomenclature so generally recognised by philologists, and for destroying the symmetry which has hitherto existed in the three voices. The List of Defective Verbs, with some slight modifications from Matthiae, Busby, and others, was derived from Fischer, by whom unques- tionable authorities are given for the use of the tenses here inserted. But the chief cause of the complaints made by teachers and learners has always existed in the Syntax, and to pre- sent the Greek student with one as complete as possible, was, in all his researches, the great object of the compiler, in the attainment of which he flatters himself that he has not wholly failed. His design was, by its copiousness, to adapt it to the student at any stage of his studies, and accordingly here, as also elsewhere, the parts first to be learned are printed in the largest character, and those last of all in the smallest. The rules and observations, for the ease of the learner, are expressed as concisely as possible, and those which the Greek language has in common with the Latin, generally in the words of Adam's Latin Grammar; but where they would still have been too long to be cited on every occasion, the inconvenience is obviated, either by comprising so much only in the principal part as is of most frequent use, and after the exemplification subjoining the remainder, or by dividing the rule into several parts, of which that only is to be taken which is immediately applica- ble. Moreover the use of difficult or abstract terms was studiously avoided, although in 50 doing it was sometimes necessary to employ others hardly so precise or expressive. VI PREFACE. The Prosody also, which next to the Syntax demanded most attention, is the result of much labor and reflection ; and, it is believed, is as full and satisfactory as the limits allowable to its relative importance will admit of its being made. The prosodists from whom it was drawn are Maltby, Leeds, and others of the highest authority, and from it may be ascertained, in almost every case, whether the doubtful vowel of any word be long by the usage of the poets. It is presented in the form which seemed most convenient for reference ; and that every proper facility might be afforded to the younger student, derivatives and compounds, partic- ularly from less obvious primitives, are often given, for which the more advanced student may have little occasion. Considerable pains likewise have been taken with the rules for the Accents ; and they will be found to comprise nearly all those delivered on this subject in much larger treatises by the earlier grammarians, but which later ones have been able, with scarcely any loss, greatly to condense, and which perhaps admit of little further simplification. As the omission of these marks involves many passages in need- less obscurities, which often require the aid of adscititious light, where their presence alone would have rendered the sense perfectly clear and obvious, it is to be hoped that no Greek will hereafter be printed without them. The Dialects it was thought advisable to take from the Gloucester Greek Grammar, in consequence of the great and unexpected difficulties experienced in the execution of the more important parts. They have been altered and corrected, however, in many places, and the accents inserted throughout. The compiler cannot dismiss his performance, without returning his thanks to those gentlemen who so kindly aided him in procuring the books necessary to be consulted ; and he PREFACE. VU regrets that its appearance should convey so inadequate an idea of the labor bestowed upon it, particularly to the super- ficial or casual reader, that it would hardly protect him against the charge of ostentation, should he acknowledge in detail the obligations laid upon him. He must, however, be permitted to express his gratitude for the use he was allowed to make of the literary treasures of Harvard University, from the Librarian of which he experienced every kindness con- sistent with the duties of his important charge. It has long been the opinion of the compiler, and one which he finds pretty generally to prevail among others, that a considerable portion of the time usually allotted to the study of Greek, might be employed to much greater advan- tage in the writing of exercises in this language ; not such exercises, indeed, as have been drawn up for xhis purpose by Neilson and Huntingford, which, from the difficulties they present, fail altogether of the end they were designed for ; but such as, by the simplicity and pertinency of the exam- ples to be written, by the gradual transition from the easiest rules of construction to those more difficult, and, above all, by their not presupposing a knowledge of what has not already been learned, shall render the progress of the student more rapid, than any method hitherto devised. Such a vol- ume he is endeavoring to prepare ; and, as most of the ma- terials necessary had previously been collected, it is already in such a state of forwardness, that, should no unforeseen ob- stacle prevent, it will appear not long after the publication of this Grammar. Waltliam, Massachusetts, June, 1830. PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. The compiler of this Grammar, by a maturer consideration of the subject, and by the suggestions of several respectable teachers, has been enabled in the Second Edition to make various improvements, which he natters himself will be found considerably to enhance its value. To render the inflection of words more easy to the under- standing of the pupil, new declensions of substantives and adjectives have been inserted, and examples for the exercise of the learner subjoined to each declension ; transpositions have been made in the declensions of adjectives, by which they have been better arranged ; the four conjugations of baryton verbs have been exhibited at length, through all the voices, and the contract verbs have been conjugated in a form better adapted for use ; complete synopses of the modes and tenses have been given, of the four conjugations of bary- ton verbs, and of the three forms of contract verbs, and the synopses of the verbs in μι have been more conveniently dis- posed ; and numerous other additions and simplifications have been interspersed throughout the whole. The penultimate quantity of polysyllables has been indi- cated by the usual signs, wherever it might otherwise have been doubtful, that the beginner may be enabled to give each word its proper accent from the first time he has occa- sion to pronounce it. This was deemed of so much impor- tance, that whenever the marks of quantity would have been excluded by the Greek accents, the latter have been sacri- PREFACE. IX ficed without hesitation ; as we have no regard to them in our pronunciation of the language, but observe the same rules that we do in Latin, in which we accent the penultima of dissyllables, whether it be long or short, but the penultima of polysyllables only when it is long, and when it is short, the antepenultima. Of the polysyllables not marked, compara- tives in ιων, as βελτίων, have the accent on the penultima, except in writers not Attic ; and the words which have a short vowel in the penultima, rendered common by a mute and liquid following, as άδακρυς, p. 48., are to be accented on the antepenultima in prose. The Exercises promised in the Preface to the first edition have been duly published, and the compiler has the assur- ance of experienced teachers, that they fully answer the pur- pose for which they were intended. It is believed that, if the Grammar be first committed to memory, and a portion of easy Greek be next read, they may then be written with the greatest profit. Although the Notes appended to the Exercises refer to the pages of the first edition of the Gram- mar, which do not correspond with those of the second, yet, by means of the Table at the end of this volume, they may be used alike with both editions. Waltham, Massachusetts, October, 1S31. CONTENTS Page Letters 1 Breathings 3 Accents . 4 Marks of Reading 4 Change of Final Syllables on the Meeting of two Words.. 5 Farts of Speech 6 Article 6 Noun 7 Gender 7 Declension 8 First Declension 9 Second Declension 12 Third Declension 14 Gender 15 Genitive : 16 Accusative 20 Vocative 21 Dative Plural 21 Contracts 22 [The Ten Declensions] 2G Irregular Nouns — I. Defective Nouns 34 II. Redundant Nouns 35 Derivative Nouns — I. Patronymics 36 II. Diminutives 37 III. Amplificatives 38 IV. Verbals 38 Adjectives 39 Irregular Adjectives 49 Comparison of Adjectives 50 Irregular Comparison 51 Numerals — Cardinal Numbers 53 Ordinal and other Derivative Numbers 54 Methods of representing Numbers 55 Pronouns , 56 Verb 58 Modes 60 Tenses 61 CONTENTS. XI Fage Conjugation 62 Characteristics 63 Active Voice 63 Augment 71 Augment of Compound Verbs 74 Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice 75 Passive Voice 80 Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice 89 Middle Voice 92 Formation of the Tenses in the Middle Voice 95 Deponent Verbs 97 Contract Verbs 98 Verbs in μι 103 Irregular Verbs in μι 113 Defective Verbs 125 Impersonal Verbs 138 Particles 139 Adverbs 139 Comparison of Adverbs 141 Prepositions 142 Conjunctions 142 SYNTAX 143 Concord 143 Agreement of one Substantive with another 143 an Adjective with a Substantive 144 a Verb with a Nominative 146 Accusative before the Infinitive 147 The same Case after a Verb as before it 149 The Construction of Relatives 150 Agreement of an Adjective, Verb, or Relative, with Sub- stantives coupled by a Conjunction 152 The Use of the Article 153 1 as a Pronoun 155 Government 156 Government of Substantives 156 Adjectives taken as Substantives 157 Government of Adjectives 158 Adjectives governing the Genitive 158 Adjectives governing the Dative 161 Government of Verbs 162 Verbs governing the Genitive 162 the Dative -. 166 > the Accusative 169 the Dative and Genitive 170 the Accusative and Genitive 170 the Accusative and Dative 171 two Accusatives 172 The Government of Verbs having a Causative Signification 173 The Construction of Passive Verbs 173 Impersonal Verbs 174 the Infinitive 175 Participles 177 Verbals in τίον 180 XII CONTENTS. Page The Construction of Circumstances 1 81 Price 181 Crime and Punishment 181 Matter, and Part taken hold of. 182 Cause, Manner and Instrument 182 Measure and Distance 182 Place 183 Time 183 Part and Circumstance referred to 184 The Construction of Adverbs 184 Conjunctions 187 Prepositions 190 Grammatical Figures 203 PROSODY 206 Quantity 206 Syllables long by Nature 206 by Position 207 The Doubtful Vowels in the First and Middle Syllables— 1. Before Vowels and Diphthongs 207 2. Before Single Consonants 209 The Doubtful Vowels in Final Syllables 214 The Quantity of Derivative and Compound Words — 1. Derivatives 216 2. Compounds 216 Verse 217 Scanning 217 Different kinds of Verse — I. Hexameter 217 II. Pentameter 218 III. Iambic 218 IV. Trochaic 219 V. Anapestic 219 VI. Anacreontic 220 VII. Sapphic and Adonian 220 Accents 221 Enclitics 226 Dialects 228 Attic Dialect 228 Ionic Dialect 236 Doric Dialect 242 iEolic Dialect 249 Bceotic Dialect 252 Dialects of the Pronouns 255 Dialects of the Article 257 Dialects of the Verb Substantive είμι 258 DlGAMMA 259 Abbreviations 4 • 260 GREEK GRAMMAR. LETTERS. The Greek Language is written by means of twenty-four letters. Figure. Name. Power. Λ α άλφα alpha a Β β* βήτα beta b Γ γί γάμμα gamma g J d δέλτα delta d Ε ε ε ψΐλον epsilon e Ζ ζ ζήτα zeta ζ Η η ήτα eta e Θ &ό β-ήτα theta th Ι ι ιώτα iota i Κ κ κάππα kappa k Λ λ λάμβδα lambda 1 Μ μ μν mu m Ν ν νϋ nu η *-ί ι f xi X ο μινιόν omicron Π 7Γ ΤΛ πϊ Pi Ρ Ρ 9 ρώ rho r Σ ο ς οϊγμα sigma s Τ τ? τ αν tau t Υ υ ν ψϊλον upsilon u φ Ψ ψϊ phi ph χ Χ 7J chi ch ψ V %μϊ psi ps Ω ω ώ μέγα omega ό 2 LETTERS. The different characters for the same sound are used indiscriminately, with the exception of ο and ς, of which the former is used only at the be- ginning and in the middle of words, and the latter only at the end. By some modern editors, however, ς is used at the end of syllables, when they form an entire word, with which another is compounded ; as, δνςμενί,ς, είςφϊρω. Also in a word where the last vowel is cut off, a is retained be- fore the apostrophe; as, ίνόηο' y Αγαμέμνονα. Γ before y, κ, ξ, χ, is pronounced like ng in angle ; as, άγγελος, anggelos ; ΆγχΤσης, Angchises. When Greek words are written in Latin, κ and ν are generally repre- sented by c and y ; as, κύκνος, cycnus. The Latin ν is expressed in Greek by β or ου, and sometimes by υ alone ; as, Σϊρβιος, or Σερούιος, Servius ; Σευήρος Severus. Tne old Greek alphabet consisted of sixteen letters only, α β γ δ ε ι κ λμιοπρστν, which were sufficient to express all the sounds of the Greek language. The remaining eight were afterwards added, for tbe sake of convenience rather than from necessity. The letters are divided into seven vowels and seventeen consonants. The vowels are ε, ο, short ; η, ω, long ; and a, ι, υ, doubtful. The doubtful vowels are long in some syllables, short in others, and either long or short in others. The ancient Greeks used ε for η, and ο for ω or ου* as, JEMETPOS for J, -μητρός, ΘΕΟΝ for Θεών, HEPOJO for Ήρώδου. There are twelve diphthongs ; six proper, αι, av, u, εν, οι, ov • and six improper, a, rj, q>, r\v, ων, ν ι. All diphthongs end with torr hence these vowels are called subjunctive, and the others prepositive. .The iota subscript, in the diphthongs «, r\, ω, is not sounded, but serves only to indicate the derivation of the word. It was anciently written in the line, and in capital letters this is still practised as, TSII ΑΗΙΣΤΗΙ, τω %arjf, τω'Άίδτ} or ady. Αι is commonly represented in Latin byte, as, Φαιδρός, Phcedrus, some- times by ai, as, Μαία, Μαία ; ει by i long, as, Νείλος, Nilus, sometimes by e long, as, Μ ,\δεια, Medea ; οι by oe, as, Βοιωτία, Baotia ; and ου by u long, as Μούσα, Musa. The consonants are divided into mutes, semivoivels, and double consonants. The mutes are nine ; Three smooth, π, κ, τ • Three middle, β, γ, d • Three aspirate, φ, χ, &. BREATHINGS. 3 Each smooth mute has its corresponding middle and aspirate, into each of which it is frequently changed ; thus, π has β for its middle, and φ for its aspirate. When two mutes come together, the former must be of the same breathing with the latter ; a smooth must stand before a smooth, a middle before a middle, and an aspirate before an aspirate ; thus, τέτνττται, έτύφ&ην, not τέτνφτοα, έτύτί&ην • ex- cept when the same aspirate would be doubled, and therefore, J-unqcib, Βάκχος, not — «φφώ, Βάχχος. The poets often drop the final vowel of the preposition κατ'α, and change the τ into ττ before φ, into κ before /, and into β, γ, δ, π, λ } μ, ν, ο, before those letters respectively ; as, κακχεϋσαι for καταχενσαι, κάββαλε for κατέ- βαλε, καδδίναμιν for κατά δνναμιν, καλλείψω for καταλείψω. The semivowels are nve, λ, α, ν, ο, σ, the four first of which are also called liquids. Ά Γ is changed into γ before 7, κ, ξ , χ ■ into μ before β, μ, π, φ, ψ ' and into λ, ρ, and σ, before those letters respectively ; as, εγγράφω for ένγράγο), εμβάλλω for ένβάλλω, συλλέγω for συν- λέγω. The double consonants are three ; ζ for δα • ξ for κσ, γα, χα • τμ for πα, β α, φα. These double letters are universally used instead of their corresponding simple ones ; as, λείψω for λείπσω, from λείπω • λέξω for λέγσω, from λέγω • except where the two simple letters belong to two different parts of a compound ; as, έχσεύω, not έξεύω. BREATHINGS. There are two breathings, the smooth or soft ('), and the rough or aspirate ( c ), one of which is placed over every vowel or diphthong beginning a word. The aspirate breathing has the force of the English h aspi- rate ; as, Ιστορία, Jiistoria ; " Ομηρος, Homeros. The smooth is 4 ACCENTS. MARKS OF READING. used where, in modern languages, we begin with a vowel ; as, έγώ, ego ; ώμος, omos. In diphthongs the breathing is placed over the second vowel •, as, Ευριπίδης, οϊος • except when it is silent ; as, "Αιδης, όίδης. Υ and q at the beginning of a word have always the aspi- rate ; as, νδωρ, ρήτωρ. When ρ is doubled, the former has the smooth, and the latter the aspirate ; as, Πΰρρος. The ancient mark for the aspirate was H, as in Latin ; thus, ΉΈΚΑ- TON was written for εκατόν. This was afterwards divided, and d used as the soft, and l• as the aspirate. These were next altered to -* and *< , and finally rounded into their present form, ' and r . The iEolians, who avoided the aspirate, used another sound, similar to a ν or a w, to prevent the hiatus occasioned by the meeting of vowels in different syllables : this was called the digamma, because its figure re- sembled two gammas, one above the other, thus, F or f. Thus ftoniqa for ίσπίρα, ώ/όν for ώ'ον, τούτο $ίδον for τούτο ϊδον. Hence the Latin vispera, ovum, video, &c. ACCENTS. There are three accents, the acute ( ' ), the grave, ( y ), and the circumflex (" ). The acute stands over one of the three last syl- lables of a word ; the grave over the last syllable only ; and the circumflex over one of the two last. The circumflex stands only over long vowels and diphthongs ; the acute and the grave, also over short vowels. Words accented on the last syllable are called oxytons or acutitons ; those not accented on the last syllable, barytons or gravltons. MARKS OF READING. The Greek comma ( , ) and period ( . ) are the same as the English ; the colon ( • ), which is not distinguished from the semicolon, is a point at the top of the line ; and the note of interrogation ( ; ) is the English semicolon. The diastole or hypodiastole is a comma, used to distinguish certain words from others consisting of the same letters ; as, o,rt, which, to distinguish it from οτι, that. CHANGE OF FINAL SYLLABLES. 5 The apostrophe denotes that a vowel is cut off; as, αλλ' εγώ for αλλά εγώ. The diceresis is placed over the latter of two vowels, to show that they do not form a diphthong ; as, δις, pronounced o-is. CHANGE OF FINAL SYLLABLES ON THE MEET- ING OF TWO WORDS. The Greeks have three methods of preventing the meeting of vowels in different words ; by cutting off the last vowel of the former word, by adding a consonant to it, and by drawing the two words into one. 1 . The final vowel of some words is often cut off when the next word begins with a vowel, and the omission denoted by an apostrophe ; as, πάντ ελεγον for πάντα ελεγον. If a smooth mute be left before an aspirate vowel, it is changed into its cor- responding aspirate ; as, άψ ov for άπο ov. The vowels thus cut off are α, ε, t>, o, and the diphthongs at and οι • but περί and πρό never, and datives of the third de- clension seldom lose their final vowel. The Attics and Dorians sometimes cut off these vowels and diphthongs at the beginning of words ; as, ώ "γαϋ-ε for ώ άγϋ&έ. 2. Ν is added to the dative plural in at, and to verbs of the third person in ε and l, when the next word begins with a vowel ; as, παοιν είπεν εκείνος, for naoi είπε εκείνος. Also to εϊχοσι, πε\)ϋθι, παντάπάαι, νύσφι, πρόσύε, οπιοόε, κε, and νν. In like manner οντω, άχρι, μέχρι, and άτρέμα, take ς before a vowel ; as, ούτω; είπε. Ού becomes ούκ before a smooth vowel, and ουχ before an aspirate. Ν is often added before a consonant in verse ; as, ωτρϋνεν dk εκαστον. 3. When a word ending with a vowel or diph- thong precedes another beginning with a vowel or diphthong, they are sometimes drawn into one ; PARTS OF SPEECH. as, τα^Γκα for τ ά αδϊκα, κάγώ for καϊ εγώ, κάτι for και ετι, κατά for και είτα, χώπότε for καϊ οπότε, ώνηο for ό άνήο, ουκ for ό εκ, έγωδα for εγώ olda, &οιμάτιον for το Ιμάτιον. Some of the most learned critics omit t, when in the former of the two words thus drawn together, and subscribe it when in the latter, as in the examples above ; but others subscribe it in both cases, writing κα/ώ, κα'™, as well as κατά. PARTS OF SPEECH. The parts of speech in Greek are eight, viz. article, noun, pronoun, verb, participle, adverb, preposition, and conjunction; the interjection being reckoned as an adverb by the Greek grammarians. The article, noun, pronoun, and participle, are declined with gender, number, and case. There are three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter. There are three numbers ; the singular, which speaks of one ; the plural, which speaks of more than one ; and the dual, which speaks of two, or a pair. The dual is not used in the lEioYic dialect any more than in the Latin, which was derived from it ; nor is it found in the New Testament, in the Septuagint, or in the Fathers. It is used most frequently by the Attics, who, however, often employ the plural instead of it. There are five cases, nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and vocative. ARTICLE. The article <5, ή, τό, generally answers to the definite article the in English. When no article is expressed in Greek, the English indefinite article a is signified. Thus άν&ρωπος means a man, or man in general ; and ό άν&ςωπος the man. It is thus declined : NOUN. Dual. Μ. F. Ν. Singular. Μ. F. Ν. Ν. ό, ή, τό, G. του, ττ\ς, του, D. τω, τη, τω, Α. τό^, τή", τό There is no form of the article for the vocative, for ώ is an adverb. The article with δε or γε annexed to it has the signification of a demon- strative pronoun. The declension remains the same ; as, οδε, ηδε, τόδε, τούδε, τ^σδε, τούδε, &c. Ν. Α. τώ, τά, τώ, G. D. τοΧν, ταΧν, τοϊν. Plural. Μ. F. Ν. Ν. οί, αί, τά, G. των, των, των, D. τοΐς, ταΐς, τοΐς, Α. τους, τά?, τά. NOUN. GENDER. To indicate the gender of the noun, use is made of the ar- ticle ό for the masculine, ή for the feminine, and τό for the neuter. The gender of nouns is determined partly by their signifi- cation, and partly by their termination : the following are the rules concerning the former; those concerning the latter will be given with each declension. I. The names of male persons or animals, of months, and rivers, are masculine ; as, ό Σωκράτης, δ ΜουνυχΧων, δ Σιμδεις. Exc. The gender of some names of rivers depends on the termination ; as, ή Λή&η, the river Lethe. II. The names of female persons or animals, of trees, coun- tries, islands, and towns, are feminine ; as, ή ' Ασπασία, ή Αε- όντιον • ή φηγός, ή πίτυς • ή Αίγυπτος, ή Σάμος, ή ΑακεδαΙμων. Exc. 1. Diminutives in ον are neuter ; as, τό γΰναιον, from γυνή, wife. Exc. 2. Some names of trees are masculine ; as, ό έρινεδς, wild fig-tree ; ό φέλλος, cork-tree ; δ κέρασος, cherry-tree ; δ λωτό?, lote-tree; δ κΰτΧσος, cytisus. Some are masculine or feminine ; as, δ, ή πάπυρος, papyrus , ό, ή κδτίνος, wild olive-tree. Exc. 3. Several names of towns are masculine ; as, ό Σε- λτνοϋς, &c. Others are either masculine or feminine : δ', ή Μαρά&ών • δ, ή Ί Ακράγας. "Αργός, εος, is neuter. Many names of islands and cities are of both genders ; as, 6, ή Ζάκνν&ος • ό, ή "Επίδαυρος. III. Nouns used as masculine when the male, and feminine when the female is spoken of, are common ; as, ό and ή βους % ox or cow ; δ and ή ίππος, horse or mare. 8 NOUN. Obs. In most names of animals one gender is used for both sexes, called the epicene gender ; as, ό λύκος, wolf, and ή άλώπηξ,/οζ, whether masculine or feminine. DECLENSION. There are three declensions of nouns, correspond- ing to the three first declensions in Latin. GENERAL RULES OF DECLENSION. The nominative and vocative are mostly the same in the singular, and always in the dual and plural. The dative singular always ends in t, either in the line, as in the third declension, or subscribed, as in the first and second. The genitive plural always ends in ων. The nominative, accusative, and vocative of neu- ters are alike, and in the plural end in a. The dual has but two terminations, one for the nominative, accusative, and vocative, and the other for the genitive and dative. View of the Three Declensions. I. Decl. II. Decl. III. Dec!. N. a * f G. as — ης \ D. ?- A. av - V. a — N. A. V. a G. D. aiv N. at G. ων D. αις A. ας V. at ης Singular. ος Neut. ov mmm ου Ψ ov ε Neut. ov ος X it — ν Neut. like the Nom. Dual. Ι ω 1 « | οιν otv Plural. οι Neut. a ες Neut. X. ων ων οις ους Neut. a οι Neut. a σί ας Neut. H ες Neut. & FIRST DECLENSION. FIRST DECLENSION. Nouns of the first declension end in α, η , feminine ; and in ας, ης, masculine. ή μούσα, muse. Singular. Dual. Plural. Ν. μοΰσ-α, a Ν. μούσ-α, two Ν. μοϋσ-αι, G. μούσ-ης, of a ^ G. μούσ-αιν, of two «ί G. μουσ-ών, of (λ D. μούσ -r,, to a § D. μούσ-αιν, to two | D. μούσ -atc, to 3 Α. μονσ-αν, a § Α. μούσ-α, two 1 Α. μούσ-α ς, δ V. μουσ-α, Ο V. μούσ-α, Ο two V. μουσ-α*, Ο In like manner decline άμιλλα, contest. S -ύελλα, tempest. γλώσσα, tongue. μέλισσα, bee. δίψα, thirst. ρίζα, root. ϊχιδνα, viper. τράπεζα, table. θάλασσα, sea χλαίνα, outer garment. Nouns in ρα, a pure, and α contracted, with some proper names, as Λήδα, Ανδρομέδα, Μάρ&α, Φιλομήλα, Γέλα, make the genitive in ας, and the dative in a • thus, ή φιλία, friendship. Dual. Sing. N. φιλϊ-α, G. φιλί-ας, D. φιλί-α, Α. φιλί-αν, V. φιλί-α. Ν. Α. V. φώ/-α, G. D. φιλί-αιν. In like manner decline αίτ/α, Plur. Ν. φιλί-α ι, G. φίλί-ώ/', D. φιλί-α ις, Α. φΛ/-α£, V. φιλί-αι. αγορά, market, &ρουρα, field, γέφυρα, bridge, ήμερα, day. &ύρα, door. μά/α*ρα, sword, knife, μοίρα, share, σφαίρα, sphere. Obs. 1. A vowel is called pure, when it immediately follows a vowel or diphthong, with which it is not mixed or united in sound. Obs. 2. The ancient Latins followed this manner of making the genitives in as; as, terras, escas, Latonas, for terra, esca, Latona. Paterfamilias continued always in use. άλή&εια, δωρεά, ^λα/α, εστία, ττέλεια, σκιά, στοά. cau^e. truth. gift• olive-tree. hearth. dove. shadow. porch. 10 NOUN. Ν. G. D. A. V. Sing. τψ-ή, τψ-ής, τφ -rf, τιμ-ήν, τιμ-ή. άξΐνη, αρετή, ηδονή, κόρη, κώμη, λύπη, Sing. Ν. ταμι-α£, G. ταμί-ον, D. ταμί-α, Α. ταμί-αν, V. ταμί-α. ή τιμή, honor. Dual. Ν. Α. V. τψ-ά, G. D. τιμ-αϊν. In like manner decline axe. νεφέλη, virtue. νίκη, pleasure. νύμφη, girl. όδννη, village. πύλη, grief. φωνή, δ ταμίας, a steward. Dual. Ν. G. D. A. V. Plur. τιμ-αΐ, τιμ-ων, τιμ-αΧς^ τιμ-άς, τιμ -al. cloud. victory. bride. pain. gate. voice. N. A. V. ταμ/-α, G. D. ταμί-αιν. Plur. Ν. ταμί-αι, G. ταμι-ών, D. ταμί-αις, Α. τα^-α^, V. ταμί-αι. In like manner decline Μνείας, JElneas. νεανίας, youth, κοχλίας, cockle. όρνι&οϋ-ήρας, fowler. Some nouns in ας make the genitive in α as well as ου - as, Πυ&αγόρας, gen. Πυ&αγόρου and Πυθαγόρα, Pythagoras ; πατραλοίας, gen. πατραλοίου and πατραλοία, parricide. Some keep a exclusively, as, Θωμάς, gen. Θωμά, Thomas; Βορράς, gen. Βορρά, north wind; ^ατα^ας, gen. -Σατανά, Satan; πάππας, gen. πάππα, father. These g'enitives in a were the Doric form. Sing. Ν. τελών-ης, G. τελών-ου, D. τελών -rf, Α. τελών-ην, V. τελών-η. 6 τελώνης, publican. Dual. Ν. Α. V. τελών-α, G. D. τελών-αιν. Plur. Ν. τελων-αι, G. τελων-ών, D. τελών-αις, Α. τελών-ας, V. τελών-αν. In like manner decline άδολέσχης, prater. Άιρείδης, Atrides. FIRST DECLENSION. 11 All nouns in της, poetical nouns in πης, national names in ης, and compounds of μετρέω, πωλέω, τρίβω, make the vocative in a* as, προφήτης, προφήτα, prophet; κυνώπης, χυνώπα, shameless; Σκύ&ης, Σκύ&α, Scythian; γεωμέτρης, γεωμέτρα, geometrician. Also λάγνης, Μεναίχμης, Πνραίχμης. But ΑΙήτης, αίναρέτης, καλλιλαμπέτης, make η. Nouns in στης make α or η ' as, ληστής, Χτιστά and ληστή, robber. Words for Practice. άρτοπώλης, seller of bread. πολίτης, citizen. δεσπότης, master. τεχνίτης, artist. κλέπτης, thief. τοξότης, archer. κριτής, judge. μα&ητής> disciple. εραστής, lover. Πέρσης, Persian. ' Ορέστης, Orestes. ποιητής, poet. πολεμιστής, warrior. The iEolians and Macedonians adopted the termination α even in the nominative of these nouns ; thus, ίππότα for Ιππό- της, horseman; νεφεληγερέτα for νεφεληγερέτης, cloud-gathering. Hence in Latin cometa, planeta, poeta, from κομήτης, πλανήτης, ποιητής. Contracts of the First Declension. Some nouns of the first declension are contracted, by drop- ping the vowels preceding the terminations α, η, ας, ης ■ except εα not preceded by a vowel or ρ, which is contracted into η • thus, uvaa, a, mina. Sing. Ν. μν-άα, a, G. μν-άας, ας, D. μν-άα, a, Α. μν-άαν, αν, V. μν-άα α &,C. έρεα, a, wool. Sing. . Ν. έρ-έα, α, G. έρ-έας, ας, D. έρ-έα, α, Α. έρ-έαν, αν, V. έρ-έα, a, &c γέα, γή, earth. Sing. Ν. γ-έα, η, G. γ-έας, ής, D • ϊ' έα , ΊΪ> Α γ-έαν, ψ, V. y -έα, ή,&ϋζ. άπλόη, η, simplicity. Sing. Ν. άπλ-όη, ή, G. άπλ-όης, ής, D. άπλ -orj, η~, Α. άπλ-όην, ήν, V άπλ-όη, ή, &C. Ερμέας, ής, Mercury. Sing. Ν. Έρμ-έας, ής, G. Έρμ-έου, ον, D. Έρμ-έα, f, Α. Έρμ-έαν, ήν, V. Έρμ-έα, ή, &C. γαλέη, η, weasel. Sing. Ν. γαλ-έη } ή, G. γαλ-έης, ής, D. γαλ-έη, ff, Α. γαλ-έην, ήν, V. γαλ-έη, TJ,&C. Απελλέης,ής,ΑρεΙΙββ. Sing. Ν. "Άπελλ-έης, ής, G. ' Απελλ-έον , ου, D. Άπελλ-έτ], η, Α. "Άπελλ-έην, ήν, V. Άπελλ-έη, ή, &c. 12 NOUN. SECOND DECLENSION. Nouns of the second declension end in ος, generally mascu- line, but sometimes feminine, and ov neuter. ό λόγος, word, speech. Sing. Dual. Plur. Ν. λόγ-ος, Ν. λόγ-οι, G. λόγ-ου, Ν. Α. V. λάγ -w, G. λόγ-ων, D. λόγ-ω, D. λόγ-οις, Α. λογ-ον, G. D. λ6γ-οιν. Α. λόγ-ονς, V. λογ-ε. V. λόγ-οι. In like manner decline 6 άνεμος, wind. ή νήσος , island. δ άργυρος, silver. ή οδός, way. ή δοκός. beam. δ οίκος, house. ή ήπειρος, continent. ό σίδηρος, iron. 6 κψιος, gar den. ή φηγοί •, 5eecA. 06s. In a few instances, the common dialect, like the Attic, makes the vocative like the nominative ; as, & Θεός, whence the Latin ό Deus ; and δ οίτος, heus tu. τό ξύλον, wood. Sing. Dual. Plur. Ν. ξύλ-ον, Ν. ξνλ-α, G. ξνλ-ου, N. A. V. ξύλ-ω, G. ξύλ-ω ν, D. ξύλ -cp, D. ξνλ-οις, Α. ξνλ-ον, G. D. ξύλ-οιν. A. ξνλ-α, V. ξύλ-οί'. V. ξνλ-α. In like manner decline άργύριον, silver. μήλον, apple. βνβλίον, book. πέδτλον, sandal, shoe, δένδρον, tree. πρόβάτον, sheep, ζωον, animal. ρόδον, rose. μέτρον, measure. συκον. fig- Contracts of the Second Declension. Some nouns of the second declension are contracted, by changing so, oo, into ov, and εα, oa, into «, and dropping ε and ο before a long vowel or diphthong. SECOND DECLENSION. 13 τό όστέον, bone. Dual. N. A. V. όστ-έω, δ, G. D. όστ-έοιν, olv. Sing. Ν. όστ-έον, οϋ>, G. όστ-έον, ου, D. όστ-έω, ω, Α. όστ-έον^ οΰν, V. όστ-έον, οϋν. In like manner decline κάνεον, basket, dish. Plur. N. όστ -ea, or, G. όστ-έων, ων, D. όστ-έοις, οΐς, Α. όστ-έα, α, V. όστ-έα, a. Sing. Ν. y-oos, οΰς, G. ν-όου, ου, D. ί'-όω, ω, Α. ν-όον, ovv J V. y-'3e, ου. 6 νόος, understanding. Dual. N. A. V. ν-όω, ω, G. D. ν-όοιν, olv. Plur. N. ν-όοι, ol, G. ν-6ων ί ων, D. ν-όοις, οΐς, Α. ν-όους, οΰς, V. ^-(5θ4, οί. So its compounds εϋνοος, &νοος, &,c. Also δ ρόος, stream; 6 πλόος, voyage ; 6 χνόος, down ; 6 χρόος, skin ; with their compounds. But the neuter plural in a of compounds remains uncontracted ; as, evVoa, καλλίρροα, εϋπλοα. Even in the geni- tive we rather say εύνόων, εύηλόων, than εϋνων, εϋπλων, &.c. To the contracted of this form may ό Ίησοϋς be referred, dif- fering in the dative only, which ends in ου • and (with more propriety than to the triptots) diminutives in ϋς • as, 6 Jwvvg, ό Καμυς, 6 Κλαυσΰς. Sing. Ν. Ίησ-οΰς, G. Ίησ-οϋ, * D. Ίησ-οΰ, Α. Ίησ-οϋν, V. Ίησ-ον. Sing. Ν. Λιον-νς, G. 4ιον-ΰ, D. Jiov -ΰ, Α. 4ιον-ΰν, V. Jiov-v. Attic Form. In some nouns of the second declension the Attics change the last vowel or diphthong into ω, subscribing ι, and making the vocative like the nominative ; as, ό λαγώς, λαγώ, hare, for λαγός, λαγον. If the vowel preceding ως be α long, it is changed into ε • as, ό λεώς for λαός, people ; τό άνώγαιον, άνώγεων 9 hall. 2 14 NOUN. <5 ί'εώί, temple. τντ Si " g • Dual. Plur. JN. ν£-ως } Ν. νε-ω, G. νε-ω, Ν. Α. V. *ε-ώ, G. νε-ων, D. νε-ω, D. νε-ως, Α. νε-άν, G. D. νε-ων. Α. ^ε-ώ^, V. νε-ώς. In like manner decline V. ^ε-ω. ή γάλως, brother' 5 wife. ό Μενέλεως, Mcnelaus, ό κάλως, cable. ο ταώς, τό άνώγεων, hall. peacock. Sing. Dual. Plur. Ν. άνώγε-ων, Ν. άνώ/ε-ω, G. άνώγε-ω, Ν. Α. V. άνώγε-ω, G. άνώγε-ων; D. άνώγε-ω, D. ό^ώ^ε-ω?, Α. άνώγε-ων, G. D. άνώγε-ων. Α. άνώγε-ω, V. άί'ώ^ε-ωΐ'. V. ό^ώ^ε-ω. In like manner decline the neuter adjectives εϋγεων ) fertile. ϊλεων, propitious. Obs. 1. There is one neuter in ως, viz. τό χρέως, του χρεω 9 debt. Obs. 2. The Attics frequently omit ν in the accusative ; as, τον ϊαγώ, τον νεώ, τήν εω. So Κω, Κέω, "Λ&ω. Sometimes in the nominative ; as, τό άγήρω, for άγ-ήρων. Obs. 3. The Attics often decline after this form, words which otherwise belong to the third declension ; as, Μίνω for Μίνωος, from Μίνως • γάλων for γέλωτα f from γέλως • and the later Greeks decline words in ως, which belong to the second, according to the third declension ; as, κάλωος for χάλω, from κάλως. THIRD DECLENSION. Nouns of the third declension end in α, ν, ν, ω, ν, ξ, ρ, ς, φ, and increase in the genitive. ό σωτήρ, savior. Dual. Sing. Ν. σωτ-ήρ, G. σωτ-ηρος, D. σωτ-ηρι, Α. σωτ-ηρα, V. σωτ~ερ. Ν. Α. V. σωτ-τ\ρε, G. D. σωτ-ήροιν. Plur. Ν. σωτ-τ\ρες, G. σωτ-ήρων, D. σωτ-ηρσι, Α. σωτ-ηρας, V. σωτ-ηρε?. THIRD DECLENSION. 15 το σώμα, body. Sing. Dual. Plur. Ν. σώμ-α, Ν. σώμ-ατα, G. σώμ-ατος, Ν. Α. V. σώμ-ατε, G. σωμ-άτων, D. σώμ-ατι, D. σώμ-ασι, A. σώμ-α, G. D. σων-άτοιν. Α. σώμ-ατα, V. σώμ-α. 6 rtcaav, pcBan. V. σώμ-ατα. Sing. Dual. Plur. N. παι-άν, Ν. παι-ανες, G. παι-ανος, Ν. Α. V. παι-ανε, G. παι-άνων, D. ηαι-ανι, D. παι-ασι, A. ηαι-ανα, G. D. Ttai-avotv. Α. παι-ανας, V. παι-άν. ή λαϊλαψ, storm. V. παι-ανες. Sing. Dual. Plur. N. \α.Ζλ<χ-ψ 1 Ν. λαΐλα-πες, G. λαΐλά-ηος , Ν. Α. V. λαίλα-πε, G. λαιλά-πων, D. ΧαίΧα-πι, D. λαΐλα-ψι, A. χαΐλα-πα, G. D. Χαιλά-ποιν. Α. λαΐλα-πας, V. λαΐλα-ψ. δ &ώς, jackdll. V. λαίλα-τζες. Sing. Dual. Plur. N. #-ώ ? , Ν. &-ωες, G. &ωός, Ν. Α. V. &-ωε, G. -θ -ώων, D. &-ωΐ, D. -&-ωσΙ, # A. #-ώα, G. D. &-ωοϊν. Α. 3~-ώιχς, V. <&-ώς. V. &-ώες. Words for practice in the third declension are given with the examples of the different formations of the genitive. GENDER. Nouns of the third declension admit of no general rule for the determi- nation of their gender ; but that of a large proportion of them may be known by the following rules for some of the principal endings, in which those nouns, whose gender is determinable from their signification, are not noticed. 1. Nouns in ην, ηρ, ενς, ως, -ωτος, and those which have ντος in the genitive, are masculine ; as, 6 λψήν } harbor ; 6 ζωστήο, girdle ; 6 άμφορενς, amphora ; ό γέλως -ωτος, laughter ; 6 τένων -οντος, tendon ; 6 όδονς -οντος, tooth ; 6 ίμάς -άντος, thong. Except ή φοήν, intellect; δ,-ηχήν, goose; ή /αστήο, belli/; ή *ή?ι f aie > °> ή άηρ, air, mist ; with the neuter contracts in η$ ' and τό φως, light. 16 NOUN. 2. Nouns in ας -αδος, ις, ω and ως -οος ) with nouns of quality in της, are feminine ; as, ή λαμπάς -αδος, torch ; ή χάρις, grace ; ή πει&ω, persuasion ; τ] αΙδως -6ος, modesty ; r) γλυκϋτης, sweet- ness. Except some adjectives in ας -αδος of the common gender, and the following nouns in ις • ό όφις, serpent ; 6 εχις, adder; ό κόρις, bug; ό μάρις, a certain measure ; δ κΐς, weevil; δ λΐς, lion; ό δελφίς, dolphin; ό, ή όρνις, bird; ή, ό τίγρις, tiger ; and ή, ό &1ς, bank, shore, 3. Nouns in α, ν, υ, ορ, ωρ, ος, ας -ατός and -αος, αρ, with contracts in εαρ -ηρ, are neuter ; as, τό σώμα, body ; τό μέλι, honey; το άστυ, city; τό ήτορ, breast; τό νδωρ, water ; τό τείχος, wall; τό τέρας -ατός, miracle; τό δέπας -άος, cup ; τό \παρ, liver; τό κέαρ, κτ)ρ, heart. Except ό ψάρ, starling; 6, ή Ιχώρ, lymph; δ άχωρ, ulcer; δ λάς -άος, stone; and ό or τό κράς, κράτος, head. There are no other neuter substantives of this declension, except τό πυρ, fire ; τό φως, light ; τό ούς, ear ; and τό σταΐς, dough. Those in ας, therefore, are generally masculine, when they make the genitive in αντος • feminine, when they make it in αδος • and neuter, when they make it in ατός and αος, GENITIVE. The genitive of the third declension always ends in ος, and admits of a great variety of formations. From the vowels α, ι, ν, ω. a — -ατός τό σώμα, σώματος, body ; τό νόημα, thought ; τό πράγμα, thing ; τό στόμα, mouth. l — ιος τό σίνηπι, σινήτϊΐος, mustard ; τό κόμμι, gum ; τό πέπερι, pepper, — ιτος τό μέλι, μέλϊτος, honey, the only substantive of this form ; but there are several neuter adjectives, which may be said, however, to derive their genitive rather from the masculine termination in ις. υ — υος τό δάκρυ, δάκρυος, tear; τό νάπυ, mustard. In like manner τό γόνυ, knee, and τό δόρυ, spear ; but these two sometimes take άτος from the obsolete γόνας and δόρας. — εος τό άστυ, άστεος, city ; τό πών, fiock. ο) — οος ή Λητώ, Αητόος, Latona; ή πει&ώ, persuasion; ή ή^ώ, echo. THIRD DECLENSION. 17 From the consonants ν, g, ς, ξ, ψ. αν — ctvog — αντος εν — ενός Ψ — ηνος — ενός kV — ινος 6 παιάν, παιανος, pman ; 6 Τιτάν, Titan. τό τύψαν, τύψαντος, having struck, neuter parti- ciples, which follow their masculine. τό τέρεν, τέρενος, tender, neuters of adjectives in ην. ό" Έλλην ," Ελληνος, Greek; ο μην, month ; ή Σειράν t Siren. 6 ποιμήν, ποψένος, shepherd; ό λψην, harbor; ή tyQtyi intellect. ό δελφίν, δελφίνος, dolphin; ή άκτίν, ray ; ή ρίν, nose. The nominative of these nouns fre- quently ends in ις, as, ό δελφίς. τό μείζον, μείζονος, greater, neuters of adjectives in ων. τό τύπτον, τύπτοντος, striking, neuters of parti- ciples in ων. ό μόσυν, μόσϋνος, wooden tower ; and those end- ing in w or νς, as, ό Φόρκυν or Φόρκνς, Φδρ- χννος, Phorcys, the name of a sea deity. τό ζευγνύν, ζενγνύντος, joining, neuter participles of verbs in νμι. ό Πλάτων, Πλάτωνος, Plato ; ό κλων, branch ; ή μήκων, poppy. ή χελτδών, χελιδόνος, swallow; ή σιαγών, cheek; ό πρίων, saw. ό Ξενοφών, Ξενοφώντος, Xenophon. In like man- ner the present participles of contracted verbs in αω, as, ό τιμών, τιμώντος, honoring. ό δράκων, δράκοντος, dragon ; ό λέων, lion ; ό τένων, tendon. So the present, first future, and second aorist active of participles, as, ό τνπτων, τΰπτοντος, striking. — ουντος ό τυπών } τυποϋντος, going to strike, the second future active of participles : also the present of contracted verbs in £ω and οω, as, ο ποιων, ποιοΰντος, making. ovv — οδός neuter compounds of πους, as, τό δίπουν, δίποδος, from δίπους } two-footed, •—ονντος τό τυποϋν, τυπονντος, neuter participles. 2* ον — όνος — οντος νν — ννος — υντος ων —ωνος 9 —όνος —ωντος — οντος 18 NOUN. αρ — ατός —αρος VQ — ηρος — ερος ορ — ορός νρ — υρος ωρ — ωρος — ορός Big — ειρος τό ?\παρ, ήπατος, the ' liver ; τό δέλεαρ, bait ; τό φρέαρ, the well, δ ψάρ, ψαρός , starling ; τό νέκταρ, nectar ; ή οαρ, wife, ή δάμαρ, wife, makes δάμαρτος. δ S -ήρ, ϋ-ηρος, wild beast ; δ βοτήρ, shepherd ; δ ζωστήρ, girdle ; ή κήρ, fate, δ αΐ&ήρ, αΐ&έρος, sky ; δ, ή άήρ, air, mist ; δ δαήρ, brother-in-law. τό ήτορ, ψορος, breast; τό άορ, sword. ό, ή μάρτνρ, μάρτυρος, witness ; τό πυρ, fire, δ φώρ, φωρός, thief; δ Ιχώρ, lymph; τό ελωρ, prey, δ Νέστωρ, Νέστορος, Nestor ; δ ρήτωρ, orator. ή Χ ε ^ι Χ ειο *>ς, hand; δ φ&εΐρ, louse. ας ■αντος — ανος — ατός ^αδος ες — αος •—εος ευς — εος ns — εος ——τίτος — η&ος —--εντός *? — ηντος — ιος δ άνδριάς, άνδριάντος, statue ; δ γίγας, giant ; δ ίμάς, thong, δ μέλας, μέλανος, black; δ τάλας, wretched, τό γήρας, γήρατος, old age ; τό κρέας, flesh. ή λάμπας, λαμπάδος, torch ; ή πελειάς, dove , δ, ή φυγάς, fugitive, δ λάας, λάάος, a stone, τό άλη&ες, άλη&έος, true, the neuter of adjectives in ης. δ βασΧλενς, βασιλέος, Att. βασιλέως, Ion. βασιλψς, king; δ άλιενς, fisherman; δ ίερεύς, priest; δ ίππευς, horseman, ή τριήρης, τριήρεος, galley ; δ Λημοσ&ένης, De- mosthenes, ή φιλότης, φιλότητος, love ; δ λέβης, caldron, kettle ; ή έσ&ής, clothing. ή Πάρνης, Πάρνη&ος, Parnes, a mountain of Attica. δ Κλήμης, Κλήμεντος, Clemens; δ Ούαλης, Ούά- λεντος, Valens, and other names borrowed from the Latin, ό τιμής, τιμψτος, honored, contracted from ηεις. δ όφις, οφΧος, Att. οφεως, serpent ; ή πόλις, city ; δ μάντις, seer ; ή δννάμις, power ; ή πράξις, action. THIRD DECLENSION. 19 i S — t$og ή έλπίς, έλπϊδος, hope ; 6 Πάρις, Paris ; ή κηλίς, κηλϊδος, spot. — ι&ος δ, ή όρνις , ορντ&ος, bird; ή μέρμις, cord. — πος ή χάρις , χάρΧτος, a favor, --—ιστός ή &έμις, Γεμιστός, and ΰέμϊδος, right. — ινος ό, ή τΙς, τινός, any. So words in ις which often end in iv t as, ό δελφίς, dolphin. *ς — εος τό τείχος, τείχεος, wall; το άν&ος, fiower ; τό μέρος, part ; τό ορός, mountain ; τό χείλος, lip. —οτος τό τετϋφός, τετυφότος, having struck, neuter parti- ciples. νς — νος δ μΰς, μυός, mouse; δ Ιχ&υς, fsh; ή δρυς, oak; ή πίτυς, pine, δ οξύς, οξέος, sharp ; δ ηδύς, sweet, ό πέλεκυς, πελέκεως, axe; ό πηχυς, ell. — υ&υς — ύντος — υνος ως — οος — ωτος δος — εος — εως Att. — υδος ή χλαμύς, χλαμυδος, military robe ; ό, ή νέηΐυς, stranger. ή κόρυς, κόρυ&ος, helmet. ό ζευγνύς, ζευγνύντος, joining, and the like parti- ciples of verbs in υμι. δ Φόρκυς or Φόρκυν, Φόρκϋνος, Phorcys. ή αΙδως, αίδόος, shame ; ή ηώς, dawn. δ έρως, ϊρωτος, love ; δ γέλως, laughter ; δ φως, man ; τό φως, light ; and contracted parti- ciples from αως, as, ό εστώς, εστωτος, from εσταώς, standing. ή φώς, φωδός, a red spot on the legs, occasioned by being too near the fire, the only word of this form. ό ηρως, < ήρωος ί hero ; δ &ώς, jackall ; δ Τρως, Trojan. δ τετϋφώς, τετυφότος, having struck, and such like participles. δ δαίς, danos, meal, entertainment; τό σταΐς, dough. δ, ή παις, παιδός, child. ή γραϋς, γραός, old woman. ή κλεΐς, κλειδός, key. δ κτείς, κτενός, comb; είς, ενός, one. δ Σιμόεις, Σψόεντος, Simois, a river of Troas ; ή ' Οπόεις, Opus, a city of Greece ; δ χαρίεις, comely. Likewise the participles, as, ό τυ- φ&είς, τυφ&έντος, having been struck. δ, ή βούς, βοός, ox or cow ; ό χροϋς, skin. δ πους, ποδός, foot. — ωος —οτος αις —αιτος — αιδος αυς — αος εις — είδος — ενός — έντος ους — οος — οδός 20 NOUN. ους — οντος δ οδούς, οδόντος, tooth ; and participles of verbs in μι, as, δούς, δόντος, having given. — ονντος ή * Οποϋς, ' Οποϋντος, Opus, and other nouns con- tracted from δεις. το ους, ώτός, ear, is contracted from οίας, οϋάτος. λς — λος ή αλς, αλός, sea. νς — ν&ος ή ελμινς, ίλμιν&ος, earth-worm, belly-worm ; ή ΤΙρυνς, the name of a city. δ μάκαρς, μάκαρτος, happy. ρς — ρτος ξ — γος — κος -—χτος —χος δ τέττιξ, τέττίγος, grasshopper ; δ ορτνξ, ορτνγος, quail; ή φλόξ, flame; ή σάλπιγξ, trumpet; δ, ή φάλαγξ, phalanx, δ &ώραξ, θώρακος, breastplate ; ό κόραξ, κόρακος, raven ; ή κύλιξ, κύλΧκος, cup ; δ μύρμηξ, ant ; ή άλώπηξ, αλώπεκος, changing η into ε, fox. δ άναξ, άνακτος, king; ή νύξ, night. ή βήξ, βηχός, cough ; ό ονυξ, nail, claw ; ή στίξ, rank. ■ψ ψ — πος ή ecu//, ώττός, visage; ή λαΐλαψ, storm; δ Κύκλωψ, Cyclops, —βος δ "Λραψ, "Λραβος, Arab ; ή φλέψ, vein ; δ χάλυψ, steel. — φος δ ΚΙνυψ, ΚΙννφος, Cinyps, a river of Africa ; ή κατηλιψ, stair. Obs. Some nouns form their genitive from an obsolete nominative ; as, τό γάλα, γάλακτος, from γάλαξ, milk; ή γνν^, γυναικός, from γύναιξ, woman ; τό ύδωρ, ύδατος, from νδας, water; τό σκώρ, σκατός, from σκας, filth; δ Ζευς, Λ ιός from ΛΙς, and Ζηνός from Ζ\ν, Jupiter. ACCUSATIVE. The accusative singular of masculine and feminine nouns generally ends in a • as, ό Τιτάν, Τιτάνα, Titan. Exc. 1. Nouns in ις, νς, ανς, ους, having ος pure in the geni- tive, change ς of the nominative into ν • as, ό βότρυς, βότονος, βότρυν, bunch of grapes ; ή ναϋς, ναός, ναϋν, ship. Also ό λάας, stone, makes λάαν. But ό ΛΙς, Λιός, Jupiter, makes 4 la, and ό χρονς, χροός, skin, commonly χρόα. The poets frequently use the regular termination in a, as βότρύα, ευρέα, νέα or vrja. THIRD DECLENSION. 21 Exc. 2. Barytons in ις and υς, having og impure in the geni- tive, make both a and ν • as, ή ερις, ερϊδος, £$>rJ« and f'otv, strife; ή χόρυς, χόρύ&ος, xoov&u and κόρνν, helmet. Also the compounds of πους • as, ό ΟίδΧπους, Οιδίποδα and ΟίδΧπουν, Qldipus; with ή κλεί?, χλειδδς, key. Ή χάρις, favor, has χάριν, but Χώξ>ί=, Grace, Χάρϊτα, VOCATIVE. The vocative of nouns generally, and of participles univer- sally, is like the nominative ; as, Τιτάν, ω Τιτάν. Exc. 1. Adjectives in ψ, barytons in ων -όνος and -οντος, ηο, ωο, and nouns in ης -εος, form the vocative by shortening the long vowel of the nominative ; as, τέρην, ώ τέρεν, tender ; ελεήμων, ώ έλεημον, compassionate; βελτίων, ώ βέλτιον, better; ό λέων, ώ λέον, lion ; μήτηρ, ω μψερ, mother ; δ "Εκτωρ, ω" Εχτορ, Hector ; ό Λημοσ&ένης, ω Λημόσ&ενες, Demosthenes. Also ό ' Απόλλων, ω ~" Απολλον, Apollo ; δ Ποσειδών, ω Πόσειδον, Nep- tune ; άν^ρ, ώ άνερ, man; δαήρ, ώ δάερ, brother-in-law; πατήρ, ώ πάτερ, father ; σωτήρ, ώ σώτερ, savior, though we meet also with ώ σωτηρ. Exc. 2. All nouns in ευ ς and ους, barytons in ις, and bary- tons, contracted nouns, and adjectives in νς, drop ς to form the vocative ; as, βασιλεύς, ω βασϊλεν, king ; ό Σιμούς, ω Σιμού, Simois, a river of Troas ; ό όφις, ώ οφι, serpent; ό βότρυς, ω βό- τρυ, bunch of grapes ; δ μύς, ώ μύ, mouse; οξύς, ω όξύ, sharp. Likewise γραύς, ω γραύ, old woman; ό, ή παις, ώ παΐ, child: but ό πους, ώ πους, foot ; and δ οδούς, ώ οδούς, tooth. Other words also lose ς among the poets; as, Άμαρυλλίς, ώ Άμαρυλλϊ, Ama- ryllis, the name of a woman. Γυνή, woman, makes γύναι, from the obsolete γύναιξ, and άναξ, king, in addressing a deity, ccVa. Exc. 3. Barytons in ας -ανος and -αντος, and adjectives in εις -εντός, form the vocative by dropping ος or τος from the geni- tive ; as, τάλας, τάλανος, ώ τάλαν, ivretched ; Αϊας, Αϊαντος, ώ Αϊαν, Ajax ; χαρίεις, χαρίεντος, ω χαρϊεν, comely. So ό Σιμόεις, Σιμόεντος, ώ Σιμόεν. Some of these also form the vocative by dropping ς from the nominative ; as, Αϊας, ώ Ala • χαρΧεις, ώ χαρΧει. Exc. 4. Feminines in ω and ως form the vocative in οι • as, ή Σαπφώ, ω Σαπφοϊ, Sappho; ή ήώ?, ω ήοΓ, dawn. DATIVE PLURAL. The dative plural is formed from the dative singular by inserting σ before * ■ as, ό σωτηρ, σωτηρι > σωτηρσι, savior ; ό γύψ, γυπί, γυψϊ (for γνπσΐ, the double consonant ψ being put 22 NOUN. for πσ, by page 3), vulture. But δ, &, ν, τ, are dropped for the sake of softness ; as, λαμπαδι, λαμπασι for λαμπάδσι, from ή λαμπάς, torch ; γίγα-ντι, γίγασι for γίγαντσι, from ό γίγας, giant. Οντι is changed into ονσι • as, λέοντι, λέονσι. Words ending in ς after a diphthong add ι to the nominative singular ; as, ίππενς, Ιππενσι, horseman ; τυπείς, τνπεΐσι, having been struck. Except ό κτείς, κτεσΐ, comb ; 6 δρομεύς, δρομέσι, runner; νίενς, νΐέσι, son; το ούς, ώσΐ, ear; ό πονς, ηοσϊ, foot ; which are regular from κτενΙ, δρομέϊ, νίέϊ, ώτΐ ηοδί. Τρεις, three, makes τρισί. Syncopated nouns in ηρ make the dative in ασι • as, ττατήξ>, father, πατρϊ, πατρασι. Also ό αστήρ, άστράσι, star ; ό άρήν, άρνός, άρνάσι, lamb ; νϊς, νίασι, son. But ή γαστήρ, belli/, makes γαστήρσι. Ή χεϊρ, hand, makes χερσί, from the poetic χερί. Contracts of the Third Declension. Contracted nouns of the third declension are very numerous, and are divided into five forms. I. Nouns in ης, ες, and ος, are contracted in all the cases where two vowels meet. Sing. Ν. τριήρ-ης, G. τριήρ-εος, ους, D. τριήρ-εϊ, ει, Α. τριήρ-εα, η, V. τρίηρ-ες. ή τριήρης, galley. Dual. Ν. Α. V. τριήρ-εε, η, G. D. τριηρ~έοιν, οΐν. Plur. Ν. τριήρ-εες, εις, G. τριηρ-έων, ων, D. τριήρ-εσι, Α. τριήρ-εας, εις, V. τριήρ-εες, εις. Sing. Ν. τεΐχ-ος, G. τείχ-εος, ους, D. τείχ-εϊ, ει, Α. τεΐχ-ος, V. τεΐχ-ος. τό τείχος, wall. Dual. Ν. Α. V. τείχ-εε, η, G. D. τειχ-έοιν, οΐν. ' Plur. Ν. τείχ-εα, η, G. τειχ-έων, ibv f D. τείχ-εσι, Α. τείχ-εα, η, V. τείχ-εα, η. Obs. 1. Proper names have sometimes the accusative and vocative according to the first declension ; as, τον Σωκράτην, τον Άντισ&ένην, τον ' Αριστοφάνην , ώ Σωκράτη, ω 'Αριστοφάνη. THIRD DECLENSION. 23 Oiis. 2. Proper names in χΜης are doubly contracted ; thus, 2d Contraction. 1st Contraction. Ν. Ήραχλ-έης, G. Ήραχλ-έεος, έους } D. Ήρακλ-έϊΐ, έει, Α. Ήραχλ-έεα, ε*α, V. Ήράκλ-εες, εις, Obs. 3. The termination εα, when preceded by a vowel, is contracted into a, and not into η • as, ityi%, τον and τά ύγιέα, ■byta ' χρέος, τά χρέεα, χρέα. έος, &\ ει, έα, η, ε?. II. Nouns in tg and ι contract u, ιε, m, of the singular ai plural, into *. ό όφις, serpent. Sing. Dual. Plur. N. δφ -ic, • Ν. οφ-ιες, ις, G. btp-Hog, Ν. Α. V. οφ-ιε, G. όφ-/ω^, D. οφ-ιι, ι, D. δφ-ίσ*, Α. δφ-^, G. D. όφ-Ιοιν. A. οφ-ίας, ις, V. δφ -t. τό σίνηπι, mustard. V. οφ-ιες, ις. Sing. Dual. Plur. Ν. σίνηπ-ι, N. σινήπ-ια, ι, G atvrj7r-To?, Ν. Α. V. σινήπ-ιε, G. σινηπ-Ιων, D. σί/^ττ-α, t, D. σινήπ-ισι, Α. σίνηπ-ι } G. D. σινηπ-ίοιν. A. σινΊψτ-ια, ι, V. σίνηπ-ι. V. σινήπ-ια, ι. Obs. The form ις, -ιος is properly Ionic. Nouns in ις are more commonly inflected in εος, D. ei f ει. Dual, Ν. εε, G. έοιν. Plural, N. V. εες, εις, G. έων, D. εσι, Α. εα?, εί£. But the most usual form of the genitive is the Attic, in εως and εων. III. Nouns in ευς, νς } and ν, making εος in the genitive, contract εϊ into ει, εε into η, εες, εας, into εις, and εα of the neuter plural into η. δ βασΧίενς, king. Dual. Sing. Ν. βασϊλ-εύς, G. βασιλ-έος, D. βασιλ-έϊ, εί, Α. βασιλ-έα, V. βασιλ-εϋ. Ν. Α. V. βασιλ-έε, η, G. D. βασιλ-έοιν. Plur. Ν. βασιλ-έες, εΐς, G. βασιλ~έων 9 D. βασιλ-εϋσι, Α. βασιλ-έας, εΐς, V. βασιλ-έες, εΐς. 24 NOUN. δ πέλεκυς, axe. Sing. Dual. Plur. Ν. πέλεκ-υς, Ν. πελέκ-εες, εις, G. πελέκ-εος, Ν. Α. V. πελέκ-εε, η } G. πελεκ-έων 9 - D. πελέκ-εϊ, ει, D. πελέκ-εσι, A. πέλεκ-υν, G. D. πελεκ-έοιν. Α. πελέκ-εας, εις. V. πέλεκ-υ. το &στυ, city. V. πελέκ-εες, εις. Sing. Dual. Plur. N. &στ-υ, Ν. &στ-εα, r\ y G. άστ-εος, Ν. Α. V. άστ-εε, η, G. άστ-έων > D. άστ-εϊ, ει, D. #στ-εσ&, A. (Ζστ-υ, G. D. άστ-έοιν. Α. οίστ-εα, η, V. α στ- υ. V. αστ-εα, η. Obs. The Attic genitive in εο^ς is most in use, particularly from masculines in ευς. Nouns in ενς pure contract εως ' m the genitive into ω?, and εα in the accusative singular and plural into α • as, χοενς, a certain measure, χοώς for χοέως, χοά for χοέ<χ, and χοάς for χοέας. IV. Nouns in ω and ως contract οος into ους, o'C into οι, and oa into ω. Sing. Ν. αΐδ-ώς, G. αΐδ-όος, ους, D. αΐδ-όϊ, οΓ, Α. α2, &υγατ-ρΙ, Α. &υγατ-έρα, <&ύγατ-ρα, V. &ύγατ-ερ. Dual. Sing. Ν. άν-ήρ, G. άν-έρος, D. 7ί, ης, D. άπλ-ότ?, ρ, Α. <£ίτλ-<5?7ΐ/, ην, V. άπλ-ύη, η, &C. THIRD DECLENSION. Nouns of the third declension of simples end in ος, generally masculine 3 but sometimes feminine, and ov neuter. b λόγος, word, speech. Sing. Dual. Plur. Ν. \όγ-ος, Ν. \6γ-οι, G. λόγ-ου, N. A. V. λδγ-ω, G. λόγ-ων, D. λόγ-φ, D. λόγ-οις, A. \6y-ov, G. D. \6γ-οιν. Α. λόγ-ους, V. λόγ-ε. V. λόγ-οι. Obs. In a few instances the common dialect, like the Attic, makes the vocative like the nominative ; as, ω Θεός, whence the Latin 6 Deus ; and ω ούτος, heus tu. rb ξϋλον, wood. Dual. Plur. Ν. ξύλ-α, Ν. Α. V. ξύ\-ω, G. ξύλ-ων, D. \νλ-οις, G. D. ξύ\-οιν. Sing. Ν. ξν\-ον, G. |ύλ-ου, D. ξύλ-ψ, Α. ξνλ-ον, V. \b\-ov. Α. |ύλ-α, V. ξύ\-α. [the ten declensions.] 29 Some nouns of the third declension are contracted, hy changing to, oo, into ov, and εα, oa, into a, and dropping ε and ο before a long vowel or diphthong. rb όστίον, bone. Dual. Sing. Ν. όστ-έον, ουν, G. όστ-έου, ου, D. όστ•ίψ, ω, Α. όστ•£ον, ουν, V όστ-έυν, ουν. Ν. Α. V. όστ-έω, G. D. όστ-εοιν, Plur. Ν. boT-ta, α, G. οστ-έων, ων, D. όστ-ίοις, ο7ς, Α. όστ-ία, α, V. όστ-έα, α. Sing. Ν. v-dos, ους, G. ν-όου, ου, D. ν-6ω, ω, Α. ν-<$ον, οίν, V. ν-6ε, ου. ο vν, D. λα/λα-ψι, Α. λαίλα-παί, V. λαΑα -JTCS. [the ten declensions.] 31 h θώς, jackall. Sing. Ν. θ-ύς, G. θ-ωϋς, D. θ-ωΐ, Α. θ-ώα, V. θ-ώς. Dual. N. A. V. θ-ΰε, G. D. 0-ωο7ν. Plur. Ν. 0-ώεί, G. θ-ώων, D. 0-ωσί, Α. β-ώ -if, V. θ-ΰες. Some nouns of this declension are contracted in every case , as, τί εαρ, spring. Sing. N. lap, )ip, G. έαρος, %ρος, &C. ft λάα$, 5< αΰς . γρ-αες, > ft βότρυς, bunch of grapes. Sing. Ν. βότρνς, G. 0<$rp8o S . Plur. N. /?<5rp-faf, Α. βότρ-νας V. 0drp-wi ft, ij 0o8?, az or cow. Sing. Ν. βοϋς, G. βοάς. Sing. Ν. κλεις, G. κλειδός. Plur. N. /?-d £f , Α. β-όας, V. 0-ίεί, /J κΧεϊς, key. Plur. Ν. κλ-εΓ<5εί, A. V. Γ. κλ-ε?3εί, ^ ι. κλ-είία?, > e7f r . κλ-εϊδες, ) ©t/yOTJj^, daughter, arr>,o, man, and ^ ^μήτης, Ceres, are syncopated in all cases, except the nominative and vocative singular, and the dative plural, άνΐβ inserting δ, because ρ is never immediately preceded by v. Sing. Sing. Ν. θυγατ•ηρ, Ν. Μρ, G. θυγατ-ίρος, θυγατ-ρδς, G. άν-έρος, άν-ίρό?, D. θυγατ-έρι, θυγατ-ρι, D. άν-ε'ρί, αν-ίρί, Α. Ουγατ•έρα, θνγατ-ρα, Α. άχ- [the ten declensions.] Sing. Ν. σίνηπ-ι, G. σινήπ-ϊος, D. σινήπ-ιι, ι, A. alviftt-i, V. σίνηπ-ι. U3 το σίνηπι, mustard. Dual. Ν. Α. V. σινήπ-ιε, G. D. σινηπ-Ιοιν. Plur. Ν. σινήπ-ια, ι, G. σινηπ-ίων, D. σινήπ-ισΐ, Α. σινήπ-ια, ι, V. σινήπ-ια, ι. Obs. The form in ι? -to? is properly Ionic. Nouns in ις are more com- monly inflected in εος, D. ε-ϊ, ει. Dual, Ν. εβ, G. eW. Plural, N. V. εβς, e»c, G. ta»•, D. «at, Α. «α?, εις. But the most usual form of the genitives is the Attic, in εως and εων. THIRD DECLENSION. Nouns of the third declension of contracts end in ενς masculine, υ? mas- culine and feminine, and ν neuter. Sing. Ν. βασϊ\-εύς, G. βασιλ-έος, D. βασιλ-έϊ, t Α. βασι\-έα, V. βασι\-εν. Sing. Ν. πέ\εκ-υς, G. πελέκ-εος, D. πε\έκ-εϊ, ι Α. πέλεκ-υν, V. πέλεκ-υ. Sing. . αστ-υ, G. άστ-εος, D. άστ-εϊ, ει, Α. άστ-υ, V. άστ-υ. & βασϊλενς, king. Dual. Ν. Α. V. 0α«λ-&, 5, G. D. βασι\-έοιν. ο πεΧεκνς, axe. Dual. Ν. Α. V. πε\έκ-εε, η, G. D. πελεκ-έοιν. τδ άστυ, city. Dual. Ν. Α. V. αστ-εε, η, G. D. άστ-ίοιν. Plur. Ν. βασι\-ίες, εις, G. βασι\-έων, D. βασιλ-εΰσι, Α. βασιλ-ίας, εις, V. βασι\-έες, εις. Plur. Ν. ιτελεκ-εεί, «ί, G. πε\εκ-έων, D. πελε^-εσί, Α. πελέκ-εα?, ει?, V. πελέκ-εες, εις. Plur. Ν. άστ-εα, η, G. άστ-έων, D. αστ-εσι, Α. άστ-εα, η, V. άστ-εα, η. Obs. The Attic genitive in εω? is most in use, particularly from mascu- lines in ενς. Nouns in ενς pure contract εως in the genitive into ως, and εα in the accusative singular and plural into a • as, χοεύς, a certain meas- ure, χοώς for χοεως, χοα for χοεα, and jfo&g for χοίας. FOURTH DECLENSION. Nouns of the fourth declension of contracts end in ω, ως, feminine. Sing. Ν. α'ιδ-ως, G. αΐδ-όος, D. αίδ-όϊ, A. αίδ-όα, V. αΐδ-όϊ. ους, ft αΙδώς, modesty. Dual. N. A. V. alS -ύ, G. D. αΙο-οΊν. Plur. N. alS-oi, G. αΙδ -cSv, D. αΙδ-ο7ς, Α. αΐδ-ούς, V. eW-oi. 34 NOUN. Obs. 1. The dual and plural are formed like nouns in ος of the third of the simples. Obs. 2. The only nouns in ως of this form are αίδως and ι]ως, and the use of these scarcely extends beyond the singular. Obs. 3. In the same manner are declined the Attic forms in ω for ων -όνος ' as, Γοςγω, Γο()γονς, for ΤΌργων, Γοςγονος. FIFTH DECLENSION. Nouns of the fifth declension of contracts end in ας pure and ξ>ας, and are of the neuter gender. τδ κέρας, horn. Sing. Ν. κίρ-ας, G. κέρ-άτος, (by syncope) κίρ-αος, (by crasis) κέρ-ως, D» κέρ-άτι, κέρ-αϊ, κέρ-α, Α. κέρ-ας, V. κέρ-ας. Dual. Ν. Α. V. κέρ-άτε, κέρ-άε, κέρ-α, G. D. κίρ-άτοιν, κερ-άοιν, Plur. κερ-ψν. Ν. κέρ-ατα, κέρ-αα, κέρ-α, G. κερ-άτων. κερ-αων, κερ-ων, D. κέρ-ασι, Α. κίρ-άτα, κέρ-αα, κέρ-α, V. κίρ-άτα, κέρ-αα, κέρ-α. IRREGULAR NOUNS. Irregular nouns may be divided into two classes, defective and redundant I. DEFECTIVE NOUNS. The following are indeclinable ; the names of the letters of the alphabet ; nouns shortened by apocope, as τό δω for δώμα, το κάρα or κάρη for τό κάρηνον • and some foreign names, as Αβραάμ. Some have only one case, as ή δώς, gift ; al κατακλω&ες, fates ; ω πόποι, Ο gods. Some are used in two cases only, as ό λτς, τόν λίν, Hon ; ol φ&οΐς from φ&όϊες, τους φ&οϊς from φ&δίας, a sort of cake. The following neuters have the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular only ; βρέτας, δέμας, ηδος, λέπας, οναρ, 'όφελος, σέλας, υπαρ. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 35 Some have no plural, as δ, ή άήρ, ->) αλς, ή γτ\, τό Ucdov, το πύρ, and others known by the sense. The following have no singular ; τά έ'/κατα, entrails ; ol ϊτησϊαι, trade winds; the names of festivals, as, τά ΛιονΰσΧα, feast of Bacchus; and some names of cities, as, ui 'Λ&ψαι, τά Μέγαρα. II. REDUNDANT NOUNS. 1. Some nouns have different terminations in the nomina- tive ; as, ό Μωστ)ς and Μωσεύς, τό δάκρυ and δάκρϋον, τό δέν- δρο; and δένδρον, ό χρως and χροΰς, ό ταών and ταώς, ό στρατός and ή στρατιά, ό φ&όγγος and ή φ&ογγή, ό πλαστήρ and πλαστής, ό, ή μάκαρ, δ, ή μάκαρς, and ό μακάριος, &LC. Nouns in ώ^, όνος, in particular, are declined by the Attics in ώ, ους • as, ή χελτδώ, χελιδοΰς, for χελϊδών, χελιδόνος. So ή άηδώ for αηδών, ή Γοργώ for Γοργών. Frequently a new form of the nominative arises from an oblique case of the old form ; as, ό φύλαξ, φύλάκος, and δ φύ- λακος, φνλάκου • ό, ή μάρτνρ, μάρτυρος, and ό, ή μάρτυρος, μαρτύρου • ό διάκτωρ, διάκτορος, and ό διάκτορος, διακτόρου • ό ψί&υρ, ψί&υρος, and ό ψί&ύρος, ψίχτύρου. In like manner ό γέρων, γέροντος, whence the dative plural γερόντοις * τό πάϋ-η- μα, παϋ-ήματος, dative plural πα&ημάτοις. So from the accusa- tive την Λημητέρα, 4τ\μητρα, a new nominative τ) Δήμητρα -ας, has arisen. 2. Some admit different inflections from the same nomina- tive ; as, δ μύκης, μύκου and μύκητος ■ ό Θαλή?, Θαλοϋ and Θάλη- τος • ό " Αρης," Λρου ," Λρεος and "Λρητος • δ έλεος, έλέου, and τό έλεος, έλέεος • ό δσσος, οσσου, and τό οσσο£, οσσεος • ό o^oc, ο/ου, and τό οχος, οχεος' δ σκότος, σκότου, and τό σκότος, σκότεος• δ σκύφος, σκύφου, and τό σκύφος, σκύφεος • ό τάρϊχος, ταρίχου, and τό τάρΤ- χος, ταρίχεος • ό νους, νου and νοός • δ χους, χοΰ and χοός • δ κά)•&)ς, κάλωος and κάλω • δ έρως, έρωτος and ερω • ή, δ τίγρις, τίγρϊος and τίγρίδος • ή μτ\νις, μ^νΊ,ος and μτ\νϊδος • ή -ίτέμις, χτέμιστος, Ό-έμΧτος, and χτέμϊδος. c Ο Οιδίπους and all compounds of πους make ποδός and που. Some nouns in ης are declined after the first and third-declension in the accusative and voca- tive ; thus, δ Σωκράτης of the third declension makes τον Σωκράτη, ώ Σώκρατες, after the third, and τόί> Σωκράτην, ώ Σωκράτη, after the first. 3. Some are regularly declined, and have besides, in the oblique cases, other forms, which descend from obsolete nomi- natives; as, δ υίός, υίοΰ, υΐω, and υΐέος, υίεΐ, from υίεύς, also νίος, υϊϊ, from υΐς • τό ονειρον, ονείρου, and όνείρατος from ονειρας. «JO NOUN. Likewise 6 άϊδης, άΐδου, and &ίδος from αϊς • ή αλκή, άλκψ, anc άλκός from αλ<|• • ή ίωκή, Ιωκψ, and 2ώκο£ from Ιώξ • ό κλά£ο£, κλάίοο, and κλάδος from κλά^ • ή κρόκη, κρόκης, and κροκός from κρό£ • ό λαό?, λί -roO, and λ*τό? from λ /g • ή φνγή, φ υ γψ, and φνγός from φύ|. In the same manner τό πρόβάτον, dative plural προβάτοις, and πρόβάσι from πρόβας • τό πρόσωπον, προσωποις, and προσώπάσι from πρόσωπας. Some nouns, without having two forms in use in any case, borrow their oblique cases from obsolete nominatives ; as, τό γάλα, γάλακτος, from γάλαξ • ή γυνή, γυναικός, from γύναιξ • τό ύδωρ, ύδατος, from υδας • τό σκωρ, σκατός, from σκας • ό Ζευς, voc. Ζεϋ, makes J ιός, Jti; J la, from Jig, and Ζηνός, ΖηνΙ, Ζψα, from Zr\v. Ναϋς, Ionic νηϋς, makes, in the sing., νεώς, νηί, ναϋν, ναΰ, and in the plur., νψς, νέων, ναυσϊ, ναυς, νψς. From νηϋς the Ionics have, in the sing., νηός, νηΐ, νηα and νηϋν, νηϋ, and in the plur., νψς, νηών, νηυσΐ, νηας, νψς • also in the sing., gen. νεός, ace. νέα, and in the plur., nom. νέες, gen. νέων, ace. νέας. 4. Some have different genders in the singular and in the plural. Masculine in the singular, and neuter in the plural ; Τάρταρ- ος, -a. The following are commonly added, but they some- times occur in the neuter singular ; έρετμ^ός, -ά • ζυγ-ός, -ά • νωτ-ος, -α. Masculine in the singular, masculine and neuter in the plural ; δεσμ-ός, -ol and -ά • δίφρ-ος, -οι and -a • &εσμ-ός, -ol and -ά • κύκλ-ος, -οι and -a • λύχν-ος, -οι and -a • μηρ-ός, -ol and -ά • μοχλ-ός, -ol and -a * πυρσ-ός, -ol and -ά • σϊτ-ος, -οι and -a • στα&μ-ός, -ol and -a ■ ταρσ-ός, -ol and -ά • χαλτν-ός, -ol and -ά. The following are more rare in the neuter plural ; δάκτυλ-ος, -οι and -a • δρυμ-ός, -ol and -ά • ρύπ-ος, -οι and -α • τράχηλ-ος, -οι and -α. Feminine in the singular, feminine and neuter in the plural ; κέλενϋ•-ος } -οι and -a. DERIVATIVE NOUNS. I. PATRONYMICS. 1. Masculine patronymics are derived from the genitive singular of their primitives, by changing the termination into άδης, ιάδης, or ίδης. If the primitive be of the first declension, or in ος pure of the second, the change is into άδης • as, ό Βορέας, Βορέ-ου, Βορε-άδης • ό 'Ιππότης, "Ιππότ-ου, ' Ιπποτ-αδης • ό "Ηλϊος, ΉλΙ-ου 9 Ήλι-αδης. DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 37 But when the penultima of the genitive is long, of whatever declension it be, the change is into ιάδης • as, ό Λαέρτης, Ααέρτ-ου, Ααερτ-ιάδης ' ό* Ατλας, "Λτλαντ-ος, Άτλαντ-ιάδης. Under every other circumstance, the change is always into Ιδης • as, ό ΑΙάκός, ΑΙάκ-οΰ, ΑΙακ-ϊδης • ό Νέστωρ, Νέστορ-ος, Νεστορ-ϊδης. The Ionics form their patronymics in Ιων • as, ό ΚρονΙων for Κρονϊδης, from Κρόνος. The iEolics in άδιος • as, ό c Υρ ρά- διο; for Ύρραδης, ΐτοΐΐΐ'Ύρρας. 2. Feminine patronymics end in Ις, άς, ηΐς, Ινη, or ώνη. Those in I; and a; are formed from their masculines by cast- ing οίΐ δη • as, ό Άίεστορϊδης, ή Νεστορίς • δ Ήλιάδης, ή 'Ηλίας. Those in ηΐς, from the nominative of the primitives, by changing the termination into ηΐς • as, ό Χρυσής, ή Χρυσηΐς • ό Κάδμος, ή Καδμ.ηΐς. Those in Ινη, from nominatives of the second declension in ος impure, and of the third in ενς • as, ό 'ΙΙκεανδς, ή ΊΙκεαντνη• ό Νηρεύς, ή ΝηρΤνη. Those in ώνη, from nominatives of the second declension in ος } and of the third in ων, when these terminations are pre- ceded by ν or ν ' as, ό 'Ακρίσιος, ή 'Άκρισιώνη • ό *Ηλεκτρνων, ή Ήλεκτρυώνη. II. DIMINUTIVES. 1. Masculine diminutives end in α?, παππϊας, from ό πάππας• αξ, λΐ&αξ from ό λί&ος • ινης, έλαφίνης from ό ϊλάφος • ιλος, ναν- τΧλος from ό ναύτης • νλος, μικκνλος from δ μικκός, Dor. for μικρός • ίχνος, κνλίχνος from ή κύλιξ • ισκος, άν&ρωπίσκος from ό αν&ρωπος • ίων, μωρίων from δ μωρός. 2. Feminine diminutives end in ας, χοιράς from δ χοίρος • ις, νησϊς from ή νήσος ι ιγξ, φύσιγξ from ή φΰσα • ακνη, πι&άκνη from ό 7τ/#0£ • ίχνη , πολίχνη from ή 7τόλί£ • ίσκ^, παιδίσκη from ό, ή τταΓ?. 3. Neuter diminutives end in ιον, στρον&Ιον from ό στρον&ός • αιον, γύναιον from ή γυνή ' ειον, άγγε,ΐον from τό #χ}Ό£ • ^toy # pjtftov from ή χη • t^io^, γνωμίδιον from ή γνώμη • υλλίον, είίΰλλίο^ from τό 62#0£ • αριον, όνάριον from ό, ή όνος • ασιον, κοράσιον from ή κόρ^. One primitive has sometimes a variety of diminutives ; as, from ή κόξ>?7 is derived ή κορίσκη, τό κόριον, τό κοράσιον, τό κορίσκιον, τό κορίδιον. One diminutive sometimes generates another ; as, from ή πολίχνη comes τό πολίχνιον. 4 NOUN. III. AMPLIFICATIVES. Amplificatives increase the signification of their primitives, and generally import something contemptible in the person. They end in ων, γαστρών, κεφάλων, having a large belly, head, from γάστηρ, κεφαλή • αξ, πλούιαξ, over-rich, from πλοντος • ρναξ, current, especially of lava, from ρόος. IV. VERBALS Are generally formed by casting off the augment of their primitives, and changing the termination, in the first person of the perfect passive, S 1° ^ '"'λ" / from γέγραμμαι. μη, — ή γραμμή J I I* rr μος, — ό δεσμός — δέδεσμαι. μων, — ό, ή νοήμων — νενόημαι. in the second person of the perfect passive, as ή δοκιμασία from δεδοκίμ&σαι, — ή ποίησις — πεποίησαι. — ό θαυμάσιος — τε&ανμασαι,. — 6 χρήσϊμος — κέχρησαι. into into Masc. into in the third person of the perfect passive, into Neut. {τηριον, τρον, τέος, έα, iov, as 6 ^αρακτήρ — ό ποιητής — ό κριτικός — ό ακουστός — ό κοσμήτωρ as ή πίστις — ή ορχήστρα — ή όρχηστρίς — ή όρχηστύς } as τό ιιοτήριον — τό δίδακτρον — ό γραπτέος from κεχάρακται. — πεποίηται. — κέκρϊται. — ήκουσται. — κεκόσμηται. from πέπεισται. — ωρχησται. from ηέτΐοται,. — δεδίδακται. — γέγραπται. ADJECTIVE. in the first person of the perfect middle, as ό τομενς from τέτομα. — ή επιστολή — έπέστολα. — τό λόγων — λέλογα. — ό τόνος — τέτονα. A few are formed from other tenses ; as, ό λευκός, from the present λείσσω • ή ταραχή, from the perfect τετάρα^α • ή #*jk*7, from the first aorist ε&ηχα • ή φι^ή, from the second aorist ϊφνγον. Ϊευς, ων, ος, ADJECTIVES. Adjectives are declined like substantives. Some adjectives have different terminations for all the three genders ; some have one for the mas- culine and feminine, and another for the neuter; others have only one for all the genders. I. Adjectives of three terminations end in M. F. Ν. ος, *?> ον • νς, ua, υ • ug, εααα, εν ας, αινα, αν • ας, άοα, αν • ων, ονσα, ον • ψ, uva, εν • εις, ειβα, εν • ους, ουαα, ον • νς, νσα, νν ων, ονσα, ονν ων, ωσα, ων • ως, νια, ος • ως, ωσα, ως 40 ADJECTIVE. Among these terminations are included those of participles, the last seven being peculiar to them. In adjectives of three terminations, all feminines are of the first declension ; all masculines in ος, with their neuters in ov, of the second; and all other masculines and neuters, of the third. καλός, beautiful. Sing. Dual. Plur. N. καλ-ός, ή, όν, N. A. V Ν. καλ -ol, αϊ, ά, G. καλ-οϋ, τ\ς, ον, καλ-ώ, ά, ώ, G. καλ-ων, ων, ων, D, καλ-φ, fj[, Φ* D. καλ-οϊς, αϊς, οΧς, A χαλ-όν, ήν, δν, G. D. Α. καλ-ούς, άς, ά, V χαλ -e, ή, όν. χαλ-όΐν, αΐν, oiv. V. καλ -ol, αϊ, ά. In like manner < lecline άγα&ός, good. λευκός, white. απαλός, soft, tender. μαλακός , soft. . δήλος, plain. ξυλϊνός, wooden. &εωρητίκός } contemplative. σοφός, wise. κακός, bad. τερπνός t delightful. κουφός, ligl it. φίλος, dear. Adjectives in ος pure and ρος make the feminine in a • as, φίλιος, φιλία, φίλων , friendly ; μακρός, μακρά, μακρόν, long : except those in εος and οος not preceded by ξ» or a vowel ; as, χάλκεος, χαλκέη, χάλκεον, brazen ; όγδοος, ογδόη, δγδοον, eighth. -' μακρός , long. Dual. Ν. Α. V. μακρ-ώ, ά, ώ, Sing. Ν. μακρ-ός, ά, όν, G. μακρ-οϋ, ας, ου, D. μακρ-φ, α, φ, Α. μακρ-όν, άν, όν, V. μακρ -h, ά, όν. άγιος άγριος, wild, άξιος, worthy, δεξιός, right, δίκαιος, just. G. D. μακρ-οΐν, αϊ ν, όΐν. In like manner decline holy. αριστερός, left. Plur. N. μακρ -ol, αϊ, ά, G. μακρ-ων, ων, ων, D. μακρ-οΐς, αΐς,οΐς, Α. μακρ-ούς, άς, ά, V. μακρ -ol, αϊ, ά. έλευ&ερός, free, έχ&ρός, hostile. Ιερός, sacred. Ισχυρός, strong. DECLENSION. 41 λείος, smooth. μιχρδς, small. όμοιος, like. σκληρός, hard, ρ άδιος, easy. φανερός, manifest. Some adjectives in εος, έη, εον, and οος, 6η, οον, are con- tracted into ους, η, οϋν • as, χρύσ-εος, έη, εον, golden, into χρνσ-οϋς, η, οΰν • likewise some in εος, έα, εον, into ους, ά, οϋν • as, άργύρ-εος, έα, εον, of silver, into άργνρ-οϋς, ά, οϋν. Dual. Ν. Α. V. χρνσ-έω, έα, έω, χρυσ-ώ, α, ώ, G. D. χρνσ-έοιν , έαιν, έοιν, χρυσ-οΐν, αΐν, οΐν. Plur. Α. χρύσ-εοι, εαι, εα, χρυσ-οΐ, αϊ, α, G. χρυσ-έων, έων, έων, χρυσ-ών, ων, ων, D. χρνσ-έοις, έαις, έοις, χρνσ-οΐς, αΐς, οΐς, Α. χρυσ-έονς, έας, εα, χρυσ-οϋς, ας, α, V. χρύσ-εοι, εαι, εα, χρυσ-οΐ, αϊ, α. Sing. Ν. χρύσ-εος, έη, εον, χρυσ-ονς, η, οΰν, G. χρυσ-έου, έης, έου, χρυσ-οΰ, ης, οΰ, D. χρνσ-έω, έη, ^ω, χρυσ-ω, m, ω, Α. χρύσ-εον, έην, εον, χρνσ-οϋν, ην, οϋν, V. χρύσ-εε, έη, εον, χρυσ-η, η, οϋν. Adjectives in οος, 6η, οον, have the same form after contrac- tion as the above, except in the voc. sing, masc, in which they contract οε into ου. Words for practice. It νέος, flaxen, linen. άπλόος, simple. χάλκεος, brazen. διπλόος, double, or two-fold. Adjectives in εος, έα, εον, differ in contraction from those in εος, έη, εον } only in the sing, fern., through all the cases of which they are contracted into a * thus, έρέ-εος, έα, εον, woollen, and άργύρ-εος, έα', εον, are contracted, in the nom., into οϋς, a, ovv • in the gen., into οϋ, ας, οϋ, &,c. The adjectives άλλος, τηλικοϋτος, τοιοϋτος, and τοσοϋτος, make the neuter in o, though the neuters τοιοϋτον and τοσοϋτον are sometimes found. Many adjectives in ος, especially compounds and derivatives, have but one termination for the masculine and feminine ; as, 6, i t ένδοξος • also adjectives of three terminations are often used as common in Homer and the Attic writers; as, χλυτος 'Ιπποδάμεια, II. /S'. 742} αναγκαίος τροφ//, Thucyd. ι. 2. ηδύς, sweet. Sing. Ν. ήδ-νς, εϊα, ν, G. ήδ-έος, είας, έος, D. ήδ-έϊ, εϊ, ε ία, έϊ, εΐ, Α. ήδ-νν, εϊαν, ν, V. ήδ-ν, εϊα, ύ. 4* Dual. Ν. Α. V. ήδ-έε, εϊα, έε, G.D. ffi -έοιν, είαιν, έοιν. Plur. Ν. ήδ-έες, εϊς, εϊαι, έα, G. -ηδ-έων, ειών,έων 9 D. ήδ-έσι, είαις, έσι, Α. ήδ-έας, εΐς, είας, έα, V. ήδ-έες, εΐς, εϊαι έα• 42 ADJECTIVE. In like manner decline βα&ύς, deep. ευρύς, broad, βαρύς, heavy. ήμϊσύς, half. βραδύς, slow. οξύς, sharp. γλυκύς, sweet. ταχύς, swift. Adjectives of this termination, in the poets, often make the accusative singular in εα instead of w • as, evQia πόντον, II. ζ'. 291. Sometimes they are used as common ; as, ηδύς αϋτμη, Odys. μ'. 369. εσσα. εν, Sing Ν.χαρϊ-εις, G. χαρί-εντος,έσσης, εντός, Ό.χαρ(~εντι, έσσί], εντι, Α.χαρί-εντα, εσσαν, εν, ν.χαρί-εν or ει, εσσα, εν. χαρίεις, graceful Dual. Ν. Α. V. χαρί-εντε, έσσα, εντε (χ.\).χαρι-έν έντοιν. Plur. Ν.χαρΙ-εντες, εσσαι, εντα, 0.χαρι-έντων,εσσών,έντων ί Ό.χαρΙ-εισι, έσσαις, εισι, Α.χαρΙ-εντας, έσσας, εντα, V ,χαρί-εντες, εσσαν, εντα. In like manner decline λαχνήεις, hairy. νιφόεις, snowy, πετρήει,ς, rocky. σκιόεις, shady, άν&εμόεις, flowery. εύρώεις, mouldy. From adjectives declined after this form arise several con- tracts, ήεις, ήεσσα, ψν, being contracted into $?, ησσα, ψ, and όεις, όεσσα, όεν, into ους, ονσσα, ονν • thus, τιμής, honored. Sing. Ν. τιμ-χς, ψσα, r\v, G. τιμ-ψτος, ήσσης, ηντος, D. τιμ-ψτι, ήσστ}, ηντι, Α. τιμ-ψ>τα, ησσαν, ην, V. τιμ^ψΌΧ if, ησσα,η»'. Dual. N.A.V. τιμ-Ύ\ντε, ήσσα, ηντε, G.D. τιμ-ήντοιν, ήσσαιν, ήντοιν. Plur. Ν. τιμ-ψτες, ησσαι, ηντα, G. τιμ-ήντων, ησσων,ήντων, D. τιμ-ήσι, ήσσαις,τβσι, Α. τιμ-ηντας, ήσσας, ηντα, V. τιμ-ψτες, ησσαν, ψτα. μελίτοΰς, full of honey. Sing. Ν. μελιτ-ονς, ονσσα, ονν, G. μελιτ-ονντος, ούσσης, ονντος, D. μελιτ-ονντι, ούσσί], οϋντι, Α. μελιτ-ονντα, ονσσαν, ονν, V. μελιτ-ονν or ον, ονσσα, ονν. Dual. Ν. A.V. μελιτ-ονντε, ούσσα, ονντε, G.D. μελιτ-έντοιν, όσσαιν, έντοιν, Plur. Ν. μελιτ-ονντες, ονσσαι, ονντα, G. μελιτ-ούντων, ουσσών, ονντων, D. μελιτ-ονσι, ούσσαις, Ονσι, Α. μελιτ-οΰντας, ούσσας, ονντα, V. μελιτ-ονντε ς, ονσσαι, ονντα. DECLENSION. 43 μέλας, black. Sing. Ν. μέλ-ας, αινα, αν, G. μέλ-άνος, αίνης, άνος, D. μέλ-ανι, alvrj, ανι, Α. μίλ-ανα, αιναν, av, V. μέλ-αν, αινα, av. Dual. N. A. V. μέλ-ανε, αιναι, ανε, G. D. μελ-άνοιν, alvaiv, avow. Plur. Ν. μέλ-ανες, αιναι, ava t G. μελ-άνων, αίνων, άνων, D. μέλ-ασι, αΐναις,ασι, Α. μέλ-ανας, αίνας, ανα, V. μέλ-ανες, αιναι, ava.» In like manner decline τάλας, wretched, and some compounds, as nauuikag, all black, δνστάλας, very miserable, the only other examples of this form. πάς, all. Sing. Ν. π-άς, ασα, άν, G. π-αντός, άσης, αντός, D. π-αντί, άστβ, αντί, Α. π-άντα, άσαν, αν, V. rc -άς, άσα, άί>. Dual. N.A.V. π-άντε, άσα, άντε, G. D. π-άντοιν, άσαιν, άντοιν. Plur. Ν. π-άντες, άσαι, άντα, άντων, άσαις, άσι, Α. π-άντας, άσας, άντα, V. π-άντες, άσαι, άντα. In like manner decline several compounds, as, άπας, nqonag, and participles in ας, ασα, αν, the only other words declined after this form. \j. π-άντων, άσων, D. π-άσι. εκών, willing. τέρην, tender. Sing. Sing. Ν. εκ-ών, ούσα, ^ Ν. τέρ-ην, εινα, εν, G. εκ-όντος, ούσης, όντος, G. τέρ-ενος, είνης, ενός, D. εκ-όντι, ούση, όντι, D. τέρ-ενι, είνη, ενι, Α. ϊκ-6ντα, ονσαν, όν, Α. τέρ-ενα, ειναν, εν, V. εκ-ών, ούσα, όν. V. τέρ-εν, εινα, εν. Dual. Dual. N.A.V. ίκ-όντε, ούσα, όντε, N.A.V. τέρ-ενε, είνα, ενε, G. D. ίκ-όντοιν, ούσαιν % όντοιν. G.D. τερ-ένοιν, είναιν, ένοιρ Plur. Plur. Ν. ίκ-οντες, οϋσαι, όντα, Ν. τέρ-ενες, είναι, ενα, G. έκ-όλ'τωί', ουσών, όντων, G. τερ-ένων, εινων, ένων D. έκ-οΟσί, ούσαις : οΰσι, D. τέρ-εσι, είναις, εσι, Α. ϊκ-όντας, ούσας, όντα. Α. τέρ-ενας, είνας, ενα, V. έκ-όντε?, ούσα*, όντα. V. τέρ-ενες, είναι, ενα. So decline άίκων, or "άκων, nnvAll- ing, and participles of the present, first future, and second aorist active. There is no other example of this form. 44 ADJECTIVE. τνφ&είς, having been struck. Sing. Ν. τυφ&-εΙς } είσα, έ>, G. τυφϋ-'έντος, είσης, έντος, D. τυφ&-έντι } είση, έντι, Α. τυφ&-έντα, εΐσαν, ev f V. τυφϋ•-εΙς, εΐσα, εν. Dual. N.A.V. τυφ&-έντε ί είσα ) έντε, G.D. τνφ&-έντοιν, είσαιν f ίντον». Plur. Ν. τνφ&-έντες, είσαι, έντα, G. τνφ&-έντων, εισών, έντων, D. τνφ&-εΐσι, είσαις, εΐσι, Α. τνφ&-έντας, είσας, έντα, V. τνφ&-έντες, είσαι, έντα. In this manner are declined parti- ciples of the first ana second aorist passive, and of verbs in μι from primitives in ίω. δούς, having given. Sing. Ν. δούς, δονσα, δον, G. δόντος, δούσης, δόντος, D. δόντι, δούστ}, δόντι,, Α. δόντα, δονσαν, δόν, V. δούς, δοΰσα, δόν. Dual. N.A.V. δόντε, δούσα, δόντέ, G.D. δόντοιν, δούσαιν, δόντοιν Plur. Ν. δόντες, δονσαι, δόντα, G. δόντων, δουσών, δόντων, D. δούσι, δούσαις, δονσι, Α. δόντας, δούσας, δόντα, V. δόντες, δοϋσαι, δόντα. In this manner are declined parti- ciples of verbs in μι from primitives in οω. ζενγν-ύς, joining. Sing. Ν. ζευγν-ύς, υσα, i>v, G. ζευγν-ύντος, ύσης, ύντος, D. ζευγν-ύντι, ύση, ύντι, Α. ζευγν-ύντα, νσαν, ύν. V. ζενγν-νύς, υσα, ύν, Dual. N.A.V. ζενγν-ύντε,ϋσα, ύντε, G.D. ζευγν-ύντοιν, ύσαιν, ύντοιν. Plur. Ν. ζευγν-ύντες, νσαι, ύντα, G. ζευγν-ύντων, νσών, ύντων, D. ζενγν-νσι, ύσαις, νσι, Α. ζενγν-ύντας, ύσας, ύντα, V. ζευγν-ύντες, νσαι, ύντα. In this manner are declined parti- ciples of verbs in μι from primitives in νω. τύπων f going to strike. Sing. Ν. τυτΐ-ων, ονσα, ovv, G. τνπ-ονντος, ούσης, ούντος, D. τυπ-οϋντι, ούση, / ονντι, Α. τνπ-ονντα, ονσαν, οϋν, V. τνπ-ών, ονσα, οΰν. Dual. N.A.V. τντΐ-ονντε,ούσα, ονντε, G.D. τυπ-ούντοιν ούσαιν, ούντοιν. Plur. Ν. τνττ-ονντες, ονσαι, ονντα, G. τυπ-ούντων , ουσών, ούντων, D. τυπ-ούσι, ούσαις, ονσι, Α. τνπ-ονντας, ούσας, ούντα, V. τνπ-ονντες, ονσαι, ούντα. In this manner are declined parti- ciples of the second future active, and of the present of contracted verbs in ^ω and όω. DECLENSION. 45 τιμών, honoring. Sing. Ν. τιμ-ών, ώσα, ών } G. τιμ-ώντος, ώσης, ώντος, D. τιμ-ώντι, ώση, ώντί, Α. τιμ-ώντα, ώσαν, ών, V. τιμ-ών, ώσα, ων. Dual. Ν.Α.ν.τι,Μ-ώ^τε, ώσα, ώντε, Θ.ΙΧτ^-ώ^τοιν, ώσανν, ώντοιν. Plur. Ν. τιμ-ώντες, ώσαι, ώντα, G. τιμ-ώντων, ωσών, ώντων, D. τιμ-ώσν, ώσαις, ώσι, Α. τιμ-ώντας, ώσας, ώντα, V. τιμ-ώντες, ώσα*, ώντα, In this manner are declined the present participles of contracted verbs in αω. τετΰφώς, having struck. Sing. Ν. τετνφ-ώς, νια, off, G. τετυφ-όιος, υ/α?, OTO£, D. τετνφ-ότι, υ/α, ότι, Α. τετυφ-ότα, υΐαν, ό?, V. τετνφ-ώς, υΓα, off. Dual. Ν. A.V. τετυφ-ότε, u /α, ότε, G. D. τετυφ-ότοιν , νίαιν,ότοιν. Plur. Ν. τετυφ-ότε?, mat, ότα, G. τετυφ-όιων. υίώ*', ότων, D. τετνφ-όσι, νίαις, όσι, Α. τετνφ-ότας, νιας, ότα, V. τετνφ-ότες, u?at, ότα. In this manner are declined parti- ciples of the perfect active and mid- dle. Sing. Ν. Ιστ-ώ?, ώσα, ώς, G. εστ-ώτος, ώσης, ώτο?, ϋ.-Ιστ-ώ™, ώσ ( 7, tort, Α. ίστ-ώτα, ώσαν, ώς, V. έστ-ώ?, ώσα, ώ?. έστω?, standing. Dual. Ν. Α. V. έστ-ώτε, ώσα, ώτε, G.D. ίστ-ώτοιν, ώσαι,ν, ώτοιν. Plur. Ν. έστ-ώτες, ώσα*, ώτα, G. έστ-ώτων,ωσώί', ώτων } D. £ στ-ώσι, ώσαις, ώσι. Α. εστ-ώτας,ώσας, ώτα, V. έστ-ώτε?, ώσα*, ώτα. This word, and several others declined in the same manner, as βίβως, γΐγω:, are participles of the perfect active, from which the Ionics drop κ, generally shortening the penultima, and which are afterwards contracted ; thus, sOTrjxaig, ίσταως, ίστώς. II. Adjectives of two terminations end in M. F. N. ος, ov • ως, ων • ης, ες • ων, ον • ις, ι- ους, ονν • 46 AJJJX, 1/A1VJS. νς, V ψ, εν ωο, 0Q ας, αν All adjectives of two terminations are of the third declension ; except those in ο ς and ως, which are of the second. ένδοξος, glorious. Dual. Sing. Ν. Μοξ-ος, G. ένδόξ-ου, D. ένδόξ-ω, Α. Μνδοξ-ον, V Μοξ-ε, Ν. Α. V. ένδόξ-ω, ■ G. D. ένδόξ-όιν. Plur. Ν. ϊνδοξ-οι*, G. ένδόξ-ων 9 D. ένδόξ-οις, Α. ένδόξ-ους, V. ε'νδοξ-ον. α. In like manner decline ά&άνατος, immortal. εϋκαρπος, άλχϊμος, strong, brave. όμορος, άοίδϊμος, celebrated. σωτήριος, βασιλέως, royal. fruitful, bordering upon, saving, salutary. ταλαίπωρος, wretched. Several adjectives which are properly common sometimes take a distinct feminine ; as, α&ανατη μητης, Horn. ; πολυτίμητη 4ημήτη<3, Aristoph. εϋγεως, fertile. Sing. Dual. Plur. Ν. εΰγε-ως, ων. Ν. εϋγε-ω, ω, G. εϋγε-ω, Ν. Α. V. εϋγε-ω, G. εϋγε-ων, D. εϋγε-ω, D. εϋγε-ως, Α. εΰγε-ων, G. D. εϋγε-ων. Α. εϋγε-ως, ω V. εϋγε-ως, ων. V. εϋγε-ω, ω In like manner decline Ίλεως, propitious. πλέως, full. Compounds of γίλως, laughter, 'έρως, love, and xlqaq, horn, follow the third declension ; as, ψιλόγελ-ως, ων, fond of laughter, G. -ωτος, D. -ωτι, At " Α. -ωτα, ων • but the Sing. Ν. άλη&^ς, ες, G. άλη&.εΌς, οϋς } D. άλη&-έϊ, ει, Α, άλη&-έα, τ\, ές } V άλη&-ές. ttic form of the second declension is also used. άλη&ής, true. Dual. 1 Plur. N. A. V. Ν. άλη&-έες, εις, i«, % άλη&-έε, η, G. άλη&-έων, ων, D. άλη&-έσι, Α. άλη&-έας, εις, έα, η, V. άληχτ-έες, εϊς, έα, η. G. D. άλη&-έθίν } οΐν. DECLENSION. 47 In like manner decline άχρτβής, exact, ακραιφνής, pure. ασφαλή?, safe, secure, ευγενές, of noble birth. πενταετής, for five years, άκαν&ώδης, thorny, λι&ώδης, stony, stone-tike. &εοειδής, godlike. Sing. Ν. εύδαίμ-ων, ov, G. εύδαίμ-ονος, D. εύδαίμ -ovt, Α. εύδαίμ-ονα, ov, V. εϋδαιμ-ον. ευδαίμων, happy. Dual. N. A. V. εύδαίμ-ονε, G. D. εύδαιμ-όνοιν. Plur. Ν. ευδαίμ-ονες, ovct f G. εύδαιμ-όνων, D. εύδαίμ-οσι, Α. εύδαίμ-ονας, ova, V. ενδαίμ-ονες, ova. In like manner decline άναίμων, bloodless. ελεήμων, compassionate, γείτων, neighboring. ευσχήμων, comely. Comparatives in ων are declined like ευδαίμων, but they syncopate and contract the accusative singular of the common gender, and the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural of all genders ; thus, μείζων, greater. Plur. Ν. μείζ-ονες, οες, ους, ova, oa, ω, G. μειζ-όνων, D. μείζ-οσι, Α. μείζ-ονας, οας, ους, ova, oa, ω, V. μείζ-ονες, οες, ους, ova, οα, ω In like manner decline άμείνων, better. καλίίων, more beautiful. εύχαρις, agreeable. Dual. Sing. Dual. Ν. μείζ-ων, ov, 'N.A.V. G. μείζ-ονος, μείζ-ονε, D. μείζ -ovt, Α. μείζ-ονα, oa, ω, ov, G.D. V. μεΐζ•ον. μειζ -ovotv. Sing. Ν. εϋχαρ-ις, G. εύχάρ-ϊτος, D. ενχάρ-ιτι, Α. εύχάρ-πα &, ιν, V. ενχαρ -t. N. A. V. εύχάρ-ιτε, G. D. ενχαρ-ίτοιν. Plur. Ν. εύχάρ-πες, *τα, G. ενχαρ-ίτων, D. ενχάρ-ισι, Α. ενχάρ-ηας, ιτα, V. ενχάρ-ιτες, πα. Adjectives of this termination, with the exception of Μρ-ις, t, skilful, G. -ιος, y ή ατ ι ς, fasting, and a few others, are compounded of substantives, like which they are for the most part declined ; but some compounds of πόλις make ιδος in the genitive j as, απολ-ις, ι, witliout a city, G. -Χδος. 48 ADJECTIVE. Sing. Ν. δίπ-ους, ουν } G. δΐπ-οδος ί D. δΐπ-οδι ί Α. δίη-οδα&ί^ουν ) ουν 1 V. δίπ-ους&ι,ου, ουν. δίπονς, two-footed. Dual. Ν. Α. V. δίπ-οδε, G. D. δίτι-6δθίν ) Plur. Ν. δίπ-οδες, οδα, G. διπ-όδων ί D. δίπ-οσΐ) Α. δΐπ-οδας } ο£α, V. δίπ-οδες, οδα. Adjectives in ου? are declined after the substantives of which they are compounded. Thus, ανόδ-ονς, cvv, toothless, G. -οντος, D. -οντι, A. -on a, ουν. Contracted compounds of nouns of the second declension, thus; εϋν-ονς, ow, favorably disposed, G, -ov, D. -ω, A. -ovv, V. -ου, ουν. In the same manner those of μνα, as δίμνονς, &c. ' Sing. Ν. άδακρ-νς, G. ά#άκρ-υο?, D. ά^άκρ-υί", Α. άδακρ-υν, V. <Μακρ-ι/. αδαχρυς, tearless. Dual. Ν. Α. V. ό<Μκο-νε, G. D. άδακρ-ύοιν. Plur. Ν. ά#άκρ-υε£, ι/£, να, G. όό'ακρ-ΰωί', D. άίάκρ-νσ*, Α. άδάκρ-νας, νς, να, V. άδάκρ-νες } νς, να. Adjectives of this termination follow the substantives of which they are compounded; as, τςίπηχ-υς, υ, three cubits long, G. -εος. Sing. Ν. άρρ-ην, G. άρρ-ενος, D. ϊχρρ-ενν, Α. &ρρ-ενα, V. άρρ-εν. &ρρην, male. Dual. Ν. Α. V. άρρ-ενε, G. D. άρρ-ένοιν. ' Plur. Ν. &ρρ-ενες, eva f G. αρρ-^ων, D. άρρ-εσι, Α. άρρ-ενας, ενα, V. άρρ-ενες, ενα There is no other adjective declined after this form. Sing. Ν. μεγαλήτ-ωρ, ορ } G. μίγαλητ-ορο^, D. μεγαλήτ-ορι, Α. μεγαλήτ-ορα, ορ, V. με^αλητ-ορ. με^αλ^τωρ, magnanimous Dual. Ν. Α. V. μεγαλήτ-ορε } G. D. μεγαλητ-όροιν. Plur. Ν. με^αλητ-ορε?, ορα, G. μεγαλητ-όρων, D. με^αλήτ-ορσΓ, Α. μεγαλήτ-ορας, ορα, V. μθ/αλητ-ορε£, ορα. In like manner decline dpjmeft £>rai?e. COMPARISON. 49 Sing. Ν. άείν-ας, G. άείν-αντος, D. άεΐν-αντι, Α. άείν-αντα, V άείν-αν. άεΐνας, evcrfiowing. Dual. Plur. Ν. άεΐν-αντες, αντα, G. άειν-άντων, D. άείν-ασν, Α. άεΐν-αντας, αντα, V. άεΐν-αντες, αντα.. Τη like manner decline άκάμας, unwearied. Ν. Α. V. άεΐν-αντε, G. D. άειν-άντοιν, III. Adjectives of one termination are the cardinal numbers above τέσοσψς, four. Other adjectives of one termination are masculine and femi- nine only. Such are, 1. Adjectives compounded with sub- stantives, which remain unchanged ; as, μακρόχειρ, long-handed; ενριν, quick-scented. 2. Those derived from πατήρ and μψηρ • as, άπάτωρ, fatherless ; όμομψωρ, of the same mother. 3. Ad- jectives in ης -ητος and ως -ωτος • as, άδμής, unsubdued ; άγνώς, unknown, also that does not know; except πένης, poor, which is always masculine. 4. Adjectives in I and ψ • as, ηλιξ, of the same age; αϊγϊλιψ, lofty. 5. Adjectives in ας -αδος and ις-ιδος• as, φυγάς, fugitive ; άναλκις, weak, cowardly, most of which, however, are feminine only. Some are also neuter, except in the nominative and accusa- tive ; as, cponaat πτεροΐς, Eurip. Some are masculine only ; as, γέρων, old, and adjectives in ας and ης of the first declen- sion, γεννάδας, noble ; έ&ελοντής, voluntary. The neuter, which is deficient, is expressed by another ad- jective ; thus, for the neuter of άγνώς, άγνωστόν is used. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. Μέγας and πολύς have only the nominative, accusative, and vocative, masculine and neuter, of the singular, and borrow the other cases from the obsolete μεγάλ-ος, η, ov, and πολλ-ό^ η, όν • thus, μέγας, great. Sing. Ν. μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, G. μεγάλ-ου, ης, ου, D. μεγάλ-ω, ij, ω, Α. μέγαν, μεγάλην, μέγα, V. μέγα, μεγάλη, μέγα. πολύς, much. Sing. Ν. πολύς, πολλή πολύ, G. πολλ-ον, r^g y ου, D. πολλ-ω > «j Φ, Α. πολύν, πολλην, πολύ, V. πολΐ } πολλή. πολύ. 50 ADJECTIVE. Dual. Ν. Α. V. μεγάλ-ω, a y ω, G. D. μεγάλ -oiVj αιν^ οιν. Plur. Ν. μεγάλ-οι, ai i a f G. μεγάλ-ων, ων^ ojv j D. μεγά^ις } aig y ocg } Α. μεγάλ-ους, ag t a y V. μεγάλ-οι, at, a. Dual. N. A. V. ποίλ-ώ, ά, ώ, G. D. πολλ-οΐν, alv y otv, Plur. N. ττολλ -oi, ai, ά, G. πολλ-ων, (bp f uv f D. πολλ-οΐς, αΐς } οϊς } Α. πολλ-ονς, άς } ά,' V. ποίλ-οΐ, α Ι. ά. Ohs. The poets decline πολύς throughout like ίβνς, whence comes πολιός in the genitive; πολιές, πόλεις, in the nominative plural; πόλεων, in the genitive ; and πολέας, πόλεις, in the accusative. Sometimes also the form πολλος, πολλον, is used. Σως, safe, contracted from σάος, has from this form only σως masculine and feminine, σων neuter and accusative, σώς accu- sative plural ; rarely the feminine singular and neuter plural σα. All the rest is from σώο?, α, «■ op. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 1. The comparative and superlative are generally formed by adding τερος and τατος to the positive ; as, μάκαρ, happy, μακάρτερος, μακάρτάτος • εννονς, kindly disposed, εύνονβτερος, ευνονοτάτος. Adjectives in ας, ης, νς, add τερος and τατος to the neuter ; as, μέλας, black, μελάντερος, μελάν- τατος • ευρύς, broad, ευρύτερος, ευθύτατος. So πένης, poor, makes πενέοτερος, but -ψευδής, false, ψευόίατατος. Adjectives in ων and ξ add τερος and τατος to ες of the nominative plural, those in ξ moreover changing ες into ις • as, σώφρων, prudent, οώφρονες, αωψρονέοτερος, οωψρονέστατος • βλάξ, stupid, βλάκες, βλακίοτερος, βλακίοτατος. But πέπων, ripe, makes πεπαίτερος • πίων, fat, πιότερος • and άφήλ^ξ, old, άφηλικέστερος. Adjectives in ε*ς drop ι • those in ος drop ς, and, if the penultima be short, change ο into ω • as, COMPARISON. 51 /«(fee, graceful, χαριέατερος, χαριέβτατος • ένδοξος, renowned, ενδοξότερος, ενδοξότατος • ίοχϋρός, strong, ίσχνρότερος, ίοχνρότατος • σοφός, wise, οοφώτερος, οοψωτατος • καάάρός, pure, καύαρώτερος, καόαρω- τατος. Obs. Some adjectives in ος, particularly in the Attic writers, change ος into ai, ες, or ις * as, μέσος, in the midst, μεσαίτερος, μεσαίτατος • άφ&ονος, without envy, liberal, abundant, άφ&ο- νέστερος, άφ&ονέστατος • λάλος, loquacious, λαλίστερος, λαλίστατος. Some in αως drop ος • as, παλαιός, ancient, παλαίτερος, παλαΐτατος. 2. Some adjectives in νς and ρος change these terminations into ίων and ιοτος for the comparative and superlative ; as, τ^δυς, sweet, ήδίων, ηδιοτος • αισχρός, base, αίοχίων, αίοχιοτος. So βαόνς, βραδύς, βραχύς, γλυκύς, παχνς, &c, έχόρός, κνδρός, οικτρός. The form τερος and τατος, how- ever, is also used in all these adjectives, and always m the comparative of πρεοβνς, old, and ώκύς, swift, which sometimes have πρέοβιοτος and ωκιοτος in the superlative. Obs. Some comparatives in ιων change the ι, with the pre- ceding consonant, into σσ or ττ • as, βαΊϊύς, deep, βάσσων for βα&ίων ' γλυκύς, sweet, γλύσσων for γλνκίων • ελάχνς, little, small, έλάσσων for έλαχίων • ταχύς, swift, &άσσων for ταχίων, since it should properly be &αχύς. άγοί&ός, good χακός, bad, IRREGULAR COMPARISON. ' άμείνων, βέλτερος, βελτίων, χρείσσων, \ κρείττων, \ κάρρων, ) κακώτερος, ) κακίων, \ χειρών, ϊ χερείων, j ησσων, ϊ ^ψτων, J αγαθότατος. βέλτατος. βέλτιστος. κράτιστος. κάκιστος, χείριστος. \κιστος. 52 καλός, fair, μακρός, long, μέγας, great, μικρός, small , ολίγος, few, πολνς, many, ράδιος, easy, τερπνός, agreeable, φίλος, friendly. ADJECTIVE. καλλίων. ί μακρότερος. \ μάσσων, μείζων 9 ! μικρότερος, μείων, όλίζων, ί πλέων, \ πλείων, ράων, ί τερπνότερος, \ τερπνίων, {φίλτερος, φιλίων, κάλλιστος, μακρότατος, μήκ ιστός, μέγιστος. μεΐστος. όλίγιστος. πλείστος. ρ αστός. τερπνότατος, τερπνίστος. φίλτατος. φίλιστος. Comparisons from the Comparative Degree. άρείων, καλλίων, λωίων, μείων, άρειότερος. καλλιώτερος. λωίτερος. μειότερος. μείζων, πρότερος, χείρων, χερείων, μειζότερος. προτεραίτερος. χειρότερος, γερειότ ερος. ελάχιστος, έσχατος, From the Superlative. Ιλαχιστδτερος. Ισχατώτατος. κϋοιστος, πρώτος, κνδίστατος. πρώτιστος. From Substantives. &>γος, "Αρης, βασιλεύς, ίταΐρος, θεός, κέρδος, κηδος, άλγίων, &\γιστος. άρείων, άριστος, βασιλεύτερος, Βασι\εντατος. Ιταιρότατος. θεώτερος. κερδίων, κέρδιστος. κήδιστος. φώρ From a Pronoun. αϊτός, ipse, αυτότατος, ipsissimus, From Verbs. κλέπτης, κλεπτίστατος. πλεονίκτης, πλεονεκτίστατο$, πλήκτης, πληκτίστατος. πότης, ποτίστατος. ρϊγος, ρ*ιγίων, ρίγιστος. υβριστής, υβριστότερος, νβριστότατος φωρότατος. δεύομαι, λώ, δεύτερος, δείτατος. λωίων, λώϊστος, λψων, λαίστος. φέρω, φίρτερος, φίρτατος. φέριστος. φέρτιστος. From a Participle. Ιδρωμένος, ίρρ^ωμενέστερος, ίορωμενέστατος NUMERALS. 53 From Adverbs. ανω, αφαρ, Ιγγυς, tvboVf εξω, εσω, • ίπερ, Ini, ανώτερος, ανώτατος, άφάρτερος. ίγγύτερος, ίγγίτατος. ίγγίων, εγγιστος. ίνδότερος, Ινδότατος. Ιζώτερος, Ιζώτατος. ίσώτερος, Ισώτατος. κάτω, όπϊσω, πόρος, πόρ^ω, πρόσω, πρωί, βψι, κατώτερος, ύπίστερος, παροίτερος, πορ^ώτερος, προσώτερος, πρωιαίτερος, Ιψίτερος, πρότερος, Ιπέρτερος, ϋστερος, From Prepositions, κατώτατος. όπίστατος. παροίτατος. πορ^ώτατος. προσώτατος. πρωϊαίτατος. βψισΓο?. πρδτατος, (by syncope and contraction) πρώτος. ίπερτατος, (by syncope) ίπατος. ίστάτος. NUMERALS. CARDINAL NUMBERS. The four first cardinal numbers are declined ; the rest, as far as ten, and the decimals, as far as a hundred, are indeclin- able. The round numbers above a hundred are again declinable, like the adjectives ; as, διαχόσϊ-οι, αι, a, tico hun- dred, &LC. είς, one, sing. Ν. είς, μία, %v, G. kvbg y μιας, kvbg, D. hi, μια, hi, A. ha, μίαν, h. δύο, two, dual. Ν. Α. δύο or δύω, G. D. δυοΐν or δυεΧν, δύο, two, plur. G. δνών, D. δυσί. τρεις, three, plur. Ν. τρεις, τρία, G. τριών, D. τρισΐ, Α. τρεις, τρία. τέσσαρες, four, plur. Ν. τέσσαρ-ες, α, G. τεσσάρ-ων, D. τέσσαρ-σι, Α. τέσσαρ-ας, α. Obs.l. Like είς are declined its compounds ουδείς, μηδείς- as, ουδείς, ουδεμία, οϋδεν, &C. ; μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν, &C. Aristotle Uses οΰ&είς and μη&είς. Ονδε εϊς and μηδί εϊς are often used for the sake of increas- ing the negative signification. ΕΪς, from its nature, can have no plural, but ουδείς and μηδεις have ούδενες and μηδΐνες. Ohs. 2. Ji'o is the Attic mode of writing; in Homer and Herodotus it is indeclinable. Λυοϊν is the form for the genitive and dative. Jvtty is hardly found except in the genitive. "Jjutpte accords with δύω. 5* 54 ADJECTIVE. The» cardinal numbers are : *, one. δύο, two. τρεις, three. τέσσΆρας, four. πέντε, five. Hf six. επτά, seven. οκτώ, eight. Ιννέα, nine. δέκα, ten. ένδεκα, eleven. δώδεκα, twelve. τρισκαίδεκα, thirteen. τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα fourteen. πεντεκαίδεκα, fifteen. εκκαίδεκα, sixteen. έπτακαίδεκα, seventeen. όκτωκαίδεκα, eighteen. έννεακαίδεκα, nineteen. είκοσι, twenty. είκοσιν εΊς, &C. twenty-one, 8fC τριάκοντα, thirty. τεσσαράκοντα, πεντήκοντα, ίξήκοντα, εβδομήκοντα, δγδοήκοντα, Ιννενήκοντα, εκατόν, διακόσϊ-οι, αι, α, τριακόσι-οι, αι, α, τεσσαρακόσι•οι, αι, α, πεντακόσι-οι, αι, α, εξακόσι-οι, αι, α, επτακόσι-οι, αι, α, όκτακόσι-οι, αι, α, εννακόσι-οι, αι, α, •χί\ι-οι, αι, α, δισχίλι-οι, αι, α, μύρι-οι, αι, α, δισμϋρι-οι, αι, α, δεκακισμύρι•οι, αι, α, ίκατοντακισμϋρι-οι, αι forty. fifty- sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety. a hundred, two hundred, three hundred, four hundred, five hundred, six hundred. # seven hundred, eight hundred, nine hundred, a thousand, two thousand, ten thousand, twenty thousand, a hundred thousand. '., a thousand thousand. Obs. 1. From ten to twenty, the numbers are usually expressed as above; less commonly δεκατρείς, δεκαπέντε, &c. The remaining com- pound numbers are usually written separately ; and when the smaller number precedes, they are connected by και, when it follows, commonly not; as, πέντε- και είκοσι, or εΐκοοι πέντε. Obs. 2. The numbers compounded with eight and nine are more fre- quently expressed by a circumlocution with the participle of δέω, as, ετη είκοσι, ίνος δέοντος, or ίνος δέοντα, twenty years, wanting one, that is, nine• teen years. ORDINAL AND OTHER DERIVATIVE NUMBERS. 1. The ordinal numbers end always in ος, and are declined like καλός or μακρός. πρώτος, δεύτερος, τρίτος, τέταρτος, πέμπτος, 'έκτος, 'έβδομος, όγδοος, ενί'ατος, δέκατος, ενδέκατος, δωδέκατος, τρισκαιδέκατος, τεσοαρεσκαιδέκατος, &C, είκοστός, first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh, twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth, 8fC. twentieth. εικοστός πρώτος, &C τριακοστός, τεσσαρακοστός, πεντηκοστός, εξηκοστός, εβδομηκοστός, δγδοηκοστός, εννενηκοστός, εκατοστός, διακοσιοστός, τριακοσιοστός, &C. χιλιοστός, δισχιλιοστός, &C. μυριοστός, δισμυριοστός, twenty-first, SfC. thirtieth, fortieth, fiftieth, sixtieth, seventieth, eightieth, ninetieth, hundredth, two hundredth, three hundredth, fye. thousandth, two thousandth, SfC. ten thousandth, twenty thousandth. NUMERALS. 55 Obs. Here also in compound numbers the smaller number usually pre- cedes with και, or follows without it, as, τριακοστός πρώτος, or πρώτο? καΐ τριακοστός. 2. The numeral adverbs, which answer to the question How \ many times 1 are άπαξ, once ; dig, twice ; τρίς, thrice ; τετράχις, \ four times, &c. 3. The multiplicative numbers are άπλοΰς, simple; διπλούς, double, or two-fold ; τριπλούς, triple, or three-fold, &,c. 4. The proportionals, or those which express how many times more one thing is than another, are διπλάσιος, twice as much ; τριπλάσιος, thrice as much, &c. 5. The numerals which answer to the question On what day 1 are δευτεραΐος, on the second day ; τριταίος, on the third day, &c. 6. The numbers as substantives are all formed in ag t gen •αδος, as ή μονάς, unity ; δυάς } τριάς, τετράς, &c. METHODS OF REPRESENTING NUMBERS. 1. The Greeks represented numbers by the letters of the alphabet, which for this purpose were divided into three classes, the first expressing the class of units, the second that of tens, and the third that of hundreds. But as each class contained only eight letters, 6 was denoted by ς•, called Ιπίσημον • 90 by *? , called κόππα' and 900 by ^, called σάνπι. A mark was placed over the numeral letters in order to distinguish them. Units. Tens. Hundreds. ρ' 100. Λί » , Si " g * Sing. Sing. Sing. Ν. έγώ, Ν. σύ, N. Ν. δ £ , % δ, G. έμονοτμον, G. σον, G. ol•, G. οδ, \ς, ol•, D. ΙμοΙ or μοϊ, D. σοι, D. ol, D • ί"> ί, «, Α. έμε or μέ. Α. σέ. A. 1 Α. δ*, ^, δ. Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual. Ν. Α. νώϊ, ν φ, Ν. Α. σφώϊ, σφω, Ν. Α. σφωε, σφε, Ν. Α. Μ, δ, G.O.vibi'v,vcuv. G.O.cq>ia'iv f aq)(5v. G.D.uqxutv, σφίν. G.D. οϊν,αϊν,οϊν. Plur. Plur. Plur. Plur. Ν. ήμεΐς, Ν. νμεΐς, Ν. σφεΐς, Ν. ο?, «?, δ, G. ήμων, G. υμών, G. σφών, G. ων, ων, ων, D. ήμϊν, D. νμϊν, D. σφίσι, D. οϊς, αϊς,οϊς, Α. ήμας. Α. νμας. Α. σφα?. Α. ονς, &ς, 5. Afabg and εκείνος are declined like the relative δ?, and δδε like the article ό. OJs. Αντος has the signification of the English seZf; or else, in the ob- lique cases, after other words in the clause, it is used for the simple pro- noun of the third person; but when it is immediately preceded by the ar- ticle, it signifies the same. In this last sense it is often compounded with the article, as ταΰτον for του αντοϋ, ταύτη for τί) αϋτγ • and then the neu- ter ends in ov as well as in o, as ταντο arid ταύτον for to αυτό. PRONOUNS. 57 Οίτος, αυτή, τοΰτο, this, is declined, and prefixes τ, like the article; thus, Sing. N. οίτος, αυτή, τοΰτο, G. τούτον, ταύτης, τούτου, D. τούτω, ταύτη, τούτω, A. τούτον, ταύτην, Dual. τοντο. N. A. τούτω. ταύτα, τούτω, G D. τούτοιν % ταύταιν, Plur. τούτοιν. N. ούτοι, αΐται, ταντα, G. τούτων, τούτων, τούτων, D. τούτοις , ταύταις, τούτοις, A. τούτους, ταύτας, ταΰτα. Obs. The Attics add ι to the demonstratives, to give a stronger empha- sis, in which case it is long, receives the accent, and absorbs the short vowel at the end of the word to which it is affixed ; as, οντοσΐ, this here, hicce, αντηΐ from αντη, ταυτί from ταύτα, όδι from οδε, ίκεινοσί, that there. For the same purpose γι and δί, instead of t, are annexed to the cases which end with a short vowel; as, ταυταγι, τουτοδί. From the accusative singular of the personal pronouns and αυτός are compounded the reflective pronouns έμαυτοΰ, of my- self; α ε αν του, of thyself '; έαυτοϋ, of himself. G. Sing. εαντ-οϋ, ης, ου, G. Plur. &αυτ-ων, ων, ων, D. Ιαυτ-ω, if, Φ) D. ίαυτ-οΐς, αΐς, οΐς, A. Ιαυτ-όν, ην, 6. Α. ίαυτ-ονς, άς, ά. In like manner are declined έμαυτοϋ and σεαυτοΰ in the singular number only. Obs. 1. Homer never uses these reflectives, but Ιμβ αντον, ai αυτό», ε αντον, or αυτόν, &c. Obs. 2. Σαυτοϋ is often found, by crasis, for αεαντον, and αντοϋ for εαυτού. The latter is used by the Attics in the three persons. τΙς, any. Sing. Dual. Plur. N. τις, τΐ, Ν. τινές, τινά. G. τινός, Ν. Α. τινέ, G. τίνων, D. τινί, G. D. τινοΐν. D. τισΐ, A. τινά, τι. Α. τινάς % τινά. 58 VERR. Obs. 1. Tig, τί, who, what ? is marked with an acute accent, and always on the first syllable. Obs. 2. Του and τω are often used for τίνος and τινί, also του and τω for τίνος and τίνι, and in the neuter plural αττα, Ion. aooa, instead of τινά. Obs. 3. *Ος and τις are often joined, and signify whosoever ; thus, «Wic, »/rtg, on, &c. In the neuter δ is often separated from τι, with or without a comma, to be distinguished from the conjunction 'ότι. Also ότου, οτω, are used for ούτινος, ώτϊνι, and αττα, Ion. άσσα, for απινα. Obs. 4. Ouv, with the signification of the Latin cunque, is added to compound relatives, and takes the accent, as όοτϊοοϋν, whosoever. δείνα, some one. Sing. Ν. δείνα, or δείς, G. δείνατος, or δεΐνος, D. δείνατι, or δεΐνι, Α. δείνα. Plur. Ν. δεινές, G. δεινών. άλλι\λων ί of one another. Plur. G. όλλ^λ-ο^, ωϊ>, ων, D. άλλ^λ-οί?, οα£, Οί?, Α. άλλήλ-ους, ας, α. Dual. G. D. άλλήλ-οιν, αιν, oiv y Α. άλλήL•ω t α, ω. Obs. Juva is sometimes indeclinable ; as, τον δείνα, τον του fofva, sc. νίόν. VERB. Verbs are of two kinds, transitive and intransitive or neuter. A transitive verb expresses an action which is exerted by the agent upon some object; as, φνλω σε, I love you ; εγραψεν έπιστολήν, he wrote a letter. An intransitive verb expresses an action or state, which is not communicated to any other object ; as, τρέχω, I run ; εΰδει, he sleeps. Transitive verbs have three voices, active, passive, and middle ; intransitive verbs have properly an ac- tive voice only. The active voice signifies action or condition ; as, τνπτω σε, / strike you ; βαδίζει, he goes ; εϋδονσι, they sleep. The passive voice signifies passion, suffering, or the receiving of an action ; as, τνπτομαι, I am struck. The middle voice expresses an action that is re- flected upon the agent ; as, τνπτομαι, I strike myself. But more particularly, 1. The middle voice signifies what we do to ourselves, and is equivalent to the active joined with the corresponding reflec- tive pronoun ; as, λούω, I wash another, but λοίομαι, the same as λοι'ω έμαυτύν, I wash myself ; ^λειψαν αυτόν, they anointed him, but ^λείφαντο, the same as ψ.ειψαν εαυτού,, they anointed themselves ; άπέ/ειν, άπόσχειν, to restrain, άπέ/εσ&αι, άποσχέ- σ&αι, to restrain one's self, to refrain. In many verbs the middle receives a simple intransitive signification ; as, στίλλω, I send, στέλλομαι, I send myself, i. e. I travel ; παϋειν, to put to rest, παίεαβαι, to put one's self to rest, i. e. to cease. 2. But more frequently the middle signifies what we do for ourselves, and is equivalent to the active with the dative of the reflective pronoun ; as, ri\v νησον έδούλωσε, he subjected the island, without its being defined to whom, τους Μήδους έδουλώ- σάτο, he subjected the Medes to himself; θώρακα ένδύειν, to put a breastplate on another, θώρακα ένδύεσχται, to put a breast- plate on one's self; φυλάττειν, to watch any one, to observe, φυλάττεσθαι, to observe any thing to one's advantage in order to avoid it. Hence the middle is used to signify what we do to any thing that be- longs or relates to us ; as, περιυρήζαι χιτώνα, to tear the garment of another, ' περιρρήξαα&αι χιτώνα, to tear one's own garment; λϋσαι, to return any thing to any one for a ransom, λνσασ&αι, to receive back any thing that belongs to one. 3. The middle often signifies what we cause to be done ; as, r) Πάι&εια χτώρακα έποιήσάτο, Panthea caused a breastplate to be made ; διδάσκονται τους νίεΐς, they cause their sons to be taught; τράηεζαν παρετίϋ-ετο, he caused a table to be set. Hence έμέ έγράψατο, he accused me, properly he caused my name, as that of an accused person, to be taken down in writing by the magistrate before whom the process is carried. Obs. 1. The passive has frequently the signification of the middle; as, iua; τούτω τω 'έργω φίλους πεποίησαι, by this deed you have made us your friends; τίνα γραφήν σε γέγραπται ; what accusation has he brought against you ? εκείνους τα όπλα αφγρ>'με&α, we have deprived them of their arms ; τα Ιπιτήδεια έν τοις όχυροις ανακεκομισμένοι 7 t oav, they had conveyed their provisions into their strong holds; ώς fia&vv ϊχοιμή&ης! how pro- foundly you slept! κατεκλϊ&η ύπτιος, he lay down on his back; ί,μάς ΐίυΐν&,'αονται, they will fear us. Obs. 2. The middle is often used passively ; as, ?; πατρίς αύτοϋ ανετρά- πετο, his country was subverted ; especially the future middle; as,r7r' iuov τηιι'αεται, he shall be honored by me ; ο&εν ino των Ιππέων ov βλάψονται, whence they will not be hurt by the cavalry. 60 VERB. Many verbs, called deponent, have a passive or middle form, and an active (some transitive, some• intransitive) signification; as, δέχομαι, to receive ; έρχομαι, to come. Some verbs are deponent in the future, and active in the present ; as, ακούω, άκούσομαι, to hear ; σιωπάω, σιωπήσομαι, to be silent. Obs. Some deponents are also used passively; as, Ιμοί Ιστιν εϊργασμένον τοιούτον έργον, such a deed has been done by me ; υπ' (wfovos οϊφ&η, he was seen by no one. MODES. The modes are five ; indicative, optative, subjunc- tive, imperative, and infinitive. The indicative is used when any thing is to be represented as actually existing or happening, and as any thing independent of the thought and ideas of the speaker. Hence it is put in many cases where in Latin the subjunctive is used ; as, σκοπεί εΐ γιγνώσκεις τις έστι, see if you know who he is, an scias quis sit. The optative and subjunctive represent an action not in its actual relation, but rather in its reference to the ideas of the speaker, the subjunctive only expressing this more determi- nately and certainly than the optative. The optative is used alone to express a wish ; as, αύτϊκα τε&ναΐην, may I instantly die ; γένοω πατρός ευτυχέστερος, may you be more fortunate than your father. The subjunctive is used alone only in exhortations in the first person ; as, ϊ'ωμεν, let us go ; οϊ'κάδε νεώμε&α, let us return home: and in dubious questions, partly with and partly without βοΰλει or -Ο-έλεις pre- ceding ; as, ποΐ βώ; whither shcdl I go ? εϊ'πω οΰν σοι τό αίτιον ; shall I tell you the cause 1 πό&εν βοΰλει &ρ£ωμαι ; whence will you that I begin ? Ό-έλεις μεΐνωμεν αύτοΰ ; will you that we remain here ? . In dependent members of sentences, the optative is com- monly used when the verb in the preceding member denotes past time, and the subjunctive when it denotes present or future ; as, ούκ ε!χον ι or ούκ γ(δειν, οποί τραποΐμην, I knew not whither I should turn myself; ούκ ϊχω, or ούκ οϊδα, οποί τρα- ηωμαι, I know not whither I shall turn myself. MODES AND TENSES. 61 The optative is frequently used in relating the words or sentiments of another, without representing him as speaking in the first person ; as, ελεξέ μοι, δτι ή οδός φέροι είς τήν πόλιν, ηνπερ όρώην, he told me that the way led to the city which I saw. Obs. When any one relates the words, or describes the sentiments of another, not representing him as speaking in the first person, the relator is said to use the oratio obliqua. The imperative is sometimes used by the Attic poets in a dependent member of a sentence after οίσ&α • as, οΐσϋ-' ώς ποίί,σον ; do you Imoio what you have to do ? Soph. Also the future is often put for the imperative ; as, προμηνύσεις τοντο μηδενΐ, divulge this to no one. TENSES. The tenses are nine ; the present, the imperfect, the perfect, the pluperfect, the first and second aorists, the first and second futures, and, in the passive, the paulo-post-future. Time in general is divided into three parts, the present, the past, and the future. The present tense, besides its proper use, is put for the imperfect and aorists in an animated narration, which repre- sents what took place as present ; as, ταύτην τ\ν επιστολών δίδωσι πνστω άνδρΐ, ώς ωετο • ό δε λαβών, Κνρω δείκνϋσι, this letter he gives to a trusty person, as he thought, who, having received it, shows it to Cyrus. Past time is expressed in different ways by the imperfect, perfect, pluperfect, and aorists. The imperfect expresses an action which was going on, but not completed, at some former time ; as, εγραφον, I was writ' ing. Hence it often has the signification of an action fre- quently repeated ; as, Μίλων ό Κροτχονιατης τί\σΰ•ιε μνάς χρεών εϊχοσι, Milo the Crotonian was accustomed to eat twenty mina of flesh. The perfect expresses an action which has taken place at a previous time, but which is connected, either in itself, or its consequences, or its accompanying circumstances, with the present ; as, y έγραφα, which signifies not only / have written, but it shows also the continued existence of the writing. The pluperfect shows an action which is past, but which still continued, either by itself or in its following and accom- 62 VERB. panying circumstances, during another action which is past ; as, έγεγραφειν, I had icritten. The perfect is often put for the present, in which case the pluperfect has the sense of the im- perfect ; as, δέδοικα, έδεδοίκειν, I fear, I feared. The aorists express simply a past action, without any refer- ence to the present, or any other past time ; as, έγραψα, which signifies I wrote, but it does not determine whether the writing be still existing or not. Hence they often denote the custom- ary performance of an action ; as, τάς των φαύλων σννη&είας όλϊγος χρόνος διέλυσε, a short time commonly dissolves the con- nections of the wicked. Future time is expressed in different ways by the futures and paulo-post-future. The futures express an action that is to take place here- after ; as, γράψω, I shall write. The paulo-post-future shows that an action will be com- pleted at some future time ; as, ή πολιτεία τελέως κεκοσμήσεται, the state will be perfectly organized. There is also a periphrastic future, made up of μέλλω and the infinitive of the present, future, or aorists, corresponding to the Latin participle in rus joined with the verb sum, and de- noting that one is about to do something, or intends to do it ; as, μέλλει άναιρεΐσ&αι, he is about to be put to death ; τοντο εμελλον λέξειν, I intended to say this ; δπερ μέλλω πα&εΐν, which I am to suffer. The infinitive is often understood ; as, σεαυτόν έφόνευσας, έμέλλησας δε καΐ ήμας, sc. φονεύειν, you slew yourself, and meant to slay us also. Obs. The first and second aorist differ not in signification. Few verbs have them both, and the first is found much oftener than the second. The same may be observed of the first and second futures. CONJUGATION. There are four conjugations of baryton verbs, distinguished by their characteristics. The characteristic is the letter which immediate- ly precedes ω or ομαι in the present tense. In nr, κτ, αν, the former letter is the characteristic. The letter before ω in the future, and before a in the perfect, is also the characteristic of each of these tenses respectively. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CONJUGATIONS. 63 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE Pres. *. τέρπω, 0, \είβω, φ, γράφω, First Conjugation. Fut. Perf. τέρψω, λείψω, γράψω, τύψω, τέτερφα, to delight. λ έλειψα, to pour out γέγραφα, to write, τέτΰφα, to strike. Pres. Second Conjugation. Fut. π\έκω, ' ίπ\έξω, \έγω, Χέζω, βρέχω, > * i βρέξω, όρνσσω, or όρύξω, όρύττω, J i Perf. f πέπ\εχα, λΑεχα, βέβρεχα, ωρΰχα, to plait, to say. to moisten. to dig. Third Conjugation. Pres. άνϋτω, α<5ω, πείθω, pure, as τίω, Fut. άνϋσω, ασω, πείσω, φράσω, Perf. ' ηνυκα, πέπεικα, | πέφρακε {τέτΊκα, to finish, to sing, to persuade, to say. to honor. Pres. Fourth Conjugation. Fut. Perf. λ, ν, ψάλλω, νέμω, φαίνω, " Α* > ν < ψαλώ, Ν \ νεμώ, / < φάνω, V ζ εψαλκα, to play. \ νενέμηκα, to distribute, κ < πέφαγκα, to show. Ρ, σπείρω, τέμνω, • \ Ρ # σπερώ, V ν τεμω, s J εσπαρκα, to sow. ν. τετέμηκα, to cut. 4 ACTIVE VOICE. SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES OF THE First Conjugation. Present Imperf. 1st Fut. 1st Aor Perfect Pluperf 2d Aor. 2d Fut. Indie. Imper. Optat. Subjunc. Infin. τϋπτω τύπτε τύπτοιμι τίπτω τίπτειν ετνπτον τύψω τίψοιμι τύψειν έτυψα' τίψον τϋψαιμι τύψω τίψαι τίτνφα τέτυφε τετϋφοιμι τετνφω τετυφεναι έτετνφειν ετυπον τύπε τίποιμι τνπω τνπε7ν τνπω τνποΊμι τνπέϊν Part. τύπτων τΐψων τνψα<; τετυ^ώ* *τυπω* τύπων 64 VERB. Second Conjugation. Indie. Imperat. Optat. Subj. Infin. Part. Present πλέκω πλέκε πλέκοιμι πλέκω πλεκειν π\έκων Imperf. επλεκον 1st Fut. πλέξω πλέξοιμι πλίξειν πλέξων 1st Aor. έπλεξα πλέξον πλέξαιμι πλέξω πλέξαι πλέξας Perfect πέπλεχα, πέπλεχε πεπλέχριμι πεπλέχω πεπλεχέναι πεπλεχως Pluperf. (πεπλέχειν 2d Aor. επλακον ■ πλάκε πλάκοιμι πλάκα» πλακεΊν πλακών 2d Fut. πλακω πλακοΐμι ' πλακεΊν πλακών Third Conjugation. Present πείθω πείθε πείθοιμι πείθω πείθειν πείθων Imperf. επειθον 1st Fut. πείσω πείσοιμι πείσειν πείσων 1st Aor. έπεισα πεϋσον πείσαιμι πείσω πεΊσαι πείσας Perfect πίπεικα πέπεικε πεπείκοιμι πεπείκω πεπεικίναι πεπεικώς Pluperf. Ιπεπείκειν _ 2d Aor. επιθον πίθε πίθοιμι πίθω πιθείν πίθων 2d Fut. πιθώ πιθοϊμι πιθεΧν πίθων Fow •tk Conjugation. Present σπείρω σπείρε σπείροιμι σπείρω σηείρειν σπείρων Imperf. εσπειρον 1st Fut. σπερω σπεροΐμι σπερείν σπερών 1st Aor. έσπειρα σπεΊρον σπείραιμι σπείρω σπείραι σπείρας Perfect εσπαρκα εσπαρκε ίσπόρκοιμι έσπάρκω ϊσπαρκέναι Ισπαρκως Pluperf. Ισπάρκειν 2d Aor. εσπαρον σπάρε σπάροιμι σπάρω σπαρεΧν σπαρών 2d Fut. σπαρω σπαρόΐμι σπαρεΧν σπάρων S. τντττω, I strike, D. Ρ. τύπτομεν, we strike, S. Ιτνπτον, D. Ρ. έτύτΐτομεν, FIRST CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MODE. Present Tense, I strike. τύτττεις, thou strikest, τίπτετον, you two strike, τύπτετε, you strike, Ίντίτει^ he strikes, τύπτετον, they two striae, τύπτονσι, they strike. Imperfect, J was striking. ϊτυπτες, έτύπτετον, έτϊ>7ΐτετε > ϊτυπτε, έτυπτέτην, Ιίτντντον, CONJUGATION OF THE ACTIVE VOICE. 65 First Future, I shall strike. s. D. P. τύψω, τύψεις, τύψετον, τύψομεν, τύψετε, First Aorist, I struck. τύψει, τύψετον, τύψουσι. s. D. P. ϊτυψα, ετνψας, έτύψάτον, έτύψαμεν, έτύψατε, Perfect, I have struck. ϊτυψε, έτνψάτην, ϊτυψαν. s. D. P. τέτνφα, τέτυφας, τετύφατον, τετύφ&μεν, τετύφατε, Pluperfect, I had struck. τέτνφε, τετύφατον, τετύφασι. s. D. P. έτετνφειν, έτεΊύφεις, έτετύφεηον, έτετύφειμεν, έτετύφειτε, Second Aorist, I struck. έτετύφει, έτετνφείτην, έτετύφεισαν. S. D. P. ϊτνπον, ϊτνηες, έτύπετον, έτύπομεν, Ιτύπετε, ετυπε, έτυπέτην, ετνπον. Second Future, 7" shall strike. S. τνπώ, τνπεΐς, τυπεΐ, D. τνπεΐτον, τνπεΐτον, P. τυποΰμεν, τνπεϊτε, τυπονσι. D. Ρ. IMPERATIVE MODE. Present, strike. - ~ , ' ΐνπτε, τυπτέτω, τυπτετον. τυπτέτων. τνρτετε, τυτττετωσα<: First Aorist, strike. τύψον, τύψϋτον, τύψίίτε, τνψατω, τνψάτων, τνψάτωσαν. 66 VERB. Perfect, have struck. S. τέτνφε, τετνφέτω, D. τετνφετον, τετυφέτων, P. τετνφετε, τετνφέτωσαν. Second Aorist, strike. S. τνπε, τυπέτω, D. τνπετον, τνπέτων, P. τύπετε, τυπέτωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. Present, / mighty could, mould, or should strike. S/ τνπτοιμι, τύπτοις, τνπτοι, D. τύπτοιτον, τνπτοίτην, P. τυτΐτοιμεν, τύητοπε, τύπτοιεν. First Future, I might, could, would, or should hereafter strike. S. τνψοιμ*, τύψοις, τίψον, D. τύψοιτον, τυψοίτην, Ρ. τύψοιμεν, τύψοπε, τύψοιεν. First Aorist, / might, could, would, or should strike. S. τύψαψι, τίψα,ίς, τύψαι, D. τύψαιτον, τνψαίτην, Ρ. τύψαιμεν, τύψαπε, τύψαιεν. Perfect, / might, could, would, or should have struck. S. τετνφοιμι, τετνφοις, τετύφοι, D. τετύφοιτον, τετνφοίτην 9 Ρ. τετύφοιμεν, τετύφοιτε, τετύφοιεν. Second Aorist, I might, could, would, or should strike. S. τύποιιιι, τύποις, linoi, D. τύηοπον, τνποίτην, P. τνποιμεν, τνποιτε, τνποιεν. Second Future, 1 might, could, would, or should hereafter strike, S. τνποΐμι, τνποΐς, τνπόΐ, D. τνποΐτον, τνποίτην, Ρ. τυποΐμεν, τυποϊτε, τυποϊεν. CONJUGATION OF THE ACTIVE VOICE. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Present, J may strike. 67 s. D. P. τύπτω, τύπτωμεν, τύπττις, τύπττ}, τνπτψον, τύπτητον, τύπτητε, τύητωσι. First Aorist, J may strike. s. D. P. τύψω, τύψωμεν, τύψ^ς, τύψτ], τυψητον, τύψητον, τύψητε, τύψωσι. Perfect, J may have struck. s. D. P. τετνφω, τετύφωμεν , τετύφγς, τετύφτ], τετύφητον, τετύφητον, τετύψητε, τετνφωσι. Second Aorist, I may strike. s. Ik τύπω, τύπωμεν, τύητ]ς, τύ 7 **}* τύπητον, τύπητον, τύπητε, τύπωσι. INFINITIVE MODE. Present, First Future, First Aorist, Perfect, Second Aorist, Second Future, τύπτειν, to strike. τύψειν, to be going to strike, τύψαι, to have struck, τετυφέναι, to have struck, τνπεΐν, to have struck. τνπεΧν, to be going to strike. PARTICIPLES. Present, striking. N. G. τύπτων, τύπτοντος, τύπτουσα, τύπτον, τνπτούσης, τύπτοντος, &.C First Future, going to strike. N. G. τύφων, τύψοντος, τύψονσα, τύψον, τνψούσης, τύψοντος. 68 VERB. First Aorist, having struck. N. G τύψας, τύψασα, τνψαντος, τυψάσης, Perfect, having struck. τύψαν, τνψαντος. N. G. τετνφώς, τετνφνΐα, τετυφότος, τετνφνίας, τετνφός, τετνφότος, Second Aorist, having struck. N. G. τνπών, τνποϋσα, τυπόντος, τυπούσης, τύπον, τυπόντος. Second Future, going to strike. N. G. τυπών, τνποϋσα , τυπονντος, τυπούσης, τυποϋν, τυποϋντος. SECOND CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MODE. S ing. Dual. Plur. Pres. πλεκ- ω, εις, ει, ετον, ετον, ομεν, ετε, ουσι. i mp « £πλε«- ον, Χ, h ετον, Ιτην, ομεν, ετε, ον. 1st F. πλε|- ω, W, ει, ετον, ετον, ομεν, ετε, ονσι. 1st A. έηλε£- α, ας, h &TOV, άτην, αμεν, ατε, αν. Perf. πέπλεχ- α, «ί> ε, ατον, ατον, αμεν, ατε, άσι. Plup. iiunXiv- ειν, εις, ει, ειτον, είτην, ειμεν, εηε, εισαν. 2d A. ίπΜκ- ον, κ, h ετον, (την, ομεν, ετε, ον. 2dF. ηλακ' ω, εις, ει, εϊτον, ειτον, ουμεν, είτε, οΒ« IMPERATIVE MODE. Pres. 1st Α. Perf. 2d Α. Sing. π\έκ- π\εξ• πίττλεχ- π\άκ• Dual. Plur. (τω, ετον, έτων, ετε, (τωσαν. αΤω, ατον, άτων, &τε, άτωσαν. έτω. ετον, (των, ετε, ίτωσαν. ίτω, ετον, (των, ετε, (τωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. Sing. Dual. Plur. Pres. Ίΐλέκ- οιμι, οις, οι, OtTOV, οίτην, οιμεν, οιτε, οι εν 1st F. ηλίξ- οιμί, οις, οι, OITOV, οίτην, οιμεν, οιτε. οιεν 1st Α. ηλίζ- αιμι, αις, αι, αιτον, αίτην, αιμεν, αιτε, αιεν Perf. πεπλ/χ- οιμι, οις, οι, οιτον, οίτην, οιμεν, οιτε, υιεν 2d Α. πλακ- οιμι, οις, οι, οιτον, οίτην, οιμεν, οιτε, οιεν. 2dF. πλακ- οΊμΙ, οΐς, οΐ, οιτον, οίτην. οΐμεν, οΓτβ, 015V CONJUGATION OF THE ACTIVE VOICE. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Sing. Dual. Plur. Pres. π\έκ- ω, >β> ν> ητον, ητον, ωμεν, ητε, ω σι 1st A. πλί*- ω, &J ν> ητον, ητον, ■Ομεν, ητε, ωσι Perf. πνπλέχ- ω, VS> ν> ητον, ητον, ωμεν, ητε, ωσι 2d A. πλα'κ- ω, Ρί> ν, ντον, ητον, ωμεν, ητε, ωσι INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pres. πλέκειν. Pres. πλέκ- ων, ονσα, ον. IstF. πλεξειν. IstF. ττλε£- ων, ούσα, ον• 1st Α. πλέξαι. 1st Α. π\έζ- ας, άσα, αν. Perf. η ε πλέχε vat. Perf. πεπλεχ- ως, via, 6ς. 2d Α. ηλακεΐν. 2d Α. πλακ- ων, ούσα, όν. 2dF. ηλακεΐν. 2dF. πλακ- ων, ούσα, ο£ν THIRD CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MODE. Pres. Imp. IstF. 1st A. Perf. Plup. 2d A. 2dF. Sing. Dual. Plur. κείθ- ω, εις, ει, ετον, ετον, ομεν, ετε, ουσι. επειθ- ον, «> ε, ετον, έτην, ομεν, ετε, ον. πείσ- ω, εις, ει, ετον, ετον, ομεν, ετε, ουσι εηεισ- α > «ί, h ατον, άτην, αμεν, ατε, αν. πέπεικ- <*, ας, h α το ν, ατον, αμεν, ατε, άσι. επεπείκ- ειν, εις, ει, ειτον, είτην, εψεν, είτε, ει σα* επϊθ- ον, ες, ε, ετον, έτην, ομεν, ετε, ον. Πίθ- ω, els, εϊ, εΧτον, ειτον, ουμεν, είτε, ουσι. IMPERATIVE MODE. Sing. Dual. Plur. Pres. πεΧΘ • «> έτω, ετον, έτων, ετε, έτωσαψ. 1st Α. ηεΧσ • ον. ατω, ατον , άτων, ατε, άτωσαν. Perf. πέπεικ• ε, έτω, ετον, έτων, ετε, (τωσαν. 2d Α. πίθ- «> έτω ετον, ίτων, ετε, έ τ ωσάν. OPTATIVE MODE. Sing. Dual. Plur. Pres. πείθ• οιμί, οις, οι, οιτον, οίτην, οιμεν, otre> οιεν IstF. πείσ- οιμι, οις, οι, οιτον οίτην, οιμεν, οιτε, οιεν 1st Α. πείσ- αιμι, αις, αι, αιτον α'ιτην, αιμεν, αιτε, αιεν Perf. πετχείκ- οιμι, οις, οι, οιτον j οίτην, οιμεν, οιτε, οιεν 2d Α. Τΐίθ- Of/£, οις, οι, OITOV) οίτην, οιμεν, οιτε, οιεν 2dF. πιθ- οΧμι, οΧς, οΧ, οΧτον, οίτην, οΧμεν, οΧτε, oXsv 7U VERB. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Sing. Dual. Plur. Pres. 1st A. πείθ- ω, Π?> Π» ητον, ητον, ωμεν, ητε, ωσι. πείσ- ω, }Kt 0> ητον, ητον, ωμεν, ντε, ωσι Perf. πεπείκ ω, W> ί/> ητον, ητον, ωμεν, ητε, ωσι 2d A. πίθ- ω, Jfi> Ρ> ητον, ητον, ωμεν, ητε, ωσι INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pres. πείθειν. Pres. ττείθ- ων, ονσα, OV. 1st F. ■πείσειν. IstF. πείσ- ων, ούσα, ον. 1st Λ. n εΐσαι. 1st Α. πείσ- ας, άσα, αν. Perf. πεπεικέναι. Perf. πεπεικ- ως, νια, ός. 2d Α. πιθεΧν. 2d Α. 7110- ων, ονσα, όν. 2dF. ιΐιθεΧν. 2dF. πιθ- ων, ούσα, ουν. FOURTH CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MODE. Sing. Dual. Plur. Pres. σπείρ- εσπειρ- ω, εις, ει, ετον, ετον, ομεν, ετε, ουσι. Imp. ον, «> ε, ετον } έτην, ομεν, ετε, ον. 1st F. σπερ- ω, εις, εΧ, εϊτον, εΊτον, ουμεν, εΐτε, οϋσι. 1st A. εσπειρ- α, ας, β, ατον, άτην, αμεν, ατε, αν. Perf. εσπαρκ- α, ας, ε, ατον, ατον, αμεν, ατε, άσι. Plup. εσπάρκ- ειν, εις, ει, ειτον, είτην, ειμεν, είτε, εισαν. 2d A. εσπ αρ- ον, Χ, ε, ετον, έτην, ομεν, ετε, ον. 2dF. σπαρ- ω, εΧς, ει, εΧτον, εϊτον, ουμεν, εΐτε, ουσι. IMPERATIVE MODE. Pres. 1st Α. Perf. 2d Α. Sing. Dual. Ρ lur. σττεΤρ- ε, έτω, ετον, έτων, ετε, έτωσαν. σπεϊρ- *ν, ατω, ατον, ότων, ατε, άτωσαν. εσπαρκ• ε, έτω, ετον, έτων, ετε, έτωσαν. σπάρ- ε, έτω, ετον, έτων, ετε, ίτωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. Sing. Dual. Plur. Pres. σπείρ- οιμί, οις, οι, οιτον, οίτην, οιμεν, οιτε, οιεν. IstF. όπερ- οΧμι, οΧς, οΧ, οΧτον, οίτην, οΧμεν, οΧτε, οΧεν. 1st Α. σπείρ- αιμι, αις, αϊ, αιτον, αΐτην, αιμεν, αιτε, αιεν. Perf. εσπαρκ- οιμι, οις, οι, οιτον, οίτην, οιμεν, οιτε, οιεν. 2d Α. σπάρ- οιμι, οις, οι, OITOV, οίτην, οιμεν, οιτε, οιεν. 2dF. σπαρ- οιμι, οΧς, οι, οΧτον, οίτην, οΧμεν, οΧτε, οΧεν. AUGMENT. 71 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Siiu Pres. σπείρ- lst Α. σπείρ- Perf. Ισηάρκ- 2d Α. σπάρ- Dual. US, v> ητον, ητυν, J?i; Ih ητον, ητον, us. lb ητον, ητον, PSj to ητον, ητον, INFINITIVE. Pres. 1st F. 1st Α. Perf. 2d Α. 2dF. σπείρειν. σπερεϊν. σπεΐραι. Ισπαρκεναι. σηαρεϊν, σπαρέϊν. Pres. IstF. 1st Α. Perf. 2d Α. 2dF. ωμεν, ωμεν, ωμεν, ωμεν, PARTICIPLE. Plur. ητε, ωσι. ητε, ωσι. ητε, ωσι. ητε, ωσι. σπείρ- ων, σπερ' ων, σπείρ- ας, Ισπαρκ- ως, σπαρ• ων, σπαρ- ων, ονσα, ούσα, άσα, via, ούσα, 6ν. ούσα, ουν. ον. ουν. αν. 6ς. OBSERVATIONS. 1. Those tenses whose first person plural ends in μεν, viz. all tenses of the active, the aorists of the passive, and the perfect and pluperfect of the middle voices, have no first person dual. 2. The imperfect, pluperfect, and aorists of the indicative, and all the tenses of the optative, in all the voices, form the second person dual in ov, and the third in ην. The remaining tenses of the indicative, and all those of the subjunctive, form the third person dual like the second, and the tjiird person plural in σι or ται. 3. In verbs of the fourth conjugation, and in the Attic and Doric dialects, the first future is the same as the second, when there is no change in the penultima. 4. In the ancient Greek writers, the more common form of the pluper- fect is ίτετϋφε-σαν instead of ίτετνφεισαν 5. The Attics frequently use the iEolic form of the first aorist, but only in the second and third person singular, and the third plural. S. τίψεια, τίψειας, τίψειε, D. τυψείατον, τυφειάτην, Ρ. τνψείαμεν, τυψείστε, τύψειαν. 6. The Greek tenses cannot be expressed with much precision in English, their use and signification depending on the particles joined with them. £, AUGMENT. Verbs are augmented in the imperfect and aorists of the indicative, and in the perfect, pluperfect, and paulo-post-future of all the modes. The augment is of two kinds ; the syllabic, when the verb begins with a consonant; the temporal, when it begins with a vowel. Obs. The syllabic is so called because it adds a syllable to the word ; the temporal, because it increases the time or quantity of the syllable. 72 VERB. I. The syllabic augment is ε prefixed to the imper- fect and aorists ; as, τνπτω, ετυπτον, έτυψα, ετνπον. If the verb begin with ρ, this letter is doubled after the augment ; as, ρίπτω, ερριπτον, to throw : except among the poets, where it sometimes remains sin- gle ; as, ράπτω, εραπτον, to sew. In the perfect, pluperfect, and paulo-post-future, the first consonant of the verb is repeated before the syllabic augment, which is called the redupli- cation ; as, τνπτω, τέτνφα • and the pluperfect also prefixes the syllabic augment to the reduplication ; as, ετετνφειν. If the verb begin with a rough mute, in the reduplication the corresponding smooth is used ; as, φιλέω, πεψίληκα, to love. Exc. 1. Verbs beginning with a double consonant, with σ joined to a mute, or with γν, do not receive the reduplication, but the syllabic augment only ; as, ζητέω, έζήτηκα, to seek ; ψάλλω, εψαλκα, to play ; σπείρω, εσπαρκα, to sow ; γνωρίζω, έγνώοϊκα, to know. So verbs beginning with ρ, when ρ is doubled after the augment; as, ρίπτω, ερρϊφα, to throw. So also βλάπτω, γρηγορέω, καθαρίζω, κτείνω, κτίζω, πτερόω, πτύσσω, πτίσσω, πτοέω, πτύσσω, φ&είρω. Exc. 2. The following verbs sometimes take the reduplica- tion, and sometimes neglect it: βλαστάνω, βλακεύω, βουλεύω, γλύφω, γλωττίζω, -&λάω } κρύπτω, προσπατταλεύω. Also κτάομαι, κέκτημαι and εκτημαν. II. In verbs beginning with α, ε, ο, αϊ, αν, οι, the temporal augment changes a and ε into η, and ο into ω, subscribing the ι of the diphthongs ; as, άκονω, τμονον, to hear ; ελπίζω, ηλπιζον, to hope ; ονομάζω, ώνόμαζον, to name; αίρω, τ\ρον, to lift up; ανξω, ηνξον, to increase ; οίκέω, ωκεον, to dwell. The temporal augment remains the same in all the augmented tenses. AUGMENT. 73 Exc. 1. The compounds of οΪιό;, wine, οίωνδς, bird, and οϊ'αξ, rudder, omit the augment ; as, οίνίζω, οίνοποτάζω, οΐνόω, οίνοχοέω, (though the two last sometimes change οι into ω) • οϊωνίζομαι, οίωνοσκοπέω, οίωνοπολέω • οίακίζω, οίακονομέω, ola- κοστροφέω. To these add ά'ω, άΐω, άη&έσσω, άηδίζομαι. Also ερμηνεύω, οΐόομαι, οίκουρέω, οΐμάω, οϊστράω, οΐμώζω, οΐδάνω, which are sometimes augmented, particularly οίμώζω. Exc. 2. The following verbs change ε into ει • έάω, εζω, έ&Ιζω, ε&ω, ελίσσω, έλκε'ω, ϊλκίζω, ελκύω, έλκω, ελω, έπομαι , επω (which retains the augment through all the modes), εργάζομαι, ερέω, ερπίζω, ερπύζω, έρπω, έρύω } εστήκω, εστιάω, εχω, εω, ε'ω, to go ; as, 'έχω, εΤχον, to have. Exc. 3. Verbs beginning with εο change ο into ω • as, εορτάζω, εώρταζον, to feast. In the same manner the pluper- fects έώλπειν, έώργειν, έωκειν, are formed from the Attic perfects ϊολπα, εοργ.α, εοικα, Obs. Η, ω, ι, ν, ει, ευ, ου } remain unchanged at the begin- ning of a word, t and υ short becoming long in the tenses susceptible of augmentation; as, ηχέω } %\χεον, to echo, sound; 'ϊκετεύω, Ίκέτευσα, to supplicate. But ώ&έω, to push, ωνέομαι, to buy, and ούρέω, take the syllabic augment ; thus, έώ&εον, έωνεόμην, έούρεον. Exceptions by the Attic Dialect. 1. The diphthongs ει and ευ are changed into fl and ηυ re- spectively, and the syllabic augment ε into η • as, εΙκάζω, γκαζόν, to conjecture; εΐδέω, είδήκειν, by sync, εϊ'δειν, Att. τ ί δειν ί to know; εϋχομαι, ηύχόμην } to pray ; μέλλω, ^μέλλον , to be about to do any thing. 2. The syllabic augment is used for the temporal, or pre- fixed to it, and takes the breathing of the present ; as, άγω, έ'α£α for ή£α, to break; άλόω } to take; εάλωκα for ηλωκα, to be taken ; %πω, εειπον for είπον, to say ; δράω, έώρακα for ωρακα, to see ; εί'κω, εο^κα for οΐκα } to be like. 3. In verbs beginning with a short, ε, or o, the two first letters of the present are prefixed to the perfect ; as, άγείρω, τ?\γερκα } άγηγερκα, to collect; έμέω, %\μεκα, έμήμεκα, to vomit; όρύττω, ωρϋχα, όρώρυχα, to dig; οζω, ωδα, δδωδα, to smell. Also in one beginning with η, which is changed into ε, because this redu- plication is always short ; as, ημύω, τ^μϋκα, έμήμυκα, to bend, incline, fall. If the perfect thus augmented have more than three syllables, the long vowel of the third is changed into the corresponding 7 74 VERB. short one ; as, άλή&ω, ψηκα, άλήλε κα, to grind; αλείφω, ^λειφα, άλήλϊφα, to anoint; ίλεύ&ω, ψ.εν&α, έλήλν&α, to come; ετοιμάζω, ήτοίμάκα, ετητόμάκα, to make ready ; ακούω, ^κουα, άκήκοα, to hear. But έρείδω, to prop, makes %\ρεικα, έρήρεικα, to distin- guish it from έρήρϊκα, of the verb ερίζω, to contend. Obs. The pluperfect of these forms admits a temporal augment ; as, ακήκοα, ηκηκόειν. Except Ιληλΰ&ειν, from ίλήλύ&α. 4. The reduplications of the perfect λε and με are changed into ει • as, λήβω, εΐληφα, to take ; μείρομαι, to receive for one's share, εϊμαρται, it is fated. Exceptions by the Ionic Dialect. 1. The reduplication of the perfect is used in the second aorist ad other tenses, and continues through all the modes ; as, ττε«/#ω, πέπΧ&ον for ϊπΧϋ-ον, πεπϊχτεϊν for πι&εϊν, to persuade ; κλϋμι, κέκλν&ι for κλυ&ι, to hear ; πι&έω, πεπίχτήσω for πι&ήσω, to persuade, to trust, to obey. 2. The augment is omitted, as is also the reduplication of the perfect ; as, λάβε for έλαβε, from λήβω, to take ; βεβρώκει for έβεβρώκει, from βρύο), to eat; εδεκτο for έδέδεκτο, from δέχομαι, to receive ; λύτο for έκλυτο, from λύω, to hose. 3. The two first letters of the present are sometimes pre- fixed to the aorists, after the augment has been removed ; as, άραρον, formed from άρον for ηρον, from άρω, to fit. THE AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERES. I. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the augment between the preposition and the verb ; as, προσφέρω, προοέφερον, to bring to. Exc. 1. The following verbs compounded with prepositions take the augment at the beginning. 1. Such as have the sig- nification of their simples ; as, άμφιένννμι, έναντιύομαι, ένέπω, κα&έζομαι, κά&ημαι, &lc. 2. Some whose simples are not in use ; as, άμφισβητέω, άντιδϊκέω, &,c. ; but many of these receive it in the middle ; as, απολαύω, εγκωμιάζω, έγχειρέω, έπικονρέω^ έπιτηδεύω, προφητεύω, &C. 3. ''Λμπέχομαι and άμπίσχομαι. Exc. 2. Some compounds take the augment at the beginning or in the middle ; as, καχτεύδω, προ&νμέομαι, έγγυάω, έμπολάω, &c. Others take it at the beginning and in the middle ; as, ανέχομαι, άνορχτύο), ένοχλέο), παροινέο), διακονέο), διαπάα), &C. Several in the beginning, middle, or both; as, ανοίγω, άντιβολέω. FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 75 Obs. 1. A preposition in composition before a vowel loses the final vowel; as, επέχω, to restrain, for έπιέχω. Except περί and πρό, and sometimes άμφί • as, περι4&ηκα 9 not περέ&ηκα, from περιτί&ημι, to place around. In nob the ο is often con- tracted with the syllabic augment into ου - as, προϋλεγε for προέλεγε, from προλέγω, to foretell. If the initial vowel of tne verb have a rough breathing, the smooth π and τ of the prepo- sition are changed into φ and ■■& ■ as, άφα^έω, ίο ta&e away, from άπα and αίρέω. Obs. 2. '£> and σι>, which change ν before a consonant, resume it before a vowel ; as, εγγράφω, ενέγράφον, to inscribe. Σύν always drops the ν before ζ, and sometimes before σ • as, συζητάω j to discuss, to examine. Obs. 3. If the verb begin with ρ, and the preposition end with a vowel, ρ is doubled ; as, έπιρρέω, to floiv upon. II. Verbs compounded with any other part of speech take the augment at the beginning ; as, αντομολέω, ηντομόλεον, to desert ; φιλοοοφέω, εφιλοσόφεον, to philosophize ; δνατϋχέω, έδυστν- χησε, to be unfortunate. «^C Exc. Compounds of ευ and δνς take the augment in the middle, when these particles are followed by a vowel or diph- thong susceptible of augmentation ; as, ενεργετέω, εύηογέτησε, to benefit. FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. ^/ Imperfect, The imperfect is formed from the present, by changing to into ov, and prefixing the augment ; as, τνπτο), έχνπτον. First Future. The first future is formed from the present, by changing the last syllable, in the 1st conjugation, into \\>ω • as, τνπτω, τνψω • in the 2d — into ξω • as, λέγω, λέξω • in the 3d — into οω • as, -πω, τίβω • and, in the 4th conjugation, by circumflexing the last syllable, and shortening the penultima ; as, ψάλλω, γ άλω. 76 VERB. Obs. 1. The penultima is shortened by dropping the second consonant, and the second vowel of the diphthong, and shortening the doubtful vowel ; as, σπείρω, απεςιώ • κρίνω, κρΧνώ, to judge. Obs. 2. Some verbs in σσω or ττω are of the third conjuga- tion, making the future in σω • as, ίμάσσω, πάσσω, πλάσσω, &,c. Obs. 3. Some verbs in ζω are of the second conjugation, making the future in ξω • as, αΐάζω, αλαλάζω, άλαπάζω, γρύζω, δαΐζω, έναρίζω, κράζω, οίμώζω, ολολύζω, πελεμίζω, στάζω, στενάζω στηρίζω, στίζω, στυφελίζω, σφύζω, τρίζω, &c. A few in γξω • as, κλάζω, πλάζω. Some make the future in ξω and σω • as, αρπάζω, βάζω, βρίζω, έγγυαλίζω, παίζω, &c. One in γξω and σω • as, σαλπίζω. Verbs in αω, εω, and οω, change a and ε into η, and ο into ω • as, τιμάω, τιμήσω, to honor ; φιλέω, φιλήσω, to love; χουσόω, χρυσώσω, to gild. Exc. 1. Verbs in λαω and ραω pure, with those in αω pre- ceded by ε or t, retain a. To these add άκροάομαι, δικάω, διφάω, S -λάω, κλάω, μάω, μαιμάω, νάω, πάω, σπάω, φ&άω, φλάω, with verbs from which others in αννυω, αννυμν, and ασκώ are formed ; as, πετάω, whence πεταννύω, πετάνννμν • δράω, whence διδράσκω. The following have a and η * άράομαι, άλοάω, άνιάω, άφάω, Ιλάω, κνάω, κρεμάω, μηκάω, μοιράομαι, πελάω, πεινάω, πειράω, περάω. Exc. 2. Some verbs in εω retain θ • as, αίσχέω, άλέω, άρκέω, έμέο), εω, ζέω, κέω, νεικέω, ξέω, όλέω, τελεω, τρέω, with verbs from which others in εννυω, ενννμι, and βσκω are formed; as, άμφιέω, άμφιεννύω, άμφιέννϋμι ' άρέω, αρέσκω. The following have ε and η • αΐδέομαν, αΐνέω, άκέομαι, άχ&έο- uai, βδέω, γαμέω, κηδέω, κορέω ) κοτέω, μαχέομαι, όζέω, πο&έω, πονέω, σβέω, στερέω, φορέω. Λέω makes δήσω, δέδεκα, and καλέω, καλέσω, κεκάληκα, by syncope κέκληκα. The following make the future in ευσω• #εω, πλέω, πνέω, νέω, ρέω, χέω. Καίω and κλαίω make αυσω. Exc. 3. Verbs in οω not derived from nouns retain the ο • as, άρόω, όμόω, υνόω, 6lc. The Attics drop a from the futures in ασω, εσω, oao), and ιοω, making a contraction in the three former, but only circumflexing the ω in the latter ; FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 77 as, οκεδώ for οχεδάοω, καλώ for καλέσω, όμώ for όμόσω, νομϊώ for νομϊοω. Many baryton verbs frequently have their futures in ηοω, by the Attic and Ionic dialects ; as, νεμήβω from νέμω, τυπτήαω from τνπτω. The iEolics form the futures in λω and ρω of the fourth conjugation by inserting a before ω • as, κελλω, κε'λσω, to land ; δρω, δροω, to excite. The futures of έχω, τρέφω, τρέχω, and τνψω, change the smooth of the first syllable into a rough breathing ; thus, έξω, #ρε'ψω, #ρε'ξω, &νψω. .V First Aorist. The first aorist is formed from the first future, by changing ω into a, and prefixing the augment ; as, τι) ψ ω, έτυψα. The first aorist of the fourth conjugation length- ens the short penultima of the first future ; a is changed into η, and ε into ει • as, κρίνω, έκρινα • γ άλω, 'έψηλα • οπερώ, έοπειρα. Some verbs, how- ever, which have at in the present, take a long a in the first aorist ; as, περαίνω, περάνω, επέράνα, to finish. Είπα and ηνεγκα are formed from the present ; ηκα, έ&ηκα, έδωκα, from the perfect. The use of the last three is rarely extended beyond the indica- tive. Some drop the a of the future ; as, ακεω or ακε^ί, ηκεια • άλενω, 7]λενα καίω or κάω, έκηα • κεω or κε^ω, εκεια • οενω, έαενα χέο), έχεα and έχενα, 7* \ 78 VERB. Perfect, The perfect is formed from the first future, by prefixing the reduplication, and changing, in the 1st conjugation, -ψω into φα • as, τύψω, τέτνψα • in the 2d — ξ ω into χα • as, λέξω, λέλεχα • in the 3d — σω into κα • as, τίσω, τέτϊκα • in the 4th — ώ into κα, and μώ into μηκα • as, ψαλώ, έψαλκα • τε,αώ, τετέμηκα. Obs. 1. The perfect in μ^κα presupposes a verb in κ «ω, formed from the future in ^«5 • as, τεμώ, τεμέω, whence τεμ^οω, τετέμηκα. Obs. 2. In some perfects a syncope takes place ; as, δίδμψκα for δεδίμηκα, from δΐμω, to build. Dissyllables in λω, νω, ρω, change the ε of the future into a • as, στέλλω, στελώ, εσταλκα, to send ; τείνω, τενώ, τέτάκα, to stretch. Dissyllables in εινω, ινω, and ννω, drop the ν • as, κρίνω, κρίνω, κέκρϊκα • πλύνω, πλυνώ, πέπλνκα, to ivash. Other verbs in ν ω change ν into γ • as, (ραίνω, φανώ, πέφαγκα • μολϋνω, μολύνω, μεμόλυγκα, to pollute. In dissyllables of the first and second conjugation the Attics change ε into ο • as, στρέψω, εστροψα, to turn. So ένέκω, ένηνοχα, to bear. In some verbs of the third conjugation the Ionians drop κ, and shorten the preceding vowel, when it happens to be long ; as, βάω, βέβηκα, βέβάα, to go ; γάω, γέγηκα, γέγάα, to be born. In the participle the long vowel often remains ; as, &νάω, τέ&νψ,α, τεύνηώς, to die. Pluperfect. The pluperfect is formed from the perfect by changing a into ειν, and prefixing the augment, if there be a reduplication ; as, τέτνψα, έτετνψειν • FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. νχω, to cool, make εσμνγον and εψνγον • but φρίσσω, to shudder, makes εφρϊκον. 2. In vowels, by the change of η, ω, at, αν, into ά, ει into t, and εν into ν • as, ληβω, ελάβον, to take ; τρώγω, ετράγον, to eat ; καίω, εκάον, to burn ; πάνω, επάον, to cause to cease ; λείπω, ελϊπον, to leave ; φενγν), εφνγον, to fly. But πλήσσω, to strike, makes επλάγον and επληγον. Dissyllables of the fourth conjugation change ει into a - polysyllables, into ε • as, σπείρω, εσπάρον • άγείρω, ηγερον, to assemble. so VERB. In dissyllables, ε preceded or followed by a liquid is changed into a • as, πλέχω, επλάχον • otqco, εδ ά- ρον, to flay. But βλέπω, to see, λέγω, to say, and φλέγω, to burn, retain the ε. Τέμνω, to cut, makes ετάμον and ετεμον. Verbs in αω and εω change these terminations into ov • as, μυκάω, εμϋχον, to bellow ; κτυπέω, εχτνπον, to sound, to roar. Obs. 1. In some verbs the penultima of the second aorist necessarily re- mains long, particularly in dissyllables which take the temporal augment ; as, άδω, ijdov, to sing. So also where the penultima is long by position ; as, μάρπτω, εμαρπον, to seize. But in many of these a transposition takes place to preserve the analogy ; thus, πϊρΰω, to destroy, makes ίπράΰον in poetry ; δερκω, to see, to regard, εδρακον. Obs. 2. The following verbs have no second aorist : polysyllables in ζω and οσω ' verbs in αω and εω after a vowel ; verbs in οω ■ polysyllables in αινώ, ννω, ανω, ευω, ουω, νω, υιω, and many others ; ηκοον from ακούω being poetical. Second Future. The second future is formed from the second aorist by changing ov into ω circumflexed, and drop- ping the augment ; as, ετνπον, τνπω. PASSIVE VOICE. SYNOPSIS OP THE MODES AND TENSES OF THE First Conjugation. Indie. Imper. Pres. τύπτομαι τύητου Imp. Ιτυπτόμην Perf. τέτνμμαι τέτνψο E' up ~ ίτετύμμην P.p.F. τετύψομαί 1st A. έτύφθην τίφθητι 1st F. τυφθήσομαι 2d A. ετίπην τϋπηΒι 2dF. τυπήσομαι Optat. τυπτοίμην τετυμμένος εϊην τετυψοίμην τυφθείην τνφθησοίμην τυπείην τνπησοίμην Subjunc. τίπτωμαι τετυμμένος ώ τυφοω τυπΰ Ιηίΐη. τύπτεσθαι τετίφθαι τετίψεσθαι τνφθηναι τνφθήσεσθαι τυπήναι τυηήσεσθαι Part. τνητόμενος τετνμμένος τετνύόμενος τνφθεις τυφθηαόαίνοί τνηεϊς τυπησόμενος CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 81 Second Conjugation. Indie. Imper. Optat. Subjunc. Infin. Part. Pres. 'πΧέκομαι πΧίκου πΧ εκοίμην πΧέκωμαι πΧεκεσθαι » Χεκόμενος Imp. .επΧεκόμην Perf. ,πέπΧεγμαι πέπΧεξο πεπΧεγμενος εΐην πεπΧεγμένος ω πεπΧέχθαι πεπΧεγμένος Piup. ίπ*-λέγμην P. ρ F. πεπΧέζομαι πεπΧεζ,οίμην πεπΧέζεσθαι πεπΧεξόμενος 1st A. ίπΧέχθην πΧεγθητι πΧε-χθείην πΧεχθώ πΧεχθηναι πΧεχθείς IstF. πΧεχθήσομαι πΧεχθησοίμην πΧεχθήσεσθαι πΧεγθησόμενος 2d A. επΧόκην πΧάκηθι πΧακείην πλακω πΧακηναι πΧακείς 2dF. πΧακήσομαι πΧακησυίμην πΧακήσεσθαι πΧακησόμενος Tliird Conjugation. Pres. πείθομαι πείθου πειθοίμην πείθωμαι πείθεσθαι πειθόμενος Imp. ϊπειθόμην Perf. πεπεισμαι πεπεισο πεπεισμένος εϊην πεπεισμένος ω πεπεΊσθαι πεπεισμένος Plup. Ιπεπείσμην P.p.F. πεπείσομαι πεπεισοίμην πεπείσεσθαι πεπεισόμενος 1st A. επείσθην πείσθηη πεισθείην πεισθώ πεισθήναι πεισθείς IstF. πειαθήσομαι πεισθησο'ιμην πεισθήσεσθαι πεισθησόμενος 2d A. επίθην πίθητι πιθείην πιθω πιθηναι πιθεις 2dF. πιθήσομαι πιθησοίμην πιθήσεσθαι πιθησόμενος Fourth Conjugation. Pres. σπείρομαι Imp. εσπειρόμην Perf. εσπαρμαι Plup. εσπάρμην 1st A εαπάρθην IstF. σπαρθήσομαι 2d A. εσπάρην 2dF. σπαρήσομαι σπειρου εσπαρσο σπάρθητι σπάρηθι σπειροιμην εσπαρμένος εΊην σπαρθείην σπαρθησοίμην σπαρείην σπαρησοίμην σπειρωμαι εσπαρμένος ω σπαρω σπείρεσθαι εσπάρθαι σπαρθηναι σπαρθήσεσθα σπαρηναι σπαρήσεσθαι σπειρόμενος εσπαρμένος σπ αρθείς σπαρθησδμενος σπαρεϊς σπαρησόμενος FIRST CONJUGATION. \ > INDICATIVE MODE. Present Tense, I am struck. s τύπτομαι,, τύπτί], τύπτεται, D. τυπτόμε&ον y τύπτεσ&ον, τύπτεσ&ον P. τυπτόμε&α ί τύπτεσ&ε τύπτονται. Imperfect, I was struck. s. έτυπτόμην, έτύπτου, ετύπτετο, D. έτυπτόμε&ον } έτύπτεσϋ-ον 9 έτνπτέσ&?]ν, P. έτνπτόμε&α, ίτνπτ.εσ&ε } έτύπτοντο. ft VERB. Perfect, 7" have been struck. s. D. P. τέτυμμαι, τέτνψαι, τέτνπται, τετύμμε&ον, τέτνφ&ον } τέτνφ&ον, τετύμμεϋα ) τέτυφ&ε } τετνμμένοι εϊσΐ. Pluperfect, I had been struck. s. D. P. έτετνμμην ί έτέτνψο, έτέτυπτο, ετετύμμε&ον , έτέτνφ&ον, έτετνφ&ην, έτετνμμε&α, έτέτνφ&ε } τετνμμένοι, ^σαν. Paulo-post-Future, I shall be struck. s. D. P. τετνψομαι 1 τετνψ^ τετνψεταν, τετνψόμε&ον } τετνψεσ&ον, τετνψεσ&ον 9 τετνψόμε&α, τετύψεσ&ε, τετύψονται. First Aorist, I was struck. S. D. P. έτνφ&ην, έτύφ&ης, έτύφ&η, έιύφ&ητον } έτνφ&ήτην 9 έτύφ&ημεν } έτνφ&ητε, έτύφ&ησαν. First Future, I shall be struck. S. D. P. τνφ&ήσομαι,, τνφ&ήσ-η, τνφ&ήσεται, τνφ&ησόμε&ον, τνφ&ησεσ&ον, τνφ&^σεσ&ον^ τυφ&ησόμε&α, ) τνφ&ήσεσ&ε, τνφ&ησονται. Second Aorist, I was struck. S. D. P. έτύπην, έτύπης, έτύπη, έτύπητον, έτνπήτην, έτύπημεν, έτύπητε, έτύπησαν. t / Second Future, I shall be struck. S. D. P. τυπ^σομαΐ) τυπήσ^ τνπήσεται, τυπησόμε&ον , τνπ-ήσεσ&ον t τυπήσεσ&ον, τνηησόμε&α } τνπΎ\σεσ^ε ί τυπΊ\σονται. IMPERATIVE MODE. Present, be struck. S. τνπτου, τνητέσ&ω, D. τΰπτεσ&ον, τνπτέσ&ων, P. τνητεσ&ε } τνπτέσ&ωσαν. CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.• 82 Perfect, have been struck. S. τέτνψο, τετΰφ#ω, D. τέτυφ&ον, τετνφ&ων, P. τέτνφ&ε, τετύφ&ωσαν. First Aorist, be struck. S. τνφ&ητι, τυφ&τ\τω, D. τύφ&ητον, τυφ&ήτων, P. τνφ&ητε, τυφΰήτωσαν. Second Aorist, be struck. S. τύπη&ι, τυπήτω, D. τΰπητον, τυπήτων, P. τνπητε. OPTATIVE MODE. Present, I might, fyc. be struck. S. τνπτοΐμην, τύπτοιο, τΰπτοιτο, D. Tvmolued-ov, τύπτοισ&ον, τνπτοΐσ&ην, P. τυπτοίμε&α, τύπτοισ&ε } τνπτοιντο. Perfect, I might, fyc. have been struck. S. τετυμμένος εϊ'ην, εϊης, εϊ'η, D. τετνμμένω εϊητον } είψην, Ρ. τετυμμένοι, εϊημεν, εϊ^τε, εϊησαι>. Paulo-post-Future, I mighty fyc. hereafter be struck. S. τετυψοίμην, τετνψοιο, τετύψοιτο, D. τετυψοίμε&ον, τετύψοίσ&ον, τετνψοίσ&ην % Ρ. τετνψοίμε&α, τετνψοισϋ'ε, τετνψοιντο. First Aorist, I might, fyc. be struck. S. τυφ&εΐνν, τνφ&είης, τυφ&είη, D. Ίυφχ^εΙητον } τνφϋ~εντίιτην ί Ρ τυφβ-είημεν, τνφ&είητε, τνφ&είησαν. First Future, i" might, fyc. hereafter be struck. S. τνφβ-ησοίμην , τυφ&ήσοιο, τνφ&ήσοιτο, D. τυφ&ησοίμε&ον, τνφ\^^ ι σοισϋ'ον ) τνφ&ησοίσ&ην Ρ. τυφ&ησοίμε&α, τυφ&ήσοισ&ε, τνφ&ησοιντο. 84 VERB. Second Aorist, J mighty fyc. be struck. S. τυπείην ) τυπείης, τνπείη, D. τνπείητον, τνπειψην, Ρ. τυπείημεν, τυπείητε, τυπείησαν. Second Future, 1 might, Sfc. hereafter be struck. S. τνπησοΙμην ί τνπΊ\σοιο, τνπήσοιτο, D. τυπησοίμε&ον, τνπησοισ&ον , τν7τησοίσ&ην 9 Ρ. τνπησοίμε&α, τυπήσοισ&ε , τυπησοίντο. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Present, I may be struck. S. τύπτωμαι, τύπττ], τύτΐτηται, D. τνπτώμε&ον, τίπτησ&ο> τίπτησ&ον, Ρ. τυπτώμε&α. τύπτησ&ε, τύπτωνται. Perfect, I may have been struck. S. τετνμμένος δ, ^g, -J, D. τετνμμένω ήτον, ήτον, P. τετνμμένοι (ύμεν, ^τε, δσ*. First Aorist, / may be struck. S. τυφ&ώ, rvcp&ifg, τνφ&τ[, D. τυφ&ψον ) τυφ&ψον, Ρ• τυφ&ωμεν, τυφ&ητε, τυφ&ωσί. Second Aorist, 7 may δβ struck. S. τυττώ, τνπης, zvnrf y D. τυπψον } τυττητον, P. τνπωμεν, τνπψε, τνπώσι. INFINITIVE MODE. Present, τνπτεσϋ-αι, to be struck. Perfect, τετνφ&αι, to have been struck. Paulo-post-Future, τετνψεσ&αι, to be going to be struck. First Aorist, τνφ&ψαι, to have been struck. First Future, τυφ&ήσεσ&αι, to be going to be struck. Second Aorist, τνπψαι, to have been struck. Second Future, τι/ττ^σεσθ-αί, to be going to be struck. CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 85 PARTICIPLES. Present, being struck. Ν. τυπτόμενος, τυπιομένη, G. τυπτομένου. Ν. G. Ν. G. Ν. G. Ν. G. Ν. G. τυπτομένης, τνπτόμενον } τυπτομένου, &LC. Perfect, having been struck. τετυμμένος, τετυμμένου, τετυμμένη, τετυμμένης, τετνμμένον^ τετνμμένου. Paulo-post-Future, going to be struck. τετυψόμεΐ'ος, τετυψομένη, τετυψόμενον ί τετυψομένου } τετνψομένης, τετνψομένου. First Aorist, having been struck. τνφ&είς, τυφ&εΐσα, τυφ&εν } τυφΰέντοζ, τνφ&εΐσα, τυφ&είσης ) τνφ&έντος. First Future, going to be struck. τυφ&ησόμενος, τυφΰησομενη^ τνφ&ησόμενον, τυφ&ησομένον, τνφ&ησομένης, τνψ&ησομένου. Second Aorist, having been struck. τνττείς, τυπέντοί τνπείσης, τνπεν, τυπέντος. Second Future, going to be struck. Ν. τυπησόμενος, τντνησομένη, τνπησόμενον^ G. τυηησομέρον } τυπησομένης ) τνπησομένου. SECOND CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MODE. Sing. Pres. π\έκ- ομαι, t), trai, Imp. επλεκ- 6μην, ου, ετο, Perf. πέπλε- γμαι, ξαι, κται, Plup. £πεπλέ- γμην, ζο, κτο, P. p. F. πέπλε"!- ομαι, $, εται, 1st Α. ΙπΧίχθ- ην, ης, η, 1st F. πλεχθήσ-ομαι, η, εται, 2d Α. έπλακ- ην, ης, η, 2d F. πλακήσ- ομαι, η, εται, 8 ' Dual. όμεθον, εσθον, εσθον, όμεθον, εσθον, εσθην, γμεθον, χθον, χθον, γμεθον, χθον, χθην, όμεθον, εσθον, εσθον, ητον, ήτην, όμεθον, εσθον, εσθον, ητον, ήτην, όμεθον, εσθον, εσθον, όμεθα, όμεθα, γμεθα, γμεθα, όμεθα, η μεν, όμεθα, ημεν, όμεθα, Plur. εσθε, ονται. εσθε, οντο. χθε, γμενοι είσί- χθε, πεπλε- γμένοι ήσαν. εσθε, ονται. ητε, ήσαν. εσθε, ονται. ητε, ήσαν. εσθε, ονται. VERB. IMPERATIVE MODE. Sing. Pres. πλίκ- ου, έσθω, Perf. πί'πλε- ξο, χθω, 1st Α. πλέχθ- ητι, ήτω, 2d Α. πλάκ- ηθι, ήτω, Dual. εσθον, έσθων, χθον, χθων, ητον, ήτων, ητον, ήτων, Plur. εσθε, έσθωσαν. χθε, χθωσαν. ητε, ήτωσαν. ητε, ήτωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. Sing. Pres. πλεκ- οίμην, οιο, οιτο, Perf. πέπλε- γμένος ειην, εΧης, είη, P. p. F. πεπλε|- οίμην, οιο, οιτο, 1st Α. πλεχθ- είην, είης, είη, 1st F. πΚεχθησ- οίμην, οιο, οιτο, 2d Α. πλακ- είην, είης, είη, 2d F. πλακησ- οίμην, οιο, οιτο, Dual. οίμεθον, οισθον, οίσθην, γμίνω εϊητον, εϊήτην, οίμεθον, οισθον, οίσθην, ειητον, ειήτην, οίμεθον, οισθον, οίσθην, είητον, ειήτην, οίμεθον, οισθον, οίσθην, Plur. οίμεθα, οισθε, οιντο. γμίνοι εϊημεν,εϊητε, εϊησαν• οίμεθα, οισθε, οιντο. είημεν, είητε, είησαν. οίμεθα, οισθε, οιντο. είημεν, είητε, είησαν. οίμεθα, οισθε, οιντο. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Sing. Pres. π\έκ- ωμαι, η, Perf. πέπλε- γμίνος ώ, VJ, 1st Α πλεχθ- ω, γς, 2d Α. πλακ- ω, ρ ς, ηται, ί ν> V, ώμεθον Dual. , ησθον, ησθον, /μένω tJTOV, JJTOV, ητον, ητον, ητον, ητον, Plur. ώμεθα, ησθε, ωνται γμένοι ωμεν, ή~τε, ωσι. ωμεν, ητε, ωσι. ωμεν, ητε, ωσι. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pres. π\έκεσθαι. Perf. πεπ\έχθαι. P.p.F. πεπλίξεσθαι. 1st Α. πλεχθήναι. 1st F. πλεχθήσεσθαι, 2d Α. πΧακηναι. 2d F. πΧακήσεσθαι. Pres. Perf. P.p.F. 1st Α. IstF. 2d Α. 2dF. πλεκδμεν- πεπλεγμέν- πεπλεξόμεν- πλεχθ- πλεχθησόμεν- πλακ- πλακησόμεν- ος, η, ον. ος, η, ον. ος, η, ον. εις, εϊσα, iv. ος, η, ον. εις, εϊσα, iv. ος, η, ον. THIRD CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MODE. Pres. Imp. Perf. Sing πείθ- ίπειθ- πέπει- ομαι, ομην, σμαι, V? ου, σαι, εται, ετο, σται, όμεθον, όμεθον, σμεθον, Dual. εσθον, εσθον, εσθον, έσθην, σθον, σθον, όμεθα, όμεθα, σμεθα, Plur. εσθε, εσθε, σθε, ονται. οντο. σμένοι Plup. P. p. F. ίπεπεί- πεπείσ- σμην, ομαι, σο, V? στο, εται, σμεθον, όμεθον, σθον, σθην, εσθον, εσθον, σμεθα, όμεθα, σθε, πεπει- σμένοι ϊ}σσν εσθε) ονται 1st A. 1st F. Ιπείσθ- πεισθήσ• ην, ομαι, VS, ν> V, εται, όμεθον, ητον, ήτην, εσθον, εσθον, ημεν, όαεθα, ητε, εσθε, ήσαν. ονται. 2d A. 2d r. πιθήσ ην, ομαι, εται, όμεθον, ητον, ήτην, εσθον, εσθον, ημεν, όμεθα, ητε, εαθε, ήσαν. ονται. CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 87 IMPERATIVE MODE. Sing. Pres. πείθ- ου, έσθω, Perf. πέπει- σο, σθω, 1st Α. πείσθ- ητι, ήτω, 2d Α πίθ- ητι, ήτω, Dual. εσθον, έσθων, σθον, σθων, ητον, ήτων, ητον, ήτων, Plur. εσθε, έσθωσαν. σθε, σθωσαν. ητε, ήτωσαν. ητε, ήτωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. Pres. πειθ- οίμην, οιο, οιτο, Perf. πεπει- σμένος είην, εΧης, είη, P. p. F. πεπεισ- οίμην, οιο, οιτο, 1st Α. πεισθ- είην, είης, είη, 1st F. πεισθησ- οίμην, οιο, οιτο, 2d Α. πιθ- είην, είης, είη, 2d F. πιθησ~ οίμην, οιο, οιτο, Dual. οίμεθον, οισθον, οίσθην, σμίνω εϊητον, εΐήτην, οίμεθον, οισθον, οίσθην, είητον, ειήτην, οίμεθον, οισθον, οίσθην, είητον, ειήτην, οίμεθον, οισθον, οίσθην, Plur. οίμεθα, οισθε, οίντο, σμίνοι εϊημεν, είητε, εΐίησαν. οίμεθα, οισθε, οιντο. είημεν, είητε, είησαν. οίμεθα, οισθε, οιντο. είημην, είητε, είησαν. οίμεθα, οισθε, οιντο. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Sing•. Dual. Plur. Pres. τιε'ιθ• ωμαι, ji, ηται, ώμεθον, ησθον, ησθον, ώμεθα, ησθε, ωνται Perf. πεπει- σμένος σμένω σμίνοι ύ> flff, ( }}τον, ή~τον, ωμεν, η*τε. 3>σι. 1st Α. κεισθ- ω, ]fff, V, ητον, ήτοι . ωμεν, ητε, ωσι. 2d Α. πιθ- ώ, is, if ητον, ητον, ωμεν, ητε, ωσι. INFINITIVE. PARTIC IPLE. Pres. πείθεσθαι. ' Pres. πειθδμεν• ος, η, ον. Perf. πεπεΊσθαι. Perf. πειχεισμίν- ος, η, ον. P. p. F πεπείσεσθαι. Ρ. p. F. πεπεισόμεν ος, η, ον. 1st A. τιεισθηναι. 1st Α. πεισθ- εις, εισα, έν. IstF. πεισθήσεσθαι. 1st F. πεισθησόμεν - ος, η, ον. 2d A. ■πιθήναι. 2d Α. πιθ- εις, εΊσα, έν. 2dF. πιθήσεσθαι. 2d F. πιθησδμεν- ος, η, ον. FOURTH CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MODE. Sing. Pres. σιτείρ- ομαι, jj, εται, Imp. έσπειρ- 6μην, ου, ετο, Perf. εσπαρ- μαι, σαι, ται, Plup. εσπάρ• μην, σο, το, 1st Α. εσπάρθ- ην, ης, η, 1st F. σπαρθήσ- ομαι, η, εται, 2d Α. ίσπάρ- ην, ης, η, 2d F. σπαρήσ- ομαι, ρ, εται, Dual. δμεθον, εσθον, εσθον, δμεθον, εσθον, έσθην, μεθον, σθον, σθον, μεθον, σθον, σθην, ητον, ήτην, δμεθον, εσθον, εσθον, ητον, ήτην, δμεθον, εσθον, εσθον, Plur. δμεθα, εσθε, ονται. δμεθα, εσθε, οντο. μέθα, σθε, μένοι εισί. μέθα, σθε, εσπαρ' μένοι 7/σαν. ητε, ήσαν. εσθε, ονται. ημεν, δμεθα WWf ητε, ήσαν. δμεθα, εσθε, ονται. 88 VERB. IMPERATIVE MODE. Sing. Pres. σπείρ- ov, έσθω; 1 Perf. εσπαρ- σο, σθω, 1st Α. σπάρθ- ητι, ήτω, 2d Α. σπάρ- ηθι, ήτω, Dual. εσθον, έσθων, σθον, σθων, ητον, ήτων, Plur. εσθε, έσθωσαν. σθε, σθωσαν. ητε, ήτωσαν. ητον, ήτων, ητε, ήτωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE, Sin< Pres. σπειρ- οίμην, οιο, οιτο, Perf. εσπαρ- μένος είην, εΐης, εϊη, 1st Α. σπαρθ- είην, είης, είη, 1st F. σπαρθησ- οίμην, οιο, οιτο, 2d Α. σπαρ- είην, είης, είη, 2d F. σπαρησ- οίμην, οιο, οιτο, Dual. οίμεθον, οισθον, οίσθην, μένω εΐητον, εΐήτην, είητον, ειήτην, οίμεθον, οισθον, οίσθην, είητον, ειήτην, οίμεθον, οισθον, οίσθην, Plur. οίμεθα, οισθε, κ'ΐντο. μένοι εΤίημεν, ειητε, εΐησαν είημεν, ειητε, εΐησαν, οίμεθα, οισθε, οιντο. είημεν, είητε, είησαν. οίμεθα, οισθε, οιντο. Sing•. Pres. σπε'ιρ- ωμαι, η, Perf. εσπαρ- μένος 1st Α. σπαρθ• ω, $ς, 2d Α. σπαρ- ω, ης, SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Dual. ώμεθον, ησθον, ησθον, μένω Vj η* τον, %τον, Vj ητον, ητον, V> ητον, ητον, Plur. ώμεθα, ησθε, ωνταχ. μένοι ω μεν, η*τε, ωσι. ώμεν, ητε, ωσι. ώμεν, ητε, ωσι. INFINITIVE. Pres. Perf. 1st Α. IstF. 2d Α. 2dF. σπείρεσθαι. έσπάρθαι. σπαρθηναι. σπαρθήσεσθαι. σπαρηναι. σπαρήσεσθαι. Pres. Perf. 1st Α. IstF. 2d Α. 2dF. PARTICIPLE. σπειρόμεν- ος, η, εσπαρμέν- ος, η, σπαρθ- εις σπαρθ ησό μεν ος, σ παρ- εις, σπαρησόμεν- ος, εισα ε"ίσα V, OBSERVATIONS. 1. The second person singular of the present indicative was originally formed in εσαι • as, τνπτομαι, τνπτεααι,τνπτεται. The Ionics dropped the a, making it τνπτεαι, which the Attics contracted into τνπτψ The Attics also contracted fat into ει instead of r l} which form remained in common use only in βονλει, οί'ει, and όψει. The same observation applies to other tenses. Thus in the imperfect Ιτνητεαο became Ιτνπτεο, and was afterwards contracted into ϊτΰτττου. So τνπτοισο became τΰπτοιο, and Ιτύ-ψαοο, Ιτνψαο, ετν-ψω. Some verbs retain the original form ; thus φάγομαι, φάγεααι. Thus also is formed the passive of verbs in μι, ϊοταμαι, 'ΐστασαι • τίΰεμαι, τ'ιβεοαι, &C. 2. If the perfect indicative end in μ αι pure, the circumlocution of the participle with ειμί is not used in the third person plural, which is then formed from the third person singular by inserting ν before ται • as, Sing.^ τετιμ-γμην, ηο, γτο, κεχρυσ-ι$μην, αϊο, ψτο, FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. 89 πΐψίλημαι, πεφ'ιλιραι, πειρίλψται. So in the pluperfect Ιπεφίλητο, Ιπεφίληντο. In this case also the perfect optative is formed by changing μαι into μην ί and subscribing ι under the preceding vowel if it be η or ω • thus, Dual. Phir. γμεθον, γσθον, γσθην, ύμεθα, ησθε, γντο. ωμεθον, ωσθον, ψσΟην, ώμεθα, (£σθε, (ρντο. If the preceding vowel be t or v, it is merely lengthened ; as, λ*λϋτο from λϊ/.νμαι. The subjunctive is formed by changing μαι with the preceding vowel into ωμαι ' thus, Sing•. Dual. | Plur. τετΊμ-ώμαι, γ,, ηται, | ώμεθον, ησθον, ησθον, | ώμεθα, ησθε, ωνται. { ωμαι, ω, ώται, ώμεθον, ωσθον, ώσθον, 1 ώμεθα, ώσθε, ωνται. κε ΧΡ υσ ~ { or jj", ηται, J ησθον, ησθον, \ ησθε. 3. The aorists are often syncopated in the third person plural of the indicative; as, ίκόσμη&εν for ϊχοαμ^βηααν. In the second person singular of the imperative they end in &ι, but in χι when another ■& precedes ; as, τνπη&ι, πί&ητι. In the plural of the optative their more common form is the Attic con- traction ειμεν, εΓτε, tier. 4. The first future subjunctive is sometimes found : thus, Sing. I Dual. I Plur. τυφθήσ-ωμαι, η, ηται, \ ώμεθον, ησθον, ησθον, \ ώμεθα, ησθε, ωνται. FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. Present. The present is formed from the present active, by changing ω into ο μαι, • as, τΰπτω, τνπτομαι. « Imperfect. The imperfect is formed from the present, "by changing μαι into μην, and prefixing the augment ; as, νίπτομαι, έτνπτόμην. Perfect. The perfect is formed from the perfect active, by changing, in the 1st. conj., (pa into μμαι • as, τέτν -cpa, τέτν-μμαι• in the 2d, χα into γμαι ■ as, λέλε-χα, Ιέλζ-γμαι • in the 3d, xa into σμαι- as, πέφρά-κα, πέφςα-ομαι ■ in the 4th, xa into μαι • as, eyal-xa, εψαλ-μαι. 90 VERB. Perfects in (pa impure change this termination into μαι • τέτερ-ψα, τέτερ-μαι. Verbs of the third conjugation in ω pure, if the penultima of the perfect be long, change xa into μαι ' as, πεψίληχα, πεφίλημαι. Also άρόω, δέω, δνω, ^ω, λύω, and πτάω, whose penultima is short. But ακούω, γνόω, ΰρανω, κελεύω, κρούω, παίω, πταίω, ραίω, σείω, and χόω, retain ο\ Some have both μαι and ομαι • as, χλείω, κε'κλε^κα, χέχλειμαυ and κέκλζι,ομαι, to shut. In verbs of the fourth conjugation, γ before κ is changed into μ, by the Attics into a • as, φαίνω, πέψαγχα, πέφαμμαί, Att. πέφαομαι. Dissyllables of the first and second conjugation, which in the perfect active change ε into o, in the perfect passive resume ε • as, κλέπτω, χέχλοψα, χέχλεμμαι, to steal. Τρέπω, τρέψω, οτρέορω, and sometimes κλε'πτω, change ε into a • as, τρέπω, τέτραμμαι, to turn. Some verbs change εν in the penultima of the perfect active into ν in the perfect passive ; as, κε'- χενχα, χέχναμαι and χέχνμαι • πέψευχα, πέφυγμαι • πέπευχα, πέπνβμαι • πέπνενχα, πέπννμαι • οέοενχα, οέονμαι • τέτευχα, τέτνγμαι. Synopsis of the Formation of the Perfect Passive in all its Persons. I. S. τέτυμμαι, τίτυψαι, τέτυπται, (for τέτνφμαι, τέτυφσαι, τέτυφται,) D. τετύμμεθον, τέτυφθον, τίτυφθον, Ρ. τετίμμεθα, τέτυφθε, τζτνμμίνοι είσί. II. S. \ί\εγμαι, λίλεξαι, λέλεκται, (for λέλεχμαι, λελεχσαι, ϊίλεχται,) D. >ελέγμεθον, Μλεχθον, \έ\ε-χθον, Ρ. λελέγμεθα, λέλεχθε, \ε\εγμίνοι είσί. III. S. κέπεισμαι, κίπεισαι, πέπεισται, (for πέπεισσαι,) D. πεπείσμεθον, πέπεισθον, πίιχεισθον, Ρ. πεπείσμεθα, πίιτεισθε, πεπεισμένοι είσί FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. 91 IV. S. πέφαμμαι, πέφανσαι, πέφανται, (for πέφανμαι) D. ηεφάμμεθον, πέφανθον, πεφανθον, Ρ. πεφάμμεθα, πέφανθε, πεφαμμίνοι εισί. The second person imperative is formed from the second person indica- tive, by changing ai into ο ■ as, τίτνψ-αι, τέτυχρ-ο. The third person is formed from the second person plural indicative, by changing ε into ω ■ as, TfTUtf-d-S, TtTl'lfd-U). The infinitive is formed from the second person plural indicative, by changing ε into ai ' as, τέτνψ&-ε, τετΰψ^-αι. Pluperfect. The pluperfect is formed from the perfect, by changing μαι into μην, and prefixing the second augment ; as, τέτνμμαι, έτετνμμην. Paulo-post- Future. The paulo-post-future is formed from the second person singular of the perfect, by changing ai into ομαι • as, τέτνψαι, τετνψομαι. First Aonst. The first aorist is formed from the third person singular of the perfect, by changing ται into όην, the preceding smooth mute into the rough one, and dropping the reduplication ; as, τέτνπται, έτνψόην. Some verbs assume ο • as, εζ^ωται, έίβ&ο&ην • μέμνηται, έμνήοόην • πέπανται, έπανσβην • πέπλη- ται, έπλήούην. On the contrary, οέοωοται drops it, making έσώόην. Some verbs which have η in the perfect passive, change it into ε in the first aorist ; as, άφήςηται, ay Ύβέόην • εν^ηται, ενζέόην ίπ^νηται, έπτρέύην. In the poets, some verbs in νω, which dropped ν in the perfect, receive it again in the first aorist; as, έχλΜην for έχλϊόην. 92 VERB. Those verbs which in the perfect passive change ε into a, in the first aorist resume ε • as, στρέφω, ϊοτς>απται, έοτοέφόην, to turn First Future. The first future is formed from the first aorist, by changing ην into ησομαι, and dropping the aug- ment ; as, έτίχρόην, τνφύήοομοα. Second Aorist. The second aorist is formed from the second aorist active, by changing ov into ην • as, ετνπον, έτνπην. Second Future. The second future is formed from the second aorist, by changing ην into ηοομαι, and dropping the augment ; as, έτνπην, τνπηοομαι. MIDDLE VOICE. SYNOPSIS OP THE MODES AND TENSES OF THE First Conjugation. Present Imperf. Perfect Pluperf. 1st Aor. 1st Fut. 2d Aor. 2d Fut Indie. Imper. Optat. Subjunc. Infin. τϋπτομαι τϋπτου τνπτοίμην τϋπτωμαι τύπτεσθαι ετνπτόμην τίτυπα τέτυπε τετίποιμι τετίπω τετνπεναι ετετύπειν ίτυψάμην τύψαι τνψαίμην τύψωμαι τνψασθαι rvxpouai τυψοίμην τύψεσθαι Ιτνπόμην τύπου τυποίμην τίπωμαι τυπέσθαι -υποϋμαι τυκοίμην τνπεϊσθαι Part. τνπτόμενος τετυπώς τυψάμενος τυψόμενος τυπόμενος τνπούμενος Second Conjugation. Present Imperf. Perfect Pluperf. 1st Aor. 1st Fut. 2d Aor. 2d Fut. πλέκομαι π\(κου π\εκοίμην πλέκω μα ι πλέκεσθαι επλεκόμην πέπλοκα πέπλοκε πεπλόκοιμι πεπ\6κω πεπλοκέναι επεπλόκειν επλεζάμην πλέζαι πλεζαίμην ττλ έζωμαι ■πλίξασθαι πλεζομαι πλεζο'ίμην πλίξεσθαι έπλακύμην πλακοδ πλ&κοίμην πλάκωμαι πλσκέσθαι ι πλακονμαι πλακοίμην πλακεϊσθαι π\εκ6μενος πεπλοκώς πλεζάμενος πλεζόμενος πΧακόμενος η\αΚθύμενθ\ CONJUGATION OF THE MIDDLE V *CE. f Third Conjn gation. . Indie. Imper. Optat. Subjunc. Infin. Part. Present πείθομαι πείθου πειθοίμην πείθωμαι πείθεσθαι πειθόμενος Jmperf. επειθόμην Perfect πέποιθα πίποιθε πεποίθοιμι πεποίθω πεποιΟέναι πεποιθώς Pluperf. Ιπεποίθειν 1st Λογ. Ιπεισάμην πεΧσαι πεισαΐμην πείσωμαι πείσασΟαι πεισάμενος 1st Fut. πείσομαι πεισυίμην πείσεσθαι πεισόμενος 2d Aor. ίπιθόμην πιθοΰ πιθυίμην πίθωμαι πιΟέσθαι πιθόμενος 2d Fut. πιθοϋμαι πιθυίμην πιθεΐσθαι πιθούμενος Fourth Conjugation. Present σπείρομαι σπείρον σπειροίμην σπείρωμαι σπείρεσθαι σπειρόμενος Imperf. εσπειρόμην Perfect εσπορα εσπορε εσπόροιμι εσπόρω Ισπορίναι Ισπορύς Pluperf εσπδρειν 1st Aor. Ισπειράμην σπέΐρα t σπειραίμην σπείρωμαι σπείοασθαι σπειράμενος 1st Fut. σπερουμαι σπεροίμην σπερεϊσθαι σπερονυενος 2d Aor. (σπαρόμην σπάρου σπαροίμην σπάρωμαι σπαρέσβχι σπαρόμενος 2d Fut. σπαρυυμαι σπαροίμην σπαρεϊσθαι σπαροϋμίνο; FIRST CONJUGATION. S. INDICATIVE MODE. First Aorist, / struck. S. έτυψαμην 9 D. έτυψάμε&ον, Ρ έτυψάμε&α } ετνψω, έτύψασ&ον έτνψασ&ε, έτύψατο, έτυψάσ&ην, έτύψαντο. Second Future, / shall strike. τνπονμαι, D. τνπούμε&θΡ } P. τυπούμε&α, τυπη, τυπεϊσ&ον t τυπεϊσ&ε, τνηειτα.}, τνπεϊσΰον 9 τνηοννται>. IMPERATIVE MODE. First Aorist, strike. S. τΰί//οα, τυψάσ&ω, D. τνψασχτον, τυψάσ&ων 9 P. τύψασ&ε, τνψάσ&ωσαν. Second Aorist, strike. S. τνττοϋ, τυττ^σθΐο, D. τνπεσθ~ον } τυπέσ&ων P. τύπεσ&ε, τυπέυχτωσαν. 94 VERB. OPTATIVE MODE. First Aorist, I might, fyc. strike. S. τνψαψην, τύψαιο, τύψαιτο, D. τυψαίμε&ον, τύψαισ&ον , τυψαΐσ&ην Ρ. τνψαΐμε&α, τύψαισ&ε, τίψανντο, SECOND CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MODE. Sing-. 1st Α. ίπ\εζ- αμήν, ω, aro, 2d F. πλακ- οϋμαι, ρ, έϊται, Dual. j Plur. άμεθον, ασθον, όσθην, όμεθα•, ασθε, αντο. οίμεθον, έΐσθον, εΊσθον, | οίμεθα, είσθε, ουνται. IMPERATIVE MODE. Sing. ι Dual. , Plur. 1st Α. π\{ξ- at, όσθω, ασθον, άσθων, ασθε, άσθωσαν. 2d Α. ηλακ- ου, έσθω, εσθον, έσθων, \ εσθε, έσθωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. Sing. Ι Dual. I Plur. 1st Α. κλεξ-αΐμην, αιο, αιτο, J αίμεθον, αισθον, αίσθην, J αίμεθα, αισθε, αιντο. THIRD CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MODE. Sing. 1st Α. Ιπεισ- αμήν, ω, ατο, 2d F. πιθ- οΰμαι, ρ, είται, Dual. . Plur. άμεθον, ασθον, όσθην, άμεθα, ασθε, αντο. οίμεθον, εΊσθον, έΐσθον, \ οίμεθα, είσθε, ουνται. IMPERATIVE MODE. Sing. 1st Α. πεΓσ- αι, όσθω, 2d Α. πιθ- ου, έσθω, Dual. . Plur. ασθον, όσθων, ασθε, άσθωσαν. εσθον, έσθων, εσθε. έσθωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. I Dual. 1 Plur. 1st Α. πεισ-αίμην, αιο, αιτο, | αίμεθον, αισθον, αίσθην, \ αίμεθα, αισθε, αιντο. FOURTH CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MODE. Sing. . Dual. I Plur. 1st Α. Ισπειρ-αμην, ω, ατο, άμεθον, ασθον, άσθην, όμεθα, ασθε, αντο. 2d F. σπαρ- οΰμαι, ρ, εΊται, ] οίμεθον, εΊσθον, εΊσθον, Ι οίμεθα, είσθε, ουνται* FORMATION OF TENSES IN THE MIDDLE VOICE. 95 Sing. 1st Α. σπείρ- at, άσθω, 2d Α. σηαρ• ου, έσθω, IMPERATIVE MODE. Dual. ασθον, άσθων, εσθον, έσθων. Plur. ασθε, άσθωσαν. εσθε, έσΟωσαν. Sing. 1st Α. σπειρ- αίμην, αιο, αιτο, OPTATIVE MODE. Dual. αίμεθον, αισθον, α'ιαθην, Plur. αίμεθα, αισθε, αιντο. OBSERVATIONS. 1. In verbs of the fourth conjugation the first future is the same as the second, both in the middle and in the active voices, when there is no change in the penultima; as, ψάλλω, first and second future active χραλ.ώ, middle ■ψαλονμαι • but σπείρω, first future active σττερώ, middle σπεροϋμαι ■ second future active σπαςώ, middle σπαοονμαι. 2. The perfect and pluperfect have an active, the other tenses a passive termination. The only tenses that have a peculiar conjugation are the first aorist in- dicative, imperative, and optative, and the second future indicative ; the others are conjugated like those of the active and passive, whose termina- tion they borrow. FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE MIDDLE VOICE. Present and Imperfect. The present and imperfect are the same as those of the passive. Perfect. The perfect is formed from the second aorist active, by changing ov into a, and prefixing the reduplication ; as, ετνπον, τέτνπα. If the second aorist have a in the penultima, from a present in ε or ει, the perfect middle changes it into ο • but from a present in η or ai, into η • as, πλέκω, επλάχον, πέπλοχα • οπείφω, eonagov, eonoqa ■ λήόω, ελάόον, λέληόα ■ (ραίνω, εψάνον, πέφηνα. So ελπω makes ολπα, and with the syllabic augment εολπα • έργω, οςγα, eoqya. Also 96 VERB. #άλλω, εόάλον, makes τέόηλα • χλάζω, εκλαγον, κέχληγα • and &άπτω, εταφον, τέύηπα. If the second aorist have ε in the penultima, the perfect middle changes it into ο • as, ελεγον, λέλογα. If the second aorist have ι in the penultima, from a present in ε^, the perfect middle changes it into οι • as, πείύω, επϊάον, πέποιύα • είδίο, ϊδον, olda ■ and in like manner ε/'χω, olxa, and with the syllabic augment εοιχα. But from a present in t, it is mere- ly lengthened ; as, τρίςω, ετςάγον, τέτφγα • φςπσσω, εφςηκον, πέφρϊκα. Some retain also the diphthong of the present ; thus κεύ&ω makes κέκευϋ~α and κέκϋ&ιχ ' φεύγω } τιέφευγα and πέφνγα. The poets frequently shorten the penultima again, particu- larly in the feminine of the participle ; as, τεϋ -ulmu, from ■&άλλω } τέ&ηλα, τε&ηλώς. "Ed -ω makes εϊ'ω&α, and ρησσω, ερρωγα. Also δείδω makes δεδοικω, to avoid the too frequent recurrence of the δ. Obs. The perfect active and middle of the same verb are seldom both in use. Indeed the perfect middle may be considered as another form of the perfect active, as it has generally the same sense. Pluperfect, The pluperfect is formed from the perfect, by changing a into uv, and prefixing the augment ; as, τέτνπα, ετετνπειν. First Aorist. The first aorist is formed from the first aorist active, by adding μην • as, έτυψα, ετνψάμην. Obs. Verbs in ω pure have this tense often syncopated ; as, εύράμηι> } ώνάμην } for εύρησάμην } ώνησάμην. First Future. The first future is formed from the first future active, by changing ω into ομαι • as, τνψω, τύψο- DEPONENT VERBS. 97 μαι - but in the fourth conjugation, into ovucci ■ as, ι/;αλώ, ψαλοϋμαι. Obs. Those verbs also of the third conjugation, which by the Attic dialect lose σ from the future active, change ώ into ουμαι ■ as, χομϊώ } κομιοϋμαι. Second Aorist. The second aorist is formed from the second aorist active, by changing ov into ομψ • as, ετύπον, έτνπόμην. Second Future. The second future is formed from the second future active, by changing ώ into ovuai • as, τνπώ, τνπονμαι. Except εόομαι, (ράγομαι, πίομαι, and the poetic futures βέομαι, νίομαι, by crasis vevucu ■ which are thus varied : φάγ-ομαι, εσαι, εται, &c. DEPONENT VERBS. Deponent verbs generally have the middle form in the first future and first aorist, but the passive form in the perfect, pluperfect, and paulo-post-future, and some also in the first aorist and first future. SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES. Pres. Imp. 1st K. M. 1st A Μ Perf. P. Plup. P. P.p. P. 1st A P. IstF. P. Indie. Imper. OptaU Subjunc. Infin. &ίχομαι δέχου δεχοίμην δέχωμαι δέχεσθαι έδεχόμην δέζομαι δεξοίμην δέξεσθαι έδεζάμην δέξαι δεξαίμην δέζωμαι δέζασθαι δίδεγμαι δέδεζο δεδεγμένος εϊην δεδεγμένος ω δεδέχθαι εδεδέγμην δεδέξομαι δεδεζο'μην δεδέζεσθαι εδέχθη ν δέχθητι δεχθείην δεχθία δεχθήναι δεχθήσομαι δεχθησοίμην δεχθήσεσθαι Part. δεζόμενος δεξάμενος δεδεγμένος δεδεζόμενος δεχθείς δεχθησόμενος Obs. Several deponents have a perfect, and some a second aorist, of the middle form; as, γίγνομαι, to become, γ ϊγ ova, έγενόμην ■ οπτομαι, to see, οπωπα• αίσ&άνομαι, to perceive, ήσΰόμην. Μαίνομαι, to rave, has the 9 98 VERB. perfect mid. μίμηνα, and the second aor. pass. Ιμάνψ, and μάχομαι, to fight, the second fut. mid. μαχονμαι. CONTRACT VERBS. Verbs in αω, εω, and οω, are contracted in the present and imperfect : the other tenses admit no contraction, but are formed like those of baryton verbs. Verbs in αω contract αω, ao, into ω • and αε, αη, into a • subscribing ι and dropping v, whenever they happen to follow ; as, τιμάω, τιμώ, to honor ; τιμάομεν, τιμώμεν • τίμαε, τίμα • τιμάητον, τιμά- τον • τιμάοιμι, τιμωμι • τιμάονύι, τιμώύί. Verbs in εω contract εε into ει, εο into ov, and in every other contraction drop ε » as, φιλέω, φιλώ, to love ; (ριλέεις, φιλεΐς • (ρίλεε, (ρίλει • (ριλέομεν, ψίλονμεν. Verbs in ο ω contract ο with a long vowel follow- ing into ω • with a short vowel, or ov, into ov • with any other diphthong, into οι • as, χονσόω, χςνσώ, to gild; χρνσόετε, χςναοντε • χρναόονσι, Xqvoovoi' xQvoorjg χονσοϊς. Except οει in the infinitivlf which is contracted into ov • as, χ$νο6ειν, χ^νοονν. ACTIVE VOICE. SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES OF VERBS IN Pres. Imp. 1st F. 1st A. Perf. Plup. 2d A. 2dF Indie. Imperat. Optat. Subj. Infin. τιμάω τίμαε τιμ-άοιμι •άω -άειν τιμώ τίμα τιμ-(ί>μι ώ- •<£ν ίτ'ιμαον ιτίμων τιμήσω τιμήσ-οιμι -ειν ετίμησα τι μη σον τιμήσ-αιμι -ω -αι τετίμηκα τετίμηκε τετιμήκ-οιμι -ω -ίναι ετετιμήκειν ϊτιμον τ'ιμε τίμ-οιμί -ω -εΐν τιμώ τιμ-οΐμι -εΐν Part. -άων -ων -ας -ως CONJUGATION OF CONTRACTS. 99 εω. Indie. Imperat. Optat. Subj. Infin. Part. Pres. j φιλέω φίλεε φιλ-έοιμι -έω -έειν -έων φίλΰ φίλει φιλ-οΊμι -ω -έϊν -ων Imp. j εφίλεον εφίλουν IstF. φιλήσω φιλήσ-οιμι •ειν -ων 1st A. εφίλησα φίλησαν φιλήσ-αιμί -ω -at -as Perf. πεφίληκα πεφίληκε ηεφιλήκ-οιμι -ω -ίναι -ώί Plup. επεφιλήκειν 2d A. εφιλον φίλε φίλ-οιμί -ω •ειν -ων 2dF. φιλώ φιλ-οΊμι •εΐν ων Pres. Imp. IstF. 1st Α. Perf. Ρ] up. χρυσόω χρύσοε χρυσ-δοιμι ~6ω •όειν -6ων χρυσώ χρίσου χρυσ-οϊμΐ -α -οΰν -ων εχρύσοον εχρύσουν χρυσώσω χρνσώσ-οιμι -ειν -ων εχρίσωσα χρύσωσον χρυσώσ-αιμι -ω -at -ας κεχρίσωκα κεχρίσωκε κεχρνσώκ-οιμι -ω -hat -ως εκεχρυσώκειν INDICATIVE MODE. Present Tense. τιμ• φιλ- χρνσ- Sing. Dual. Plur. άω, άεις, άει, άετον, άετον, άομεν, όετε, άονσι. ώ, ας, 9'> ατον, ατον, ωμεν, ατε, ωσι. ίω, έεις, έει, έετον, ίετον, έομεν, έετε, ίου σι» ω, είς, ει, είτον, εΐτον, ου μεν, έΐτε, ουσι. 6ω, ύεις, όει, όετον, όετον, όομεν, όετε, όουσι. ω, οΐς, οϊ, οΰτον, οϋτον, οϋμεν, ούτε, οϋσι. Imperfect Tense. έτίμ- εφϊλ- i X? ic- Sing. Di ial. Plur. αον, αες, αε, άετον, αέτην, άομεν, άετε, αον. ων, ας, β; ατον, άτην, ωμεν, ατε, ων. εον, εες, εε, έετον, εέτην, έομεν, ίετε, εον. ουν, εις, / ει, εΊτον, ε'ιτην, οΰμεν, είτε, ουν. οον, οες, οε, όετον, οέτην, όομεν, όετε, οον. ονν, ους, ου, ουτον, οϋτην, ουμεν, ούτε, ουν. 100 VERB. IMPERATIVE MODE. D. ιβΙ. Plur. αέτω, άετον, αίνων, άετε, αέτωσαν. άτω, άτον, άτων, ατε, άτωσαν. εέτω, έετον, εέτων, έετε, εέτωσαν. είτω, εϊτον, είτων, εΊτε, είτωσαν. οίτω, άετον, θέτων, όετε, οέτωσαν. ούτω, ουτον, οϋτων, ούτε, οντωσαν. τίμ- ψιλ- χρ νσ• OPTATIVE MODE. Sing. Dual. Plur. 5 άοιμι, άοις, άοι, άοιτον, αοίτην, άοιμεν, άοιτε, άοι εν ( ψμι> js, ψ τον. <$την, ωμεν, <£τε, ωεν. 5 έοιμι, εοις, έοι, ίοιτον, εοίτην, έσιμεν, έοιτε, έοιεν. ( οΊμι, οΊς, οι, οίτον, οίτην, οΊμεν, οΐτε, οΊεν. ( όοιμι, > οΐμι, όοις, 6οι, όοιτον, οοίτην, άοιμεν, άοιτε, όοιεν. ο7ς, οΊ, οϊτον, οίτην, οΊμεν, οΧτε, OUV SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Sing. Dual. Plur. Till' {6ω, Ι ω, 6m, «%, άητον, άητον, άωμεν, άητε, άωσι. ?*> it ατον, ατον, ωμεν, ατε, ωσι. φι\• Ιέω, ? ω, «κ> k, έητον, έητον, έωμεν, έητε, έωσι. Vi> ν> ντον, ητον, ωμεν, ητε, ωσι. Χ?νσ- <(5ω ; Ι ω,' οΊς, 6V, οΊ, άητον, ώτον, άητον, ω το ν, άωμεν, άητε, όωσι. ωμεν, ωτε, ωσι. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. ( όειν. 5 ^ων, άουσα, άον. " ( ων, ωσα, ων. τιμ- Ι αν. άω- S έειν. ώι\- \ έ ων, έουσα, έον ( έϊν. ύν, ούσα, ουν. k όειν. ί όων, άουσα, άον. χρνσ- Ι ουν. Λ * ( ων, ούσα, ουν. PASSIVE VOICE. SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES OF VERBS IN Indie. Imper. Optat. Subj. Infin. Part. Pres. $ τιμάομαι τιμωμαι τιμάου τιμώ Τίμ-αοίμην τιμ-ωμην -άωμαι -ωμαι -άεσθαι -ασθαι -αόμενος -ώμενος Imp. j ίτίμαόμην ίτιμώμην Perf. τετίμημαι τετίμησο τετιμ-τάμην -ωμαι -ησθαι -ημένος Plup. έτετιμήμην P.p.F. τετιμήσομαι τετιμησ-οίμην -εσθαι •άμενος 1st A. ίτιμήθην τίμφητι τιμηθ-είην -ω -η ναι -εις IstF. τιμηθήσομαι τιμηθησ-οίμην •εσθαι -άμενος 2d A. ίτίμην τίμηθι τιμ-είην -ώ •ηναι -εις 2dF. τιμήσομαι τιμησ-οίμην -εσθαι -όμενος CONJUGATION OF CONTRACTS. 101 εω. Pres. Imp. Perf. Plup. P. p. F. 1st A. IstF. 2d A. 2dF. Indie. Imper. Optat. Subj. Infin. Part. φιΧέομαι φιΧέου φιΧ-εοίμην -ίωμαι -έεσθαι •εόμενος ώιΧοϋμαι ΙψιΧεόμην φιΧοϋ ψιΧ-οίμην -ώμαι -εΊσθαι -οίμενος (φιΧουμην πεφίΧημαι τχεφίΧησο πεφϊΧ-γμην -ώμαι •ήσθαι •ημένος επεφιΧήμην ιτεφιΧήσομαι πεφιΧησ-οίμην -εσθαι -όμενος ίψιΧήθην φιΧήθητι φιΧηθ-είην -ω -ήναι -εις ΛιΧηθήσομαι εφίΧην φιΧηθησ-οίμην -εσθαι -όμενος φίΧηθι φιΧ-είην -ω -ήναι -εις φιΧήσομαι φιΧησ-οίμην -εσθαι -όμενος οω. Pres. - Imp. < Perf. Plup. P. p. F. 1st A. IstF. χρυσόομαι χρυσόου χρυσ-οοίμην -όωμαιι -όεσθαι -οόμενος χρυσονμαι χρυσού χρυσ-οίμην -ώμαι -οΰσθαι •οϋμενος εχρυσοόμην εχρυσυνμην κεχρύσωμαι κεχρύσωσο κεχρυσ-ίρμην -ώμαι -ώσθαι -ωμένος εκεχρυσώμην κεχρυσώσομαι κεχρυσωσ-οίμην -εσθαι -όμενος ε•χρυσώθην χρυσώθητι χρυσωθ-είην -ω -ήναι -εις χρυσωθήσομαι χρυσωθησ-οίμην -εσθαι -όμενος Τίμ- φιΧ- Χ? νσ " ΙτΊμ- ΙφΧΧ- ίχρίσ Sing. ( άομαι, ώ), άεται, ( ώμαι, α, αται, ( (ομαι, έτι, ίεται, \ οΰμαι, ρ", εϊται, \ όομαι, oj) f όεται, \ οΰμαι, οΐ, οΰται, Sing. f αόμην, άου, άετο, 1 ώμην, ώ, ατο, j εόμην, ίου, έετο, 1 οΰμην, ου, εΊτο, ' οόμην, ύου, όετο, ούμην, ου, οΰτο, 9 * INDICATIVE MODE. Present Tense. Dual. αόμεθον, άεσθον, άεσθον, ώμεθον, ασθον, ασθον, εόμεθον, έεσθον, έεσθον, οίμεθον, εΐσθον, εΐσθον, οόμεθον, όεσθον, όεσθον, ούμεθον, ουσθον, ουσθον, Imperfect Tense. Dual. αομεθον, άεσθον, αέσθην, ώμεθον, ασθον, άσθην, εόμεθον, έεσθον, είσθην, οίψεθον, εΐσθον, είσθην, οόμεθον, όεσθον, οέσθην, οίμεθον, ουσθον, ούσθην, Plur. αόμεθα, άεσθε, άονταε. ώμεθα, ασθε, ώνται. εόμεθα, έεσθε, έονται. οϋμεθα, εΧσθε, οΰνται. οόμεθα, όεσθε, ύονται. ονμεθα, ουσθε, ουνται. Plur. αόμεθα, όεσθε, άοντο, ώμεθα, ασθε, ώντο. εόμεθα, έεσθε, έοντο. ονμεθα, είσθε, ουντο. οόμεθα, όεσθε, όυντο. οίμεθα, ουσθε, οΐ/ντο. 102 VERB. IMPERATIVE MODE. Τψ- χρυσ . "Ι Sing. Dual. Plur. άου, αίσθω, άεσθον, αέσθων, άεσθε, αεσθωσαν ω, άσθω, ασθον, άσθων, ασθε, άσθωσαν. £ου, εέσθω, έεσθον, εέσθων, έεσθε, είσθωσαν ύυ, είσθω, εΊσθον, είσθων, είσθε, είσθωσαν. άου, οίσθω, άεσθον, οέσθων, άεσθε, οίσθωσαν. ου, ούσΟω, ουσθον, ούσθων, ουσθε, ούσθωσαν OPTATIVE MODE. Τίμ- ΧΡ ι τιμ- χρνο Sing. Dual. Plur. ( αοίμην, άοιο, άοιτο, αοίμεθον, άοισθον, αοίσθην, αοίμεθα, άοισθε, άοιντα. ( ώμην, ωο, ψτο, ώμεθον, ΰίσθον, (£σθην, οίμεθα, ψσθε, ώ~ντο. 5 εοίμην. έοιο, ίοιτο, εοίμεθυν, έοισθον, εοίσθην, εοίμεθα, ίοισθε, έοιντο. ( οίμην, οΐο, οϊτο, οίμεθον, οϊσθον, οίσθην, οίμεθα, οΧσθε, οΧντο. { οοί^ην, όοιο, όοιτο, ( οίμην, οΐο, οΧτο, οοίμεθον, όοισθον, οοίσθην, οοίμεθα, άοισθε, άοιντο. οίμεθον, οΐσθον, οίσθην, οίμεθα, οΧσθε, οΐντο. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Sing. Dual. Plur. ( άωμαι, άη, άηται, ( ωμαι, α, αται, αώμεθον, άησθον, άησθον, αώμεθα, άησθε, άωνται. ώμεθον, ασθον, ασθον, ώμεθα, ασθε, ωνται. ( (ωμαι, έη, έηται, ) ωμαι, ρ, ηται, εώμεθον, έησθον, εησθον, εώμεθα, ίησθε, έωνταΐ. ώμεθον, ησθον, ησθον, ώμεθα, ησθε, ωνται. ^ άωμαι, 6η, όηται, ( ωμαι, οΧ, ωται, οώμεθον, άησθον, άησθον, οώμεθα, άησθε, άωνται. ώμεθον, ωσθον, ωσθον, ώμεθα, ωσθε, ωνται. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. ( αεσθαί. ϊ αόμεν-ος, η, ον. " / ασθαι. Ρ" / ώμεν- ος, η, ον. . » \ ίεσθαι. * ίλ " \ εϊσθαι. ώι\- \^μεν-ος, η, γ Ι οίμεν-ος, η, ον. ον. \ όεσθαι. \ οόμεν-ος, η, ον. ΧΡ νσ • Ιονσθαι. λ" ^ οίμει -ος, η, ον. MIDDLE VOICE. SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES OF VERBS IN Indie. Imperat. Optat. Subj. Infin. Part. Prcs. s τιμάομαι τιμάου τιμ-αοίμην -άωμαι -όεσθαι -αδμενος τιμώμαι τιμώ τιμ-ω~μην -ωμαι -ασθαι -ώμενος Imn \ Ιτιμαάμην C Ιτιμώμην Perf. τέτιμα τέτιμε τετίμ-οιμι -ω •έναι -ώς Plup. Ιτετίμειν 1st A. Ιτιμησάμην τίμησαι τιμησ-αίμην -ωμαι -ασθαι -άμενος IstF. τιμήσομαι τιμησ-οίμην -εσθαι -όμενος 2d A. Ιτιμάμην τιμοΰ Τίμ-οίμην -ωμαι -ίσθαι -όμενος 2dF τιμούμαι τιμ-οίμην -εΐσθαι -οίμενος Pres. Imp. Perf. Plup. 1st A. 1st F. 2d A. 2dF. Pres. Imp. 1st A. IstF. VERBS IN μι. 103 εω. Indie. Imperat. Optat. Subj. Infin. Part. φιλίομαι φιλέου φίλ-εοίμην -έωμαι •έεσθαι -εΑ μένος φιλοΰμαι (φιλεόμην φιλοΰ φιλ-οίμην -ώμαι •εΧσθαι -ούμενος ίψιΧουμην πίψιΧα πέφιλε πεφίλ-οιμι -ω -ένα* -ώς επεφίλειν ίφιλησάμην φίλησαι φιλησ-αίμηι •ωμαι -ασθαι •όμενος φίλησομαι φιλησ-οίμην -εσθαι -όμενος ίφιλόμην φιλοϋ φιλ-οίμην -ωμαι -ίσθαι -όμενος φιλοΰμαι φιλ-οίμην οω. -εΊσθαι -ούμενος χρνσδομαι χρνσόου χρνσ-οοίμην -δω μα ι -όεσθαι -οόμενος χρυσοΐιμαι χρυσού χρυσ-οίμην •ώμαι -ουσθαι -οίμενος ίχρυσοόμην Ιχρυσοίμην ί-χρυσωσάμην γρυσωσαι χρνσωσ-αίμην -ωμαι -ασθαι -άμενος χρυσώσομαι OBSE χρυσωσ-οίμην RVATIONS. •εσθαι -όμενος 1. Dissyllables in αω, from which the Attics had excluded ι, are not contracted ; as, κλάω, κάω, from κλαίω, καίω. 2. Dissyllables in εω commonly admit only the contraction in ει • as, πλέω, πλεις, πλει. πλΐομεν, πλειτε, πλίονΰι. Yet we sometimes find δουν for δέον, δοϋσι for δίουσι, &c. 3. In some, verbs, particularly ζάω, πεινάω, διψάω, and χράομαι, the Attics contract αε and αει into η andy. Thus, ζω, tyg, ty, &c. Imperf. ϊζων,εζης, &c. Inf. tfjv. In the optative they change μι into ην as, ίρωτωην, ίοωτώης, ποιοί'η * but the third person plural is, as in the common form, τιμώεν, φιλοιεν. 4. Several contracts vary in their characteristic, and consequently in their contraction; as, ξυράω or ξνρεω, σνλάω or συλίω. Some verbs are both barytons and contracts; as, αΐδομαι or αίδίομαι, διδάακω or διδασχίω, 'έλκω or $λχίω } Ιπιμϊλομαι or Ιπιμελεομαι 1 ρίπτω ΟΓ ριπτεω, ϊρνχω ΟΓ τρυχόω. VERBS IN ΜΙ. Verbs in μι are derived from verbs of the third conjugation in αω, εω, ο ω, and νω • as from στα ω, &έω, δόω, δεικνύω, ϊοτημι, to stand ; τίύημι, to place ; δίδωμι, to give ; δείχννμι, to show- 104 VERB. Verbs in μι are formed, 1. By changing ω into μι, and lengthening the penultima. 2. By prefixing the reduplication. The reduplication properly consists in repeating the first consonant of the present tense with an ι • as, δοω, δίδωμι. If the consonant be an aspirate, the corresponding smooth must be used ; as, &έω, τίύημι, for &ί&ημι. If the verb begin with a vowel, with πτ or στ, an aspirate ι only is prefixed, which is called the improper reduplication ; as, έ'ω, ϊημι, to send ; πτάω, ϊπτημι, to fly ; ατάω, ΐβτημι. Verbs in μι have only three tenses of that form ; the present, imperfect, and second aorist. They take the other tenses from verbs in ω • thus δίδωμι makes δώαω, δέδωχα, from δόω. Verbs in νμι have no second aorist ; except dis- syllables, in which this tense is the same as the imperfect. They likewise want the optative and subjunctive modes, which they borrow from verbs in ω. Many verbs in μι have no reduplication, par- ticularly all those derived from verbs of more than two syllables ; as, δείκννμι from δεικνύω, ζενγννμι from ζευγννω, κρέμνηαι from κρεμνάω, δ νμι from δνω, φημϊ from φάω. Obs. 1. The poets and^Eolics give the terminations of verbs in μι> to a great number of contract verbs, but without the re- duplication ; as, γελάω, γέλημι • νικάω, νίκημν • όράω, ορημν • κτάω, κτημι* ' αΐνέω, αϊνημι • νο&ω, νόημν όνέω, ονημι • φιλέω, φίλημι. Barytons sometimes become verbs in μν as, from βρί&ω, ϊχο), φέρω, we meet with βρί&ημι,, εχημι, φέρημι • though thr ν of the penultima discovers that they are properly derived CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN μι. ACTIVE VOICE. 105 from βοιθ-ίω, ίχέω, φερέω, obsolete, it being usual for barytons to be changed into contract verbs. Obs. 2. The poets sometimes repeat the two initial letters for a reduplication; as, άλάω, άλάλημι, • ά/ε'ω, άκάχημι. To the common reduplication they sometimes add μ * as, πλάω, πΐμ- πλημ* • πράοι, πΐμπρημι. They also make the reduplication in the middle ; as, V, ω, ν, Imperfect. Dual. ατον, άτην, ετον, έτην, οτον, ότην, ντον, ύτην, Second Aorist. άμεν, εμεν, ομεν, νμεν, Plur. ατε, ετε, οτε, ντε, ασαν. εσαν. οσαν. ν σαν. Sing. ϊστ-ην, ης, ϊ&-ην, ης, ϊδ-ων, ως, ν> ω, Ι Dual. ητον, ήτην, ετον, έτην, οτον, ότην, IMPERATIVE MODE Present. ημεν, εμεν, ομεν, Plur. ητε, ετε, οτε, ήσαν, εσαν οσαν Sing. ϊστ&-&ι, -ν τί&ε-τι, / δΐδο-&ι, ί ' δε1κνν-&ι, s τω, Dual. τον, των, τε, Plur. τωσαν. Second Aorist. Smg. στηθ"*, στήτω, S -ες, &έτω, δός, δότω, Dual. σνψον, στήτων, ΰέτον, S -έτων, δότον, δότων, στητέ, ΰέτε, δότε, Plur. στι\τωσαν. ϋ-έτωσαν. δότωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. Present. Sing. Ισταί-ην, \ τι&εί-ην, V ης διδοί-ην, ) » V, Dual. ητον, ήτην, ημεν, Plur. ητε, ήσαν &» εν. Sing, σταΐ-ην, &εΙ-η δοί-η CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN μι. ACTIVE VOICE. 107 Second Aorist. Dual. ητον, ήτην, Plur. ημεν, ητε, ήσαν &, εν. Sing, ίστ-ώ, ας, τι&-ώ, ης, διδ-ώ. στω, SUBJUNCTIVE MODE Present. Dual, ατον, ατον, ητον, ητον, ', mov f Sing. σττ[ς, στη, δως, δω, ωτον. Second Aorist. Dual. στψον 9 στψον, d -ψον, χϊψον, δώτον. δώτον. Plur. ώμεν, ατε, ώσι. ωμεν, ητε, ωσ*. ωμέ?, ώτε, ώσ*. Plur. στίαμεν, στητέ, στώσ*. &ωμεν, &ψε, Ό-ωσι. δώμεν, δώτε, ίωσ». ίστδνα». INFINITIVE MODE. Present. τι&έναι. διδόναι. δειχνύναι. στι\ναι. Second Aorist. &εΤναι. δοΰνο PARTICIPLE. Present. ίστ-ά?, ασα, άν. τι^&-εΙς ί εΐσα, έν. διδ-ούς, οϋσα, όν. δειχν-νς, νσα, ύν. Second Aorist στ&ς, στασα, στάν, -θ -elg, &εϊσα, &έν. δούς, δοϋσα, δ όν. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The third person plural of the present indicative is commonly termi- nated in aoi by the Attics; as, τι&ϊαοι, διδόαοι, δεικννασι. 2. In the imperfect, use is generally made of the original contracted form with the reduplication ; as, ΐστ-ων, ας, a • Ιτϊ&-ονν, ei$, ei ■ Ιδϊδ-ουν, νυς, ου. Sometimes also in the present ; as, τι#«Γς διδοι 10S VERB. 3. The second aorist indicative retains the long vowel in the penultima of the dual and plural, except in τίΰημι, δίδωμι ϊημι. The third person plural is often syncopated ; as, εβαν for ϊβψαν, ε'&εν for ε&εααν. 4. The iEolics and poets retain the long vowel in the present impera- tive ; as, ϊστη&ι, τί&ητι, δίδω&ι. And from both forms &i is often rejected ; hence ϊοτη and Γστα, τίϋη, δείκνυ, &c. The contracted form is also fre- quently used ; as, τί&ει, δίδον. The second aorist imperative ends in #i, except in verbs from primitives in εω, as also in δίδωμι ' as, &1ς, θχες } φρ*5, δός. 5. The present infinitive has always the short vowel. The second aorist assumes the long vowel, except in verbs from primitives in ίω, as also in δίδωμι, which change the short vowel into a diphthong. FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. Imperfect. The imperfect is formed from the present, by changing μι into v, and prefixing the augment, except when the verb begins with ι • as, τί&ημι, έτϊβην • ϊοτημι, ϊοτην. Second Aorist. The second aorist is formed from the imperfect, by dropping the reduplication ; as, ivCGqv, εόην • or by changing the improper reduplication into the augment ; as, ϊοτην, εοτψ. Obs. If the verb have no reduplication, the second aorist is the same as the imperfect. PASSIVE VOICE. SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES. Indie Imper. Optat. Subj. Infin. Pres. Imp. ΐοταμαι Ιστάμην Ίστασο ισταίμην Ιστωμαι Ίστασθαι Perf. εσταμαι εστασο ισταίμην ίστωμαι ίστάσθαι Plup. Ιστάμην P. p. F. ίστάσομαι Ιστασοίμην Ιστάσεσθοα 1st A. Ιστάθην στάθητι σταθείην σταθώ σταθηναι IstF. σταθήσομαι σταθησοίμην σταθήσεσόαι Part. Ιστάμενος Ιστάμενος ίστασδμενος σταθείς σταθησδμίνοζ CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN μι. PASSIVE VOICE. 109 Pres. Imp. Perf. PIup. P. p. F. 1st A. Indie. τίθειιαι ίηθίμην τέθειμαι ίτεθείμην τεθεΐσομαι ετίθην 1st F. J τεθήσομαι Imper. τίθεσο τίθεισο τίθητι Optat. Τίθείμην τεθείμην τεθεισοίμην τεθείην τεθησοίμην Subj. τιθωμαι τεθωμαι τεοω Infin. τίθεσθαι τεθεϋσθαι τεθεΐσεσθαι τεθηναι τεθήσεσθαι Part. τιθέμενος τεθειμίνος τεθεισόμενος τεθάς τεθησόμενος Pres. Imp. Perf. Plup. P. p. F. 1st A. IstF. δίδομαι έδιδόμην δίδομαι ίδεδόμην δεδόσομαι εδόθην δοθήσομαι δίδοσο δέδοσο δόΟητι διδοΐμην δεδοΐμην δεδοσοίμην δοθείην δοθησοίμην διδΰμαι δεδωμαι δοθώ δίδοσθαι δεδόσθαι δεδδσεσθαι δοθηναι δοθήσεσθαι διδάμενος δεδομένος δεδοσδμενος δοθείς δοθησόμενος Pres. Imp. Perf. Plup. 1st Α. IstF. δείκννμρι ιδεικνύμην δίδειγμαι Ιδεδείγμην ίδείχθην δειχθήσομαι δείκννσο δείκννσθαι δεδεΊχθαι δειχθηναι δειχθήσεσθαι δεικνίμενος δεδειγμένος • δειχθείς δειχθησόμενος Sing. ϊστα- ^ τΐ&ε- ( ~,^ > ,αα*. cat. ται. δίδο- V δείχνν- ) INDICATIVE MODE. Present Tense. Dual. με&ον, σ&ον, u&ov t Plur. με&α, a&e t vrm. Sing, ίστδ- -ν έτι&έ- ( έδιδό- >W°>™, έδεικνν- J Imperfect. Dual. με&ον, a&ov f α&ην, Plur. α, σ&β. ντο. 10 no VERB. Sing. ϊστα- >. δίδο- ( σ0 > σ ^ ω > δείκνν- J Sing. ίσταΐ- \ τι&εΐ- \μψ, ο, το, διδοΐ- Sing. Ιστ-ώμαι, a y ατα*, τί&-ωμαι } tj, ητα*, διδ-ωμαν, ω, ώται, IMPERATIVE MODE. Present. Dual. σ&ον, σ&ων, OPTATIVE MODE. Present. Dual. με&ον, σ&ον, σ&ην, SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Present. Dual. ώμε&ον, άσΰον, ασ&ον, ώμε&ον } ησ&ον, ησ&ον, ώμε&ον } ώσ^ο*', ωσ&ον, Plur. σ&ε, σ&ωσαν. Plur. με&α } σ&ε, ντο. INFINITIVE. Present. ϊστασ&αι, τί&εσ&αι. δίδοσ&αι. δείχνυσ&αι*. Plur. ώμε&α, ασ&ε } ώνται, ώμε&α, ησ#£, ώνται*. ώμε&α, ώσ&ε, ωνται, PARTICIPLE. Present. Ιστάμεν-ος, τι&έμεν διδόμεν-ος δειχννμε ος, } >?, C " v-og, J OBSERVATION. The Ionics drop a from the second person singular in oat and ao, and the Attics contract the syllables ; as, ΐστασαι,ϊοη. ϊοτααι, Att. ϊοτψ B&eoo t Ion. s&so, Att. ε&ον ' δίδοοο, Ion. δίδοο, Att. δίδου. FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. Present, The present is formed from the present active, by changing μι into μαι, and shortening the pe- nultima ; as, ϊοτημι, ϊατάμαι • except in αημαι, άκά- CONJUGATION OF VERBS I MIDDLE VOICE. Ill χημαι> άλάλημαι, άλαλνχτημαι, άπόχταμαι, δίζη- μαι, and όνημαι, though ονάμαι is also used. Imperfect. The imperfect is formed from the present, by changing μαι into μην, and prefixing the augment, except when the verb begins with ι • as, τίΰεμαί, έτι&έμην • ϊστάμαι, Ιοτάμην. MIDDLE VOICE. ^ SYNOPSIS OF THE MODES AND TENSES. Pres. Imp. 2d A. 1st A. IstF. Indie. ΐσταμαι Ιστάμην ίστάμην ίστησάμην στήσομαι Imper. ΐστασο στάσο στήσαι Optat. Ίσταίμην σταίμην στησαίμην στησοίμην Subj. ιστωμαι στωμαι στήσωμαι Infin. ιστασθαι στάσθαι στήσασθαι στήσεσθαι Part. Ιστάμενος στά μένος στησάμενος στησόμενος Pres. Imp. 2d Α. 1st Α. IstF. Pres. Imp. 2d Α. 1st Α. IstF. Pres. Imp. 1st Α. IstF. τίθεμαι ίτιθέμην εθέαην εθηκάμην θήσομαι τίθεσο θίσο θηκαι τιθείμην θ ει μη ν θηκαίμην θησοίμην τιθώμαι Θωμά ι θήκωμαι τίθεσθαι θέσθαι θήκασθαι θήσεσθαι τιθέμενος θ (μένος θηκάμενος θησόμενος δίδομαι εδιδόμην (δόμην ίδωκάμην δώσομαι δίδοσο δόσο δωκαι διδοίμην δοίμην δωκαίμην δωσοίμην διδώμαι δώμαι δω κώμα ι δίδοσθαι δόσθαι δώκασθαι δώσεσθαι διδόμενος δομένος δωκάμενος δωσόμενος δείκννμαι δείκνυσο δείκνυσθαι δεικνίμενοί εδεικννμην εδειξάμην δείζομαι δέΐζαι δειζαίμην δειζοίμην δείξωμαι δείζασθαι δείξεσθαι δειξάμενος δειξόμενος INDICATIVE MODE. The Present and Imperfect as in the Passive. Second Aorist. έσιοί i&i έδό Sing. (- >H V , σο , τ0 > - ) Dual. με&ον } σ&ον, σ&ην. Plur με&α, σ&ε, ντο. 112 VERB. IMPERATIVE MODE. Second Aorist. στά- ) Sing. Dual. Plur. ■σέ- ' δό- { > σο, σ&ω, σ&ον, σ&ων, OPTATIVE MODE. Second Aorist. σ&ε, σ&ωσαν. σταί- Sing. Dual. Plur. -σεί- δοί~ \μην, ο, το, με&ον, σ&ον, σ&ην, με&α, σ&ε, ντο, Sing. στ-ώμαι, rf, ψαι, χϊ-ώμαι, ff, τ\ται, δ-ώμαι, ω, curat, SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Second Aorist. Dual. ώμε&ον, ησ&ον, ησ&ον, ώμε&ον, ησϋον, ησΰον, ώμε&ον, ωσ&ον, ωσ&ον, Plur. ώμε&α, ησ&ε, ώνται. ώμε&α, ησ&ε, ωνται,, ώμε&α, ώσ&ε, ώνται. INFINITIVE. Second Aorist. στάσ&αι. 3•έσ&αι,, δόσ&αν. PARTICIPLE. Second Aorist. στά- \ &έ- > μένος, μένη, μενον, δ6- ) Second Aorist. The second aorist middle is formed from the im- perfect, by dropping the reduplication ; as, έτιύε- μην> έόέμην • Ιστάμην, έοτάμην. % IRREGULAR VERBS IN μι. 113 TENSES PECULIAR TO THE PRIMITIVES OF VERBS IN μι. The tenses peculiar to the primitives of verbs in μι are regularly formed, according to the rules for verbs in ω • as, στάω, στήσω, εοτηαα. But there are some deviations in particular verbs. 1. The first future active has sometimes the reduplication of the present ; as, διδώσω, I will give. 2. The perfect active and passive of τί&ημι and ϊημι has ει instead of η, and the first aorist passive has ε only ; as, &ήσω, τέ&εικα, τέ&ειμαι, ετέ&ην (for έ&έ&ην, τ being put for & on account of the & which follows) ; ησω, εϊκα } είμαι, ε&ην (though εΐ&ην is sometimes found). 3. The perfect and first aorist passive of ΐστημι and δίδωμι shorten the long vowel of the perfect active ; as, εστηκα, εστα- μαι } έστα&ην • δέδωκα, δέδομαι, έδό&ην. Obs. 1 The perfect active of ϊοτημι has sometimes α instead of η • as, 'έοτακα, which is distinct from the Doric form βίττακα. Very frequently it is syncopated; as, %αταα, whence the participle ίσταως, and by crasis ϊστως. It is to be observed also, that the augment of ϊίστηκα retains the rough breathing of the present, and further often takes an ι in the pluper- fect ; as, sfrTTiy'xitv. Obs. 2. The perfect, pluperfect, and second aorist active, οι ΐστημι, have the intransitive signification to stand, and the rest of the tenses the trans- itive one to place. The perfect has also the signification of the present, and consequently the pluperfect that of the imperfect. IRREGULAR VERBS IN MI. Irregular verbs in μι may be divided into three classes, each containing three verbs. I. From εω are derived είμΐτ, to be ; εϊμι and Ι'ημι, to go. II. From εω are derived ϊημι, to send; \μαι, to sit ; είμαι, to clothe one's self. III. Κεΐμαι, to lie down ; ϊσημι, to know ; φημ1 7 to say. Class I. 1. Ειμί, to be. INDICATIVE MODE. Present Tense. Sing. Dual. 1 Plur. εΙμΙ, εϊς or e7, ίστϊ, έστόν, έστον, έσμεν, έστε, είσΐ. 10* 114 VERB. Sing. ty, iff, i or fy, Imperfect. Dual. Plur. ifcov, ^τψ 9 ημεν, ήτε } \σαν % Sing. \μψ, ήσο, ήπ>, Imperfect Middle Dual. I Plur. Υΐμε&ον, ήσ&ον, ι^σ&ην, | ^με^α, ^σ#ε, ^ντο. Sing. ϊσομοα,, ear], Ι'σετα*, Future Middle. Dual. έσόμε&ον, ϊσεσ&ον } εσεσ&ον, Plur. έσόμε&α, εσεσ&ε, έσονται IMPERATIVE MODE. Present. Sing. I Dual. I Plur. ϊσ&ι or too, 2στω, | ϊστον, εστων, | εστε, ϊστωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. Present. Sing. Dual. Plur. ]v t εϊης, εϊ'η, | εΥητον, εΙήτην } | εΐημεν, εϊ'ψε, εϊησαν or είεν. Future. iaol u.r\v t έσοιο, έσοιτο, Dual. ΙσοΙμε&ον, Ισοισ&ον, Ισοίσ&ην, Plur. ΙσοΙμε&α, 'εσοισ&ε, εσοιντο. ψ SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Present. δ, Sing. Dual. Ι ήτον, fpov, Plur. INFINITIVE. Present. είναι. Future. ίσεσ&αι*. IRREGULAR VERBS IS μι PARTICIPLES. 115 Present. Future. έσόμεν-ος, η, ov. 2. Είμι, to go. INDICATIVE MODE Present. Sing. ΒΪμι, είς or ε Γ, eft™, Dual. Χτον ) hov f Plur. Χμεν, fte, είσι, Xai t or foot. Imperfect. Sing. είν, εϊς, *l Dual. ¥tov, Ι'την, Plur. Χμεν } Χτε, ϊσαν. Pluperfect. Sing. εϊχ-ειν } εις, e », Dual. ειτον, είτην ί Plur. ειμεν, είτε, εισαν Second Aorist. Sing. tov, feff» Dual, fr, ϊ'ετον, Ιέτην, Plur. Χομεν, Χετε, Χορ. IMPERATIVE MODE . Present. Sing. i#t or εΐ, ϊτω, Dual. hov f ϊτων ί Plur. ϊτε, Χτωσαν. Second Aorist. Sing, ifc, Ιέτω, Dual. ϊετον, Ιέτων, Plur. fere, ίΐιωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. Second Aorist. Sing. ϊοιμι, ϊοις, ft», Dual. ϊοιτον, ΙοΙτ Ψ> Plur. Χοιμεν, Χοιτε, ϊϋιεν. 116 VERB. Sing. fc SUBJUNCTIVE MODE Second Aorist. Dual. ΐητον, ϊητον } Plur. ϊωμε* ί ϊητε, ϊωσι. INFINITIVE. Present. είναι or ϊναι. PARTICIPLE. Second Aorist. Ιών Ιονσα. Ιόν. Sing. εϊα εΐας, εΐε, Sing. γειν, γεις, $ει } First Future. εϊσομυα,, MIDDLE VOICE. INDICATIVE MODE. Perfect. Dual. ■>v } εΐα Pluperfect. Plur. εϊ&μεν, εϊατε ) εϊασι. Dual. ηειτον^ ηηείτην, Plur ■τ[ειμεν ) τ^ειτε, ηεισαν ί ΟΓ ήμεν, ήτε, ήσαν. First Aorist. είσάμην. Obs. 1. The present εϊμι has regularly the signification of the future ; as, slut και άγγελώ, Eurip. ; ϊμεν και intxsiQijaoiiev, Demosth. So in the infinitive and participle. Obs. 2. The imperfect and second aorist belong to epic poetry ; but ί'« and ΐεν, ΐτην and ϊβαν, are all that can be found, except in composition. "Hiov and yov, used by epic poets, and tfeiv, ηϊα, and ija, in a pluperfect form, are also found in the sense of the imperfect. Sing. ϊημι, ϊης, Ι'ησι, 3. "Ιημι, to go. INDICATIVE MODE. Present. I Dual. j ϊετον, ΐετον, Imperfect. Plur. Χεμεν ) Ι'ετε, ΙεΧσι. ϊεσαν. IRREGULAR VERBS IN μι. 117 Sing. OPTATIVE MODE. Present. Dual. Plur. ΙεΙη. INFINITIVE. Present. livat. PARTICIPLE. Present. ΙεΙς, Ιέντος. Sing. ϊε-μαι, σαι, τ α ι, MIDDLE VOICE. INDICATIVE MODE. Present. Dual. Plur. με&α, σ#ε, νται. με&ov f a&ov f a&ov t Imperfect. Ιέ~μην } σο, το, | με&ον } o&ov y σ&ην } | με&α } σ&ε, ντο IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. Present. Present. ϊεσο, Ιέσ&ω, || Ιέμεν-ος, η, ον. Class II. Ι. "Ιημι, to send. INDICATIVE MODE. Present. &}μ*, Sing. "ης, ϊησι, Dual. ϊετον ) ϊετον f Plur. ΐεμεν, ϊετε } Ιεΐσι Imperfect. Ίψ) 1ης, "η, | ΐετορ, ίέτην, | ΐεμεν, ϊετε, ϊεσαν. J18 VERB. First Future. Sing. ησ-ω, εις, ει, Dual. ετον, ετον, Plur. ομεν, ετε, ουσι First Aorist Perfect. Pluperfect. \κα. 1 εϊκα. Second Aorist. εΐκειν. Sing. \v f \ς, % Dual• ετον, ετην, Plur. εμεν, ετε, εσαν, or εϊμεν, εϊτε, εϊσαν IMPERATIVE MODE. Present, ftih, Ιέτω, j ϊετον, ίέτων, ϊετε, Ιέτωσαν. First Aorist. Perfect. \κον. εϊκε. U, Second Aorist. Sing. ετω, Ι Dua o Ι ετον, ετών, Ετε, Plur. ετωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. Present. Ιεί-ην, ης, η, | ητον, ήτην, \ ημεν , ητε, ήσαν First Future. Perfect. τροιμν. είκοιμι. Sing. ΒΪ-ην, ης, ης, Second Aorist. Dual. ητον, ήτην, Plur. ημεν, ητε, ήσαν. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Present. ίώ, If ς, if, Ι Ιψον, ίψον, \ ίωμεν, Ιψε, ίώσ*. Sing. IRREGULAR VERBS IN μι. 1 19 Perfect. Dual. . Plur. ητον, ψον ί ωμεν, ητε ί ωσι. Second Aorist. δ, I?, j, Ι \τον, \τον, \ &μεν, \τε, δσ*. INFINITIVE MODE. Present. First Future. ίέναι. τ\σειν. Perfect. Second Aorist. είχέναι. \\ είναι. PARTICIPLES. Present. First Future. Ιείς, ίεΐσα, ίέν. ησων, ησουσα, \σον. Perfect. Second Aorist. είχ&ς, είχνΐα, είχός. εις, εϊσα, εν. PASSIVE VOICE. INDICATIVE MODE. Present. Sing. ?e-«at, σο», rat, Dual. με&ον, σ&ον ) σ&ον } Plur. με&α, σ&ε } νται. Imperfect. Ιε-μην, σο, το, J με&ον, u&ov f σ&ην } | με&α, σ&ε, ντο. Perfect. εϊ-μαι, σαι, rou t | με&ον, σ&ον } a&ov f j με&α, σ#ε, νται. Pluperfect. εϊ-μην } σο, το, | με&ον } σ&ον, σ&ην, | με&α, σ&ε, ντο. Paulo-post-Future. First Aorist. First Future. εϊσομαι. ε&ην &, εϊ&ην. \\ ε&ήσομαν. 120 VERB. MIDDLE VOICE. Present and Imperfect like the Passive. First Aorist. Dual. Plur. άμε&ον, ao&ov f άσ&ην } J άμε&α, ασ^ε } αντο. First Future, ησ-ομαί, ^, «τα*, Ι 6με&ον 1 εσ&ον, εσ&ον, Ι όμε&α } εσ&ε, ονται. Second Aorist. εϊμην, εσο, ετο, | εμε&ον, ισ&0Ρ } εσ&ην, Ι εμε&α, εσ&ε, εντο, IMPERATIVE MODE. Second Aorist. ΐσω, £σ#ω, ίσ&ον, εσ&ων, | $σ#6, εσ&ωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. First Future. ήσοί-μην, ο, το, | με&ον, σ&ον } σ&ην, | με&α, σθ^, ντο. Second Aorist. εϊ-μην, ο, το, | με&ον } σ&ον 9 σ&ην, | με&α, σ&ε, ντο, SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Second Aorist. &uai f ij, f^ca, | ωμε&ον, fy&ov f \a&ov f | ωμ£#«, ζσ#ε, ώιτα*. INFINITIVE MODE. First Future. Second Aorist. ^σεσ&αι. \\ ia&cu. PARTICIPLES. First Future. Second Aorist. ήσόμεν-ος, η, ov, || «/e^-of, ?, oj>. IRREGULAR VERBS IN μι. 121 Obs. 1. This verb is placed here among the rest derived from ?ώ, whence it is formed by an improper reduplication ; but it has scarcely any irregu- larities, since it conforms almost entirely to iluiui. Obs. 2. 'Jfuui and iun;r, the present and imperfect middle, signify / send myself, &C., or / am impelled. Hence they are generally used in the sense of wishing; thus ϊεται αίνώς,ΐιβ earnestly wishes, Horn. Odys. ,*'. 3^7. 2. r Hu(u, to sit. INDICATIVE MODE. Present. Plur. ϊ]με&α, \σΰε, τ\ΐ'ται. Sing. Dual. \μαι, τ ( σ«(, \ται, | ημε&ον, rpifov, ησ#θί•, Imperfect. V n P'> h a0 i \ τ °ΟΧ \στο, \ fyis&o», \σΰον, ψ&ψ, | ηαε#α, \σ&ε, \ντο. Dual. Plur. εϊνται. IMPERATIVE MODE. Present. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Present. Present. Ija#ca. ημεν-ος, η, ον. 3. Είμαι, to clothe one's self. INDICATIVE MODE. Present and Perfect Sing. είμαι, είσαι, efrat &, εΐσται, Pluperfect. ε"μην } εΐσο &, εσσο, ε ho, Ι Ι εΓντο. εϊστο, εεστο, & εστο, | First Aorist. είσ- Λ έσσ- > αμήν, ω, ατο, \ άμε&ον } ασ&ον, άσ&ην } \ άμε&α, ασ&ε, αντο. εεισ- ) PARTICIPLES. Present and Perfect. First Aorist. είμένος. ϊσσάμενος. Obs. This verb may be considered as middle. The active is "ω or fvruiii, forming 'έοω 1st Fut., and Λοα 1st Aor., Inf. tlaai, with ο generally doubled ; thus ?σσω uiv, I will clothe him, Horn. Odys. π . 79. 11 122 VERB. Plur. με&α, σ#ε, νται. Class III. 1. Κύμαι, to lie down. INDICATIVE MODE. Present. Sing. Dual. χεΧ-μαι, σαι, ται, με-&ον, σχτον, σ&ον, Imperfect. ΙχεΙ-μην, σο, το, | με&ον, σ&ον, σ&ην, | με&α, σϋε, ντο. First Future. χείσ-ομαι, tj, εται } J όμε&ον, εσχτον, εσ%τον, | όμεχτα, εσ&ε } ονταν. IMPERATIVE MODE. Present. χεΐσο, χείσ&ω, Ι χεΐσ&ον f χείσ&ων, Ι χεΐσ&ε, χείσ&ωσαν. OPTATIVE MODE. Present. χεοί-μην, ο, το, | με&ον, σ&ον, σ&ην, J με&α, σ&ε, ντο. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Present. First Aorist. χίωμαι. χείσωμαι. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Present. Present. κεΐσ&αι. χείμεν-ος, η, ov. 2. "Ισημι, to know. INDICATIVE MODE. Present. Plur. αμεν &, μεν, ατε & τε, ασι. Sing. Dual. ϊσ-ημι, ης, ησι, άτον, ατον Imperfect. ϊσ-ην, ης, η, Ι ατον, άτην, j αμεν, ατε, ασαί* & αν IMPERATIVE MODE. Present. ϊσ-α&ι, & &ι, άτω & τω ί INFINITIVE. Present. Ισαναι. ατον & το^, άτων & των, ατε & τε, άτωσαν, τωσαν, &> των. PARTICIPLE. Present. ϊσα-ς, σα ν. IRREGULAR VERBS IN μι. 123 Sing. ϊσα-μαι, σαι, ται, Plur. με&α, σ#ε, νται. MIDDLE VOICE. INDICATIVE MODE. Present. Dual. με&ον, σ&ον } σ&ον, Imperfect. Ισα~μην 7 σο, το, | με&ον, σ&ον, σ&ην, | με&α, σ&ε, ντο INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Present. Present, ί'σασ^α*. Ισάμεν-ος, η, ον. Obs. The passive ϊοαμαι is seldom used. 'Επίσταμαι often occurs. 3. Φημι, to say. INDICATIVE MODE. Present. Dual. φατον, ορατό*', Imperfect. άτον, άτην, | αμεν ) ατε, αυαν&,αν. First Future. ετον, ετον, Ι ομεν, ετε, ονσι. First Aorist. ατον, άτην, J άμεν, ατε, αν. Second Aorist. ητον, ήτην, | ημεν, ητε, ήσαν. Ι Sing. φημί, φής, φησί, εφ-ην, ης, η, φήσ-ω, εις, ει, εφησ-α, ας, ε, εφ-ην, ης, η, φά&ι, φάτω, (fal -ην, ης, η, Plur. φαμεν, ορατέ, φασί. IMPERATIVE MODE. Present. φάτον } φάτων } | φάτε, φάτωσαν, OPTATIVE MODE. Present. ητον, ήτην, Vl^^t V TE t ν σαν 9 or μεν 3 τε, εν. First Aorist. φήσ~αιμι, αις, av t αιτον, αίτψ, | αιμεν, αιτε, αιεν. 124 VERB. φω, φτ^σ-ω, SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Present. Sing. I Dual. Plur. w> <*> I φψον, φψ:ον ί First Aorist. φωμεν, φψε 1 φώσι. V$> Tt> 1 ητον, ητον, ωμεν } ητε, ωσι. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. Present. Present. φάναν. φάς ί φάσα, φάν. First Aorist. First Future. φησαι. Ι! φήσων. Second Aorist. First Aorist. ψψαι. II φήσας. PASSIVE VOICE. INDICATIVE. IMPERATIVE. Perfect, ηέφαται. πεφάσΰω. INFINITIVE. τίεφάσ&αο. PARTICIPLE. πεφασμέν-ος, η, op. Sing. έφα-μην, σο, το, φάσ-ο, &ω. MIDDLE VOICE. INDICATIVE MODE. Second Aorist. Dual. με&ον, σ&ον, σ&ην, IMPERATIVE MODE. Second Aorist. &ov, &ων, Plur. με&α, σ#ε, ντο &ε. &ωσαν. INFINITIVE. Second Aorist. φάσ&αι. PARTICIPLE. Second Aorist. φάμεν-ος, η, ov. Obs. For εφψ, εφη, are frequently put ψ, η • as, ην δ' ίγω, said /, η δ' bg, said he. So ijul, for ψημί, say J, Aristoph. Ran. 37 LIST OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 125 DEFECTIVE VERBS. Many Greek verbs are defective in some of their tenses, which they supply from other verbs of the same derivation and signification, or of the same signification only. Thus, λ« ( to bring, ayayo), η^γάγον, ηγαγύμΐ]ν. X«, ) \ to please { άδέω ' ά Η σω > ¥>?*"> ¥ * & εάδον, χνω, ) ¥ ' ( εαδα, JEol. εϋΰδα. Verbs in α#ω and αιω, poetic derivatives from other verbs ; as, άμυνά&ω from άμϋνω, to defend ; σκεδαίω from σκεδάω, to scatter. al ifo}^\ to take, P W ' f X ~ K ' Ζ 16 * 171 "' m * ίλ °~ νμα1 ' τ ι ρηκα > ) * " ' * αΐσ&άνομαί } to perceive, αίσ&έω, αίσ^σομαι^σϋ-ημαι,^σ&όμην, alV ' l io i ncrease > όλ<%ω, άλ£τ|σω, τ^λδηκιχ. ,,,ν j /τ ί άλέκω. άΐέξασ&αι. άλεξω. to ward off ,< >■> >-, αϊ Vi ,, *- •"' \ άλεξεω, άλεξησω άλεζτισαι,. Π* 126 άλέομαι> ι άλινδέ& Λ άλίσκω, άλφαίνω, άμαρτανω ί άμβλίσκω, to avoid, to roll, to take, to find, to err, to miscarry, VERB. ( άλεύω. άλίω, άλόω. αΧωμν, άλφέω } ηλευσα, ήλεναμην &. ήλεάμην by syncope. άλτσω, τελικά. άλώ-σω, σομοα, ηλωσα, ηλωκα &, έάλωκα, ηλω- μαι. ήλων &> έαλων. άλφήσω & άλφέσω, τιλφον. άμαρτέω, άμαρτή-σω, σομαι, ή- μάρτη-σα, κα, μαν, ήμαρτήβ-ην, ημαρτον. άμβροτέω ) ημβροτον. άμβλόω, άμβλώσω. Verbs in ανω, derivatives from other verbs, take their tenses from their primitives ; ' as, ανξάνω } to increase, αυξήσω, ηϋξηκα, from αύξέω. άι>ώγω, -^ a s \ > to order. ηνωγα &, l ■ . ' &νωγα } J απεχθάνομαι, to be hated, i *™X™<»> *™X»¥j<», *M- C άρέω, άρέ-σω, σομαι, ηρεσα, αρέσκω, to please, ^ ηρεσαμην, ^ιρεσμαι, ή- ρέσ&ην, αύξέω, αύξή-σω, σομαι,, ηϋξη- σα, κα, μαι } ηύξύ&ην, {άχ&έω, αχ&έσομαι & άχ&ή- σομαι, ήχ&έσ&ην, ά- χ&εσ&ήσομα^ Verbs in αω, desideratives, inceptives or imitatives, and poetic derivatives from other verbs; as, μα&ητιάω } to desire to learn; κείαινιάω, to he blackish; Ισχανάω from ίσχάνω ) to restrain. {άνωγέω, Imp. ηνώγονν. άνώγημι, Imper. άνώγη&ι, &νω•> αύξανο), \ αί)£ω, V άέξω, ) to increase ■ \ άχϋ-ομαι, to be indignant, βαίνω, to go, βιβάω, βίβημι, βή-σο), σο μ α ν, εβησα, έβησαμην, βέβηκα &, Ion. βέβαα } βέβημαι & βέβαμαι, Ιβα&ηρ, 2d F. Μ. βέομαυ. Pres. Part. βιβΰ>ρ. 2d Α. Ιβψ, Pres. Part β,βός. LIST OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 127 ιχλώ, \ ϊάλον, ) βάλλω, β ϊβάλο to throw, βιώσκω, to live, βλαστανω, to bud, ίβιάω,' ( βίωμι, βό βλέω, βγήσω, βέβλη-κα, μαι, βεβλή. σομαι,έβλή&ην,βλη&ήσομαι. βαλλέω, βαλλήσω. βλημν, ϊβλην, 2d Α. Optat. Μ. 2d Pers. βλεΐο. βολίω, βεβόλημαι, βέβολα. βιόω, βιώ-σω, σομαι, έβίωσα, έβιω- . σάμην, βεβίω-κα, μαι,. έβίων. βλαστέω, βλαστήσω, έβλάστησα, βε- βλάστηκα & έβλάστηκα, ( ίβλαστον. C βοσκέω, βοσκή-σω, σομαι, έβόσκησα, Ν βεβόσκηκα, βοσκη&ήσομαι. ) βόω, βόσω, εβοσα &, εβωσα, βέβο- ^ κα &&βέβωκα. ί βονλέω, βονλήσομαι, βεβονλημαι, \ έβουλή&ην, προβέβουλα. ω, βρώσω, βέβρω-κα, μαι, βε~ βρώσομαι, έβρώ&ην, βρω&ή* σομαι. εβρων. εβρώ&ω, βεβρώ&οις. Verbs in βω, preceded by a consonant, or by ε • as, φ^ω, to feed; σέβω, to honor. to feed, βούλομοο, to will, Βοώσκω, ) M w r > to eat, βιβρωσκω ) * Ϊβρόω, βρώμι, βεβοώι γαμέω, .* γαμήσω. Ψ , ' ! ' \ to marry, γαμέσω, ( •* γεγάμηκα,) γηράσκω, to grow old, ' J " ' > to become, γίνομαι, ) ' ώ**™* \ to know, γινωσκω, ) ' Γ. γάμω, γαμώ, εγημα, έγημαμην. γηράω, γηράσομαι, έγήρασα, γεγή- ρακα. γήοημι, Pres. Inf. γηράναι, Part. γηράς. γενίω, γενήσομαι, έγενησάμην, γε~ γένημαι, έγερήθην,έγενόμην, γέγονα. γείνω, γείνομαι, έγείνάμην. γάω, γέγάα, Ion. for γέγηκα. γνόω, γνώσομαι, έγνωσα, ϊγνω~κα > σμαι, έγνώσ&ην, γνωσθήσα- μαι. γνωιιι, ε"γνων. 128 δαίω, to learn. δ α (ω, to divide, δάκνω, to bite, δαρ&άνω, to sleep, δείδω, \ δείσω, > δέδεικα, ) to fear, δέομαι, to want, διδάσκω, \ διδάξω, \ δεδίδάχα, ) to teach, διδράσκω, to run away δοκέω. VERB. J. δαέω, δαή-σω, σομαι, δεδάψ κα, μαι, έδάην, δέδάα, (Ρ. Μ. δέδηα, 2d Α. Μ. δάωμαι, from δαίω, to burn.) ** { δάζω, δ άσο μα ι, έδασαμην, \ δ έδ άσμα ι. {δήκω, δήξομαι, δέδηγμαι, έδήχ&ην, δηχΰ-ησομαι, ϊδακον, C δαρ&έω, δαρ&ήσομαι, δεδάρ- < <&ηκα, έδάρ&ην, εδαρ- { 3-ον & εδρα,'&ον. ( δέδτμι, Imperat. δέδϊ&ι, I Poet, δείδϊ&ι. { δίω, εδιον, δέδια. j δεέω, δεήσομαι, δεδέημαι, έδεή'&ην, δεη&ήσομαι. διδασκήσω, έδιδάσκη- σα. δράω, δρά-σω, σομαι, έδρα- ( διδασκέω, διδασκήσω, έδιδάσκη- \ σα. ί 6ράω % Ορά-σω, σο μα < σα, δέδρακα. { δρτ]μι, εδρην &, έδρα ϊοκέω, \ Poet, δοκήσω, \ to seem, δεδόκηκα, ) δόκω. δ όξω, εδοξα, δέδογμαι. φ ίύναμαι, to be able, δυνάω, δυνήσομαι, έδυνησα- μην, δεδύνημαι, έδυ- νή&ην, δυνάζω, έδυνάσ&ην, δύω, δύ-σω, σομαι, εδνσα, ίδυσάμην, δέδν-κα, δύνω. to go in, put on, ^ μαι, έδύ&ην, δυ&ή- σομαι. ϋμι, εδυν. Verbs in δω preceded by a consonant ; as, κνίίνδω, to roll. E. εγείρω, to rouse, εΎρω, ^\'(φμψ ί έγρήγο§α. LIST OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 129 ϊδω, -\ εδομαι, / 2d F. M. for C t0 eat > έδοΰμαι, s ήδεκα & έδήδε-κα, σμαΐ) ήδέσ&ην, ήδα &, εδηδα. ήδοκα &, έδι\δο-κα, μαι. Verbs in ε&ω, poetic derivatives from other verbs; as, φλε- γέ&ω from φλέγω, to burn, εΐδέω, είδήσω, εϊ'δησα, εΐδη- εϊσω, είδον, ΐδον, οϊδα, to see, or to know, χα, Sync, εϊδα, Inf. εΐδέναι, Plup. είδψ χειν, Sync, εϊδειν, Att. γδειν. εϊδημι, Optat. είδείψ. Verbs in εινω, polysyllable derivatives ; as, άλεείνω from άλεύω, to avoid. εϊρω, ) έρώ, J to say, to ask, < ® * εϊρη-χα, μαι, Paul.-p.- F. είρήσομαι, είρέ&ην. Verbs in ειω, desideratives formed from futures; as, γαμη- σείω, to desire to marry, from γαμέω, γαμήσω. έλάω, έλασω, Att. ^ω, ψα- σα, ήλασαμην, τ^λακα to drive, Ζ &, έλήλάκα, ψ,άμαι, i έλήλάμαι & τήλασμαι, \ ψ.ά&ην &, ^Ιάσϋ-ην. to ask { έρέω ' ^ σ °μ°"• ' ( είρέω, είρήσομαι, to go to ruin, έρρέω, έρρήσω, ^ρρησα. to make red, έρυϋέω, Ιρυ&ήσω, ηρυΒηκα. C έλεύ&ω, έλεύσομαι, ψ.ενσα, ψ,ύ&ον, Sync, ty&ov, Perf. Μ. φν&α & έλήλϋ&α. %δω, which see. εύδέω, εύδήσω. εύρέω, εύρήσω, εύρησαμην, Sync, εύράμην, ενρη- κα, μαι, εύρέ&ην, εύρε&ήσομαι, ενρον $ εύρόμην. έλαννω, ϊρομαι, ) *εϊ'ρομαι, ) ίρρω, έρυ&αίνω, έρυ&ανώ Ζρχομαι, ε'σ&ω έσ&ίω εΰδω, ευρίσκω, to come f to eat, to sleep, to find, 130 %χω 9 Υ $ξω, ] εψω, to have, to cook, VERB. σχεω, έψέω. σχή-σω } σομαι, εσχη- κα } μαι, εσχέ&ψ f σχε- ϋ-ησομαι,, εσχον, έσχό- μην. 2d Α. Imper. σχές. εψή-σω, σομαι. ζάω, ϊ ζήσω, $ ζωννύω, ) ζώνννμι, ) ήβάσκω, &έλω, Ό-ηγανω, &ιγγανω, -&νήσκω } ΐ ΰνήξω, ] &6 &ρώσ ρνίω, \ ρννμι, \ ώσκω, ) ίδρννω, ) ίδρνρϋ-ην, j ίζανω, to live, to gird, ζόω, Η. to be young, ήβάω, Θ. to mil, { * Μω • to sharpen, | ^ ω * to touch, Όίγω, f Ό-νάω, to die, to leap, to place, to set, &ήνω, τε&νήκω, τέ&νημι, ( S -ορέω, Ι. C ίδρνω, ίζάω, ίζάα \ΐζω } εζην, ζηθ -t & ζη. ζώ-σω, σομαι, έζω- σα, έζωσαμην, εζω-κα, σμαι, έζώσ&ην. ήβήσω, %\βψσα, κα 3-ελήσω, έ&έίησα, τε- &έληκα. S -ήξω, ε&ηξα, έ&ηξα- μην, τέ&ηγμαι. ■Q -ί-ξω, ξομαν, ε&ϊγον, τέ&νηκα, τέ&ροία, τέ- -&νεικα & τε&νεια^ τε&ρεώς, (-ώσα, gen. -ωτος.) Ιΰανον, 2d F. Μ. #ofe νονμαι. τε&νψξω, ξομαι. Pr. Imperat. τέ&να- &ι, Opt. τε-ίϊναΐην, Inf. τεΰ-ράναι, Part. τε&νάς, 2d Α. εΰνην. &ορήσω, ϊ&ορον, $ό- ρουμαν. ίδρϋσω, ίδρυσα, Ιδρν- σάμην, ΐδρν-κα 9 μαν 9 Ιδρν&ην. ίζψσω, σομαι, ϊζησα, ϊ-σω, σομαι, Ισα. LIST OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 131 Verbs in ^ω, derived from contracts of the same significa- tion ; as, νεμεσίζω, from νεμεσάω, to be angry ; πολεμίζω, from ηολεμέω, to wage war. Ιχνέομαι, Ιλάσκομαι } ϊπτημι, ) ετττην, ) to direct, to come, to propitiate, to fly, Ι&ύω, f Ίκω, \ ft", ^ ίλάω. ϊλημί, πτάω. Ι&νσω, ϊ&νσα. Ι'ξομαι, Τγμαί ί ίκόμην, ϊξον. ίΧάσομαι, ίλασαμην, ϊληκα, ίλάσ&ην, ίλα- σ&ήσομαι. ΐλα&ι, Pr. Μ. ΐλαμαι. πτή-σω } σομαι, πέ- πτάμαι. χαίω, χαύσω, κέκαυχα. χεραννύω, χεράνννμι, χίρνημι, χερδαίνω κε χεχ κιχανω, ) to", ] ρδανώ, > κέρδάκα, ) κίχτ κλαίω, κλανσω, κέκλαυκα. χλύω, κορεννύω, ) κορέννϋμι } J :ί κρεμάνννμι γ.ρεμαννίω to burn, to mix, to gain, to overtake, to weep, to hear, to satisfy, to hang, \ χάω, ϊκηα, έχηαμην. Ι χείω, %xBiot f έκειδίμην. ' χεράω, κεράσω, έκέρασα, εκε- ρασαμην y κεκέρασμαι, έκεράσ&ην, κερασϋ-ι\- σο μα ι. χράω, κράσω,χέκρα-κα, μαι, έκρα&ην } κρα&ι\σο- μαι, χερδέω, κερδή-σω, σομαι. έ- χέρδησα, χεκέρδηχα, χερδη&ήσομαι. χιχέω, κιχήσομαι, έκίχησα, έκιχησαμην, εκϊχον. χλαιέω. κλαιήσω. ί κλνμι, ζ- χορέω, Imperat. χλϋ&ι & χέκλϋ&ι. κορέσω, έκόρεσα, £κο- ρεσάμην, κεκόρ-ηκα, ημαί &, εσμαι, έκορέ- σ&ην. κρεμάω, κρεμάσω, κρεμήσομαι, έκρέμασα, έκρεμασά- μην, έκρεμάσ&ην. χρέμημι, κρέμαμαι. 132 VERB. χτείνω, -ν χτενω, ( ϊκτακα & ί to Μΐ > %κταγκα, J χυλίνδω, to roll, χννέω, ) , . „ , ) to kiss, χνν-ψω, ) ' ( κτημι, εκτην, 2d Α. Μ. £κτα- μην, Inf. κτάσ&αι, Part, κτάμενος. χ- κυλίω, κυλίσω, έκνλισα, έκν» \ λ(σ-&ην ) κυλισϋ-ήσο- ) μα ι. ν κυλινδέω, κυλινδήσω. ί κύω, κνσω, εκυσα &, εκυσ \ σα. μαν&άνω, μάχομαι, μέλλω, ιιίλω. Γ Μχ ω ι λήξομαι, λέληχα, Att. λα Ί χο.νω, ίο obtain by lot, \ * ΐληχα > ei% W«>, «*■ / ^ 0,/ • ν λέγχω, λέλογχα. λήβω, λήψομαι, λέληφα, Att. εΐληφα, λέλημμαι &> εϊλημμαι, έληφ&ην, ληφ&ήσομαι, ϊλάβον, λαμβάνω, to receive, έλαβόμην. λαβέω, λελάβηκα. λάμβω, λάμψομαι, έλαμψα- μην, λέλαμμαι, έλάμ- φ&ην. λή\)ω } Imp. ελη&ον, λή-σω, σομαι, λέλησμαι, & λέλασμαι, λελήσομαι, έλήσ&ην, ελα&ον, έλα- -&6μην, λέλη&α. λα^α^ω, to be concealed, Μ. ί μα&έω, μα&ήσομαι, μεμά&η• \ κα, ϊμά&ον. ,- μαχέω, μα χέ σομαι &, /^ α Χψ \ σομαι, έμαχεσαμην &, j έμαχησαμην, μεμάχη- C μαι, 2d F. μαχονμαι, to be about to do, μελλέω, μελλήσω, έμέλλησα. s- μελέω, μελή-σω, σομαι, έμέ- λησα, μεμέλη-κα, μαι & μέμβλημαι, έμελή. &ην } εμελον, μέμηλα. to learn, to fight, to be a concern to, ιγνίω, ) Ιγνϋμι, ) LIST OF DEFECTIVE VERBS 133 uly to mix, μφνήσκω, to remember, μίμνω, μοργνύω, ) μόργνϋμι, ) to remain, to wipe off, μ(-ξω, ξομαι, εμιξκ, μέμιγμαι, μεμίξομαν, έμίχί/ΐ/ν, εμΧγην, μιγ^- σομαι. μνάω, μνή-σω, σομαι, εμνη- σα, έμνησ(ίμην > μέ- μνημαι, μεμνήσομαι, έμνήσ&ην, μνησΰήσο- μαι. μενέω, μεμένηκα. μόργω, μόρξο), έμορξάμην. Ν. to dwell, ( νάω, νάσομαι, ϊνασα, ένα» \ σαμην, ένάσ&ην. Verbs in ναω and νεω, formed from others by inserting ν • as, περνάω, to sell, from ηεράω • some of which change s into »• as, πιτνέω, to fall, from πέτω. ο. όδάξω, οζω, υσο), ωδα, Att. οδωδα, οίδαΐνο), \ οίδανώ, > οϊδίσκω, ) οϊομαι, ) οϊμαι, ) οϊχομαι, to bite, to smell. όδαξέω, όδαξήσω. ί όζέω, όζέσω &, ώζεσα. δζήι όλισ&αίνω to swell, to think, to go away, > to slide, ανω, ) ' 8Μϋ/ 5ω, ϊ φι, ( to destroy, 12 οΐδέω, οίδήσω, ώδη-σα, κα. ( οΐέω, οΐήσομαι, ωημαι, φτ\- ( &ην. {οΐχέω, οΐχήσομαι, φχη-κα, μαι. οΐχόω, φχωκα. {όλισ&έω, όλισ&ήσω, ώλίσ&η» σα, κα, ώλισ&ον, ώλίσ&ην. όλέω, όλέσω, ωλεσα, ωλεκα & όλώλεκα, ώλέσ&ην, (ύλον όλω, ώλόμην, όλονμαν, ώλα &, δλω- λα. 134 ομνύω, I ομννμι, j ύμόργννμν, ονημν, \ )νίνημν, J όρννω, ) ορνϋμι, ) οφείλω, οφλω, όφλισκάνω } πάσχω, πέσσω. πεταννύω, ) νμι, ] πετάνννμι τομαι, ) ταμαι, ) πέτομαι, πί πηγνύω, ) πίνω πωμν ;! ίο swear, to wipe off, to benefit, to excite, to smell, to owe, to suffer, to cook, to spread, to fly, to fasten, to drink, όμόω, όμόργω, όνάω, C ορω, {όφειλε^ όφλέω, 77. πή&ω, πα&έω, πέν&ω, πίπτω, πετάζω, πετάω, ποτάω, πήγω, f πόω, πιω. πιΐιι^ όμόσω, ωμοσα, ώμο- σάμην, όμώμο-κα, μαι, & σμαν, ώμόϋην, 2d F. Μ. όμονμαι. όμόρξω, ώμορξάμην. όνή-σω, σομαι, ώνησα, ώνησαμην &, ώνάμην, ωνημαι, ώνή&ην. ορσω, ώρσα, ώρμαι, ορωρα &, ώρορα, ώρό- μην. όσφρήσομαι, ώσφρό- μην. όφειλήσω, ώφείλη-σα, κα, ώφειλον &, ωφελον. όφλήσω, ωφλη-σα, κα. πείσομαν, Boeot. for πήσομαι, επησα, επά- 3~ov f πέπη&α, πα&ησω, έπά&ησα, πεπά&ηκα. πέπον&α. πέψω, ϊπειρα, πέπεμ- μαι, έπέφ&ην. πετασω, έπέτασα, πε- πέτασμαι, πέπτασμαι, &> πίπτάμαι, έπετά- σ&ην. πετίψομαι, έπετά- σ&ην, ποτίψομαι, πεπότη- μαι. πήξω, έπηξα, έπηξά- μην, πέπηγμαι, έπή- χ&ην, έπα,γην, παγή- σομαι, πέπηγα. πώσω, πέπωκα, πέπο- μαι, έπό&ην, πο&ψ σομαι. πίσομαι, ϊπιον, 2d F. Μ. πίομαν for πιον- μαι. Imperat. πϊ&ι. LIST OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 135 πιπίσκω, πίπλημι^ \ πίμπλημι, > πιαπλανω, ) πιπράσκω. πίπρημι, ) πΐμπρημι, ) πίπτω , πτάρννμαι, πνν&6.νομαι, ρέζω, ιέξω, \ ϊρρεξα, ) ρηγνύω, ) ρωννύω ρώννϋμι to give to drink, πιω, ^ πλάω, to fill % to sell, to burn, to fall, to sneeze, to inquire, to do, to flow, to break, ί ' > to strengthen. 1%7ν7μ\, } t0 ^inguish, σκεδ σκεδά αννύω, ) άννϋμι, ) πλημι, περάω, πρή&ω, πτόω, πέτω, πεσέω, πταίρω, πεύ&ω, Ρ. ( ρυέω, C ρήσσω, ρόω, πλήσω, επλησα, έπλη~ σάμηρ, πέπλησμαν, έπλήσθ-ην^ πέπληΰα. Imp. Pas. έπλήμην. Sync, πράω, πράσω, πέπρα-κα, μαι, πε- πράσομαι, έπραθ-ην, πρα&ήσομαι. πρήσω, επρησα, πε- πρη-κα, σμαι., πεπρή- σομιχι, έπρήσ&ην. πέπτωκα, έπεσα, έπεσάμην. επεσον, 2d F. Μ. πε- σόν μα ι. επτάρον. πενσομαι, πέπυσμαι, έπυ&όμην. ερξο Σ. σβέω, σβημι, to scatter, Att. ερδω Μ. εοργα. ρυήσομαι, έρρύηκα, έρρύην, ρήξω, ερρηξα, έρρηξα- μην, ερρηγα &, ερρω- γα, έρραγην, ραγή- σομαι. ρώσω, 'έρρωσα, ερρω- μαι, έρρώσ&ην } ρω- σ&ήσομαι,, ερρωσο, farewell. σβέσω, ϊσβεσα, ε'σβεκα & εσβηκα, ϊσβεσμαι, ίσβέσϋ-ην, σβεσ&ήσο- μαι. ϊσβην. σκεδάσω, έσκέδοίσα, έσκέδασμαι, έσκεδά- σ&ην. 136 σκέλλω, VERB. {σκάλλω, εσκηλα. σκλάω, εσκληκα. σκίημι, 2d Α. Inf. σκλψαι. Verbs in σκω, derivatives from verbs in ω pure, form their tenses from their primitives ; as, ευρίσκω, to find, εύρήσο), εΰρηκα, from εύρέω. σπένδω, to pour out. ύω, \ νμν, \ u, ) νννύω, ) -, , _ > to spread^ στορεννύω, στορένννμι,, J» to spread, στόρνϋμι στρωννύω, σιρώνννμΐ) $ vu °*"* σχέ&ω, to have, {σπείω, σπεί-σω, σομοα, εσπει- σα, έσπεισαμην, εσπει- σμοα, έσπείσ&ην. {στορέω, στορέσω, έστόρεσα, έστορεσάμην, έστορέ- σ&ην. ( στρόω, στρώσω, ϊστρωσα, έ- \ στρωσαμην, εστρωμαι. σχέω, See εχω. ταλάω, > τέτλημι τανύω, | ταννσω, ) τέμνω, τεμώ, τέτμψ τίκτω. ■■■'} τιτράω, τίτρημν, \ τετραίνω, ' τετρανώ, ■ ιιτρώσκω, τρέχω, \ &ρέξω, J ίγω, "J ρώξομαί, > τραγον, ) τρώγω τ to bear, to extend, to cut, to bring forth, to bore, to wound, to run, to eat, f τλάω, τλήσομαι, τέτληκα. \ τλημι, ετλην. τάζο), εταγον, τέτα^α. {τεμέω, τεμήσω. τμήγω, τμήξω, ϊτμηξα, ετμα- γον, έτμαγην. {τέκω, τέ-ξω, ξομαι, έτέχ&ην, ετεκον, έτεκόμην, τέ- τοκα. ίτράω, τρήσω, ετρησα, τέτρη- μαν. {τρόω, τρώ-σω, σομαι, έτρω- σα, τέτρωμαι, έτρώ- &ην, τρωϋ-ι]σομαι. {δραμέω, δεδράμη-κα, μαι. δρέμω, εδράμον, 2d F. Μ. δραμονμαι, δέδρομα. !φάγω, Μφαγον, 2d F. Μ. φά- γομαι for φαγονμαι. LIST OF DEFECTIVE VEHBS. 137 ζ τεύχυ), τεύξομαι, χετευχα, ε- τυγχάνω. to obtain, happen, < , , ' , , ,Λ ' ' rr ' J τΐ'/εω, τυ/ησω, έτνχησα, τε- \. τύχηκα. δπισχνέομαι, to promise, ίύποσχέω, ύποσχήσομαι, ύττέσχη» μαι, ύπεσχ-έ&ην } ό- μην. Verbs in ν&ω, poetic derivatives from other verbs ; as, φ&ινυ&ω from φ$1νω, to destroy. Verbs in w», polysyllables ; as, δεικνύω, to show. Φ. φασκω, \ πιφάσκω, > τπςραΰσκω, ) φέρω, φ&άνα φ&ίνω φύο) to say, to bear, to be sooner, to destroy, ύω, \ ςτι'σο), > to πέφνκα, ) produce, 12* φάω, φημί, οϊω, φησω, εφησα. εφην } έφάμην. ο\'-σω, σομαι, οίσ&ή• σομαι. ένέγκω, 1st Α. ?\νεγκα, ηνεγκα- μην, τ^νεγκον, ηνεγκό- μην. ενέκω, ένήροχα, ένήνεγμαι, τ\ν&χϋ•ην,£νεχθι\σομαι. \οη.£νεΙκω, 1st Α. ^νεικα, ήνει- καμην , ένήνειγμαι, ήνεΐχ&ην. φορήσω, έφόρησα, πεφύρημαι, Sync. φρέω, φρήσω, εφρησα. 2d Α. Imperat. φρές. φ&άσω } φϋ-ησομαι, έ'φ#α-σα, κα. 'έφ&ην, φ#Τ-σω, σομαι, έ'φ#Γ« σα, Ι'φ-σ^κα, εφ&ϊμαι. φορέω, φρημι, {φ#άω, φΰημι, ί φ#ί'ω, φνμι 138 VERB. Χ ρω, \ χρω, \ \χαρκα, ) χαίρω χαρώ κέχαρ χαρέω, to rejoice. to receive, hold. χανδάνω, χάσκω, \ κάζω,) t0 Z a P e > ΖΙΤμι,} tOCOl ° r > χασ χρω χρών χωννυω χώννϋμι . ' > to heap up, Ω. ώ&έω, έώ&ονν ώ&ιησω :} t0 ω&ω. push, χαρή-σω, σομαι, κε- χάρη-κα, μαι, κεχα- ρήσομαι, έχαρην. χαιρήσω, έχαίρησα. ϊχάδον, κέχανδα for κέχάδα. χείσομαν. χάνω, χανουμαι, εχα~ νον , κέχηνα. χρώσο), εχρωσα, κέ• χρωσμαι. χώσω, έχωσα, κέχω- κα, σμαι, έχώσ&ην, χωσ&ήσομαι. ω-σω, σομαι, &σα & Ι'ωσα, έωσάμην, εω- κα, σμαι, Ιώσ&ην^ ώσ&ήσομαι IMPERSONAL VERBS. Impersonal verbs are either used alone, or they are accom- panied by an infinitive or part of a sentence with which they agree. Most of them are also more or less frequently used personally, sometimes with rather a different meaning. The following are some of those in most frequent use. άν-ήκει, προσήκει, it belongs, it is suitable; αρέσκει, it pleases ; δει, it is necessary; δοκεΐ, it seems; ενδέχεται, it is possible ; ενεστι, εξεστι, πάρεστι, it is lawful, it is allowable ; εοικε, it befits, it is likely ; επέρχεται, it occurs, it offers ; μέλει, it is a concern ; πρέπει, it becomes ; συμβαίνει, it happens ; συμφέρει, it is profitable ; φιλεΐ, it is wont ; χρ!\, it behoves ; άπόχρη, it suffices, it is sufficient. Obs. 1. Under impersonal verbs may be comprehended those which denote changes of the weather, as, νει, νίψει, βροντά, which grammarians explain by an ellipsis of Θεός, Ζευς, or άι,ρ, sometimes expressed, as, νει 6 ΘεΌς, Herodot. Obs. 2. Many verbs are used impersonally in the passive voice, even neuters which otherwise can have no proper passive, as, λύεται, λείπεται, ϊγνωαται, εϊρηται, ηκουσται, εΐμαρται, βεβίωται, κεχύρενται. ADVERBS. PARTICLES. 139 The name of particles is given to the adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions, that is, to the indeclinable parts of speech. ADVERBS. I. The article, substantives, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, are used adverbially. 1. Substantives and adjectives in the accusative, frequently with the article; as, αρχί,ν, altogether; τίλος, finally ; τϊ,ν ποώτητ, at first ; τίν ταχίστην, in the quickest manner. Particularly neuter adjectives ; as, ταχύ, quickly; συνεχές, continually; το παλαι'ον, formerly ; ijavjra f quietly; τΐχ, τελευταία, at last. 2. The article, substantives, adjectives, and pronouns, in the dative ; as, τη, here, or there; σπονδή, hardly ; δηιιοσία, publicly; ίδια, privately; τω δίκαίω, justly, with justice ; ταντη, this way, thus. '3. Substantives, adjectives, and ' pronouns, in the genitive ; as, του λοιπόν, henceforth, hereafter ; αντον, there, here. 4. Substantives, adjectives, and pronouns, with prepositions preceding ; as, παραχρήμα, immediately ; ϊκποδών, out of the way, afar off; καθόλου, universally, altogether ; καϋαπερ, just as. 5. The imperatives of some verbs; as, αγε, φέρε, ϊ'θι, ί'τε, come on; αιιέλει, nay, indeed, assuredly. So the second aorist indicative ωφελον, or οφελον, I wish ; and the optative εϊεν, be it so, well, from ειη. II. Derivative adverbs come from nearly all the parts of speech, and are too numerous to be specified, but some of their principal terminations are ο>ς, δον, δην } ει } τι, ιστι, ακ^, and ω. 1. Adverbs in ως are formed from the genitive plural ; as, from σοφών, οοφώς, wisely ; πρεπόντων, πρεπόντως, suitably, in a becoming manner. 2. Those in δον are generally derived from the nominative ; as, from αγέλη, άγεληδον, in fiocks ; ομόθυμος, ομοθυμαδόν, unanimously ; κνων, κνν'ος, κννηδ'ον, like a dog. 3. Others in δην generally come from verbs, but some in αδην or ινδην from substantives; as, from συλλαμβάνω, συλλήβδην, in a word, summarily ; κρνπτω, κρνβδην, secretly ; σπόρος, σποραδην, here and there, scatter ingly ; πλοντίνδην, according to wealth. 4. Some adverbs derived and compounded from substantives and verbs end in ει and τι ■ as, πανδημεί, in a body; αμαχητί and άμαχεί, without fighting ; ίγρηγορτι, watchfully. 5. Those in ιστι are mostly derived from verbs j as, from Έλληνίζω, 'Ελληνιστί, after the manner of the Greeks, in Greek. 6. Those in ακίς come from numerals above τρις' as, from πέντε, πεντάκις, five times. 7. Adverbs formed from prepositions end in ω ■ as, from ες, εξω, with- out; κατά, κάτω, below. 140 PARTICLES. III. Certain adverbs of place, answering to the questions where 1 whither ? whence ? are chiefly derived from nouns ; those denoting the place where ending in <χι, ει, οι, ου, σι, &ι, ω, and a few in χη • whither, in δε, ζε, σε • and whence, in &εν. Primitives. Where. χαμαί, on the ground, Ικεΐνος, ίκεί, there, οίκος, οίκοι, at home, βμ'ος, όμοϋ, in the same place, Ά&ήναι, Ά&ήνγσι, at Athens, 'Ολυμπία, ^Ολυμπ'ιασι, at Olympia, Ουρανός, Ουρανό&ι, in Heaven, ava, ανω, above, πας, παντός, πανταχη, every where. Whither. χαμαζε, to the ground, Ικείσε, thither, οϊκιχδε, home, or towards home, όμύαε, to the same place. ^ΛΰψαΙε, to Athens, 5 ΟλνμπΊαδε, to Olympia, Ονρανόσε, Οϊϊρανόνδε, to Heaven, ανω, upwards, πανταχόσε, to every side, Whence. χαμόΰεν, from the ground. έκεΐ&εν, thence. οϊκο&εν, from home. όμόϋεν, from the same place 'Λΰ^ν^εν, from Athens. Όλνμπία&εν, from Olympia. Ονρανόΰεν, from Heaven. ανωϋεν, from above. πανταχόϋεν, from every side. Obs. Adverbs derived from prepositions have but one termination for the place where and whither ; thus, κάτω stands for below and downwards. Likewise έν&αδε, ίνταύΰα, ενταυϋοΐ, ωδε, stand for here and hither; ου, οπού, οι, οποί, where, whither ; άλλαχον, elsewhere, to another place ; and sometimes εκεί, there, thither. Moreover some adverbs in &εν denote the place where, as Ιγγν&εν, πρόσ&εν, έμπροσθεν, οπισ&εν. IV. Some adverbs have such an affinity, that, beginning with a vowel, they are indefinites ; with n, interrogatives ; with τ, redditives. 'ho Indefinite. C which way, πη,^- by what means. r C hoto far, **' ifor what reason. °™' 6π6τε > \when. ο&εν, όπόϋεν, whence, odi, where. όσον, how much, οίον, after xohat manner. όσακις, how often. nterrooative. ,. t C which way ? 71 *l ' (by what means ? ^ m C how far? πω ' tf or what reason ? T i ' i when ? νίκα ; ) πό&εν ; whence ? π 6-9 1 ; where ? πόσον ; hoto much ? ποιον ; after what manner. ποσάκις ; how often ? ποτέ πη this way. by that means. Redditive. τΐ,δε, or ταύτη, ^ so far, for that reason. > then. τόϋεν, thence. τό&ι, there. τόσον, so much τ οίον, after that manner. τ οσάκις, so often. τότε, τψϊκα, ADVERBS. 141 ADVERBIAL PARTICLES USED IN COMPOSITION. Λοι, tqi, βον, δα, ζα, λα, λι, βηι, prefixed to words, increase their signifi- cation ; as, αρίδηλος, very manifest; ερίβρομος, loudly roaring; βονλϊμος, exesssive hunger ; δάσ/.ιος, very shady ; ζάπλουτος, very rich; λάβρος, vo- racious ; λιπάντ,ρος, very bad ; βριι'.πΰος, loudly shouting. Jvc signifies trouble, difficulty, or misfortune ; as, δυσβάστακτος, difficult to be borne; δυστυχεω, to be unfortunate. Its opposite is ευ, which, how- ever, is not an inseparable particle ; as, ενβάσταχτος, easy to be borne ; ΐύτυχίω, to be fortunate. Νε and νη denote privation; as, νίποδες, having no feet, or very short feet; ν^χεστος, incurable; ν>[ρι$μος, innumerable: but sometimes νη increases; as, ν^χϋτος, widely flowing. Λ from άνευ or ατερ signifies privation ; as, αόρατος, invisible. From ayavxi denotes increase; as, άζΰλος, vary woody. From αμα it implies union and collection; as, "άλοχος, one of the same bed, a wife. Sometimes it is redundant ; as, "άσταχυς, the same as σταχΰς, an ear of corn. It often assumes ν before a vowel; as, ανάξιος, unworthy. INTERJECTIONS. Interjections are included in Greek under adverbs of exclamation, of which the following are the principal. 1. Rejoicing ; as, ίου. 2. Grieving ; as, ίου, ω. 3. Laughing; as, α, a. 4. Bewailing ; as, αϊ, oT, ιώ, οτοτοΓ, or όττοτοΓ. 5. Wishing ; as, εί, εί'•#ε. 6. Rejecting ; as, άπαγε. 7. Praising ; as, εία, εύγε. 8. Condemning; as, ώ, ψεϋ 9. Admiring ; as, ω, βαβαί, παπαΐ, αιβοΐ. 10. Deriding ; as, ίοΰ. 11. Calling ; as, ω. 12. Enjoining silence ; as, η., η. 13. Threatening ; as, oval, 14. Raging ; as, svot. Obs. The Greek grammarians seem to have improperly reckoned as adverbs, what in the Latin, and other languages, are called interjections; since the latter are mere sounds excited by strong emotion, and have no close connection with the rest of the sentence, for the cases joined with some of them may be easily explained by an ellipsis, except the vocative, which is always placed absolutely; while, on the contrary, adverbs, prop- erly so called, always qualify the signification of some verb, participle, ad- jective, or other adverb. It may be further observed, that many words are considered as adverbs by some grammarians, and as conjunctions by others. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. Adverbs derived from the genitive plural by changing ων into ω;, form their comparative and superlative in the same manner from the genitive plural of the comparative and super- 142 PARTICLES. lative ; as, σοφώς, wisely, σοφωτέρως, σοφωτατως, from σοφών, σοφωτέρων, σοφωτάτων, the genitive plural of σοφός, wise, σοφώ- τερος, σοφότατος. Obs. Instead of the comparative and superlative in ως, the adjective is frequently used adverbially in the neuter singular of the comparative, and the neuter plural of the superlative ; as, σοφώς, αοψώτερον, αοψώτατα • αιαχοοις, basely, αϊσχιον, αΐοχιοτα. After the same analogy are compared adverbs not derived from adjectives ; as, μάλα, very, μάλλον, μάλιστα ■ ay χι, near, dooov, αγχιβτα. Adverbs formed from prepositions, as well as some others, are compared in τΐρω and τάτω • as, ανω, above, άνωτίρω, άνωτάτω ' ίγγνς, near, εγΥντέρω, ίγγντατω. Yet instead of these we as often find ίγγντερον, εγγιον,'ίγγιοτα, &c. PREPOSITIONS. The prepositions are eighteen, six of which are mono- syllables, viz. είς, έκ or έξ, &v, προ, προς, σύν, and twelve dis- syllables, viz. άμφΐ, άνά, αντί, and, διά, επί, κατά, μετά, παρά, περί, ύπερ, ύπό. Their meaning and construction will be given in the Syntax. CONJUNCTIONS. Conjunctions may be divided, in reference to their signification, into the following classes. 1. Copulative; as, και, τε, Poet. »;Je, and; μηδέ, μήτε, ονδε, οϋτε, neither, nor. 2. Disjunctive; as, η 3 Poet. ι)ε, or. 3. Concessive; as, καν, καίπερ, although. 4. Adversative; as, άλλα, άταο, ανταρ, πλην, but; δε, but, which answers to μεν, indeed; όμως, ί'μπης, yet, nevertheless. 5. Causal; as, γαρ, for; οννεκα, because; on, that, because; Ιπει, Ιπειδη, επειη, επείπερ, Ιπειδήπερ, ίπείτοι, since, for as much as. 6. Illative or rational; as, αρα, ovv } ίόοτε, therefore; διόπερ, wherefore; likewise, τοίνυν, τοιγάρτοι, τοιγαρονν, therefore. 7. Final or perfective ; as, ϊνα, οφρα, όπως, ως, that, in order that. 8. Conditional ; as, ει, lav, T\v, av, if. 9. Potential ; as, av, Poet, κε, κεν, in rendering which use is commonly made of may, can, might, could, would, or should. 10. Expletive ; as, αρ, αν, γε, δί„ δήτα, δι,ν, μϊ,ν, νν or νυν, περ, που, πω, ρ α, τοι, which are not easily translated into other languages, but have a peculiar expression, the loss of which would be discovered by a critical judge of the niceties of Greek composition. SYNTAX. Every sentence, even the simplest, must contain a subject and a predicate. The subject is that of which any thing is declared, and the predicate that which is declared concerning the subject, as, ό ήλιος λάμπει, the sun shines; ά&άνάτός έστιν τ\ ψυχή, the soul is immortal; where ό ήλιος, ή yu /ή, are the subjects, and λάμπει, άϋ-άνατός έσιιν, the predicates, the substantive verb, which is commonly called the copula, being considered as forming a part of the predicate. Words in sentences have a two-fold relation to one another, namely, that of concord or agreement, and that of government or influence. Concord is when one word agrees with another in some accidents, as in gender, number, person, or case; and govern- ment, when one word requires another to be put in a certain case or mood. CONCORD. Agreement of one Substantive with another. Rule I. Substantives signifying the same thing agree in case ; as, " Οιι 7;οος 6 ποιητίς, Homer thepoet ; r Ομι'ρου τον ποη^ον, of Homer the poet. ij πόλις Θήβαι, the city Thebes; της πόλεως Θηβών, of the city Thebes. Obs. 1. The substantive added to another m the same case contains generally an explanation, or fuller definition, but not unfrequently it de- notes character or purpose; as, ίμοί ουμβοϋλω χρώμενος, using me as a counsellor, Plato. Obs. 2. Sometimes one of the substantives is understood ; or its place supplied by an infinitive or part of a sentence ; as, Θεμιστοκλής ΐ,κω πάρα Οε, sc. έγω, Thucyd. ; 'Ελένην κτάνωμεν. Μενίλεω λνπτιν πικραν, Eurip. Orest. 1103. * ' * Hither are to be referred the following and similar examples, where τό τον ποιητοϋ, το λεγόμενον, &c. stand in the accusative, in apposition with the rest of the sentence : aXXu γαρ, το του ποιητον, έργον ονδεν όνειδος, but, as the poet says, no labor is a reproach; αλλ' η, το λεγόμενον, κατόπιν εορτής ι,κομεν ; but do we, as the saying is, come after the feast? Plato J 144 CONCORD. το δε πάντων μεγιστον, x) t v a) t v χώραν ανίζανομενην όοας, but what is the greatest of all, you see your own territory increased, Xen. ; και, το πάντων κεφάλαιον, σκοπεί, Plato. Agreement of an Adjective with a Substantive. II. An adjective agrees with a substantive in gender, number, and case ; as, δίκαιος αν'ϊβ, a just man. ποταμοί μεγάλοι, large rivers. γυνή καλή, a beautiful woman. ν-ψηλά ορη, high mountains. This rule applies to the article, adjective, adjective-pronoun, and parti- ciple ; as, το εμον αομα, my chariot; τω νόμο) τούτω, these two laws ; oi στρα τιώται άκούσαντες, the soldiers having heard. Obs. 1. Sometimes an adjective does not agree in gender and number with the substantive to which it is joined, but with another of equivalent signification; as, φίλε τέκνον, of Hector, Horn.; Ιλΰόντες ες τ/,ν ΣικελΊαν στρατό? πολύς, Thucyd. ; έώρα το στρατόπεδον αγανακτοϋντας, for τους οτςατιώτας, Dionys. Halicar. Sometimes an adjective is referred to a substantive implied in a preced- ing word; as, ϊντυχονσαι δε πρώτω ίπποφοςβίω, τούτο διη^πασαν ' καΐ επί τούτων (sc. ϊππων) ίππαζόμεναι, Herodot. IV. 110. Obs. 2. The feminine dual is often joined with masculine adjectives ; as, τώ πόλεε τούτω, Isocr. ; προλιπόντε άν&ρώπους Αιδώς καΐ Νέμεσις, Hesiod. 'Έργ. 197. Sometimes also masculine adjectives are found with the feminine singu- lar and plural ; as, -θήλυς tsQOij, the suck-giving dexo, Horn. Odys. ε . 467. The tragedians use the masculine for the feminine, especially when the plural instead of the singular of a female is used ; as, oi προ&ν^σκοντες, spoken by Alcestis of herself, Eurip. Also when a chorus of women are speaking of themselves. Obs. 3. An infinitive, or part of a sentence, often supplies the place of the substantive, and then the adjective is put in the neuter singular ; as, χαλεπόν εστί το ζτρ, Theophrast. ; on μέχρι Άσπονδου άφίκοντο, σαφές έστι, Thucyd. ♦Sometimes in the neuter plural ; as, -ίτέρους δϊ άνυδρίαν ά^ατα ήν έπι- στρατεύειν } Thucyd. ΠΙ. 88. ; δϊ\λά εστί, οτι, έμάνη μεγαλως, Herodot. πι. 38. Frequently a substantive verb takes for its subject, instead of an infinitive or part of a sentence, the subject of an infini- tive or part of a sentence, with which the adjective agrees in gender, number, and case ; as, σε δίκαιος είμι κολάζειν, for δίκαιον εστίν έμε κολάζειν σε, I am right to punish you, Aristoph.; καΐ τούτω είσΐ δτ\Ιοι, οτι είσΐ ξεϊνοι, for καΐ τούτω εστί δΐ]λον, δτι είσΐ ξεΐνοι, Herodot. ; ol Θηβαίοι φανεροί ήσαν άναγκασ&ησό- μενοι, for φανερον τ]ν } τους Θηβαίους άναγκασχτήσεσχΤαι, Demosth. AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 145 Obs. 4. An adjective in the neuter gender must often be referred to χρήμα or πράγμα understood ; as, Ισχϋρόν έστιν ή αλή- θεια, truth is powerful, iEschin. ; δολερόν πέφϋκεν άνϋ-ρωπος, man is naturally deceitful, Aristoph. ; καλόν οί νόμοι είσΐ, Menand. Sometimes the substantive is expressed ; as, κοϋφον χρήμα ποιητής εστί, a poet is a light thing, Plato. Thus in Latin, triste lupus stabulis, Virg. The neuters πλεΐον, πλείω, μείον, &c. may be joined with substantives of any gender, number, or case ; as, ιππέας μεν αξει ov μείον δισμυρίων, he wili bring not less tlian twenty thousand horse, Xen. ; Iv μάρτναι πλέον ι| τριΠμνρίυις, Plato ; παραμένει ημέρας πλείω ι} τρεις, Id. Proper names in the singular are often accompanied by the neuters πρώτα, πάντα, and others; as, ΐσ$ι των Ά&ψαΊων τα πρώτα, keep thou the first rank amongst the Athenians, Lucian; Εύβοια αύτοΐς πάντα ψ, Thucyd. Obs. 5. A substantive dual may have an adjective plural ; as, χεΐρε άμφοτέρας, Horn. Also a substantive plural may have an adjective dual, when no more than two persons or things are alluded to ; as, αίγυπιοί πλάζοντε, Horn. II. π . 428, where two vultures only are meant. Obs. 6. The adjectives μέσος, άκρος, λοιπός, and others of the same kind, usually signify the middle, the summit, &,c. of any thing; as, έν μέστ) τή λίμνη, in the middle of the lake, Herodot. ; σύν τω λοιπώ στρατω, Id. Obs. 7. Substantives are often used as adjectives ; as, γλώσσαν 'Ελλάδα έδίδαξε, she taught the Greek language, Herodot. Sometimes one of the substantives is put in the genitive ; as, & χρυσόν άγγείλας έπων, for επη χρυσά, Aristoph. ; ό τής ησυχίας βίοτος, for βίος ήσυχος, Eurip. Obs. 8. Adjectives referred to substantives are often used for adverbs, or for substantives in the dative, particularly adjectives denoting time ; as, άσ μένος πορεύεται προς Κΰρον, for ασμένως, he gladly goes to Cyrus, Xen. ; είδον παννύχιαί, for νυχτί, they slept all night, Horn. ; χ^ζός εβη μετά δαΐτα, for %&Η, Id. ; δευτεραΐος άφίκετο, for ττ] δευτέρα ήμερα. So also participles in some instances ; as, τελευτων έλεγε, at last he said, Herodot. ; τελευτώντες έχλεύαζον, at last they derided me, Demosth. ; %ταρρών αίρει, choose boldly, Aristoph.; άνόσαντες φρονιίσωμεν, let us quickly consider, Id. Obs. 9. An adjective may be used without a substantive, the one from which it takes its gender, number, and case, being understood ; as, ό σοφός, the wise man; ή άνυδρος, sc. γη, the des- ert, Herodot. ; τους άγά&ούς φίλει, Aristoph. So the pronouns ούτος, εκείνος, τΙς, &,c. Also participles ; as, γελωσιν οί ΰεώμενοι, the spectators laugh, Aristoph. ; ό -&ανών ούκ έπι&ϋμεΐ, Anacr ; 13 146 CONCORD. μίσεν τους κολακεύοντας, Isocr. Neuters in particular are fre- quently used in this way ; as, τό άλη&ές όντως έχει, the truth is thus, Plato ; χαλεπά τά καλά έστι, beautiful things are difficult, Id. ; τό ίππϊκόν, sc. στράτευμα, the cavalry, Xen. ; to Έλληνϊ κόν } the Greeks, Thucyd. ; nob των Τρωικών, literally, before the Trojan affairs, before the Trojan war, Id. ;,. μετά τά Λευκ- τρΧκά, after the battle of Leuctra, Strabo ; τό μέλλον άδηλον πάσιν άν&ρώποις, the future is unknown to all men, Dem. ; έάν τά παρεληλυ&ότα μνημόνευες, if you remember the past, Isocr. Words thus taken are said to be taken substantively. Obs. 10. Frequently adverbs with the article prefixed are equivalent to adjectives : as, ή άνω πόλις, the upper city, Thucyd. ; ot τότε άν&ρωποι, the men of that time, Herodot. ; ot έγγντάτω του γένους, the nearest relations, Aristoph. Hence they acquire the character of substantives; as, ol πέλας, the neighbors; ήαϋριον, sc. ήμερα, the morrow ; ol πάνυ, the illustrious. Obs. 11. Neuter adjectives, with and without the article, are very fre- quently used adverbially ; as, πρώτον, το πρώτον, τα πρώτα, first, at first ; λοιπόν, το λοιπόν, for the future, henceforth; ΙπΊτΐ]δες, diligently; αξλπτα, unexpectedly. Agreement of a Verb with a Nominative. III. A verb agrees with its nominative in num- ber and person ; as, ί γω γράψω, I write. οφώ άκουετον, you two hear. οί ποιηταί ιράσκουοι, the poets say. Obs. 1. The nominative is commonly omitted where it is known from the form of the verb, or from the connection, and no stress is laid on it; as, φιλώ, ψιλεΐς, φάει, I love, thou lovest, he loves. In particular, verbs indicating the employment of a definite person are often used without a nominative expressed ; as, έσήμηνε or έσάλπιγξε, sc. ό σαλπιγκτής, the trumpeter gave a sig- nal, Xen. So frequently the plurals λέγουσι, φασ\, and others, sc. άνθρωποι. Also verbs whose subject is construed with the preceding verb ; as, τον Κριτόβουλον έπύχτετο, δτι έφίλησε, for έπνΰειο δτι ό Κριτόβουλος έφίλησε, Xen. ; as in Latin, nosti Marcellum quam tardus sit, Cres. ap. Cic. Obs. 2. An infinitive, or some part of a sentence, often supplies the place of a nominative ; as, αϊσχρον ϊ\ν προδοϋναι τους εύεργέτας, it was base to betray your benefactors, Thucyd. : AGREEMENT OF VERBS. 147 on βασιλεύς έξεπλ&γη, δηλον fy, that the king was terrified was manifest, Xen. Thus also with impersonal verbs ; as, e'lfaii μοι άπιέναι, it is lawful for me to depart, Plato; which other- wise have no nominative ; as, πιερών σον δει, you have need of wings, Aristoph. ; νε ι, it rains. Exc. 1. The nominative of the neuter plural is commonly joined with a verb singular ; as, τα ζώα tqI /ϊι, animals run. τΐχ άρματα Υφενγε, the chariots fled όπλα ίλ/ψ3η πολλά, many arms icere taken. Exc. 2. Sometimes, though rarely, the nomina- tive of the masculine and feminine plural is joined with a verb singular ; as, μελιγάςυες νμ,νοι νοτίων άοχαϊ λόγων τέλλεται, for τέλλονται, the soft .har- mony of the hymns serves as a prelude to the verses that follow, Pind. Exc. 3. A nominative dual is often put with a verb plural ; as, αν$()ε δεν(ϊ άψίκοντο, tivo men came hither, Aristoph. Also a nominative plural, meaning but two persons or things, may be put with a verb in the dual; as, έιιοί -πεφιβάλλετον ίπποι, my two horses excel, Horn. Exc. 4. A collective noun may be joined with a verb either of the singular or of the plural number ; as, τό πλήόος έψηφίσάτο, or έψψρίσαντο, the multi- tude decreed. A plural verb is often joined with έκαστος and άλλος, on account of the notion of plurality which is involved ; as, εμενον εν rrj &ωντοϋ τάξι έκαστος, Herodot. ; ήοώτων δε άλλος άλλο, Plato. This construction may be explained by the following passage, where the plural is placed first, and then the singular, denoting its parts ; ίπποι δε~, παρ' αρμασιν οϊσιν έκαστος, εστάσαν^ Horn. Accusative before the Infinitive. IV. The infinitive mode has an accusative before it ; as, οϊομαί σε πλουτεΐν, I think that you are rich. 148 CONCORD. Obs. 1. The pronoun accusative before the infinitive is sometimes understood ; as, εϊτις σον λαβόμενος, είς τό δεσμωτή- qiov άπάγοι, φάσκων άδΧκεϊν, sc. σε, if any one should seize you, and lead you away to prison, saying that you acted unjustly, Plato. Thus in Latin, nos abiisse rati, sc. eos, Virg. An adjective or participle expressed may agree with the pronoun understood ; as, άφηκε μοι, έΐ&όντα λέγειν τάληχτη, that is, έμέ έλ&όντα λέγειν, he gave me leave to come and represent the truth, Xen. ; δέομαι υμών, μεμνημένονς των εΐοημένων^ βοη&βΐν ήμΐν, sc. νμάς, I entreat you, remembering what has been said, to assist us, Lys. Obs. 2. The accusative with the infinitive is put especially after the verbs λίγω, άγγϊλλω, and similar verbs of speaking. When these are in the pas- sive, either the accusative remains before the infinitive, or it is changed into the nominative of the leading verb ; as, τον Κϋρον λέγεται ειπείν, Xen. ; λέγεται ειπείν ό Κύρος, Id. Λοκεΐ, videtur, has the same construction. Obs. 3. Use is very frequently made of οτι or ως with the indicative or optative, instead of the accusative with the infinitive ; as, νομίζω οτι στασιάζει, Xen. ; ελεγον ως αν-9ρωπος ηκοι, Herodot. Both constructions are sometimes united; as, του Νίσου λίγεται θυγατέρα ίρασ&ήναι Μίνω,καΙ ως άπϊκειρε τας τρίχας του πατρός, it is said that the daughter of Nisus fell in love with Minos, and that she sheared off her father's hair, Pausan. Sometimes even the accusative with the infinitive follows οτι or ως • as, μυ&ολογοϋσιν οτι τας μοΓρας ειπείν, they relate that the fates said, Diod. Sic. ; Ιλπίζειν δε χρη, ως άνδρας αγα&ούς αυτούς γενήσεσ -dai, Xen. In a few in- stances όπως has a similar construction. Exc. The infinitive takes before it the same case as the preceding verb, when both verbs relate to the same person ; as, ψησίν αυτός γεγενήσ&αι αϊτιος, he says that he was the cause. Obs. 1. As the infinitive takes before it the same case as the preceding verb, when both verbs relate to the same person, and the accusative when they do not, it sometimes takes both the nominative and accusative ; as, ουκ ϊφη αΰτος άλλ' εκείνον στρατηγειν, he said that not he, but the other, had the command, Thucyd. Obs. 2. When the infinitive and the preceding verb relate to the same person, the subject of the infinitive is generally omitted, but expressed when an emphasis lies upon it; as ϊφη άκούειν, sc. αυτός, he said that he heard, Xen. ; εφησϋ-α oh; λοιγόν άμυνας sc. αυτή, you said that you alone warded off de- struction, Horn. Thus also before the infinitives of verbs which take the same case after as before them ; as, εφασκες είναι δεσπότης, sc. αυτός, Aristoph. Obs. 3. This rule obtains also, when the infinitive is pre- ceded by the article to, or by the particle ώστε • as, ού σεμνύνο- SAME CASE AFTER A VERB AS BEFORE IT. 14U μαι τω γραφείς άποφύγεΐν, I am not proud of having escaped when accused, Demosth. ; ΰιεπράξάτο, ώστε «ύτόι? έκπλινσαι, άρμοση); εις "Λβΰδον ί he brought it to pass, that he himself sailed out governor to Abydus, Xen. Obs. 4. Sometimes the infinitive has before it an accusative, and the preceding verb a nominative, although both verbs relate to the same per- son ; as, oiiial με σοφίας πληρωΰησεσδαι, I think that I shall be filled with wisdom Plato ; ελεγεν εαυτόν είναι Jia, Apollod. The same Case after a Verb as before it. V. Any verb may have the same case after it as before it, when both words refer to the same thing ; as, εγώ ειμί Σωκράτης, I am Socrates. . σύ μένεις δούλος, you remain a slave. ό ποταμός καλείται Ευφράτης, the river is called Euphrates, ου φγς είναι -θεός, you say that you are a god. ίδέοντο αύτοϋ είναι πρόθυμου, they begged him to be zealous, άπείπεν αντοΐς νανταις είναι, he forbade them to be navigators, νομ'ιζομεν τ'ην γην οψαΐραν είναι, we think the earth to be a sphere, αντί του πόλις είναι, φρονοιον κατέστη, instead of being a city, it becam* a castle. Obs. 1. The verbs which most frequently have the same case after them as before them, are, 1. Substantive and neuter verbs ; as, είμΐ, υπάρχω, γίγνομαι, μένω, πέφϋκα, κατέστην } &,c. 2. The passive of verbs of calling or naming, choosing, appearing, &-C. ; as, καλούμαι, ονομάζομαι, αίροϋμαν, χειροιο- νοΰμαι, φαίνομαι, νομίζομαι,, &,c. Obs. % To this rule belongs also ακούω, signifying to be called; as, οϋτ' άκοιΊσομαι κακός, Soph.; δφρα έσθΊός άκουσας, Theocrit. So in Latin, rexque paterque audisti coram, Hor. Epist. i. 7, 37. * Obs. 3. When any of the above verbs are placed between two nomina- tives of different numbers, they are commonly governed in number by the former ; as, η τύ%ις ην sxizrov άνδρες, the division was a hundred men, Xen. ; ατέωανοΊ είσιν αρετής σημειον, Demosth. ; but sometimes by the latter; as, εστον (Vc-> λόφο) ή 'Ιδομένη νψηλώ, Thucyd. in. 112. So participles stand- ing between two substantives of different genders commonly agree with the former, but sometimes with the latter; as, λίμνη εστίν όνομαζόμενον Νι'μιραιον, Pausan. Obs. 4. An infinitive having the genitive or dative before it, governed by any other word, may be followed by the accusative ; as, σοι ενίαμένω έδωκε νέον είναι, that is, ( rr« νέον είναι, she granted yuur petition to be young, Lucian ; 'Λ&ηναίων ίδεη&ηααν σιρίσι βοη&ονς γενέσ&αι, αυτούς being under- Stood, they entreated the Athenians to assist them, Herodot. 13* 150 CONCORD. Obs. 5. The Latin poets, in imitation of the Greeks, sometimes put the nominative instead of the accusative after the infinitive, when it relates to the same person with the nominative to the preceding verb ; as, rcttulit Ajax esse Jovis pronepos, for se esse pronepotem, Ovid. The Construction of Relatives. VI. The relative ος, η, δ, agrees with the ante- cedent in gender, number, and person ; and is con- strued through all the cases as the antecedent would be in its place ; as, αύ ος eiis ίΰωσας, you who saved me. οι ατςατιωταιβν Ίβχζ, the soldiers whom he commanded. αί κώμαι Iv α'ις ίσκ/,νουν, the villages in which they encamped. ij Ιπιοτολη ην ϊγςαψε, the letter which he wrote. If no nominative come between the relative and the verb, the relative will be the nominative to the verb. But if a nominative come between the relative and the verb, the relative will be of that case, which the verb or noun follow- ing, or the preposition going before, usually governs. Obs. 1. The antecedent often stands in the same clause, and in the same case, with the relative ; as, οΐτός έστιν ov είδες άνδρα, this is the man whom you saw; εϊς ην άφίκοντο κώμην μεγάλη ήν , Xen. ; εκείνοι, ών ονόματα μεγάλα λέγεται επί οοφία, Πιττάκου τε καΐ Βίαντος, Plato ; τάς τιμάς &ς ελάβε φανεραί, SC είσΐ, Xen. ; ώμολογήκάμεν, πράγματος ού μήτε διδάσκαλοι μήτε μα&ηταΐ εΐεν, τούτο διδακτόν μή είναι, Plato. Obs. 2. The relative frequently stands alone, the antecedent being understood ; as, σώζονσιν ους φιλοϊΊσι, for σώζουσι τους άνχτρώττους ους φιλοϋσι. Sometimes the relative is expressed in one case, and must afterwards be supplied in another ; as, διά τίνος μηχανής, ην έπενόησε μεν Αρχιμήδης, ονομάζεται δε κοχλίας, for η ονομάζεται, by means of a certain engine, which Archimedes invented, and is named cochlia, for and which is named, Diod. Sic. Obs. 3. When the relative comes after two words of differ- ent persons, it agrees with the first or second person rather than the third ; as, είμΐ δ' εγώ βασϊλενς ος τιμώμαι, Horn. Obs. 4. The antecedent is often implied in a preceding word ; as, οϊκία πολύ μείζων ή υμετέρα τής έμής, οϊ γε οικία χρήσ&ε γή τε καΐ ούράνω, where ρΐ is referred to the personal pronoun contained in υμετέρα, Xen. ; κουροτρόφος, οϊ ϊ'δοντο φάος, where κούροι, contained in κοναοτρόφος, is the antecedent to of, Hesiod. Theog. 450. CONSTRUCTION OF RELATIVES. 151 Obs. 5. The indefinite adjectives oroc, oJoc, &c. are also sometimes con- strued like relatives ; as, γη πάσα, 'όσης άρχει, Herodot. But these have commonly other adjectives either expressed or understood, which answer to them; as, σίτω τοσούτοι εχρήτο, όσον ηδεως i'}0&is, Xen. ; and are often applied to different substantives ; as, ούπω Φίλιππος εστί τοιούτος, οίοί πον' ήσαν Λακεδαιμόνιοι, Demosth. Exc. 1. The relative is often attracted into the case of its antecedent ; as, σύν ταΐς vavalv αις είχε, with the ships which he had. μετασχέτω της ί,δονης ι\ς έδωκα ύμΐν, let him partake of the joy which I gave you. Obs. 1. The antecedent is often found in the same clause with the relative attracted ; as, απολαύω ων εχω άγα&ωρ, I enjoy what goods I have : έπορεύετο σύν ή είχε δυνάμει, Xen. Frequently it is understood ; as, μεμνημένος ων έπραξε, for των πραγμάτων ων έπραξε, and this for α έπραξε, Lucian ; πληρώσας vav; εννέα προς αϊ; εϊχε } Thucyd. Obs. 2. Other relatives also undergo a similar attraction ; as, ίλάττω των τοιούτων κακών, οϊων νϋν εϊπομεν, fewer of such evils as we have now mentioned, Plato. Frequently οίος, with the substantive belonging to it, is attracted into the case of its antecedent, instead of standing in the nomi- native with ειμί • as, προς άνδρας τολμηρούς, ο'ίονς και Αθηναίους, for otot Ά&ηναίΌι είσί, Thucyd. ; χαριζΰμενον οϊω σοι άνδρί, for άνδρ'ι, οίος ού ει, Xen. Also when it stands for ώστε • as, τοιούτους ανθρώπους, ο'ίους με~ ■9υαδίντας όρχεΐσ&αι, Demosth. In like manner ηλΧκος ■ as, εκείνο δεινον τοις ήλ'ικοις νών, for τηλικούτοις, ηλίκοι νω εσμεν, Aristoph. Obs. 3. The relative όσος is sometimes used in phrases which seem to have been originally formed from two clauses referring to each other ; as, εκείνος δαυμαστην Οσην περί Oe προ&υμίαν ε/ει' thus, ΰαυμαστόν εστίν οσην πρυΰνμ'ιαν 1- χει, instead of θαυμαστή εστί προθυμία, οσην 'έχει, Plato, Alci- biad. II. pr. fin. ην περί αυτόν όχλος ύπερφυ'^ς όσος, exceedingly great, Aristoph. Plut. 750. Obs. 4. The phrase ουδείς όστις ού is usually considered as one word, in the sense of the Latin nemo non, every one, in which case ουδείς is put in the same case as the pronoun relative following; as, οϋδένα κίνδϋνον οντιν' ονχ νπίμειναν, they underwent every danger, Demosth. ; ούδένα tcpaaav οντιν' ού δακρνοντ' αποστρειρεσϋαι, for ουδείς ην οντιν' εχρασαν ού δακρύοντ' αποστρίφεσΰαι, they said that every one returned weeping, Xen. Obs. 5. The antecedent is sometimes put in the case of the relative, and the latter omitted, when the former is a demonstrative pronoun, with or without a substantive, and would otherwise be joined with ειμί • as, τούτο ούδ' άποκρίαεως α.%ιον έρωτας, for οι~>δ' άποκρίσεως αζιόν Ιστι τούτο, δ έρωτας, what you ask is not icorthy of an ansicer, Plato ; τίνα? τοι'σδ' όρώ ξένους ; for τίνες είσίν ούτοι οί ξένοι, ους όρώ ; who are these strangers whom I see? Eurip. Exc. 2. The relative frequently differs in number from the antecedent, when the idea of plurality is involved in the singular ; as, πάντας ανϋρώπους ΰίλγονσιν, ο, τις σιρέας είσαφίκηται, they fascinate all men who approach them, Horn. ; ασπάζεται πύντας, ώ αν περιτυγχανη, he / 152 CONCORD. salutes all whom he meets, Plato; οίς αν επ'ιω, τ,σσόν τις.Ιμοι πρόσεισι^ every one to whom I apply will take part with me the less, Thucyd. Obs. The singular Ι'στι is followed by relatives both singular and plural, and the phrase is regarded altogether as one word, equivalent to the adjective ενιοι, εγιαι, ϊνια, some; as, και εστίν οι Ιτνγχανον -θωράκων, and some hit breastplates, Xen. ; εστίν ονστϊνας άνΰρώπων τε&αυμακας επί ουψία ; have you admired some men for their wisdom? Id. In the same manner εστί is often used with a relative adverb following, in which case the two are put for an adverb; as, εστίν ore, sometimes, Thucyd. ; εστίν οπού, somewhere. Exc. 3. When the relative is placed between two substantives of different genders, it sometimes agrees in gender with the latter ; as, τό αστρον, ijv ονομάζουσιν Λίγα, the constellation which they call the Goat, Pausan. Obs. When the antecedent is part of a sentence, the relative is put in the neuter gender; as, έαν αποφυγή με οντος, b μη γίνοιτο, Demosth. Some- times the relative does not agree in gender with the antecedent, but with some synonymous word implied; as, τέκνα οι, for viol οΐ, Eurip. ; ίμοί γαρ ονδ', ο ττασι λε'ιπεται βροτοΐς, σϋνεστιν ελπις, sc. χρήμα, for nttther hope, which is left to all mortals, remains with me, Id. Agreement of an Adjective, Verb, or Relative, with Substan- tives coupled by a Conjunction. VII. ( Substantives singular connected by a copu- lative conjunction, have an adjective, verb, or rela- tive plural ; as, Κάστωρ και Πολυδεύκης, οΐ αθάνατοι είσι, Castor and Pollux, who are immortal. Obs. 1. If the substantives be of different persons, the verb plural must agree with the first person rather than the second, and with the second rather than the third; as, έγώ aal σύ έλο- γιζόμε&α, Xen. ; σύ καΐ ό Θεόδωρος έλέγετε, Plato. Obs. 2. If the substantives are of different genders, the adjective or relative plural must agree, with the masculine rather than the feminine or neuter; as, πατήρ καϊ μτ\τηρ ΙλΙ&• σοντο, γουνούμενοι, Horn. ; but this is only applicable to beings which may have life. Obs. 3. If the substantives signify things without life, the adjective or relative plural must be put in the neuter gender ; as, oi iv τω αστει, the USE OF THE ARTICLE AS A rRONOUN. 155 fcoph in the city, Thucyd. ; τύ κατά ΙΤαυσανΙαν, the affairs of Pausanias, d. ; τύ eg τοι .ιύλεμον, Herodot. ; οί σύν βααιλεΐ, Xen. The neuter article standing alone with the genitive of a substantive, signifies every thing that pertains to the person or thing denoted by the substantive ; as, δει φΐρειν τύ ιών 3εών, it is necessary to bear what co?nes from the gods, Eurip. It signifies particularly that which any one has done, or is wont to do, or that has befallen him ; in which case it is put in the singular; as, το τών αλιέων, what fishermen are accustomed to do, Xen. Similarly το τού ' Ομήρου, the sciyi?ig of Homer, Plato. Sometimes it is merely a periphrasis of the substantive in the genitive ; as, τύ τΙ^ς τύχης, fortune, that is, the things of fortune, Soph. ; τό τών ΰεών,ίΌτ οί •&εοΙ, Plato. In the same manner the possessive pronouns with the article are put instead of the personal pronouns ; as, τό νμετερον, as if τό νμων, for νμεις, Herodot. ; τάμα for εγώ, Eurip. The plural article, followed by αμφι or περί with a proper name in the accusative, signifies, 1. the companions of the person named; as, of neoti 'Λρχίδαμον, the companions of Archidamus, Xen. ; 2. the person alone; as, οί ό*' άμφί Πρίαμον και Τίάνϋοον, Priam and Panthous, Horn.; 3. the person and his companions ; as, οί περί Θρασνβονλον, TJirasybiilus with his soldiers, Thucyd. But when followed by άμφί or περί with an appellative, it signifies office or relation; as, οί περί ίερύ, the priests. Frequently the neuter article, with whatever it is attached to, is used adverbially; as, τό πρώτον and τύ πρώτα, at first ; τό λοιπόν, for the fu- ture ; τό π ρ Iv , formerly ; τό αντίκα, immediately; τανϋν, now; τό πύμπαν, το παραπαν, entirely ; το άπο τονδε, from henceforth; τό προ τοντον, before this; το έπ' εμε, τονπ' εμε, τονπί σε, as far as lies in me, in you. Also with an infinitive ; as, τό τι^μερον είναι, to-day; τό κατά τούτον είναι, as far as regards him. Obs. In the old Greek poets 6, η, τό, is rather a demonstrative pronoun, and the substantives for the most part stand alone, as in Latin, where we use the article the. Later writers also very frequently omit it. The Use of the Article as a Pronoun. IX. The article is often used for the relative and demonstrative pronouns. 1. For the relative pronoun ; as, 'Ηετίων ο μ' έτρεφε, Edtion who brought me up, Horn. τό οϊκΐ]μα εν τω κοιμώμεΰα, the chamber in which we sleep, Herodot. 2. For the demonstrative pronouns ; as, ό γαρ J^$s,for he came, Horn. τ/,ν δ' ίγώ ov λύσω, but I will not release her, Horn. Obs. 1. The article is very often used as a relative pronoun in Ionic and Doric writers. Of Attic writers the tragedians only use it in this sense, and these only in the neuter and the oblique cases ; as, τόν ΰ-εον, τον νϋν ψΐγεις, Eurip. Obs. 2. The use of the article as a demonstrative pronoun is likewise chiefly confined to Ionic and Doric writers, though it is found in this sense in Attic writers also, but for the most part in the neuter and the oblique 156 GOVERNMENT. cases ; as, ο δε είπε, but he said, Xen. ; τό δ' ου χ όντως Ι' χει, but this is not so, Plato ; τοις δε άλλη γη εστί πολλή, Thucyd. ; της γάρ πέφϋκα ίστρος, Soph. Especially in the accusative with the infinitive after και ■ as, και τον κελενσαι δούναι, and that he commanded to give it him, Xen. In the nominative the relative Jog is used in this sense; as, και Βς είπε, and he said, Xen. Thus also η δ' Ζς, said he, which is very frequent in Plato. Obs. 3. The Attics moreover use the article as a demonstrative pronoun before the relatives 'ός, όσοι, oioi • as., περί τεχνών τών οσαι περί ταύτα είοί, concerning those arts which treat of these things, Plato ; but particularly in a division, where ό μεν, 6 δε, are opposed to each other, this that, the one the other, &c. ; as, τών μεν πολλοί Ιτιτρώοκοντο, τών δε ουδείς, of these many were wounded, of those not one, Xen. ; ό μεν μαίνεται, ό δέ αωφρονεΐ, the one is mad, the other is rational, Plato ; τών άλλων Ελλήνων (otherwise quite as often ol άλλοι "Ελληνες), οι μεν νμΐν, οί δε ϊκείνοις, νπήκουον, of the other Greeks, some were subject to you, some to them, Demosth. In this construction ό μεν commonly refers to the nearer of two things, but sometimes to the more remote ; as, κρεΐττον το νονϋετεΐν τού ονειδίζειν ' το μεν γαρ ηπιόν τε και φίλον, το δε βκληρόν τε και νβριστΐ- κον, it is better to admonish than to reproach ; for the former is mild and friendly, the latter harsh and affronting, Epictet. If ό μεν and ό δε be used in speaking of one thing alone, they may each be rendered partly, or in part. Sometimes the relative pronoun is used instead of the article ; as, πόλεις 'Ελληνίδας, ας μεν άναιρών, εις ας δε τους φυγάδας καταγων, destroy- ing some of the Greek cities, and bringing back the exiles into the others, Demosth. GOVERNMENT. GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. X. One substantive governs another in the geni- tive (when the latter substantive signifies a different thing from the former) ; as, το τού Κΰρου άρμα, the chariot of Cyrus, or Cyrus's chariot. Obs. 1 . The genitive most commonly indicates that which does some- thing, or to which something belongs ; as, τά r Ομήρου ποιήματα, iEschin. ; το τού Κύρου άρμα. But frequently the genitive is also taken in a passive sense; as, ή Σωκράτους κατηγορία, the accusation against Socrates ; εύνοια Άϋηναίων, good-will towards the Athenians, Thucyd. Sometimes one substantive governs two genitives, one of which has an active and the other a passive sense ; as, τάς τών οικείων προπηλακίσεις τού γήρως οδύρον- ται, they lament the insults which the relations offer to old age, Plato. Obs. 2. A possessive adjective is frequently used instead of the genitive; as, οί Ηράκλειοι παίδες, for 'Ηρακλέους. Obs. 3. The substantive which governs the genitive is often understood; as, Σωκράτης ό Σωφρονίσκου, sc. νιος, Plato; εν Κροίσου, SC^ οίκω, Herodot. ; εις αδου, sc. δόμον, to the shades below ; h αδου, sc. δόμοι, in the shades below. GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 157 Obs. 4. The dative is frequently used for the genitive, particularly by the poets ; as, ονκέτι σοι τίχνα λεΰασει φάος, for τέκνα συν, no longer do your children see the light, Eurip. ; οι > δ* Αϊαντι ηνδανε ■θνμώ, nor did it please the mind of Mjax, Horn. Sometimes both cases are put ; as, Άχιλλήος όλοόν κήρ yij-dti, φόνον Αχαιών δερκομένω, the slaughterous heart of Achilles rejoices, as he beholds the slaughter of the Greeks, Horn. Obs. 5. Prepositions with their respective cases often serve as a circum- locution of the genitive ; as, ai κατά ro σώμα ήδοναί,αί δια τού σώματος ήδοναί, the pleasures of the body, Plato ; 6 περί τους Φώκιας ολεΰρος for ο τών Φωκίων ολε-9ρος, Demosth. Substantive pronouns are governed in the genitive like sub- stantive nouns; as, ή πόλις ήμων, our city. So also adjective pronouns when used as substantives, or having a noun understood; as, η ΰυγατηρ εκείνου, his daughter; ων oi πατέρες, whose fathers. The genitive is likewise governed by the relative and demonstrative pronouns ; as, ταύτα ίστιν ά Σωκράτους επαινώ, this is what I commend in Socrates, Plato; τάδ' αυτού αγαμαι, I admire this in him, Xen. The possessive pronouns are equivalent in signification to the genitive of the personal pronouns. Thus, /; ημετέρα πόλις, 6 ίμος πατ[ρ, is the same as /; πόλις ημών, ό πατήρ μου. Sometimes also, like the genitive, they are taken passively ; as, σος πόΰος, longing for thee, Horn. ; εύνοια και φιλία τ?/ εμη, through good-will and friendship towards me, Xen. The possessive pronouns have sometimes nouns, pronouns, and parti- ciples after them in the genitive ; as, τοΰτο σον αν εϊ'η του δικαστού, Lucian ; το σον μόνης δώρημα, Soph. ; σην αυτού φρένα τέρπε, Horn. XI. The genitive is used to express that one thing is the quality or circumstance of another ; as, δένδρον πολλών ετών, a tree of many years, άνηρ μεγάλης αρετής, a man of great virtue. λίμνη σταδίων είκοσι την περίμετρον, a lake of twenty stadia in circum- ference. Obs. This genitive frequently stands alone, άνθρωπος, χρήμα, or the like, being understood ; as, τούτου τού τρόπου ειμί, I am of this disposition, Aristoph. ; απέ&ανεν ίτώιν όγδο^κοντα, he died when eighty years of age, Lucian. Adjectives taken as Substantives. XII. An adjective in the neuter gender without a substantive governs the genitive ; as, το πλείστον του χρόνου, the most of the time, εις τοσούτον τόλμης, to such a pitch of boldness. το τετραμμένον τών βάρβαρων, that part of the barbarians which had been put to flight. 14 158 GOVERNMENT. Obs. 1. Plural adjectives of the neuter gender also govern the genitive; as, τα κράτιστα της γης, Thucyd. ; τα στενόπορα τών οδών, angusta νίά- rum, Diod. Sic. άρτων ημίσεα, Xen. Obs. 2. Instead of the neuter, the adjective frequently takes the gender of the substantive in the genitive ; as, ή πολλή της Πελοποννήσου } Herodot. ; τοΰ χρόνου τον πλείστον 9 Thucyd. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. Adjectives governing the Genitive. XIII. Adjectives of plenty, want, diversity, prop- erty, worth, cause, also verbals, compounds of a privative, and those signifying an affection of the mind, govern the genitive ; as, δείματος μεστός, full of fear, ανδρών κενός, destitute of men. 'έτερος εστί τονμού πατρός, he is different from my father. Ι'διος άν&ρώπου, peculiar to man. άξιος επαίνου, worthy of praise. της νίκης αίτιώτατος ην, he was the principal cause of the victory. ανατρεπτικός της πόλεως, subversive of the state. απαις αρρένων παίδων, childless with respect to male children. γεωμετρίας έμπειρος εϊ, you are skilled in geometry. πλήρης οίνου, Herodot. ; έρημος φίλυ)ν, Eurip. ; γυμνός οπλών, Xen. ; φόνου αγνός, Plato ; -ψιλός δενδρίυιν, Herodot. ; ορφανός τοΰ πατρός, Demosth. ; τυράννων ελεύθερος, Herodot.', δημοκρατίας αλ- λότρια, Lys. ; ιερός της Ά&ψας, ./Escnin. ; ανάξιος τον συμποσίου, Lucian; λυτήριοι δειματων, Soph.; της ηδονής ίγκρατΙ,ς, Xen.; απα&ης κακών, Herodot. ; επιμελές τών φίλων, Xen. ; -θέλω δ' αίδρις μάλλον η σοφός κακών είναι, iEschyl. Obs. 1. Adjectives of worth and cause govern the genitive and dative ; as, ήμΐν *Λχιλλ?νς άξιος τιμής, Achilles deserves honor of us, Eurip. ; πολλών αγαθών αίτιοι τοις "Ελλησι κατέστησαν, they toere the authors of many good things to the Greeks, Isocr. Obs. 2. Adjectives of plenty and want sometimes gov- ern the dative ; as, άφνβιοί μήλοισι, abounding in fruits, Hesiod. Obs. 3. In the old poets participles also are construed with the genitive like adjectives ; as, μάχης εϊ είδότε πάσης, well acquainted with all the modes of fighting, Horn.; διδασκό- μενος πολέμοιο, Id. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 159 XIV. Partitives, and words placed partitively, comparatives, superlatives, interrogatives, and some numerals, govern the genitive plural ; as, τις τών σήρατιαπων, some one of the soldiers. ό νεώτερος τών υιών , the younger of the sons. 6 σοφώτατος των r Ελλήνων, the icisest of the Greeks. τις τ' αρα ^εων ; which then of the gods? μία των νήσων, one of the islands. ό τέταρτος τών ποταμών, the fourth of the rivers. μόνος πολϊιών, Eurip. ; τών'ίππων 6 ιιεν άγα&ος, ό δ' οΰ , Plato ; προς ους uv έγώ Αυδών ίΰίλω, Xen. ; υ βυνλύμενος τών r Ελλήνων, ./Eschin. Obs. 1. Other adjectives in the positive degree frequently take their substantives in the genitive, where otherwise instead of the genitive the case of the adjective would be used : as, ol χρηστοί τών άνϋρώπων, for χρηστοί άνθρωποι, good men, Aristoph. - Obs. 2. The genitive plural is also put with some adjectives which have the positive form, but the force of superlatives; as, δια γυναικών, the most excellent of women, Horn. ; δαιμόνιε ανδρών, Herodot. ; έξοχος Αχαιών, Horn. Obs. 3. The genitive is often governed by εϊς or τΙς under- stood ; as, τούτων ήν Θαλψ, sc. είς, of these Thales was one, Plato ; πέμπων τών Ανδών ες Δελφούς, sc. τινάς, sending some of the Lydians to Delphi, Herodot. ; γυνή τών επιφανών, Plut. Obs. 4. The case of the partitive is often put instead of the genitive; as, ol παρόντες δε,,οΐ μεν ηδοϋντο, οί δε εγέλων, for τών παρόντων, of those present, some were ashamed, some laughed, Lucian. Sometimes prepositions with their respective cases are used ; as, εκ τούτων εις, Herodot. ; έξ άπασών ή καλλίστη, Lucian ; πρώτος εν ποιηταΐς, Aristoph. Obs. 5. Partitives, &c. are put in tiie gender of the substantives which are in the genitive ; but when there are two substantives of different gen- ders, the partitives, &c. are sometimes put in the gender of the former, though almost always in that of the latter; as, ό δε παις πάντων -9-ηρίων ίοτί δυαμεταχειριστότατον, the boy of all wild beasts is the most difficult to manage, Plato. Obs. 6. Partitives, &c. govern collective nouns in the genitive singular, and are of the same gender with the individuals of which the collective noun is composed; as, της στρατιάς πολλοί, Thucyd. k XV. The comparative degree governs the geni- tive ; as, λευκότεροι χιόνος, whiter than snow. ην άμείνων του πατρός, he was better than his father.- 160 GOVERNMENT. Obs. 1. Instead of the genitive, comparatives are also con- strued with the conjunction 3) or ψτερ, followed by the same case with that of the thing compared ; as, άρείοσιν ηέπερ ύμΐν άνδράσιν ώμίλησα, I have associated with braver men than you, Horn. ; μέλλεις έπ' άνδρας στρατεύεσ&αι πολύ άμείνονας ι) Σκύ- λας, Herodot. νιι. 10. But sometimes τ) is followed by the nominative, if είμΐ or some other verb may be supplied ; as, άμείνονας, ηέπερ οϊδε (sc. είσΐ}, ίππους δωρήσαιτο, he might give better horses than these, Horn. The genitive commonly follows the comparative instead of ij, only where ?! would be put with a nominative or an accusative. Sometimes, however, the genitive is put for η with the dative ; as, εξεστιν ι]μιν μάλλον έτερων, for μάλλον »] ίτΐροις, Thucyd. Sometimes the genitive is used instead of η , where η would be put with a different case from that of the word to which the comparative is joined ; as, του Πλούτου παρέχω βελτίονας άνδρας, for ij ο Πλούτος, not η τον Πλούτον, Aristoph. Obs. 2. The comparative is sometimes followed both by the genitive, and by *) with a clause explanatory of the genitive ; as, ου τι γένοιτ' &v άτοπώτερον, ^ &εραπεύειν εκ προστάγματος ; Lucian. Obs. 3. When ελαττον, πλέον, πλείω, are followed by a nu- neral, i) is often omitted ; as, μή Ιλαττον δέκα ετη γεγονότες, not less than ten years old, Plato. Sometimes $) is placed between two comparatives ; as, γυναίκα εύγενεστέραν ι) πλουσιωτέραν εγημε, he married a wife more noble than wealthy, Plut. Or it is followed by κατά or προς with an accusative ; as, όπλα πλείω ι) κατά τους νεκρούς έλήφ&η, more arms were taken than the number of dead led one to expect, Thucyd. ; έλάττω ?) προς τό κατόρθωμα νομίζειν εϊναι ττ\ν δόξαν, to think the honor inferior to the merit of the action. Or by an infinitive, commonly with, but sometimes without, ώς or ώστε before it ; as, νεώτεροι είσιν ι) ώστε εΐδέναι, they are too young to know, Lys. ; μείζον ij φέρειν, too great to endure, or to be endured, Soph. Obs. 4. Substantives are sometimes used elliptically for prop- ositions in comparison ; as, μείζων λόγου, for μείζων i) λέγειν εστί, εξεστι, greater than can be expressed, Aristoph. ; μείζων έλπϊδος, iEschyl. ; ελαττον ττ\ς άξιας, Xen. In a similar manner the comparative is followed by the genitive of the pronouns ϊμαντού, σεαντοϋ, ίαντού, when any thing is compared with itself at different times ; as, ανδρειότερος γίνεται αντος αντοϋ, for ΐ\ πρότερον ],ν, Plato. The superlative is' frequently used instead of the comparative} as, οτε δεινότατος ααντού \oda, when you even surpassed yourself, Xen. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. J 61 Obs. 5. Proportional numbers are construed like compara- tives ; as, στράτευμα πολλαπλάσιο» του ημετέρου, an army much greater than ours, Herodot. ; διπλάσια έκείνω διδόναι, Ψ\ άλλω τννίτων στρατηγών, to give him twice as much as any other of the commanders, Lys. Obs. 6. The excess or defect of measure is put in the ^* dative ; as, ένιαυτώ πρεσβύτερος, older by a year, Aristoplirp^ δραχμή τιμιώτερον, Lys. ; οσωπερ σωφρονέστερος, τοσοΰνφ^'^' ενδιχιμονέστερο;, by how much the more temperate, by so much the happier, Plato ; πολλω καλλίων, JEschin. t Also with superlatives ; as, μακοω άριστος, Herodot. Adjectives governing the Dative. XVI. Adjectives signifying profit or disprofit, like- ness or unlikeness, &c. govern the dative ; 'as, tjJ πατρϊδι ώγελΧμος, -profitable to the country, βλαβερός τοις πολεμίοις, hurtful to the enemy, όμοιος * Λχιλλεϊ, like to Achilles. To this rule belong ; 1. Adjectives of profit or disprofit; as, τ?/ πάλει χρήσιμος, άχρηστος, Demosth. 2. Of pleasure or pain; as, ήδιστον νμΐν, Xen. ; αλγεινον ίμοί, Eurip. 3. Of friendship or hatred ; as, τοις 'Ά-θ-ψαΊοις ευνοι ήσαν, Thucyd. ; κνϊχδρ'ος τω Λημαρι',τω, Herodot. 4. Of clearness or obscurity ; as, δήλος εστίν ϊμοί, Aristoph.; αφανές ωι ίκείνοις, Xen. 5. Of nearness; as, πλησίοι αλλ>\λοισι, Horn. 6. Of fitness or unfitness ; as, τοις πλεουσιν ίπιτηδειότερος 6 Πειραιενς, Pausan. 7. Of ease or difficulty; as, ράδιόν Ιστί μοι, Demosth.; χαλεπον t'jui fan, Plato. 8. Of equality or inequality; as, ov και σύ τυπτει τας "σας πληγας ίμοί, as many blows as I, Aristoph. Also of likeness or unlikeness; as, τ»,* ιρι'σιν όμο'ιαν έχει ταΐς ίταίραις, Isocr. 9. Of obedience or disobedience; as, ΚροΊσω ήσαν κατηκοοι, Herodot. , γονενσιν άπει&εΐς, Rom. i. 30. 10. Of trust; as, πίσύνος &εοΐς, iEschyl. To these add many other adjectives of various significations ; as, οϊ>δε- μϊίϊ ζι,ιιία ένοχος ην, Lys. ; 8 κοιν'ον απασίν ϊστι, Demosth., &c. — par- ticularly, Compounds of σνν and όμον, also verbals in τος taken passively, govern the dative; as, ξυνή&ης μοι εστί, he \s accus- tomed to me ; όμόγλωσσοι, τοις Καρσί, of the same language with the Carians ; τοις " Ελλησιν ύποπτος, suspected by the Greeks j άγνωστος ήμΐν, unknown to us ; ονδε ρητά μοι, Soph. 14* 162 GOVERNMENT. Obs. 1. Substantives have likewise sometimes a dative after them, and, among these, substantives from primitives governing a dative ; as, σύ μον έσσί πατήρ καΐ μήτηρ, you are father and mother to me, Horn. ; υπηρεσία τοις χτεοΐς, Plato ; πυρός βροτοίς δοτηρ' δρας, you behold the giver of fire to mortals, iEschyl. Obs. 2. c Ο αυτός, the same, governs the dative ; as, το αυτό ΰνομα ή γη τω ποταμώ έχει, the country has the same name as e river, Herodot. ; ταύτα έμοί πέπον&ας, you have suffered the same things as I, Aristoph. Sometimes εϊς has a similar construction ; as, δς έμοί μιας έγένετ' εκ ματέρος, who was born of the same mother as I, Eurip. In Latin, invltum qui servat, idem facit occidenti, Hor. ; eddem Hits censemus, Cic. Obs. 3. Many adjectives which usually govern the dative, are sometimes found with the genitive ; as, ij πορεία όμοια φυγής εγ'ιγνετο, Xen,. ; άδελιρα των ειρημενων, Isocr. ; εχ&ρος του αν&ρωπϊνου γένους, Plato; το άνόσιον του όσιου εναντίον, Id.; υπήκοοι των * Λσονρίων ήσαν, Xen. ; ουδείς ενοχός ϊοτι λειποταξίου, Lys. ; κοινον πάντων αν-Θρώπων, Plato. Particularly compounds of συν and όμον' as, και 'όσα του γένους εστί τούτου ξι'μψωνα, Plato ; oi Ύρκύνιοι όμοροι των Άσσυρίων είσί, Xen. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. Verbs which govern the Genitive. XVII. Ειμί and γίγνομαι, signifying possession, property, or duty, govern the genitive ; as, Κνρου ήσαν, they belonged to Cyrus. εοτιν άνδρος αγαϋον , it is the part of a good man. ίγίνετο Μεσσήνη Αοκρών, Messene was under the dominion of the Locrians. Obs. 1. The neuters έμόν, σον, &,c. are used in this sense, instead of the genitives of the personal pronouns εμοϋ, σοΰ, &lc. ; as, έμόν έστι, it is my duty. Obs. 2. The genitive often takes προς before it; as, δεξιού προς ανδρός Ιστι, Aristoph. Sometimes έργον is expressed; as, των αρχόντων έργον εστί, Isocr. So σον έργον εστί, Aristoph. XVIII. Verbs of remembering, forgetting, be- ginning, ceasing, desiring, ruling, &c. govern the genitive ; as, μέμνησ' Όρεατου, remember Orestes. της οργής επανσατο, he ceased from his anger. Ψαμμητίχος εβαοίλευσεν Αιγύπτου, Psammetlchus reigned over Egypt. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 163 Verbs govern the genitive, which signify, 1. To remember, to forget; as, ονκ επιληοομαι αντον, I will not forget him. T 'i? "(?/'/£ μνημόνευαν, Isocr. ; ού/ιοτε ληοομαι αυτών, Horn. Obs. These verbs are often construed with the accusative ; as, Tvdia Λγαμεμνονι, Horn. ; οδίσαντο αύτώ, Id. Obs. Μέμφομαι and επιπλ^ττω are also found with the accusative ; as, μέμφεται τον Πιττακον, Plato ; ίπέπληττε τον μη καλώς αι'Χονντα, Id. Αοιοορεω usually takes the accusative, but the middle λοιδορέομαι, the dative ; as, έλ.οιδόρουν αύτ'ον, Xen. ; λοιδορεΐτάι τώ Jii, Aristoph. 3. To assist, to profit, to hurt ; as, ίβοι'&ησε τοΐς'Έλλησι, he assisted the Greeks. λιπαίνεται τοΐς μειρακ'ιοις, he corrupts the youth. τοις φίλοις αρηγειν, Xen. ; τη πόλει αμϋνειν, Aristoph. ; Τρωσίν αλεζι',σειν, Horn. ; ΙπικΌυρεΐν Λακεδαιιιονίοις, Thucyd. ; τοΐς &ανονσι πλούτος ούδεν ώφελεΐ, iEschyl. ; ος οϋτε αντώ, ούτε πόλει, λυσιτελείς Plato ; ίμοί ουκ αρεσκονσι, Herodot. ; ώ τ6 αδΧκον λωβαται, Plato. Obs. Some of these verbs often take the accusative ; as, 8c ώφελησ* Πέρσας ονδεν, Herodot. ; σε δε ταντ' αρέσκει, Aristoph. ; διακυμαί- νεται τίν γνναΐκα. Herodot. ; λωβώνται τους νέους, Plato ; Όν /irti», βλάπτω, and some others, the accusative only. 4. To contend, to serve ; as, Ju ϊρίζειν, to contend loith Jupiter, υπηρετώ τοΐς &εοΐς, I serve the gods. 168 GOVERNMENT. μάχεται τοις πολεμίοις, Plato; άνδρασι μύρνασ -dai, Horn.; πολε- μειν τοις βαρβαροις, Isocr. ; Σκν&αις διαγωνίζεσ&αι, Xen.; τοις εχ- ■θροΐς στασιάζει, Aristoph. ; -δηρσί παλαίειν, Bion ; δεσπόταις ύμιλ~ λάσΰαι, Eurip. ; ταΐς ηδοναις δονλενειν, Isocr.; δεσπότη διακονεΐν, Demosth. Obs.l. Frequently verbs of contending, instead of the dative, take προς with the accusative ; as, προς άνδρας δέκα μάχεσΰαι, Herodot. Πο- λεμέω likewise takes the accusative, in the sense of to attack; as, Ιπολε- μψε τ ας Ά&ηνας, Apollod. Obs. 2. Jaτρεϋω is sometimes found with the accusative , as, παΐδ* * Λγαμεμνοι'ιαν λατρεύω, Eurip. 5. To approach, to meet, to follow ; as, πλησιάζομεν ry Άττίκΐ], we approach Attica, άπαντα τω ^ενοψωντι, he meets Xenophon. ο Κρίτων εϊπετο αντίο, Crito followed him. ϋηρίοις πελάζειν, Xen.; Κϋρος ψτιοντο Κροίσω, Herodot.; iv- τνγχανω τω Ενκρατει, Lucian ; ιμοί άκολου&εΐν, Aristoph.; πλούτω κύδυς όπηδεΐ, Hesiod. Obs. 1. Verbs of approaching sometimes take the genitive; as, της Αιτωλίας εγγίζειν, Polyb. Obs. 2. Άντάω is likewise found with the genitive ; as, αιτήσω τονδ' άνίρος, Horn. Also ά^τιύζω with the accusative ; as, άντιάζωμεν τον ϊπι- ύντα, Herodot. Obs. 3. Verbs of following are often construed with μετ'α, σύν, αμα, &c. ; as, άκολον&ει μετ' Ιμον, Plato; ξύν Ήρακλεΐ ίσπόμην, Soph. 6. To pray, to converse ; as, ενχετο τοις -θεοΓς, he prayed to the gods. 'Αλκιβιάδη διαλέγεται, he converses with Alcibiades. ■&εοις άραται, Soph. ; προσενςώμε&α τ\ι •9εω, Aristoph. ; τοις άλ- λοις λαλεΐν, Theophrast. Obs. Προσεύχομαι is also joined with the accusative by the Attics; as, Χνα προσεύζη τον -&εον, Aristoph. 7. To use, to trust, to associate ; as, H'V ^ρ»7 σ ^ αι ί^α/ω, not to use oil. τοις χρηστοί ς πιστενειν, to trust the good. άποχρησ$αι τω πλοντεΐν, Demosth. ; τοις πονηροΐς άπιοτεΐν, Isocr. ; τοις άγα&οΐς όμΤλειν, Pind. 8. To befit, to be like ; as, άνδρΐ ελεν&ίρω πρίπει τούτο, this befits a freeman, ο πασιν αρμόσει, Polyb. ; με&υονσιν εώκεσαν, Xen. To these add several verbs of different significations ; as, Άγκαίω ηνησαν, Apoll. Rh. ; τοις άλλοις κατήνει, Thucyd. ; προσεκννησαν αντ<7>, Matth. ii. 11. ; νπεπτησσον αντω, Xen. The accusative, how- ever, is also put ; as, προσεκννησαν τον Θεον, Xen. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 1(59 iv. Verbs signifying motion or tendency to a thing often take the dative instead of είς, επί, or nqbg, with the accusative ; as, ηξω ύμΐ», for ngog ύμας, I will come to you, Lucian ; τ\λ&εν αύτω Ζψος αγρυπνον βέλος, for είς αύτον, JEschyl. ν. ΕΙμΙ and γίγνομαι frequently take the dative of a personal pronoun, with a participle agreeing with it, where the whole is translated by the verb from which the participle is derived ; as, εί' σοι βουλομίνω εστίν αποκρίνασ&αι, if you are willing to answer, Plato; fi' σοι ηδομενω ίστϊ, if you please, Id. ; ουκ "αν εμοιγε ϊλπομϊνω τα γένοιτο, I had not hoped this, Horn. vi. Verbs of all kinds are sometimes accompanied by the dative of a personal pronoun, which might have been omitted without injury to the sense ; as, μη μοι μίμνε ανερα τούτον, do not await this man, Horn. ; τυφλός ειμί σοι, Lucian. Verbs governing the Accusative. XXI. Verbs of a transitive signification govern the accusative ; as, τον "Άχιλλΐα ΙτΊμψαν, they honored Achilles. Obs. 1. Any verb may govern the accusative of a noun having the same derivation, or a similar signification ; as, πολεμεΐν πόλεμον, Lys. ; κίνδυνους κινδυνεύειν, Plato ; εμάχοντο μάχην, Horn. ; πολλας πρεσβείας επρϊσβευσαν, jEschin. ;_ ησ&ενησβ ται'την την νόσον, Isocr. ; ήδιστον ζώμεν β'ιον, Soph.; ~>}c,av δρόμημα δειν'ον, Eurip. ; γονυπετεις 'έδρας προσπιτνώ σε, Id. ; επορεύετο την αντην όδον, Xen. ; ωμοσα καρτερ'ον ορκον, Horn. ; ηδεσ -dai μεγάλη* ηδον'ην, Plut. ; αισχρούς φόβους φοβούνται, Plato; τίρττου κενή* ονησιν, Eurip„; τίν' ορκον όρκώσεις ημάς ; Aristoph. ; Μίλϊτός με ίγράχρατο την γραφην ταύτην, Plato ; την εν Νάζω ναυμαχίαν Αακεδαΐ' μον'ιους Ινίκησαν, jEschin. A dative is often put for the accusative; as, απο&ανεΐν βιαίω δανατω, Herodot.; άπώλετο λ.υγρω ολίϋρω, Horn. ; Μαιαδος υΐον εφίληΟΒ παντοίΐ] φιλ.ότητι, Id. ; τ\ι μάχγ ενίκησαν τους Ήρακλεώτας, Thucyd. Obs. 2. Several intransitive verbs are sometimes used transi- tively ; as, η%εν χϊρα, he thrust his hand, Soph. Ajac. 40. ; άνδρας επ' αντ'ας άνέβησε, he placed men upon them, Herodot. i. 80. ; Ίμΐρα άν&' ύδατος ρείτω γάλα, let Himera floxo milk instead of loater, Theocr. v. 124. ; Svo κακά σπεύδεις, Eurip. So βοαν τίνα, to call any one ; as, Κύρον εβόα, Xen. Also βλεπειν, to look; as, φόβον βλεπειν, to look fearful, iEschyl. Obs. 3. Several intransitive verbs which express an emo- tion, and in which an action is implied, though not described, govern the accusative ; as, 15 170 GOVERNMENT. ην (πρβξιν) ηλγησ' εγώ, Soph. Ajac. 790. ; τις αν τάδε γηΰψειεν, Horn. II. Ί. 77. ; τους ένόεβεις &εο1 ϋ-νήοχοντας ον χαίρουσι, Eurip. Hipp. 1339. ; ί}σ&ψ πατέρα τον έμον ενλογονντά σε. Soph. Philoct. 1314. Also ούτε Φίλιππος έ&άυρει τούτους, ου ■&' ούτοι Φίλιπποι; Demosth. ; δυσχεραίνειν την άδικίαν, Plato. Obs. 4. Verbs of swearing govern the accusative of the object sworn by ; as, ομννμι πάντας τους &εους } Aristoph. Obs. 5. The accusative is often understood; as, εγγύς ηγον οί" Ελληνες, sc. τ 'ην στρατιά ν, Xen. ; ος ετι παις ων Ιτελεύτησε, sc. τον βίον, Demosth. ; είσβάλλειν, έμβάλλειν, sc. Ιαυτον, to make an irruption, to overflow, of a river. Xen. Verbs governing the Dative and the Genitive. XXII. Verbs of giving way, with μετέχω, μετά- δίδωμι, κοινωνεω, φόονεω, and άμφιοβητέω, govern the dative of a person, with the genitive of a thing.; as, παραχωρώ σοι τον βήματος, I give way to you from the τον κίνδυνου μετέχειν αντοΐς, to share with them the danger. μ"εταδίδωμί σοι του πλούτου, I impart to you of my'riches. εί'κειν τινί της όδον, Herodot. ; 'έδρας νπανίστανται βασιλεΐ, Xen. ; κοινωνήσατε μοι τον στόλου, Lucian ; ών εγώ. σοι ον φθονήσω, Xen.; ημψισβήτησεν Έρεχϋεΐ τής πόλεως, Isocr. To these add μεγαίρω, συγγιγνώσκω, and some others; as, ον μεγαίρω τονδέ σοι δωρήματος, iEschyl. ; Ουλλήψομαι δε τονδέ σοι κάγώ πόνου, Eurip. Obs. Frequently verbs of giving way have only the dative after them : as, ονδ' εί'κεις κακοϊς, iEschyl. Sometimes the genitive has εκ or απο before it ; as, εΧκουσ'Ακ χώρης, Tyrt. Some of the other verbs also vary their construction ; as, ήμΐν μετάσχω τονδε τον πλούτου μέρος, Aristoph.;' εί μη μεταδοιεν αντοις πυρούς^ Xen. Also αμφισβητώ σοι τούτο, or much oftener περί τούτου. Verbs governing the Accusative and the Genitives XXIII. Verbs of reminding, filling, emptying, depriving, delivering, prohibiting, and restraining, govern the accusative and the genitive ; as, μη με τούτων μίμνησκε, do not remind me of these things. ασκούς επλησεν οϊνον, he filed bottles icith wine. Θέτιν έστέρησα Άχιλλέως, I deprived Thetis of Achilles. απήλλαξε της νόσου τον Λλέζανδρον, lie freed Alexander from the disease. ειργειν εκείνους τής 3α?.άσσης, to keep them from , the sea. ϊκεΐνον της νβρεως έπαυσαν, they made him desist from his insolence. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 171 ων ϊγω-ΐ'μας άναμιμνήσκω, Plato; ίγϊμΧσε δΰο ταϋς σίτου, Isocr. ; σ* αίματος κομίσω, Herodot. ; μυριάδας πυλεις ανδρών άγαΰών ίκίνωσε, Eurip.; γνμνούοι τα όστέα τών κρεών, Herodot.; >,μβς ΜεΟηνης άποστερονσι, Isocr. ; ΙΙάριν νοσφϊεις βίου, Soph. ; σε τυύδ' ελενΰερώ φόνου, Eurip. ; όκνου οε λύσω, Soph. ; ρύσαί με δουλοσύνης, Herodot. ; μηδέ μ' Ι'ρϋκε μάχης, Hom. ; κωλύοαι της εισόδου τον 'Λντίγονον, Polyb. To these add verbs of separating, repelling, begetting, and esteeming worthy ; as, χωρίζουσιν αλλήλων λόχους, Eurip. ; Τρώων λοιγον αλάλκειν, Hom. ; * Ατλας &εών μιας εφϋσε Μ,αΐαν, Eurip. ) τιμής άξιοϋοιν εαυτούς, Aristot. Obs. 1. Several of these verbs are also construed with απο or Ix • as, απο βάρβαρων ΐ,λευ&ερωσε τ^ν τιόλιν, Plato ; πόνων εκ τώνδ' εμε λύσει, ^schyl. ; - τους νίεΐς εϊργουοιν άπο τών πονηρών ανθρώπων, Xen. ; χωρίίειν απο του σώματος την ψυχ^ν, Plato ; παύσον εκ κακών ειιε, Soph. Obs. 2. Verbs of reminding often take two accusatives ; as, ταν&' υπέμνησα νμας, Demosth. ; Also αποστερώ ■ as, τους στρατιώτας τον μισ&ον απεστΐρησε, Isocr. Obs. 3. Some verbs frequently take the accusative of a thing, with the genitive of a person or thing from which it proceeds ; as, τα ϊπίλοιπα ηκουον Θερσάνδρου, the rest I heard from Thersander, Herodot.; πΰ&εσ&έ μου ταδί, Aristoph. ; μά&ε μου τάδε, learn this from me, Xen. An infinitive or part of a sentence may supply the place of the accusative ; as, ηκουσε Τισσαφέρνους, ότι oi" Ελληνες νικώεν, Xen. The genitive often has a preposition expressed before it ; as, τάδε παρ' αύτεων πυ&ϊα&αι-, Herodot. Verbs governing the Accusative and the Dative. XXIV. Any transitive verb may govern the accu- sative and the dative (ivhen, together with the object of the action, we express the. person or thing with relation to which it is exerted) ; as, δειζόν μοι τον Σωκράτη, show me Socrates. α όνειδίζεις πατρί, with which you reproach my father. Την σκηνών Κυαξάρει ίξεΐλον, they selected the tent for Cyaxares. 'ίνα μοί λοιγον αμϋνης, that you may avert destruction for (or from) me. *Λχιλλεΐ τον ί^ιέτερον άρχοντα εϊκαζε, he compared our chief to Achilles. Obs. The dative is often used for εις, Ιπι, or προς, with the accusative ; as, σε μοι ηγαγε, he brought you to me, Hom. ; and sometimes for απο or παρά with the genitive ; as, ol εδίξατο ϊγχος, he took the spear from him, Horn. 172 GOVERNMENT. Verbs governing two Accusatives. XXV. Verbs of doing, speaking, asking, taking, teaching, clothing, and concealing, govern two accusatives, the one of a person and the other of a thing; as, πολλά aya&a νμας εποίησε, he did you many services. ο, τι ίρούσιν ημάς, what they will say of us. Ιμε οίτον αίτοϋσι, they ask food of me. Τροίαν άφείλου Ποίαμον, you took Troy from Priam. ταύτα πάντα εδίδασκέ με, he taught me all this. ίξέδΰσάν με εψατα, they took off my clothes from me. μή με κρύιμγς τούτο, do not conceal this from me. 6 Ζευς με^ταύτ' έδρασε, Aristoph. ; κακά εϊργασμαι τον οίκον, Thucyd. ; τις σε τοιαδ' ερεζε ; Horn. ; Θηβαίοι πολλά και άλλα ημάς ηδΊκησαν, Thucyd. ; ταύτα με λεγουσι, Aristoph. ; πολλά με εξείπας, Soph. ; προς τι με ταύτα ίρωτας ; Xen. ; τάδε αύτον εϊρετο ο 'Αστυάγης, Herodot. ; νμας 6 βασιλεύς τα όπλα απαιτεί, Xen. ; Ενρυμίδοντα χρήματα ίπράξαντο, Thucyd. ; ημάς αποστερεί τον μισ&Όν, Xen. ; την &εον τους στέφανους σεσυλήκασι, Demosth. ; ταΰτα παίδευσαν με, Lucian; την ϊσ&ήτα άπΐδϋσαν αντον, Id. ; ούδεν αποκρύβομαι σε, Plut. Obs. 1. Several other verbs are also found with two accusa- tives ; as, ουκ αίτιώμαι τάδε τον &εον, instead of τώνδε, Xen. ; άναμνήσω νμας τα τούτω πεπραγμένα, Id. ; ος σε κωλύσει το δραν, Soph. ; έπεισα ταύτα την βουλην, Demosth, Obs. 2. Verbs of doing and speaking often take the adverb εν or κακώί instead of the accusative of the thing ; as, τονς*Λργε'ιους ευ ποιεί, Demosth. ; μη δρα τους τε&νηκότας κακώς, Soph. ; κακώς σε λέγω, Id. In like manner την πύλιν ίκανος εύεργετειν, Plato ; Ικακονργουν την ΙΙερδίκκου, Thucyd. Also εύλογεΐν κακολογείν τίνα. Ohs. 3. Verbs of doing sometimes take the person in the dative ; as, οιικ αν εχοιμεν, ο, τι ποιοιμίν σοι, Plato; άγα&όν τι πράςαι τ\\ πάλει, Lys. So αφαιρούμαι, which is also construed with the genitive of the person and the accusative of the thing, and sometimes with the accusative of the per- son and the genitive of the thing ; thus, αφαιρούμαι σοι τοντο, αφαι- ρούμαι σου τούτο, or αφαιρούμαι σε τούτου. Obs. 4. Some verbs take the accusative of a person, with the accusative neuter of an adjective in the sense of an adverb; as, δυνάμενος τα μϊγιστα αυτούς ώφελεΐν, Plato ; πολλά ημάς ϊβλαπτον, Thucyd. ; μεγάλα νμας ευεργετήσει, Demosth. Obs. 5. A preposition must often be supplied before the accusative of the thing; as, ν μας την είρήνην προκαλούνται, Aristoph., sc. εις, or Ιπι % sometimes expressed; as, Λακεδαιμόνιοι νμάς προκαλούνται Ις σπονδ'ας, Thucyd. Verbs of dividing, especially, are construed with two accusatives, one of which is governed by εις understood; as, διίλωμεν αντην δύο μΐρη. CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 173 Plato. The preposition is often expressed ; as, διειλον σφσς αντονς εϊς Ίϊπαοα μέρη, Polyb. Sometimes the whole, which is divided, is put in the genitive, and the word μέρος, μοίρα, &c. governed by the verb ; as, δι'ο μοίρας διειλε Jvdwv πάντων, for Αυδούς πάντας (ές) δύο μοίρας διείλε, Herodot. So in the passive, δώδεκα Περσών φυλαί διηρηνται, for Πέρσαι {εις) δώδεκα φυλάς διήρηνται, Xen. Obs. 6. Some verbs take the accusative of a person, with the accusative of an adjective or substantive which expresses a quality or property at- tributed to the person by the verb. These verbs are those which signify to call or name, to make, to choose, and when in the passive take the same case after as before them. Thus, σε Προμηϋέα καλούσι, iEschyl. ; > Ιωνα ονομάζω σε, Eurip. ; βασιλέα σε εποίησαν, Xen. ; ί,γεμόνα αί- ρούνται ΛημοσΒένην, Thucyd. ; στρατηγ'ον του πεζού 3Ι Λμασιν άπέδεςε, Herodot. Likewise, τύν υίον ιππέα εδιδάξατο, Plato; σί Θήβαι υνκ ϊπα'ιδευσαν κακόν, Soph. ; καί τούτον τρέφειν τε και αϋζειν μέγαν, Plato. These verbs frequently take the infinitive είναι, from which, however, it does not follow that this word is to be supplied where it does not ap- pear; as, σοφιστίν όνομάζονσι τον άνδρα είναι, Plato ; ε'ΐλοντο βασιλέα eivai τον 7ruija, Herodot. ; απέ δεςε δικαστών είναι τον παΐδα, Id. The Government of Verbs having a Causative Signification. XXVI. Verbs signifying to cause one to do some- thing govern the accusative, with the case of the included verb ; as, εγευσάς με ευδαιμονίας, you made me taste of happiness, γάλα νμας ίπότίσα^, I caused you to drink milk, ορκίζω νμας τον Κίριον, I adjure you by the Lord. Obs. Verbs signifying to taste govern the genitive ; hence those signi- fying to cause to taste govern the accusative and the genitive ; and so° of the others. THE CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE .VERBS. XXVII. When a verb in the active voice governs two cases, in the passive it retains the latter case ; as, εΐργοντο της θαλάσσης, they were kept from the sea. τίν ίατρΧκ^ν έδιδάχ&η, he was taught the heali/ig art. άφ>\ρέ&ησαν τα κτήματα, they were stript of their possessions. Obs. 1. Some verbs in the passive retain the former case, and the latter is made their nominative ; as, ό "-Λρης επιτρέπεται την δίαιταν. for τω "Λρεϊ ίπιτρέπεται η δίαιτα, Mars is intrusted with the decision, Lucian ; τήνδ' Ικ χειρών αρπάζομαι. this is snatched from my hands, Eurip. ; ό τύραννος νπο τών γυπών κει- ρέσ&ω το ηπαο, let the tyrant's liver be torn by the vultures, Lucian. 15* 174 GOVERNMENT. The accusative with the passive may often be referred to κατά understood ; as, τιτρώσκεται τον μηρον, he is wounded in the thigh, Herodot. Obs. 2. Verbs passive, or of a passive signification, are fol• lowed by a genitive governed by (5ττό, άπο, έκ, παρά, or προς • as επολιορκοϋντο νπο τών Πελοποννησίων, they were besieged by the Pelopon- nesians, Thucyd. ; επαινεΐσϋαι προς τών -&εατών, to be praised by the spectators, Lucian ; τε&νηκεν νφ' νμών, he was killed by you, Xen. ; και νυν φεΰγουσιν νπ' εμού, and now they are banished by me, Id. ; ούτι προς ημών ωλετο, Eurip. ; επεσον νπο 'Λ&ηναίων , Herodot. Thus in Latin periit ab Hannibdle, Plin. ; iorqueor infesto ne vir ab hoste cadat, Ovid. The preposition is sometimes understood ; as, νικώμαι'Ήρας, I am overcome by Juno, Eurip. Obs. 3. Passive verbs-are often followed by a dative, some- times with, but frequently without, a preposition ; as, ου χ vn' άνδρασι ναίεται αστν, the city is not inhabited by men, Apoll. Rh. ; ταντα πεπρακταί μοι, this has been done by me, Demosth. ; τοις δε Κερ• κυρα'ιοις ονχ Ιωρώντο, they were not seen by the Corcyreans, Thucyd. Thus also impersonals ; as, κεχόρευται ημΐν, we have danced, Aristoph. THE CONSTRUCTION OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. XXVIII. An impersonal verb governs the da- tive ; as, συμφέρει, ttj πόλει, it is profitable for the state. Obs. 1. Jtl and χρ!\ agree with an infinitive preceded by the accusative, one of which is often understood, and not un- frequently both ; as, δει σε πλεΐν, you must sail, Soph. ; καρτερεί ως χρη βασιλέας (sc. καρ- τερειν), endure as it becomes kings, Isocr. ; si &ανεϊν δει (sc. {μας), κατ- ■&ανονμε-9α ευγενώς, Eurip. ; ει χρη (sc. εμε &ανεΐν), &ανονμαι, Soph. Other impersonals likewise, which more commonly govern the dative, sometimes agree with an infinitive preceded by the accusative, and hence both constructions are sometimes united ; as, συνέβη γάρ μοι όκτωκαιδεκέτη γημαι,β>τ it happened to me to marry at eighteen years of age, Demosth. ; εςεατί σοι ζην καρπονμενον τΐχ σαυτον, it is in your power to live in the en- joyment of what belongs to you, Xen. Obs. 2. Jel and μέλει, with their compounds, also μέτεσπ, προσήκει, διαφέρει, and ελλείπει, govern the dative of a person, with the genitive of a thing; as, ε\χν νμΐν εκατόν δϊη τριηρών, if you have need of a hundred galleys, Demosth.; ονδ' εμελεν αντώ τοντον,ηοτ did he care for this, Lucian; ηενησιν ov μετεστιν αρχής, the poor have no share in the government, Plato , ονπερ i'uiv προαδει, Thucyd. ; Σ ατνρω μεταμΐλει τών πεπραγμένων, Isocr. CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE. 175 An infinitive or some part of a sentence often supplies the place of the genitive; as, οϋχ εμελε μοι ερεσ&αι, I did not take care to inquire, Horn. ; or/, ore απϊχτεινά σου τον νίον μεταμελει μοι, it repents me not that I killed your son, Xen. Or they are used personally ; as, σοι μελετώ "Εχτωο, Horn. ; μΐτεστι πασι το ίσον, Thucyd. Obs. 3. Sometimes δει and χρή take the accusative of a person with the genitive of a thing ; as, ού πόνου πολλοϋ με δει, I have no need of much trouble, Eurip. ; τέο (Ion. for τίνος) σε χοή ; what is thy business ? Horn. Odys. d'. 463. The substantive χρεω, χρειώ, χρειά, frequently has the same govern- ment ; as, έμε χρεω γίγνεται αύτη;, Horn. Odys. δ'. 634. THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE. XXIX. One verb governs another in the infini- tive ; as, Ιπι&ϋμω μαν-θανειν, I desire to learn. Obs. 1. The infinitive is often used to denote the purpose of an action ; as, δίδου τεύχεα ΤρωσΙ φέρειν, he gave the armor to the Trojans to carry, Horn.; παρέχω έμαυτόν έρωταν, I offer myself to be questioned, Plato; ήλ&ον δειπνεΐν, I came in order to sup, .huc'u. This infinitive, after verbs of giving, corresponds to the Latin gerund in dum, or to the participle in dus ; after verbs of motion, to the supine in um, or to the participle in rus. Sometimes the Latin poets imitate the Greek construction ; as, dederatque comas diffundere vends, Virg. ; semper in Oceanum mittit me quarere gemmas, Propert. Obs. 2. The infinitive is governed by adjectives expressing fitness, ability, or quality ; as, ού λέγειν δεινός, άλλα σιγαν αδύ- νατος, not powerful in speaking, but incapable of keeping si- lence, Epicharm. ; δειναί γάρ αϊ γυναίκες εύρίσκειν τέχνας, for women are skilful in finding devices, Eurip. The infinitive active frequently stands for the infinitive pas- sive, corresponding to the Latin supine in u; as, νόησαν ράδιος, easy to understand, to be understood, Plato ; ηδέα άκουε iv f pleasant to hear, Id. ; πόλις χαλεπή λαβείν, Demosth. , Obs. 3. The infinitive is often put for other modes with ώς, ώστε, πρίν, πάρος, έπεί, επειδή, άχρι, μέχρι, and 'έστε, going be- fore it ; as, ώς ίδεΐν τον *Λγά&ωνα, for ώς εϊδεν ο *Λγα$ων Λ when Agaiho saw, Plato; ovx εστίν Οντως ώκνς ώστε Ικφνγεΐν, he is not so swift as to escape, Eurip. j πρίν Φίλιππον ελΰεΐν, before Philip came, Demosth. ; Ιπειδη Uvai δια της -ψάμμου, when they were marching through the sand, Herodot. 176 GOVERNMENT. The infinitive is put after oh; and όσος for ωστε } and έφ' φ or έφ' ωτε for επϊ τούτω ώστε • as, εΰτι τοιούτος οίος μη δουλει'ειν μιιδενί πράγματι, he is such a person as not to be a slave to any thing, Plato; ί] μϊν ε ψ-9 άσε τοσούτον, όσον ΊΙαχητα ανεγνωκϊναι το ψήφισμα, the former galley was so -much sooner, that Ρ aches had read the decree, Thucyd. ;' ήρέ&ησαν εφ' ωτε συγγράψαι νόμους, they were chosen on condition that they should make laws, Xen. The abbrevi- ated expressions οίος ειμί and οίος τ' ειμί are more common, the former of which usually signifies to he wont, and the latter, to be able; as, ου γαρ ijv οίος άπο παντός κειρδα'ινειν, for he was not one that profited by any thing, Xen. ; ούχ οίος τε ενδοΎ μενειν ην, I was not able to stay within, Aristoph.; ανδρός ουδαμώς οίου τε -ψενδεα&αι, Demosth. Thus also οσα γε ημάς ειδΐναι, as far as we knoio, Lucian. Frequently ως or όσον is omitted ; as, απλώς γαρ εΐπζΐν, for to speak simply, Lucian ; δοκεΐν Ιμοί, as it appears to me, Soph.; μικρού, ολίγου δεΓν, wanting but little, almost, Isocr. Sometimes the infinitive ; as, ως άπλώ λόγω, sc. είπειν, iEschyl. Prom. 46. Sometimes both are wanting; as, συνελόντι δε, sc. ως ειπείν, to speak briefly, Iseeus ; ολίγου (ρροϋδος γεγίνημαι, sc. ως or ώστε δεΐν, I am almost gone, Aristoph. Obs. 4. Sometimes the infinitive is governed by a verb of saying or thinking understood, or contained in the principal verb ; as, όσοι aifrbv απέλυσαν μη φωρα είναι, as many as acquitted him of the charge of being a thief ', Herodot. ; απιΐναι αϋτον εκελευον αυτούς γαρ νυν στρατηγειν (sc. ελεγον, contained Ίη4κίλευον), they ordered him to de- part, for that they commanded noxo, Xen. In like manner in Latin, sen- tentiam ne diceret, recusdvit : quamdiu jurejurando hostium teneretur, non esse se senator em, sc. dicens, contained in recusdvit, Cic. Off. in. 27. Obs. 5. The infinitive is often used for the imperative, par- ticularly by the poets ; as, σν δέ δεϋρο νέεσχται, do thou return hither, Horn. ; οϊνου του αντοΰ πίνειν απαντάς, let all drink of the same wine, Lucian. When the infinitive is used for the second person imperative, its subject is in the nominative ; in the other cases, mostly in the accusative. In the former case an ellipsis of -θέλε, μίμνησο, &c. is supposed ; in the latter, of χρη, δει, &c The infinitive is put in a similar manner also in supplica- tions ; as, Ζεύ ocra, Τηλίμάχόν μοι εν ανδράσιν 'όλβιον είναι, Hom. Odys. ρ'. 354., where δος, πο'ιψον, εύχομαι, or the like, is supplied. Obs. 6. The infinitive ε ϊναι is often redundant ; as, οϋτε πυρός εκών είναι άπτομαι, nor do I loiUingly touch' fire, Xen.; τό νυν είναι την συνονσίαν διαλύσομεν, Plato, Lach. fin. ; το έπ 7 έκείνοις εΊναι } Thucyd. νιιτ. 48. CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 177 XXX. The infinitive with the neuter article pre- fixed is used as a substantive in all the cases ; as, το καλώς απο&ανειν τον ζην αίσχρώς κρεΐσσόν Ιστι, to die honorably is better than to live basely. πάιτα κίνδϋνον νπεμεινε τον ίπαινεΓσ -dai %νεκα, he underwent every dan- ger for the sake of being praised, ούκ Ιπι τω χακώς πάσχειν ίξεπίμφ&ησαν, they were not sent out to be ill treated, τω ηάσιν ενπρόσοδος tlvai έχαιρε, he delighted in being easy of access to 'all. δια το στενίν είναι την όδ'ον, because the way was narrow. συγχωρεί το αδϊκεΐν αϊσχιον είναι τον άδικεισ&αι, he grants that to injure is baser than to be injured. Obs. 1. The rule applies, whether the infinitive be used singly or in con- nection with phrases, with or without a case before it, as in the examples given. Obs. 2. The article is often wanting before the infinitive ; as, o\v &ανεΐν έπέλϋ-τ], for τό &<χνεΐν, if death approach, Anacr. ; ασχολία στρατεύειν, for τον στρατεύειν, want of leisure to march an army, Xen. ; ov &ανεϊν έρρνσαμην, for τον ϋ-ανείν, Eurip. Obs. 3. The infinitive is frequently governed by ένεκα un- derstood ; as, τις σου άπελείφ&η, τον μή σον άκολου&εΐν ; who was absent from you, that he might not follow you 1 Xen. THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. XXXI. Participles govern the case of their verbs ; as, ύμαρτόντες της όδον, having missed the way. πολλά κακά ημάς ποιονντες, doing us many injuries. Obs. The same case is put after participles derived from verbs which take a nominative after them, as that of the parti- ciples themselves ; as, fy άτιμαστ] ήμας, ονσας χτεάς, if he dis- honor us, who are goddesses, Aristoph. ; ττερί χώρου καλεομένου Θυρέης, about a place called Thyrea, Herodot. XXXII. The participle is used instead of the infinitive after verbs of knowing, perceiving, show- ing, remembering, persevering, desisting, and such as signify an emotion of the mind ; as, ϊσ9ι αφιγμενος, know that you are come. ησ&οντο πεψευγότος 'ΛντωνΙον, they perceived that Antony had fled. δείξω σοφός γεγα>ς, I shall show that 1 am wise. 178 GOVERNMENT, μεμνηΰο αν&οωπος ων, remember that you are a man. τψ είρήνην άγοντες διατελοϋσι, they continue to preserve peace, οπότε λήξειεν άείδων, when he should cease to sing, ale χύνομαι τούτο ποιήσας, I am ashamed that I did this, οϋτε μοι μεταμίλει ούτω? απολογψαμενω, nor does it repent me that I thus defended myself. - Obs. 1. After a verb governing a reflective pronoun, the participle may agree in case either with the subject of the verb, or with the reflective pronoun ; as, σύνοιδα έμαυτω σοφός ων, I am conscious that I am wise, Plato ; σαυτω συνάδεις άδι- κοϋντι, you were conscious that you did wrong, Demosth. ; εαυτόν ουδείς ομολογεί κακούργος ibv, where we might also say κακοΰργον οντά, Sent. Gnom. 438. Obs. 2. When a participle is used with λαν&ανω, τυγχάνω or φ&άνω, it is rendered by its own verb, and the verb annexed by an adverb ; λαν&άνω signifying unpcrceivedly or uncon- sciously ; τυγχάνω, by chance ; and φ&άνω, previously ; as, %λα&ον έσελ&όντες, they entered unperceivedly, Thucyd. ; φονέα του παιδός έλάνχτάνε βάσκων, he was unconsciously feeding the murderer of his son, Herodot. ; ετύγχανε γάρ έχων μάχαιραν, for by chance he had a sword, Id. ; ϊν' αυτούς φ&άσωμεν άφικόμενοι, that we may arrive before them, Xen. ; ουκ εφ&η- σαν πυ&όμενον, καΐ τ)κορ, they no sooner heard of it than they came, Isocr. Κυρώ is used in the same manner as τυγχάνω by the poets ; as, μένε ώς κυρεΐς ε'χων , for ως τυγχάνεις έχων, Soph. Obs. 3. Participles often form a periphrasis witji είμί, γίγνο- tiav, υπάρχω, εχω, τ\κω, to express the verb either in the tense of which they are participles, or in that of the verb annexed; as, Ινίους εστίν έξολωλεκώς, for έξολώλεκε, he has ruined some, Aristqph. ; ούπω πεπρακώς εαυτόν r)v, for έπεπρακει, he had not yet sold himself, Demosth. ; ού σιωπήσας εσει ; for σιωπησν, will you not be silent ? Soph. ; χΤαυμασας εχο), for έ&αύμασα, I admired, Id. ; ηκεις φέρων, for φέρεις, you bring, Aristoph. Frequently also instead of a simple verb in the sense of to go away, οϊχομαι with the participle is used ; as, ωχετ' άπο- πταμενος, for άπέπτάτο, he few away, Horn. Obs. 4. Sometimes participles seem redundant ; as, ληρεΐς έχων, you trifle, Aristoph. ; παίζεις έχων, you jest, Lucian. Obs. 5. The participle frequently expresses the means by CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 179 which an action is performed ; as, Ιηΐζόμερο» ζωσι, tlicy live by plunder, Xen. So φεύγω» έχφετόγει, Herodot., where the participle is thus far redundant, that it is not necessary to the sense. A more extraordinary redundancy is in ϊ(ρη λέγων, Soph. Obs. 6. The participle of the future is used to express the purpose of an action; as, ήλ&ον πενσόμενο;, I came to inquire, Horn. Obs. 7. The participle is often joined with the adverb μεταξύ, in whatever case the construction requires, in the sense of the Latin gerund in dum ; as, μεταξύ χτίων, inter sacrifican- dum, ichile lie was sacrificing, Aristoph. ; τω βασίλεϊ μεταξύ λονομέιω ποοσ^λ&ε, regent inter lavandum adivit, he came to the king ichile he teas bathing, Diod. Sic. ; Κλεΐτον μεταξύ δει- πνούντα. έφόνενσε, Clitum inter ccenandum interfecit, he killed Clitus while at supper. XXXIII. A substantive and participle are put absolute in the genitive ; as, 7Γ(ϊθίΤίόντ«ν των πολεμίων, Έφυγε,* the enemy approaching, he fled. Θεον δίδοντος, ovdhr Ισχνει (f$oioc, when God gives, envy prevails not. πούττοντος ταύτα τού Κι'οον, αφιχνοΐνται αγγε).οι, while Cyrus is doing this, messengers arrive. Obs. 1. The genitive of the substantive or a pronoun is often understood; as, έλ&όντων δε (sc. αΰτω*), ελεξε, they hav-„ ing come, he said, Xen. ; οΰτο) γιγνομένων (sc. των πραγμά- των), oldu otl παρείη &v αυτόν, Id. Sometimes the rest of the sentence may be considered as supplying the place of the sub- stantive ; as, πνο ηνεΤν τού; ταύρους μυϋ•ολογε•&έντός ί it having been fabulously related that the bulls breathed fire, Diod. Sic. Sometimes also, though rarely, the genitive of the participle ων is want- ing ; as. ων νφ-ηγτττών, Soph. CEd. Tyr. 966., as in Latin quibus duclbus. Obs. 2. Nominatives and accusatives absolute are also used, and sometimes datives; as, έχεΐνοι δε είνελ&ύντες,' εΤπεν δ Κριτί- ας, they having entered, Critias said, Xen. ; μη θ-αύμαζε, Tty.i •' ε] φανέ**' αελπτα μηχννω λόγον } wonder not, if, my children having unexpectedly appeared, I protract my discourse, Soph. ; περιΐόντι τω ένιαντοΐ φαίιονσι πάλιν qoovQCcv επί τήν Ήλιν, as the year elapsed, they make another demonstration against Elis, Xen. Obs. 3. The absolute case of participles from impersonal verbs is always the nominative ; as, l^hv είυϊ'νην εχειν, αΐςεΐται πολεμεΐν, when it is in his power to have pcace 1 180 GOVERNMENT. he prefers to he at war, Xen. ; αρχειν παρόν μοι, when it is lawful for me to rule, Eurip. ; είρημενον αΰταις άπανταν tv -θαδε, ενδουσι και ονχ \κουσι, although it has been told them to meet here, they sleep and do not come, Aristoph.; _ Thus also the neuter participle of ειμί• as, αδύνατον ov αΐ]μηναι,Η being impossible io give a signal, Thucyd. Sometimes an in- finitive is omitted; as, of δ' ov βοη-θ-^σαντες, δέον (sc. βοη&ήσαι), νγϊεΐς απήλϋον, others not having assisted, when they ought, came off sound, Plato; ποίησομεν αυτούς χείρον ζι\ν, δυνατόν αντοις αμεινον ; (i. e. δυνατόν ov ζ^ν,) shall we make them live worse, when it is possible for them to live better ? Id. ; which perhaps is the case where a participle in the singular seems to be joined with a noun in the plural ; as, δόξαν δε ταύτα (sc. ποιεΐν), έκ^ρυξαν ούτω ποιεΐν, it having been resolved to do this, they gave orders so to do, Xen. Obs. 4. The particles ώς ωσπερ, &,c. are often put with absolute cases, for the most part in order to express a rea- son ; as, επορεΰ&η προς Ίοννιον, ως έκείνω προσήκον κολασαι^β went to Junius, as to him it belonged to punish, Plut. "; τών αδελφών άμελονσιν, ωσπερ ίκ πολϊτών μεν γιγνομένους φίλους, ίξ αδελφών δε ου γιγνομένους, they neglect their brothers, as if friends could be made of citizens, and not made of brothers, Xen. ; έρωτα ο τι βονλει, ως ταλη&ή ίροϋντος (sc. εμού), ask what you will, in the persuasion that I shall tell the truth, Id. Obs. 5. Sometimes the absolute case refers to the same person or thing that is expressed before or after by another case ; as, διαβεβηκότος ηδη Περικλέους, ί)γγίλ&η αντώ οτι Μέγαρα tyio^y^,when Pericles had already crossed over, news was brought him that Megara had revolted, Thucyd. THE CONSTRUCTION OF VERBALS IN TtOV. XXXIV. Verbals in τέον govern the dative of a person with the case of their primitives ; as, μί&ης αφεκτεον αύτοΐς, they must abstain from drunkenness. νίοις ίηλωτϊον τους γέροντας, young men should imitate the old. αρετής σοι μεταδοτέον τοις πολϊταις, youmust impart virtue to the citizens. Obs. 1. Verbals in τέον are used in the nominative, or the accusative before the infinitive, with είναι, in the sense of necessity or propriety, like the Latin gerund in dum ; as, έπιμελητϊον εστί, νομίζω έπιμελητϊον είναι, we must take care of. The verb is commonly understood, instead of which the participle is sometimes used ; as, ϊ γνω μενετϊον ov, Xen. Sometimes they agree with the substantives, like the Latin participles in dus ; as, ώφελητΐα σοι /; πόλις εστί, the state must be served by you, Xen. Obs. 2. Sometimes verbals in τέον govern the accusative of a person ; as, τόν βουλόμενον εύδαίμονα εΐναι σωφροσννην διω- κτέον καΐ άσκητέον, he who wishes to be happy must pursue and cultivate temperance, Plato. CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 181 Obs. 3 Verbals are often put in the plural, particularly by the Attics; as, έμοί έστι πλευσιίιχ, I must sail, Aristoph. Obs. 4. The construction of verbals in τίον is sometimes imitated in Latin; as, quam [viam] nobis quoque ingrediendum sit, Cic; cctcrnas quoniam pcenas in morte timendum, Lucret. THE CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. PRICE. XXXV. The price of a thing is put in the geni- tive ; as, r[v oiy.lar επρίατο ταλάντου, he bought the house for a talent, άλλάττειν χρυσού αργνρον, to exchange silver for gold. πίθου διδάσκει ; πέντε μνών, Plato ; χρνσον ψιλού ανδρός εδίςατο, Horn. ; δόζα δε χρημάτων ονκ (ονητη, Isocr. ; ί,μεί? αντοις ου διαμει- ψόμε&α τί ( ς αρετές τον πλούτον, forrj' ( v αρετών τον πλούτου, Solon. Obs. This genitive sometimes has αντί before it; as, αντ' αργυρίου διαλ- λάττειν, Plato. Also instead of the genitive the dative is used ; as, Καλ- λιρόόψ- ταλάντω ποιάμενος, Chariton. Or προς with the accusative; as, πωλείται προς χρυαίον, Athen. CRIME AND PUNISHMENT. XXXVI. The crime and punishment are put in the genitive ; as, εμε ασεβείας Ιγρά•ψατο, he accused me of impiety. Κλέωνα δώρων ίλόντες, having convicted Cleon of bribery διώκομαι σε δειλίας, Aristoph. ; τω πατρί φόνου επεζίρχομαι, Plato ; Ιπαιτιασάιιενός με (γόνου, Demosth. ; καλούμαι Πεισ&έταιρον ύβρεως, Aristoph.; ασεβείας ιρει γων, Plato; εκρϊνάν με θανάτου, iElian. Obs. 1. This genitive is often accompanied by substantives or other words on which it depends; as, μή τις ί,μας γρά-ψεται γραφών ασεβείας, lest any one bring an action of impiety against us, Lucian ; ψεύγειν ϊπ' αίτια φόνου, Demosth. ; τούτους διώκομεν περί &ανατου, Xen. Obs. 2. The crime or punishment, after verbs compounded with y.uru, is commonly put in the accusative, and the person in the genitive ; as, κατέγνωσαν απάντων θάνατον, they con- demned all to death, Thucyd. Sometimes, however, the crime also is in the genitive ; as, παρανόμου αύτοΰ κατηγορεΐν, Demosth. Likewise the person is put in the accusative ; as, τούτον μή χαταγινώσχειν φόνου, Lys. Εγκαλώ has the person in the dative, and the crime in the accusative ; as, έγκαλών δ' έμοί φόνους πατρώους, Soph. 16 182 GOVERNMENT. MATTER, AND PART TAKEN HOLD OF. XXXVII. The matter of which any thing is made, and the part by which any thing is taken, are put in the genitive ; as, ατι'λη χαλκού πεποιημένη, a pillar made of brass, ελαβον αντον του ποδός, they took him by the foot. λνκον των ωτων κρατώ, / hold a wolf by the ears. Obs. The genitive of the material often has εκ or άπο expressed before it; as, Tug τριήρεις εκ κέδρου ποιονσι, Theophrast. ; εΐμσ,τα άπο ξνλων πεποιημένα, Herodot. The dative is sometimes used instead of the geni- tive ; as, στέφανους α,ν&εοι πλέξας, Anacr. CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRUMENT. XXXVIII. The cause, manner, and instrument, are put in the dative ; as, έννοια τοϋτ' ίποίησε, he did this from good will, τούτω τω τρόπω ηλ -dov, they came in this manner, τω ςίψει ίπάταξε, he struck with his sword. τάδ' ονχ νβρει λέγω, Eurip. ; άλγώ τοις σοΐς κακοΐς, Soph.; λιμω άπέϋανε, Xen. ; Eirr>i ει βία, Lys. ; δρόμω ϊχώρει, Thucyd. ;_ γλώσσί] δεινός, Soph. ; τω γένει Πέρσης, Plut. ; τας κινήσεις τω σώματι, Plato. Also, χοημασιν έτιαιρόμετος, Plato; ovx άρεσκόμενος τη κρίσει } Herodot.; χαίρει τη ειρήνη, Demosth. ; άγασϋέντες τω ΐργω, Plato; στέργειν τοις παρούσι, Isocr. ; ovx αγαπών τοις νπάρχονσιν άγα-θοις, Lys. ; χαλεπής ϊφερον τω πολεμώ, Xen.; ολιγαρχία δυσχεραίνουσι, Plut.; άγανακτοϋντες τω πράγματι, Plato; αίσχννομαι ταΐς ύμαρτίαις, Aristoph. Obs. 1. Prepositions with their respective cases are sometimes used in- stead of the simple dative; as, h βέλει πληγείς, Anthol. ; δι]σας h πέ- δαις, Plato ; άπο σμικρας δαπάνης, Aristoph.; [Χων, they were distant about sixteen feet from each other. Obs. Measure or distance is sometimes put in the dative; as, ί^χοντα οταδίοις διίχυντες, Strabo. PLACE. XL. The question Where ? is answered by iv with the dative ; Wliither ? by εις or προς with the accusative ; and Whence ? by εκ or από with the genitive ; as, tv 'Γωμγ, at Rome. Ις τ'ας Ά&ήνας, to Athens, ώοματο εχ Σάοδεων, he marched from Sardis. Obs. 1. The place where is sometimes expressed by the dative without εν, or by the genitive ; as, Μαςα&ωνι, at Mara- thon, Thucyd. ; $ ούκ "Λργεος ήεν ; was he not at Argos ? Horn. Likewise the place whither is frequently expressed by the accusative alone, or with the termination δε annexed, especially in the poets ; as, Θτβας ήλϋ-ε, Horn. ; ΐκοριο Τι,Ημά/ον, they came to Telemachus, Id. ; Μαραχτώνΐίδε, to Marathon, Demosth. ; ονδε δόμονδε, to his house, Horn. Obs. 2. Adverbs in θ•* and σι, are used to denote the place where ; in δε, ζε, and σε, the place whither; and in #εν and &s t the place whence; as, άγοό&ι, in the country; Θήβαζε, to Thebes ; 'Λ&ήρη&εν, from Athens. XLI. Time when, if indefinite and protracted, is put in the genitive, if definite, in the dative ; time how long, in the accusative ; as, xal -dfoovg xal χειμώνος, loth in summer and icinter. άφίχοντο τη πέμπτη ί,μεοα, they arrived the fifth day. εβαβίΧευσε μήνας επτά, he reigned seven months. Obs. 1. Time when is sometimes put in the accusative, and time how long in the genitive or dative ; as, ώο«^ εβδόμην acfr^/.ev ιχύτοι> δ πυρετός, at the seventh hour the fever left him, John iv. 52. ; βασιλεύσας ετών, or ετεσι, τεσσαρεσκ«/$εκ«, having reigned fourteen years, Herodian. Obs. 2. All the circumstances of time are often expressed with a prep- osition ; as, δια ytuton oc, Xen. ; επί μιας tjitoag, Lucian ) τ^δ' εν ■teuton, Soph. ; επ' οχτώ μήνας, Herodot. 184 GOVERNMENT. PART AND CIRCUMSTANCE REFERRED TO XLII. The particular part or circumstance re- ferred to after .a general affirmation is put in the accusative ; as, το σώμα μίγας ψ, he was large in person. τον δάκτυλον αλγεΐ, he is distressed in his finger. Θουκυδίδης τοϋνομα, Thucydides by name. Σνρος την πατοϊδα, a Syrian as to his country. τταίει με το νώτον, he strikes me on the back. διαφίοουσί τι αλλήλων, they differ someiahat from each other. Obs. 1. This accusative is said to be governed by κατά understood, instead of which sometimes είς, επί, or διά, is rather to be supplied ; as, •η| κρήνη τά πλείστου άξια έχρώντο (sc. εϊς), they used the fountain for the most solemn purposes, Thucyd. ; τι ήμΐν αξιώσεις χρψθαι; for what shall you wish to employ us ? Xen. ; τοιαύτα επαινώ Άγησίλαον (sc. διά), for such things I commend Agesilaus, Id. Obs. 2. A dative might be, and sometimes is, put for the accusative ; as, δυνατοί και τοις οώμασι και ταΐς \\ιυχαις, Xen. In some instances both cases are used; as, διαιρΐοοντες η σοφία i] κάλλει η αμφότερα, Plato. Obs. 3. This is the Greek construction so frequent in the Latin poets ; as, os humerosque deo similis, Virg. THE CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. XLIII. Adverbs are joined to verbs and partici- ples, to adjectives, and to other adverbs; as, οοϋώς Ιποίησε, he did rightly. μάλα (ροόνϊμος, very prudent. Obs. 1. Adverbs of quality are elegantly joined with the verbs εχω, πάσχω, ποιέω, φέρω, ψυμι, χράομαι, &C. ; as, ήδέως εχε προς απαντάς, be pleasant to all, Isocr. ; ευ ποιεΧν καΐ ευ πάσχειν, to do and to receive favors, Xen. Obs. 2. Two or more negatives strengthen the negation ; as, οϋκ έποίησας ούδάμοϋ τοϋτο, you no where did this, Demosth. ; μηδέ άρξάτω αρχήν μηδεμίαν μηδέποτε, nor let him ever fill any office, JEschin. ; ουδέποτε ούδεν ού μη γένηταν των δεόντων, nothing that is necessary will ever be done, Demosth. Except when they belong to two different verbs ; as, ού δυναμαι μή γελάν, I cannot forbear laughing, Aristoph. So in the phrase ουδείς δστις ού, nemo non ; as, ουδείς όστις ού γελάσεταν, Plato ; ούδενΐ οτω ούκ άποκρινόμενος, Id. Obs. 3. Μη often seems redundant before the infinitive, after words Containing a denial; as, άπαγοοεύουσι τοις άαΰενοϋσι μη χοησϋαι ikaim% Ν CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 185 Plato ; ι'ρνεΓτο μη δειλός είναι, iEschin. ; ι'σχει μη στέλλειν στρατό ν, Eurip. ; άπεχόμενοι μη ίππευαν, Xen. ; η απορία ίοχ) μη ηαυχάζειν, Thucyd. Obs. 4. The modes required by particular adverbs are as follows, with the exception of the infinitive, for which see Rule XXIX. Obs. 3. 1. "Εως, οορρα, as long as, take the indicative or subjunctive ; as, 'έως $ζη 9 as long as he lived, Demosth. ; δ^ρ' έ&έλητον, as long as you please, Horn. In the sense of until, the indicative, optative, or subjunctive ; as, δφρ' άορί- κοντο, Horn.; περιεμένομεν 'έως ανοιχ&είη το δεσμωτ^ριον, Plato; μ'ιμνετε οψρα κ' ελ&ωΟι, Horn. 31 ' ji χρι, μέχρι, εστε, as long as, take the indicative ; as, αχρις ίώρων του ηλίου φώς, Athen. In the sense of until, the indicative or subjunctive; as, μέχρις ov ετελει'τησε, Thucyd. ; μένειν Ι'στε σύ άπίλ&ι\ς, Xen. Μέσγα, until, takes the indicative ; εΐσόκε, commonly the subjunctive ; as, μίσφ' αίετ'ον είσενόησαν, Apoll. Rh. ; είβύκεν ϊλ&ι^ς, Horn. Πριν, before, is joined with the indicative, optative, or subjunctive; πύρος, with the indicative ; as, πριν άπέδωκε, Demosth. ; ονδαμό&εν άψίεσαν, πριν παρα&εΐεν αντω άριστον, Xen. ; πριν άκονσης, Hesiod. 2. "Οτε, οπότε, ηνίκα, όπψΧκα, εντζ, when, έπεί, Ιπειδ'η, after or ichen, take the indicative or optative, and sometimes the subjunctive ; as, δτβ έδωκε, Horn.; οπότε έξέλΰοιεν, Thucyd.; οτε γηράσκωσι, Horn.; "Οταν, οπόταν, Ιπαν, Ιπειδύν, usually the subjunctive, sometimes the optative, the indicative rarely; as, όταν ταύτα λέγγς, Plato; εϊαεσ&ε επειδ'αν ακοι'σιμε, Demosth.; οπόταν αναγκασ-θείημεν, Plato. Ώς, όπως, when or after, take the indicative or optative ; as, ως είδον, Thucyd.; όπως γένοιτο νύξ, Herodot. In the sense of as, how, they take the indicative, optative, or subjunctive ; as, γομεν ώς Ικέλευες, Horn.; βαλλέτω ως έΰέλοι, Theocr. ; ονκ οιδ' όπως ειπώ, Eurip. "Αμα, αντίκα, as soon as, are joined with the indicative ; as, αντίκα τβ είδον, as soon as I saw him, Herodot. "Ινα, where, is generally followed by the indicative ; as, οϊδ' ϊν* ει<τί, Aristoph. 3. M\, when it expresses a wish, takes the optative ; when a prohibi- tion, the present imperative, or the aorist subjunctive; as, μή σε βασιληα Κρονίων ποιι]σειε, may Jupiter not make thee king, Horn.; ίξανδα, μη κεν&ε νόω, speak out, conceal it not in your mind, Id. ; μη φρόντισες, Aristoph. 4. Εί γ'αρ, εϊ'&ε, ώς, Ο that, utinam,, are construed with the optative ; as, αϊ γαρ τούτο &εο'ι ποι^σειαν, Herodot.; εϊΰ' απόλοιτο βοών γένος, Horn. ; ώς ό ταδί πορών ολοιτο, Soph. So ποις "uv in like manner; as, πάς αν ΰάνοιμι, Soph. Sometimes ε? is used alone; as, εΐ not γένοιτο ψ&όγγος lv βραχ'ιοσι, Eurip. Hec. 830. Εϊϋε is also put with the infinitive ; as, εϊ-3ε με πλάΐεσ&αι, Epigr. When the wish relates to any thing past, it is joined with the indicative; as, εί'^ε σοι τότε συνεγενόμψ, Xen. Εί γαρ, εϊ&ε, ώς, are often prefixed to the imperfect and second aorist of οφείλω, with an infinitive following; as, αί'&' οφελες απ ημών ησ&αι , Horn.; ώς ωιρελες αντό-θ' όλέσΰαι. Id. Sometimes the particles are omitted ; as, ωφελε Κνρος ΐγν, Xen. Later writers use ωφελον, ώ<ρελε. adverbially; as, ωψελε μηδ' έγένοι-το -&oai νέες, Callim. ; οφελον -ψυχρός ης, Apocal. iii. 15. 16 * 186 GOVERNMENT. XLIV. Adverbs of place, time, cause, quantity, concealment, separation, exception, exclamation, and adverbial nouns, govern the genitive ; as, άχρι του ορούς, as far as the mountain. μέχρι της μάχης, until the battle. 'ένεκα 'Ελένης, on account of Helen. τών τοιούτων αδην, abundance of such. λαϋρα του πατρός, without the knowledge of his father. άνευ κάματου, without labor. χωρίς τών ονομάτων, except the names. φευ της Γ Ελλάδος ! alas Greece ! ποταμών δίκην, like rivers. ay χι θαλάσσης, Horn. ; ανω -dsv ημών, Aristoph. ; ϊγγνς Τών Χωμών, Xen. ; εϊαω δόμων, iEschyl. ; ενεργέ της γης, Herodot. ; εύ -dv Πελλήνης, Aristoph. ; IV εϊ κακοϋ, Soph. ; μεταξύ Σνρων και πα- φλαγόνων, Herodot. ; πανταχού της γης, Plato; πελας τών κήπων, Herodot. ; πέραν του Ελλησπόντου, Thucyd. ; τηλε φίλων, Horn. 'έως της τρίτης ημέρας, Matth. xxvii. 64. ; τηνικαϋτα του ΰερονς, Aristoph. ; τρις του Ινιαντοϋ, Plato ; τών ίμών 'έκατι κακών, Eurip. ; αλις παί- δων, Id. ; κρνψα τών Ά &ψ α ίων, Thucyd. ; ατερ καμάτοιο, Horn.; δίχα εκείνων, Soph. ; πλην ' Αριστοδήμου, Herodot. ; βαβαί του -θορύ- βου, Lucian; ω της α&λίας πόλεως, Plut. ; χάριν" Εκτ ορός, Horn. ; ενώπιον του Θεού, Galat. i. 20. Obs. 1. The genitive is often governed by ένεκα } on account of, with respect to, understood ; as, σέ εύδαψόνϊσα του τρόπον, I esteemed you happy on account of your disposition, Plato ; τησΰ' άπατης κοτέων, angry on account of this deception, Horn. ; μακάριος τη? τύχης, happy by his fortune, Aristoph. To this place seem to belong such examples as the following ; ώς Ιγώ μνήμης ε χω, as I am with respect to memory, as far as I remember, Plato; ιδίωκον ώς ποδών είχον, they followed as fast as they could run, Herodot. ; ov γιχρ οιδα παιδείας όπως έχει και δικαιοσύνης, for I know not how he is with respect to learning and justice, how learned and just he is, Plato ; καλώς έχοντες με&ης, being pretty drunk, Herodot. ; χρημάτων εν [κειν, to be well with respect to riches, to be very rich, id. By some, however, περί is understood. Obs. 2. Some of these adverbs are also joined with the dative ; as, αγχοϋ τΐ} ϊππω, Herodot. ; ϊγγύς ί,μΐν, Xen.; εμπαλιν τοΐσι άνϋρώ- ποις, Herodot. ; ΙΊδον αλσει, Find. ; τοντοις ίξ>}ς, Plato ; σοι πε- λας, iEschyl. ; στα&εΐσα τω τεκόντι πλησίον, Eurip. ; τνμβω σχεδόν πατρώο?, Pind. And a few with the accusative; as, "Ιλιον εισω, Horn.; ε£ω τον ' Ελλήσποντον, Herodot. ; παρεζ αλα, Horn. ; περιζ το τείχος, Herodot. Obs. 3. Many adverbs of exclamation are frequently joined with other cases besides the genitive, and some with other cases only : as, φεν τον ανδρός ! Xen. ; φεν τάλας ! ah wretched me ! Soph. ; «V, αϊ, των νεογνών μον παιδιών, CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 1ST Lucian ; el rbr "Άδωην, Bion ; ω ir { ; αθλίας πόλεως. Pint. ; ώ τάλκς t) ώ, Soph. ; ω tuh δειλαν, Callim. ; ώ Κοοϊσε, Herodot. ; odul ύε τω άιθοώττω έχείνω, Matth. xxvi. 24. OV with the dative μοι added to it is often construed with the nomina- tive ; as, ol'uoi δΐίλαιο;, Aristoph. Instead of οΐμοι, ω uoi is often used ; as, ώ μυι ίγω δειλός, Horn. Sometimes a genitive accompanies, governed by f νεχ a understood ; BS } οΐμοι των Ιμων ίγω na*Sn , Eurip. ) ω μοι ίμής ItTr;, Soph. Similarly ('ώ μοι τι'χι,ς, Eurip. Adverbs of exclamation are sometimes omitted ; as, τ>~ς τι'χης ! (for ω Tr; τι '/re !) the misfortune ! Xen. ; ω Ζεν βαπιλεν, τ/;? λετττότιγτος τών γ οενών I Jupiter ! the acutcness of his mind! Aristoph. Obs. 4. Other adverbs have also a government of cases. 1. Adverbs of accompanying govern the dative ; as, εϊσιθ•' αα' euol, go in icith me, Aristoph. ; uua τω Ί,ππω τοντο ποιή- σιχντι, as the horse did this, Herodot.; όμοϋ τοις Ιππενσι, together with the cavalry, Polyb. 2. Adverbs of showing are construed with the nominative ; as, Ιδού ό υίός σον } behold thy son, John xix. 26. ; I'd ε ό &v- βρωπος, behold the man, Ibid. v. 5. 3. Adverbs of swearing take the accusative ; as, νη τον Ήρακ /.eu, by Hercules, Demosth. ; val uu τόδε σν.ΐγτιοον, by this sceptre, Horn. Κ) έ always affirms ; ««, on the contrary, generally denies, except when joined with ναι. Sometimes uu is omitted; as, ov, τόνδ' "Ολνμπον, Soph. Antig. 758. XLV. Some derivative adverbs govern the case of their primitives ; as, αξίως luvrov εΐο^κε, he has spoken worthily of himself . Γστί ομοίως ίμο'ι, you knoic in like vianner as I. μάλλον εμον αε ψιλών, loving you more than me. μάλιστα πάντων αν&οώπυη•, the most of all men. THE CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. XL VI. Conjunctions generally couple similar modes and cases ; as, ανέστη y.ai ειττεν ώ^ε, he rose up and spoke as follorcs. ίπι&ϋμεΐ ίί ούτε δυζνς, οϋτε χονμσ.ΐν» . he desires neither glory nor riches. Obs. 1. To this rule belong, not only the copulative and 188 GOVERNMENT. disjunctive conjunctions, but several others, as also adverbs of likeness ; as, αρε'ιοσιν ήέπερ νμΐν ανδρασιν ώμ'ιλησα, Hom. ; τοντο ονθενι γίνεται πλην σοι, Theophrast. ; εφανη κονιορτος, ώσπερ νεφέλη λευκή, Xen.; φέρων σάκος ηντε πνργον, Horn. Obs. 2. Sometimes different modes and cases are coupled together; as, κλν-θί μου, και Ιπαρηγοις, Orpheus; σίγα τε και μηδενί εΐπης, Herodot. ; πείϋωμεν η δώροις, η χάρϊσιν, η απφότερα, Plato; παρέχειν ϊμαυτ'ον ώσπερ γυνή εν ποιεΐν, Ί. e. όντως, ώσπερ γυνή εαντην παρέχει, Xen. XL VI I. The conjunctions ϊνα, ocpQa, όπως, ώς, μη, commonly take the optative when the leading verb denotes past time, and the subjunctive when it denotes present or future ; as, ηλ-θον ϊνα ΐδοιμι, I came that I might see. έρχομαι ϊνα ϊδω, I come that I may see. εδεισα μη πά&οιτέ τι, I feared that something might befall you. δε'ιδω μη πά-θητέ τι, I fear that something may befall you. Obs. 1. Sometimes these conjunctions take the subjunctive when the preceding verb denotes past time, and the optative when it denotes pres- ent or future; as, εδείσαν μη μονωθωσι, Thucyd. ; άπάξω σε ως ί'ίοί?, Lucian. They are likewise frequently found with the indicative of the past and future tenses; as, ϊνα ηκονσας, that you might hear, Plato; ■θέλγει όπως 'Ιθάκης επιλι'σεται, she fascinates him that he may forget Ithaca, Plom. ; especially μ[, which is sometimes put with the present indicative; as, δειμαίνω μη σε δώσει, Theocr. ; μη τις φαντάζεται, lest some one appear, Eurip. Ώς, ίόστε, that, so that, take the indicative or infinitive ; as, οντω δ' Ιστιν αναιδές, ώστ' έτόλμα λέγειν, Demosth. ; τις όντως ανέραστος ην, ώς αποκτείται το καλόν εκείνο μειοάκιον ; Lucian. But- ώστε, therefore, is joined with all the modes. Ώς, that, in quoting the words or sentiments of another, takes the in- dicative or optative ; as, λ.έγυυσιν ώς εγημε, Xen. Likewise οτι • as, ελεζαν οτι πέμψειε σγάς ό ' Ινδών βασιλεύς, Xen. Also in the sense of because; as, χαίρω οτι ενδοκϊμεΓς, Plato ; εϋανμασας οτι ου πέμψαιμ'ι σοι, Id. Obs. 2, Other conjunctions are variously construed. 1. Ει, if, takes the indicative or optative, and sometimes the subjunc- tive ; a.s, τοντον έάσομεν, εί συ κελενεις, Hom. ; περιμενοιμ' αν, ει μοι λέγοις, Plato ; εί δε μένΐ]ς, Theocr. 2. ^ Αν, in the poets κε or κεν, is put with all the modes and participles, to which it gives a potential sense. With the indicative ; as, εί παρην, ηρετο αν σε, if ke toere present ha would ask you, Lucian ; αντον γάρ κ' απωλύμεθα, for we should have perished there, Hom. It often expresses the repetition of an action ; as, επεί τοντο γένοιτο, ηκον αν εν-θνς, whenever this happened, they came immf CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 189 diatcly, Xen. ; οκως ελ&οι, λάβεσχε αν 'Ελληνίδα Ιύΰητα, as often as he came, he assumed a Grecian habit, Herodot. Also ability in past actions ; as, πληγής χτύπου πάς τις f/'m9sT > uv, every one could hear the sound of the bloic, Eurip. With the future it seems to soften the decisiveness of the sentence; as, τους αν iycov Ιπιόψομαι, I will select these, Horn.; ηδιον uv αρωτήαομεν, we shall dine the more pleasantly, Xen. With the optative ; as, ονκ αν γνοίης εϊ οοι εΐποιμι τοϋνομα, you would not knoio, if I should tell you his name, Plato. It often expresses volition ; as, ήδέως uv άκονοαιμι, I would gladly hear, Plato. Or ability ; as, νυν γάρ κεν 'έλοι π όλιν, for now he might take the city, Horn. ; ονκ αν δη μείνειας Μενίλαον ; could you not withstand Mcneldus ? Id. Sometimes it gives to the verb the sense of the future ; as, μΐνοιμ' αν, / zcill stay, Soph. Also of the imperative ; as, χωροΐς uv εί'σω ούν τύχει, go in quickly, Soph. With the subjunctive, to which it often gives the sense of the future ; as, εγω δέ κεν αντος ελωμαι, I myself will take it, Horn. ; τί ovv uv εΐττοισιν οί νόμοι ; what will the laws say ? Plato. Sometimes it expresses ability ; as, ονκ αν κτΰνιμ τίραννον, you cannot kill the tyrant, Eurip. With the imperative, though rarely ; as, εδρασ' αν, εί> τοϋτ' ϊΰ&' αν, Ι would have done it, be assured, Soph. With the infinitive ; as, ϊπ' οιιδενΐ hpaaav 'έρδειν "uv τοΰτο, they said that for no consideration would they do this, Herodot. ; οι'ει σύ κάλλιον αν Τοργίου αποκρίναοΰαι ; do you think that you can answer better than Gor- gias? Plato. With participles ; as, οι ραδίως αποκτινννντες, και αναβιωσκόμενοί γ' ~uv, ει οϊοί τ' ηοαν, who woxdd readily kill and bring to life again if they were able t Plato. After the relatives δ?, όστις, οπού, &c. αν has mostly the signification of the Latin cunque, soever, in which case it is generally followed by the subjunctive, sometimes by the optative, rarely by the indicative ; as, ους αν πεί&ωσ ι, whomsoever they persuade, Thucyd. ; πορει'εσϋαι οποί αν &ίλητε, to go whithersoever you please, Xen. ; ος κεν οπυίοι, whosoever marries her, Horn. ; ο ττι κεν εΰέλεί, whatsoever he will, Id. _ *Λν is often repeated in the same member of a sentence ; as, ει πονηρον i/V," Ομηρος ονδεποτ' αν εποίει τον Νέστορ' αγορητην αν, if it were dishonesty Homer icould never have made JYestor an orator, Aristoph. ; άλκη δε ο' ονκ α*ν, ή ύν δοξάζεις ϊσως, Οωααιμ' αν, I cannot save you by force, as you think perhaps, Eurip. Sometimes it is omitted ; as, εί μη ην ούτος πάρα Θεού, ονκ ηδννατο ποιεΐν ονδεν, for ονκ "uv ηδννατο, if this man were not of God, he could do nothing, John ix. 33. ; 8 ov δυο γ' ανδρε φεροιεν, which two men coidd not carry, Horn. ; η ρά vv μοί τι πίΰοιο ; indeed would you at all obey me ? Id. 3. y Eav, by contraction ?jv or αν, in the Ionic poets εΐ'κε or αΐ'κε, if, takes the subjunctive; as, lav εξέταζες, ενρήσεις, if you examine, you will find, Demosth. ; αν ταύτα δμολογηαωμεν, γ ελΰβετ α ι, if we grant this, he will laugh, Plato; εί δε κε μη δώωαιν, εγω δέ κεν αντος 'έλωμαι, but if they do not give it, J will take it myself, Horn. Sometimes, however, the indicative is found ; as, αν τι οννήκαμεν, Cebet. Tab. 33. Also the optative, particularly with εικε or αΐκε • asj ην περί τινας εξαμάρτοιεν, Isocr. ; αΐχ' Ιϋίλων γε μενοις, if you voluntarily stay, Horn. 4. Έιτει, ίπειδ}., επειη, επείπερ, επειδι\περ, επείτοι, since, for as much as commonly take the indicative, the optative rarely ; as, μή με κτειν' ϊπεϊ ονχ 190 GOVERNMENT. όμογάστριος "Εκτορός etui, do not kill me, since Τ am not ike brother of Hector, Horn, ; εαυτού είναι ιρησίν, Ιπείπερ Κνρου ήσαν, he says they are his, since they belonged to Cyrus, Xen. Obs. 3. When the relatives ος, όστις, οίος, οπού, ό&εν, &c. refer to in- definite persons or things, they commonly take the optative without av if the verb in the preceding clause denote past time, and the subjunctive with av if it denote present or future; as, snti&ov ους ϊδο ι ε ν, Thucyd.; δίδωσιν οίς αν ε-θίλη, Pind.; κατεσϋίει όν χε λάβγσι, Horn.; ουκ είχαν οπού επιλύβοιντο του αργυρίου, Demosth. ; όκου Ίχν 3ϋωθι, πυρην καίουσι, Herodot. Sometimes αν is put with the optative; as, 'ός "αν αυτόν άρεσκοι τρόπος, Plato. Also the subjunctive is frequently used without it; as, "όστις Λΐίνωνο μη γιγνώσκη, Plato ; όπη 'έκαστος βοϋληται, Id. When definite persons or things are referred to, the relatives are fol- lowed by the indicative. ►. THE CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. XLVIII. The prepositions αντί, άπο, εκ, προ, govern the genitive ; ε>, ούν, the dative ; and εις, the accusative ; as, "Άντϊ, for. Fori uQ' ^ντι ταύτης της ει'εργεσίας χάριν αύτω είδείης ; should you thank him for this benefit? Xen. Before; αντί χρημάτων ίλίσ&αι την δόξαν, to choose glory before wealth, Isocr. Instead of; μάστϊγας αντί οπλών έχοντες, having whips instead of arms, Herodot. Against ' αντ' Αϊαντος Ιείσατο, he went against Ajax, Horn. 'Apb, from. From; απ' 'Άργεος ηλυϋον, they came from Argos, Pind. Of time, άπο τήαδε της ημέρας, from this day, Plato. After ; απο δείπνου, after supper, Herodot. jit; άπο τρίτης ώρας της νυκτός, at the third hour of the night, Acts xxiii. 23. By ; άπο πολέμου ϊφΰάρησαν, they were wasted by war, Thucyd. Of; άπ' εκατίίβπαίδων ε\ς μοϋνος απέφυγε, of a hundred children one only escaped, Herodot. For, by rea- και ονκ ηδννατο άπο του όχλου, and he could not for the son of; crowd, Luke xix. 3. With ; η λί -doc άφ' ης το πυρ απτουσι, the stone with which they light the fire, Aristoph. Without; άπο τ<~ιν 'όπλων, without their arms, Thucyd. άπο τετταράκοντα σταδίων της ϋαλάττης, forty stadia from the sea, Diod. Sic. ; άπο &υμοϋ μάλλον εμοί εσεαι, thou shalt be farther removed from my heart, shalt be hated by me, Horn. ; οί άπο της Στοάς, άπο της 'Ακαδημίας Stoics, Academics Platonics, Plut. ; nesians, Herodot. the Lucian; of άπο Πλάτωνος, the οί άπο Πελοποννήσου, the Pelopon- CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 191 'Ex, out of. Out of; ανιμ/σας νδωρ εκ τον (/ ρέατος, having draicn up water out of the well, Plut. From, lx ΰαλάσσης ες Φύλασσαν, from sea to sea, Herodot. Of time, ix νεοτψος, from our yovth, Horn. Of; lx xrjQov πεποιημένα, made of xcax, Lucian. After; lx μεσημβρίας, af'cr noon, JEschin. Socr. ; lx τον πολέμου, after the war, Thucyd. For, in conse- lx τούτον ε&ανατώ9η, for this he was condemned to quence of; death, Xen. By; lx τον φίλων πεισ&εΐσα ; by which of her friends per- suaded? Soph. With ; Ις ίνος στόματος άνέκραγον, they cried out icith one voice, Aristoph. TTgo, before. Before, of place ; προ την ΰνρών ίστώτες, standing before the door, Eurip. S Of time ; προ τον πολέμου, before the rear, Thucyd. Of preference; πόλεμον προ είοήνης αίρειοΰίχι, to choose tear before peace, Dionys. Hal. For, in behalf of; μάχεσ&αι προ τε παίδυη• και προ γυναικών, to fight for wives and children, Horn. Instead of; ΰανείν προ κείνου, to die for him, Eurip. Έν, in. In; ετνχον δ' Iv τω κήπω περίπατων, I happened to be walk- ing in the garden, Plato. Among ; ϊ]στο iv μνηστηρσι, he sat among the suitors, Horn. Before; Iv μάρτΰσι πλέον η τρισμνρίοις, before more than thirty thousand witnesses, Plato. On; iv τοις τοίχοι; ϊγυαφε, he icrote on the walls, Aristoph. During ; Iv δε τω κακω ανειινησϋησαν τονδε τον έπους, during the plague they called to mind this prediction, Thucyd. In the power of; Iv τω Θεώ το τέλος ηι , the end was in the power of God, Demosth. With; iv πέλταις και ακοντίοις, with shields and darts, Xen. Into ; διαβάντες Iv τω Σάμω, having passed over into Samos, Pausan. At; μετ'α τψ Iv Έαλαμΐνι νανμαχίαν, after the naval fight at Saldmis, iEschin. According to ; Iv τοις νόμοις τοις ημετέροις, according to our laws, Isocr. By; Iv δε τοντοις τοις νομοΰέταις μη $ηα-9ε νόμον μηδένα, by these magistrates enact no law, Demosth. Of; t] ουκ οϊ'δατε εν Ηλία τι λέγει η γραφή ; wot ye not what the scripture saith of E/ius ? Rom. xi. 2. For ; λαβείν εν φέρνη Κοίλην Σνρίαν, to receive Cede Syria for a dowry, Polyb. On account of; περιβόητος iv τγ ποιήσει, celebrated for his poetry, Herodot. Vit. Horn.' Against ; Iv luoi &ρασύς, bold against me, Soph. τον Περικλέα iv όργη, έν αιτία είχον, they were angry with, they blamed Pericles, Thucyd. ; εστί σοι Iv ηδον\ι ; is it agreeable to you Ρ Eurip.; εν όμοίω ποιεισ -dai, to esteem equally, Herodot. ; Iv ελαφρώ ποιεΐσ&αι, to make light of, Id 192 GOVERNMENT. Σύν, with. With; δενρο ηλυΰε συν 31ενελαω, he came hither with Mend dus, Horn. On the side of; συν τοις "Ελλησιν είναι, to he on the side of the Greeks, Xen. With the assist- ενίκησε συν Άϋήν^, he overcame with the. assistance of ance of; Minerva, Horn. Against; ότι καν αντος ούν Ικείνω μάχοιτο, that even he himself would fight against htm, Xen. Besides ; συν πάσι τούτοις, besides all these things, Luke xxiv. 21. According to ; ούν τω νόμω, according to the law, Xen. In, at the time of; ούν τω πίνειν, in drinking, Anacr. ΕΙς, into. Into ; ηλαυνον ίς το άστυ, they drove into the city, Herodot. To; ϊκετο δ' εις ΚρεΊοντα, he came to Creon, Hesiod. Till; και κεν eg ηώ άνασχοίμψ, I could certainly bear it till morning, Horn. Towards; έννοια εις τους "Ελληνας, good-will towards the Greeks, Isocr. Against; πλημμελοΰσιν εις το ιερόν, they offend against the temple, Demosth. In; εις την ϊκκλησίαν κα&εΐόμενος, sitting in the assembly, iEschin. Within ; εις τΰζευμα αφικεσ&αι, to come within boto-shot, Xen. Among ; φιλοδοξών εις τους "Ελληνας, seeking reputation among the Greeks, Polyb. Before ; Ις πάντας αϋδα, speak before all, Soph. Upon ; εις άλλήλας εμπίπτουσαι, falling upon one another, Aristoph. About; εις ίσπεραν, about evening, Aristoph. Of number; Ις άν- δρας ίξήκοντα, about sixty men, Thucyd. For; παρείχε χρήματα ες το ν αυτί κόν, he furnished money for the naval forces, Thucyd. On account of; εις δικαιοσννην επαινεΐοΰαι, to be praised on account of jus- tice, Aristot. With respect to ; εις τέκνα εύτνχειν, to be happy with respect to children, Eurip. Concerning ; ούδεν ες athbv εχω λέγειν, I have nothing to say concerning him, Pausan. By; μήτε εις 'Ιεροσόλυμα, neither by Jerusalem, Matth. v. 35. XLIX. The prepositions δια, κατά, imtQ, govern the genitive and accusative ; and ανά, the dative and accusative ; as, Jia, through, on account of . With the Genitive. Through, πορενόμενοι δια της Λιβύης, going through Libya, Thucyd. By; " διελίγετο αντοις δ' Ιρμηνεως, he treated with them by an in- terpreter, Xen. With ; δια μέλανος έγραψε, he wrote with ink, Plut. During ; δια πάσης της νυκτός, during the whole night, Herodot. CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 193 After ; διά μακρόν χρόνου, after a long time, iEschyl. Above, &ίης άξιον διά πάντων, above all icorth seeing, Herodot. In; δια χειρός εχειν, to have in ones hand, Athen. A mono• ; "Ομηρος τετίμακε δι' άν&ρώπων, Homer has honored him among men, Pind. JVear ; χατεστρατοπέδευσε δια της πόλεως, he encamped near the city, Polyb. δια τελονς, continually, lsocr, ; διά_τρίτου trove, every third year, Herodot. ; δια φόβου thai, to fear, Thucyd. δι' υποψίας γενέσ&αι, to be suspected, Plut. ; δι' ϋογής εχειν τινά, to be angry with any one, Thucyd. ; δι' οΐκ του λαβείν, to commiserate, Eurip. ; δια μάχης ίέναι, αφικέσ&αι τινί, to give battle, Herodot. With the Accusative. On account of; δια Jaκεδaιμovίoυς εφυγον, they were banished on account of the Lacedemonians, Xen. By means of; δια Κροΐσον εκφει'γει, he escapes by means of Crasus, Herodot. By; δια τους χρηστούς τιμάται, he is honored by the good, Aristoph. Through; εξ δια πτνχας ηλ&ε χαλκός, the spear penetrated through six folds, Horn. In; νόμοι δι' αί-&ΐρα τεκνω&εντες, laws made in heaven, Soph. At; Of; Against ; Upon ; In; Under ; From ; Through ; Bysje Κατά, at, according to. With the Genitive. κατά σκοπού τοξεύειν, to shoot at a mark. Herodian. ταντ'ον κατά της άρετϊ}ς φατίον ίστί, the same must be said of virtue, Plut. χατ' εμού μάρτυρας παοεχεσ&αι, to produce witnesses against me, Plato. κατά γης πίπτειν, to fall upon the ground, Dionys. Hal. xa&' νδατος διαιτώμενα, living in the water, Lucian. δνιαι κατά της γης, to go under the earth, Plato. ΐ,λλοντο κατά τον τείχους, they leaped from the wall, Xen. χατ'α της νήσου διεσπάρηναν, they were dispersed through the island, Polyb. εξορκίζω σε χατ'α του Θεοϋ, I adjure thee by God, Matth. xx vi. 63. With the Accusative. According to ; κα&' "Ομηρον, according to Homer, Plato. During; ανλέουσι κατά πάντα τον πλόον, they pipe during the whole voyage, Herodot. In the time of; των Έχιναδων κατά τα Τρωικά ΆΙίγητα αρχειν φησ'ι, he says that Meges governed the Echinades in the time of the Trojan war, Strabo. Through; κατά την πόλιν ολην, through the whole city, Dionys. Hal. In; χατ' ονρανόν ναίει, he dioells in heaven, Eurip. χατ'α ρωπήία πυκνά χε'ιμεΰα, we lay among the thick bushes f Horn. 17 194 GOVERNMENT. By ; κατά. γην και κατά. θάλασσαν, by land and by sea, Isocr. Nea?' ; κατά τύμβον, near the tomb, JEschyl. Before; Χνα σοι κατ' οφθαλμούς λίγγ, that he may speak to you be- fore your face, Aristoph. Opposite to ; κατά Jay.idat^ioviovg έστησε Πέρσας, he placed the Persians opposite to the Lacedcemonians, Herodot. At ; κατ' αυτούς αίεν ορα, he continually looked at them, Horn. To ; ϊκοντο κατά στρατον, they came to the army, Horn. Towards ; ήπιος κατά τους πολιήτας, mild towards the citizens, Herodot After; κατ' αντον άλλοι ανέβαιναν, after him others ascended, Herodot. On account of; αντον κατά τ\ν νεότητα νπεριδοντες, having slighted him on account of his youth, Thucyd. Concerning ; επειρωτών τον κήρυκα κατά την απιξιν, questioning the en- voy concerning his coming, Herodot. With; κατ' εζουσίαν επιτάσσει, he commands with authority, Mark i. 27. About ; κατ' siav.ia χίλιους άνδρας, about six thousand men, Herodot. It is often put with the accusative to denote the end of an action ; κατά ληί'ην εκπλώσαντες, having sailed out in order to collect plunder, Herodot. Also to serve as a circumlocution of the genitive ; η κατά. τον ηλιον ανατολή, the rising of the sun, Polyb. xa&' s αντον, by himself, Demosth. ; κατά μήνα, every month, Aristoph. ; κατ' ενιαυτον %καστον, every year, Plato; κατά τετρακισχιλίονς, four thousand at a time, Xen. ; κατά φύλα, by tribes, Horn. Ύπερ, above. With the Genitive. Above; το νδωρ νπερ των μαστών εφαίνετο, the water of the river appeared above their breasts, Xen. Over ; ττηδών τάφρων νπερ, leaping over the trenches, Soph. Beyond; εξ Λί&ιοπίας της νπερ Αιγύπτου, from JEthiopia which is beyond Egypt, Thucyd. For ; νπερ τών ' Ελλήνων μάχεο'&αι, to fight for the Greeks, Plato. On account of; Ssv&y δε άπεχ&όμενος νπερ νμών, being, hated by Seuthes on account of you, Xen. By ; λίϋσοα νπερ μακαρων, I pray by the gods, Apoll. Rh. Concerning ; oaa νπερ της ειρήνης κατεψει'σατό μου, what he falsely laid to my charge concerning the peace, Demosth. νπερ τον μη πα&ειν, in order not to suffer, Demosth. With the Accusative. Above : lv τω πεδΊω νπερ ΣηλυμβρΊαν, in the plain above Selymbria, Xen. Of number; νπερ δε δύο μυριάδας άνϋρώπων, above twenty thousand men, Herodot. Over; ριπτεουσι νπερ τον δόμον, they throw it over the house, Herodot. Beyond; νπερ την πήραν φρονειν, to have a spirit beyond his purse f Lucian. Against; νπερ μόρον, against destiny, Horn. CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 195 *Aru, upon, through. With the Dative. Upon; leva. Γαργαρω ακρω η μ ενόν , sitting upon the summit of mount Gargarus, Horn. In; άνα ναυαίν, in ships, Eurip. With; χρυοεω άνα οκ>\πτρω, with a golden sceptre, Horn. With the Accusative. Through; άνα στρατοί•, through the army, Horn. During ; ava τον πόλεμον τούτον, during this war, Herodot. In; βααιληας ava στόμ' έχων, having kings in your mouth, Horn. Among ; ava πρώτους ε'ααν, they were among the first, Herodot. At ; νήας άνα γλαφνρας,αΐ the hollow ships, Horn. To ; Λάτμιον αν νάττος »)?.9ε, came to the Latmian forest, Theocr. Up ; άνα τον ποταμό ν πλεειν, to sail up the river, Herodot. Uj.on; &ήκεν ava μυρίκην, he hung them upon a tamarisk, Horn. According to ; άνα τον aihbv λόγον, according to the same manner, Polyb. By reason of; άνα το ακοτεινον οι> προίδύντων, they not discovering them by reason of the darkness, Thucyd. ava κράτ&ς, with all his might, Xen. ; ava μέρος, by turns, in succession, alternately, Eurip. ; άνα μέαον, in the midst, between, 1 Cor. vi. 5. ; ava παν έτος, άνα πάντα ί'τεα, yearly, Herodot. ; μηδέ άνα δϋο χιτώνας εχειν, neither have two coats apiece, Luke ix 3. L. The prepositions aucpi, επί, μετά, naqa, περί, nQoq, υπό, govern the genitive, dative, and accusa- tive ; as, *ΛμφΙ, about. With the Genitive. About ; άμφί ταντης οίκεοντες της πολιός, dwelling about this city, . Herodot. Concerning; άείδειν άμφί φιλότητος, to sing concerning love, Hom. For ; . μάχεα&ον πίδακος άμφ' όλϊγιις, they fight for a little foun- tain, Horn. By; Φοίβου άμφί, by Phozbus, Apoll. Rh. With the Dative. About; πέπλους ρήγνϋσιν άμφί οώματι, he rends the robes about his body, jEschyl. Concerning ; εμελλονύμφί πόσει εΐ'ρεσ&αι, I intended to inquire concern- ing my husband, Hom. For ; άμφ' Έλενγ ϊμάρναο, you fought for Helen, Hom. With ; πεπαρμένη άμφ' οννχεααι, pierced with his talons, Hesiod. Near ; ηρϊπε ό*' άμφ' αντώ, he fell near him, Hom. Upon ; φέρει γαρ άμφί νώτοις Σιδωνίην γυναίκα, for he Carries upon his back a Sidonian woman, Anacr. 196 GOVERNMENT. About ; Near ; To; Concerning ; For; λόγους άνεαπα, τους μεν Ατρειδών κάτα, τους (Γ άμφ' 'Όδυσ- σεί, he uttered speeches, some against the Atrida, some against Ulysses, Soph. With the Accusative. άμφί την κάμϊνον εχω τα πολλά, I am, commonly about the stove, Lucian. Of time ; άμφί Πλειάδων δνσιν, about the setting of the Pleiads, yEschyl. Of number; άμφί τα εζήκοντα στάδια, about sixty stadia, Xen. άμφί δε κανλον φάσγανον ερραίσΰη, the sword was broken near the hilt, Horn. άμφ' άλα ελααι Αχαιούς, to confine the Greeks to the sea, Horn. άλλο δε ούδεν υπόμνημα ην ενταύ&α τών μύϋων των άμφί τον 5 Ιάσονα, there was no other memorial here of the fables concerning Jason, Arrian. νείκος ετύχϋη άμφί βοηλασίαν, a contest arose for driving away the oxen, Horn. Upon; Over ; In; By; Before ; Towards ; Against ; In the time of s Of; From ; Upon; Over ; In; With ; At; To; Against , Before ; After ; *Enl, upon. With the Genitive. ίστάσι δ' επί λόφου, they stand upon an eminence, Herodot. επί τούτων άπελϊπε ΝΊκαρχον, over these he left Nicarchus, Polyb. έχων έπί της χειρός μνν, having in his hand a mouse f Herodot. επί της ϋαλάττης έστησαν, they stood by the sea, Polyb. επί τοσούτων μαρτύρων, before so many witnesses, Lucian. επλει επί της Μιλήτου, he sailed towards Jtfiletus, Thucyd. επί Φρυγίας επορενετο, he went against Phrygia, Xen. επί Κρόνου, in the time of Saturn, Hesiod. ίπί του καλού λέγων παιδος, speaking of the beautiful boy, Plato. Λύκιοι Ιπί Λύκου ϊσχον τί,ν επωνυμ'ιην, the Lycians had their name from Lycus, Herodot. Ιπ' ίωντων, by themselves, apart, Herodot. ; επί τεττα ρων,^ντ deep, Thucyd. ; ψ εφ' ενός ή κατάβααις, the descent was by one at a time, Xen. With the Dative. αγγος επί τί/ κεφαλή εχουσαν, having a vessel upon her head, Herodot. ου γαρ ονρον κατέλειπον επί κτεάτεσσιν εμοΐσι^οτ I did not leave a keeper over my possessions, Horn. ημεν ενί πτολίμω, ηδ' άλλοίοι επί έργω, both in war and in any other business, Horn. ϊσϋίουσιν επί τω σίτω οψον, they eat meat with their bread, Xen. επί τω "Αληκι ποταμω, at the riven Halex, Thucyd. κτισ&ίντες ίπί- εργοις άγα-θοις, created to good works, Ephes. ii. 10. συνιστάς τους Αρκάδας επί τγ Σπάρτη, stirring up the Arcadians against Sparta, Herodot. επί τοντοις τοις κριταϊς, before these judges, Aristoph. άνίστη επ' αύτώ Φεραύλας, after him Pher aulas rose up, Xen. CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 197 Besides; άλλα τε πόλλ' irrl τοΤς πύ&ομεν κακά, besides these we suf- fered many other misfortunes, Horn. For, 1&~ανμαζον uvtov ini οοψία, they admired him for his wis- dom, Plato. Concerning ; ίχρηατηριύζοντο ini τη χώρη, they consulted the oracle con- cerning the country, Herodot. In the power of ; ini τοις &εοΐς δ' εστί, it is in the power of the gods, Plato. It is often put with the dative to express condition ; ΐρχεο ini δώοοις, come on condition of receiving presents, Horn. Also design; δύζομεν ini πολεμώ aniivui, we shall seem to depart in order to make war, Xen. With the Accusative. Upon; ίινίπήδησεν ini τον ϊππον, he leaped upon his horse, Xen. Over; βαοιλει'σει ini τον οίκον Ίΰκώβ, he shall reign over the house of Jacob, Luke i. 33. To; ini τ/,ν olxiav a^[yutda,we are come to the house, Aristoph. Towards; όρόων ini otvona πόντον, looking towards the purple sea '■, Horn. Against; ϊστρατει'ετο ϊπΐ τους ΛΙ&ίοπας, he marched against the Ethiopians, Herodot. Among ; εκλε' in' αν&ρώηους, you became celebrated among men, Hom. By ; ini κραναν εσδόμενοι, sitting by a fountain, Theocr. For, during; ίδηονν τίν γήν επί δνο ημέρας, they ravaged the country for two days, Thucyd. Till; ένδον in' ηώ, I slept till morning, Horn. About; ini τριηκοαια, about three hundred, Herodot. It is often put with verbs of_ motion, in order to show the object of them ; προς ah ηλ&ον Ιπ' άργνριον, I came to you to get money, Xen. With ; Among ; Μετά, with, among, after. With the Genitive. τα πολλά διημερενομεν μετ' αντοϋ, we commonly spent the the living day with him, Plato τι ζητείτε τον ζώντα μετά tmv νεκρών ; why seek among the dead ? Luke xxiv. 5. By means of; μετ' αρετής πρωτενειν, io be first by means of virtue, Xen. πολεμηθώ μετ' αντών, I will fight against them, Apocal. Ajainst : Among ; In; With ; By; After; ii. 16. With the Dative. με&' νμιν, I am the youngest among γενεηφι νεωτατος you, Hom. ae μετ' αγκαλ'ιδεααι φέρουσα, carrying you in her arras, Callim. τον μετά χερσίν ίρνππατο Φοίβος 'Ληόλλων, him Apollo caught with his hands, Hom. χαΐται δ' Ιρρώοντο ιιττα πνοιγς ανεμοιο, their manes icere shaken by the blowing of the wind, Hom. With the Accusative. μετά τον θάνατον Δαρείου , after the death of Darius, Herodot. Of rank or degree; 3v φιλώ μύλοτα μετά σί, whom I love the most after you, Aristoph. 17* \ 198 GOVERNMENT. To; ϊ'ομεν (Ion. for ϊωμεν) μετά παΐδ' Ιμον, let us go to my son. Horn. In ί ρόπαλον μετά χείρας έχων, having a club in his hands, Alciphr. Into; "Ωςος μετά Κασπϊδα βάλλει, the Oxus falls into the Caspian sea, Dionys. Per. Among; αϊ ψασιν με&' όμήλΐχας ε'μμεν' άριστον, they say that you are _ the best among your coevals, Horn. Besides; οίοι και Λαναοΐσιν άριστήες μετέασι, και μετ' Άχιλληα, what chiefs there are among the Greeks besides Achilles, Horn. Against ; ηλϊτε μετ' άϋανατους μάκαρας, he sinned against the immortal gods, Hesiod. By; οϋτε ννκτωρ, οϋτε με&' {μίραν, neither by night nor by day, Plato. Sometimes it is put with the accusative to express the end of an action ; το χρνσειον επλει μετά κώας, he sailed in or- der to get the golden fleece, Theocr. Παρά, from, at, to. With the Genitive. From; παρά τον 'Αγαμέμνονος δώρα λαβείν, to receive presents from Agamemnon, Plato. Near ; παρά κυανίων πετρών, near the Cyanean rocks, Soph. By; τούτο jiaqa σου επιδεικνΰοΰω, let this be shown by you, Xen. With the Dative. At ; μίνων πάρα νηνσί, remaining at the ships, Horn. With ; παρά σοι κατίλυον, they lodged with you, Demosth. In; παρ' ' Ομήρω Λι.ομηδϊ]ς λέγει, in Homer Diomedes says, Plato. To ; Ιέναι παρά Τισσαφέρνει, to go to Tissaphernes, Xen. With the Accusative. To , ι,κε παρ* {μας, he came to us, Plato. Near ; παρ' aihbv κοιμήσαντο, they slept near him, Horn. During ; παρά πάντα τον χρόνον, during the whole time, Demosth. At ; ταύτα παρά τά συμπόσια ποιεύσι, they do these things at their entertainments, Herodot. Through; παρ' άπαν το στράτευμα, through the whole army, Thucyd. Against ; παρά τους νόμους, against the laics, Demosth. Above, more than ; έπόνει παρά τους άλλους, he labored above the others, Xen. Below; ι)λάττωσας aihbv βραχύ τι παρ' αγγέλους, thou hast reduced him a little below the angels, Psa. viii. 5. By reason of ; ευέλπιδες είσι παρά τϊ,ν έμπειρίαν, they have confidence by reason of their experience, Aristot. From; ηγούμαι είναι παρά τούτο σωτηρίαν, I think that safety is from this, Plato. Besides; ουκ εστί παρά ταύτ' άλλα, there are not others besides these, Aristoph. Except ; τεσσαράκοντα παρά μίαν ελαβον, I received forty stripes except (oisave) one, 2 Cor. xi. 24. παρά τετάρτψ ί,μέραν, every fourth day, Polyb. ; παρ' όλϊ- γον \X9ov αποϋανειν, I came within a little of dying, Isocr. ; παρ' ολίγον ίποιούντο τον Κλέανδρον , they esteemed Cleander of little consideration, Xen. CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 199 IJeoL about. About , For; From ; Above ; About ; For ; Through ; By; About ; Towards ; With the Genitive τι λέγεις περί τον Άχιλλΐως ; what do you say about Achilles? Plato. γης πέρι τησδε μαχωμεϋα, let us fight for this land, Tyrt. γράμματα κομίζω περί /ίεκριανού, I bring letters from Dccria- nus, Lucian. περί πάντων εμμεναι άλλων, to be above all others, Horn. oi περί πολλού ποιήαονται, they will greatly esteem you, Plato. With the Dative. περί τοΓσι ανχέσι, about their necks, Herodot. δεδιύτες περί τί] Ποτίδαια, fearing for Potidaa, Thucyd. περί δείματι ψέύγον, they fled through fear, Find. Ιρεικόμενος περί δονρί, transfixed by the spear, Horn. With the Accusative. περί τα 'ελεα οίκεοντες, dwelling about the marshes, Herodot. Of time; καταλαμβάνουσι περί άριστου , ω ρ uv, they overtake them about dinner-time, Thacy ά.' Of number ; περί τετ~ ταράκοντα τάλαντα, about forty talents, Lys. περί τον δημόν είσι δίκαιοι, they are just towards the people, Aristoph. περί τους -θεούς ίζαμαρτειν, to offend against the gods, Isocr. Προς, from, near, to. With the Genitive. From; προς Jib ς είσίν άπαντες, all are from Jupiter, Horn. By ; αρχεο&αι ίνος προς ανδρός, to be governed by one man, Eurip. In obtestation ; πρϋς &εών Λ by the gods, Soph. For ; δοκεις προς εμού λέγειν, you seem to speak for me, Plato. Near ; είσί προς -9-αλάσσης, they are near the sea, Herodot. Towards ; προς εσπέρης οίκεοντες, inhabiting towards the toest, Herodot. Against; προς ανδρός ίχ&ρού επιφέρων την ipijcpov, giving his vote against an enemy, Dionys. Hal. Before ; προς ΰεων άσεβης, impious before the gods, Xen. Under ; προς άλλης ίστον νφαίνοις, you may weave the web under an~ other, Horn. δεξιού προς ανδρός Ιστι, it is the part of a man of sense, Aristoph.; προς πατρός, μητρός, on the father's, mother's side, ^Eschin. ; oi προς α'ϊματος, the relations by blood, Soph. With the Dative. Near; ηνλίσαντο προς λόφω τινί, they encamped near a certain emi- nence, Thucyd. In; προς ταΤς άγκαλαις τά παιδία κομίζειν, to carry the children in their arms, Plut. Upon; κεΐντο ποτί χ&ονί, they lay upon the ground, Horn. 200 GOVERNMENT. Besides; προς rotg είρημένοις και τόδε απόκοΊναι, besides what has been said answer this also, Plato. For ; ov νομ'ιζουσι τ[ν αρετών προς τω σψετέρω αγα&ω πεφυκέναι, they do not thii.k that virtue is naturally calculated for their good, Xen. With the Accusative. To; ϊσαν προς 3 Όλυμπον, they went to Olympus, Hesiod. Towards; προς εσπέρην 'έπλεε, he sailed towards the west, Herodot. Of dispositions ; πώς προς ah διάκειται ; how is he dis- posed towards you ? Plato. Against; προς κέντρα μη λάκτιζε, do not kick against the pricks, iEschyl. According to ; προς τ^ν άξίαν ίκάστω Ιδίδοσαν, they gave to each according to his desert, Xen. In comparison προς &εον πίθηκος ορανεΐται, in comparison with a god he with ; will appear an ape, Plato. On account of; προς την όψιν ταντην τον γάμον έσπευσα, on account of this vision I hastened the nuptials, Herodot. With; %υμμαχ'ιαν ϊποιησαντο προς βασιλέα, they made an alliance with the king, Thucyd. Between; τεκμηριον της προς ημάς φιλίας, a proof of the friendship that is between us, Isocr. Besides; lav προς τούτο διαδάξης αυτούς, if besides this you tea,ch them, Xen. For ; προς το τροπαΐον Ιχρηοαντο, they used it for the trophy , _ Thucyd. About ; i t v προς ημέραν, it was about day-break, Lys. Of number; προς επτακόσιους, about seven hundred, Xen. t Ynb y under. With the Genitive. νπο χ&ονος, under the earth, Hesiod. ρϋσαι υπ 3 ηέρος υΐας Αχαιών, deliver the sons of Greece from the darkness, Horn. Ιπαινοννται νπο τών πολλών, they are praised by the multi- tude, Plato. απέϋανεν νπο Νικάνδρου, he was slain by Nicander, Xen. Ζηνος νπ' άγγελιης, according to the command of Jupiter , Horn. For, by reason of; χορενσαι inp> ηδονής, to dance for joy, Aristoph. With ; To; Under ; From ; By; According to ; υπό πομπής έξαγειν, to convey with pomp, Herodot. νπ' ανλητήρος άείδειν, to sing to the piper, Theog. νπο μαστϊγων ωρυσσον, they dug under the strokes of whips, Herodot. With the Dative. Under ; νπο χ&ονι, under the earth, Hom. Subject to ; imb Jans• δαιμονίοις εϊσι, they are under the Lacedamonians, lsocr. Near, close under; νπο τ»7 τιόλει, near the city, Thucyd. In; κατακρϋψαα' νπο κόλπω, concealing them in her bosom, Hom. Before ; νπο τοιοντω μάρτνρι, before such a witness, Herodian. By ; ίμω νπο δουρι τυπείς, struck by my spear, Hom. CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 201 For ; νπο δείυατι χεχληγυιαι, crying out for fear, Apoll. Rh. With, νπο φωτί πολλω ηοοι\ει, he went forward icitli much light, Plut. To; νπο βαοβϊτω χορείων, dancing to the lyre, Anacr. With the Accusative. Under ; νπο τους πόδας του 'ίππου νπεδραμε χίων, a dog ran under the horse's feet, Herodot. To; αϊαχιστος άι/,ρ νπο "ίλιον Ι,λ&ε, he was the most abject icrctch that came to Troy, Horn. Behind; xa't utv ίχείνη χατακονπτει νπο Tt t v &ίρην, and she conceals him behind the door, Herodot. About ; νπο τον χρόνον τούτον, about this time, Thucyd. Obs. 1. 'Slg is often used for προς or Fig • as, ηλ&εν ώς έμε, he came to me, Demosth. ; επεμπον πρέσβεις ώς τους ' Αθηναί- ους, they sent ambassadors to the Athenians, Thucyd. Obs. 2. Prepositions are sometimes separated from their cases ; as, τώ δ' είς άμφοτέρω Αιομήδεος άρματα βήτην, (for είς άρματα,} Hom. ; έν γάρ σε τη νυκτΐ ταύτη άναιρέομαι, (for έν τη νυχτϊ,) Herodot. νι. 69. They are also frequently placed after; as, μάχην ές, Hom. ; ϊίναι πέτρας άπο, Eurip. ; φιλοσοφίας πέρι, Plato. Obs. 3. The poets sometimes join a preposition with the latter only of two nouns, where it should stand with both ; as, 4) άλδς τ) επί γψ } Horn. Obs. 4. Prepositions are frequently used as adverbs, without a case ; as, σοΙ δέ τάδε λέγω, δράσω δε προς, Eurip. ; μετά δε, έλεγε τάδε, Herodot. Obs. 5. Prepositions are often understood; as, εγώ σε μετέρ- χομαι των χτεών, (sc. προς,} Herodot. ; έρχονται πεδίοιο, (sc. διά,) Horn. ; , τοξεύετ' ανδρός τούδε, (sc. κατά,) you shoot at this man, Soph. ; άπώλοντο al νψς αύτοΐς άνδράσι, (sc. ούν,) the ships were lost with all on board, Xen. ; άνεχώρησε τώ στρατό), (sc. συν,) he returned with the army, Thucyd. ; τι μοι όργί'ίτ]; (instead of διά τι ;) why are you angry with me ? Xen. LI. A preposition in composition often governs the same case, as when it stands by itself; as, απόπνεα τον άρματος, he leaps from the chariot. Τα ιρι'λλα χαταχέοντες αλλήλων, throwing the leaves at one another, αννεχι'βενε t»J J/urjoi, he played at dicexcith Ceres. νπεοενεγχόντες τας τανς τον ία&μον, having carried their ships over the isthmus. 202 GOVERNMENT. κατίγνωσαν απάντων δυνατόν, Thucyd. ; εμού καταγελώσι, Plato ; προναυμαχήσεις Πελοποννήσου, Herodot. ; ενδιετριψα τη *Ίδγ, Lucian ; πολύς υμάς όχλος περιειστήκει, Plato. Obs. 1. This rule takes place only when the preposition would have the same sense and the same case if standing immediately before the noun. Sometimes the preposition is repeated ; as, κατηγορούνταν κατά τών στρα- τηγών, Xen. Obs. 2. Sometimes a case different from that required by the preposition in composition is used; as, τους πρεσβυτέρους κατηγορεΐν, Plato; κατά- γελασαι ημΐν, Herodot. ; ίξηλ -dov την Περσίδα χώρην, Id. ; εμβατεύειν πατρίδος, Soph.; τύνδ' είσεδίξω τειχέων, Eurip. Obs. 3. Prepositions are often separated from the verbs with which they are compounded ; as, άπο λοιγον άμΰναι, (for λοιγον άπαμϋναι ,) Horn. ; κατά μεν εκαυσαν Λρυμον πόλιν, κατ'α δε Χαράδραν, Herodot. VIII. 33. Obs. 4. The prepositions with which some verbs are compounded are not un frequently used for the compounds themselves ; as, ϊγω πάρα for Ιγω πάρειμι ' εν ι for ενεστι ' ανα for ανάστα, or άνάστη&ι, arise thuu. GRAMMATICAL FIGURES. I. Figures which relate to Orthography and Etymology. Prosthesis is the prefixing of one or more letters to a word ; as, σμικρός for μικρός ' έέλπομαι for ίλπομαι. Epenthesis is the insertion of one or more letters in the middle of a word ; as, ε'.λαρε for έλαβε • άδελφειός for αδελφός. Paragoge is the addition of one or more letters to the end of a word ; as, λόγοισι for λόγοις • ήσ&α for ής. Aphceresis is the taking of one or more letters from the beginning of a word ; as, κείνος for εκείνος • εΐβω, for λείβω. Syncope is taking from the middle of a word; as, κεκμηώς for χεχμηχώς • ποόμος for πρόμαχος. Apocope is taking from the end of a word ; as, δω for δώμα • εκταν for εκτάνον, from κτείνω. Tmesis is the separation of the parts of a compound word by the insertion of another ; as, άπό λοιγυν άμνναν for λοιγόν άπαμνναι. Metathesis is the transposition of letters ; as, κραδία for καρδία • επρά&ον for επαρ&ον, from πέρϋ~ω. An- tithesis is the putting of one letter for another ; as, πόρσω for πόρρω• όδμη for οσμή. Synceresis is the contraction of two syllables into one, with- out a change of letters ; as, τείχει, for τείχεϊ. Crasis is the contraction of two syllables into one, with a change of vowels; as, τείχους for τείχεος. Synaloepha is the uniting of syllables in different words, either by dropping vowels ; as, κού for καϊ ού • or by contracting them ; as, χτοιμάτιον for το ίμάτιον • τούμόν for τό εμόν. Diceresis divides one syllable into two ; as, πάΐς for παις. II. Figures which relate to Syntax. Ellipsis is when one or more words are wanting to com- plete the sense. The following, with what have been else- where given, are some of the principal examples of this figure; but its limits are far from being accurately defined, some al- lowing it a wider field than others, and indeed than seems to belong to it. Ellipsis of substantives, ή Κοριν&Ια, ή άλλοτρία, ή βάρβαρος, ή βασιλέως, (sc. γη or χώρα,) Thucyd. ; κατά γε ττ\ν έμήν, (sc. γνώμην, or δόξαν,) Plato; ές πατρός, ές ήμέτερον, (sc. δόμον, or οΐκον,) Horn. ; κατά το έπιχώριον, (sc. ε&ος,) Thucyd. : τη ίστεραίτβ, ττ { τελευταίτ}, (sc. ψιέρτ],) Herodot. ; έν τω παρόντι, 204 GRAMMATICAL FIGURES. (sc. καιρώ,) Thucyd. ; άγε ημάς τήν επί Βαβυλώνος, τήν λοιπήν έπορεύ&η, (sc. όδόν,) Xen. ; δαρήσεται πολλάς, ολίγας, (sc. πλη- γάξ,) Luke xii. 47, 48 ; προς τά κοινά προσελ&εϊν, (sc. πράγ- ματα,) Demosth. ; εν τω Κύρον βαρβαρΧκω, (sc. στρατεύμάτι,) Xen.; ή κυβερνητική, ή ρητορική, ή δικανική, (sc. τέχνη,) Plato; εν αριστερή, εν δεξιή, (sc. χειρί,) Herodot. ; εκ των της πόλεως, (sc. χρημάτων,) JEschin. ; εν τω τότε, (sc. χρόνω,) Andoc. ; τά επί Θράκης, (sc. χωρία, or μέρη,) Thucyd. Ellipsis of verbs, έτοιμος εγωγε μαν&ανειν, (sc. είμΐ,) Plato ; Σιμωνίδη ού ράδιον άπιστεϊν (sc. εστί) • σοφός γάρ καΐ &εΐος ό άνήρ, (sc. έστϊ,) Plato; λαβε τήν μάχαιραν • είτα όπως μαγειρί- κώς σφάξεις τον bv, (for είτα δρα δπως σφάξεις,) Aristoph.; άπΧτε ούν,καΐ μή χαλεπήνητε τω δικαστή, (for καΐ σκοπείτε μή χαλεπήνητε,) Lucian ; εΐ δέ κε Τρωσϊ μάχωμαι, μήπως με περιστείωσι, (for δείδω μήπως με περιστείωσι,) Horn. ; σύ ουδέν άλλο ή απορείς, (i. e. σύ ούδεν άλλο ποιείς,) Plato ; τι δέ, εΐ μή ύπισχνεΐτο, (i. e. τι δέ άλλο έποίει,) Xen. ; εί δέ, σύ μεν μεν άκουσον, εγώ δέ κέ τοι καταλέξω, (for εί δέ βούλει,) Horn. Frequently καλώς έχει, or the like, must be supplied before εί δέ μή. Thus, εί μέν δώσουσι γέρας, [καλώς εξει,~\ εί δέ κε μή δώωσιν, εγώ δέ κεν αυτός ελωμαι, Horn. In some cases, however, instead of καλώς εχεν being supplied, εί δέ μή is rendered otherwise, alioqui ; as, μή ποίησης ταϋτα • εί δέ μή, αίτίαν έξεις, do not do this ; otherwise, you will be blamed, Xen. The participle έχων is sometimes omitted; as, που δέ ό ξΰλον ; (sc. έχων,) Lucian; έκεΐσε άπόβλειρον ές τήν μεγάλην άκρόπολιν, τήν το τριπλούν τείχος, (sc. εχουσαν,) Id. An ellipsis of the adverb μάλλον often takes place before ^ Or ήπερ • as, βοΰλομ' εγώ λαόν σόον ϊμμεναι, ή άπολέσχΤαι, (ί. β. μάλλον βούλομαι,) Horn. ; Ζευς ΤρωσΙν ε&έλει δούναι κράτος, ήέπερ ήμϊν, Id. Asyndeton is the omission of conjunctions where they are usually inserted ; as, πολλά γάρ άν ποιήσειε τω σχήμάτι, τω βλέμ- μάτι, τή φωνή, Demosth. ; και συμβαλόντες τάς άσπϊδας, εω- %τούντο, εμάχοντο, άπέκτεινον, άπέ&νησκον, Xen. Synesis is when the construction is referred, not to the gen- der or number of the word, but to the sense ; as, το στρατόπεδον, ούτως έν αίτια έχοντες τον "Λγιν, άνεχώρουν, Thucyd. Zeugma is when two or more substantives have a verb in common, which is applicable only to one of them ; as, εδουσί τε πίονα μήλα, οϊνόν τ' εξαιτον, (sc. πίνουσι,) Horn. ; ϊν' οϋτε φο)νήν οϋτε του μορφήν βροτών όψει, ^schyl. Prom. 21. Pleonasm is the use of more words than are necessary to GRAMMATICAL FIGURES. 205 express the sense ; as, ffisv όφΰαλμοΐσι, Horn. ; εφη λέγων, Soph. ; μεγά&εϊ μέγας, Horn. ; νυν μοι έπίρρωσον σε αυτό ν Lucian. Polysyndeton is the use of conjunctions where they are not grammatically necessary; as, τα μεν προς τους -ίτεούς φανερός ήν καϊ ποιών καϊ λέγων , Xen. ; Άτρεϊδαί τε καϊ άλλοι έϋκνήμτδες *Αχα%οΙ % Horn. Hendiadys is the expression of that which is in reality one, as if there were two; as, εΐτω δε προλείποι ή ρώμη καΐ το σώμα, (for ή ρώμη του σώματος,) Thucyd. Periphrasis, or circumlocution, is the use of several words to express one thing ; as, άστυ Σούσων, (for Σούσα,) ^Eschyl. ; συό; χρήμα μέγα, (for μέγας σνς,) Herodot. ; το δΐον όμμα, (for Ζευς,) yEschyl. ; νϊες, κούροι 'Λχαιών, (for οί "Ελληνες,) Horn. ; Κάστορος βία, Pind. ; βίη Ήρακληείη, Horn, (for Κάστωρ, Ηρακλής, but with the collateral idea οι strength or power.) Hyperbaton is the transgression of the common order or arrangement of words; as, α -η]λ&εν έχων, (for α έχων ffixre,) Thucyd. Anastrbphe is the inversion of words, or the placing of that word last which should be first ; as, φιλοσοφίας πέρι, (for περί φιλοσοφίας, Plato ; έτϊ&ει πάρα, (for παρετί&ει,) Horn. ; πόνου χωρίς, Soph. Hysteron proteron is when that is put last, which, according to the sense, should be first ; as, ωϊξε πνλας, καΐ άπώσεν όχ\ας, (for άπώσεν όχηας, καΐ ώϊξε πνλας,) Hom. Hypallage is when two words mutually exchange their re- spective cases ; as, άστρων εύφρόνη, (for άστρα εύφρόνης,) Soph. Synchysis is a confused arrangement of words, by which the sense is obscured ; as, ουδείς πω πρότερον Θράκας 'Ρωμαίων κατεστρέψάτο ά&ρόους, (for ουδείς πω πρότερον 'Ρωμαίων τους Θράκας κατεστρέψάτο αθρόους,) Pausan. Anacoluthon takes place, when the latter part of a sentence does not agree in syntax with the former; as, τοις Συρακονσίοις χατάπληξις έγένετο υρώντες, (for όρώσί, or οί Συρακούσιοι χατε- πΐάγησαν,) the Syracusans were surprised when they saw Thucyd. ; ό δε 'Λσσύριος, ό Βαβυλώνα τε έχων καϊ τι)ν άλλην * Λσσυρίαν, εγώ μεν οΊμαι, Ιππέας μεν αξειν ου μείον δισμυρίων , (for άξει, or τον 'Λσσΰριον άξειν } ) but the Assyrian, who is possessed of Babylon and the rest of Assyria, I think will bring not less than twenty thousand horse, Xen. 18 PROSODY. QUANTITY. The quantity of a syllable is the space of time taken up in pronouncing it. Syllables, with respect to their quantity, are either long or short. A long syllable in pronouncing requires double the time of a short one ; as, τνπτετε. Some syllables are common ; that is, sometimes long, and sometimes short; as the second syllable in -ΰύγατρες. A vowel is said to be long or short by nature, which is always so by custom, or by the use of the poets ; thus η and ω are always long, ε and ο always short. Λ, t, and v, are called doubtful, because they are long in some syllables, short in others, and common in others ; as, οπαδός, φήγίνος, 'νδωρ or 'νδωρ. The rules of quantity may be divided into those which apply to syllables long by nature or by position; to the doubtful vowels in the first and middle syllables, 1. before vowels or diphthongs, 2. before single consonants ; and to the doubtful vowels in final syllables. SYLLABLES LONG BY NATURE. I. Circumflexed syllables, diphthongs, and single vowels produced by contraction, as well as ty and ω, are long by nature ; as, δελφιτες, δονλειος. ράδιος, άκων for άίκων, οφϊς for οψιες, τύγαϋΐχ for τα αγα -du, τάμα for τα ίμά. Exc. A long vowel or a diphthong is generally shortened at the end of a word, and sometimes at the beginning, before another vowel or diphthong ; as, οιύίτω η που κείται εν ^μετίροισι δόμοιαι, Horn. οίδα δ' Ινι αιαδίιΐ δ~η'ιω μελπεσ -daX -/1ξ>ήϊ, Id. QUANTITY. 207 Obs. Sometimes also a long vowel or a diphthong is shortened before a consonant ; as, ft" dt χει υ'ί/.α>\' ϊχοψαί φίλη* ες πατρίδα γιχϊαν, Horn. But such readings are generally thought to be false, and others have been substituted for them; thus, ni δέ χεν οΐχαδ' ϊχοιμι φίλην. SYLLABLES LONG BY POSITION. II. A syllable in which a short or common vowel precedes two consonants, or a double consonant, is long by position ; as, ασΰλλΰγΤστος, ϊ~Ιεργΰζονται, onog σε τρώει, Horn. Exc. 1. A short vowel before a mute and a liquid, or before μν } πτ, χτ, the last even with ο following, is common ; as, μέτρα δε τεϊ'/ε ΰεοΐαι • το γαρ ιιϊτρον εστίν αριατον, Phocyl. ' Λλχμ)[\η, ■^ιγάττ,ρ λαοσσόου Ήλϊκτρι'ωιος, Hesiod. A short vowel before a middle mute followed by o, and before a smooth or rough mute followed by any liquid, generally continues short in the comic writers. A short vowel before a middle mute followed by λ, μ, τ, is generally made long both in the comic and tragic writers. Exc. 2. A final short vowel sometimes remains short before a word beginning with a double consonant or two single ones ; as, νλήεσσά Ζάκυν&ο;, Horn. ; ούδε Σκάμανδρος, Id. Also a short vowel sometimes continues short before a final ς followed by a word beginning with a consonant ; as, χρώζει πολύφωτος χορώνη, Arat. But such passages are differently read ; thus, χρώζει ττολι'φωνα xo- ζώνη, πολι'φωνα being used adverbially. Obs. 1. A short vowel is often made long before a single consonant, particularly before a liquid ; as, παοα ρηγμΐνι, Horn. ; πολλά, λισσόμειο;, Id. ; επειδϊ^ Id. ; αΐόλον oqiv, Id. Obs. 2. A short syllable is sometimes made long before a digammated vowel ; as, οϋττ; οί, (for ίοι,) Horn. ; rroo"; οίκον Πηληος, (for }(£χονλ Id. ; and ε&εν ϊ { κε } (for χέ&εν,) Id. Obs. 3. When three short syllables come together, one of them must be made long in heroic verse for the sake of measure ; as, a&avuzo; } ΠρΤαμίδη;, 3-νγατέρος, δτά μεν άστιί- δο;, Horn. THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE FIRST AND MIDDLE SYLLABLES. 1. Before \ t owels and Diphthongs. III. A doubtful vowel before another vowel or a diphthong is generally short. PROSODY. tions. Excepti A is long in 1. Words where it is used in Doric for η • as, ΰώς for ηώς. 2. The oblique cases of γρανς, νανς } lag for λάας. 3. The ^Eolic genitives in «o and αων • as, Αϊνείαο^ &εαων. 4. The second and third persons singular present indicative ionic of verbs in αω, if the preceding syllable be long ; as, μενοιναα • but otherwise it is short; as, ούχ όράας. 5. The present and imperfect of verbs in «ω, when the di- gamma is supposed to be inserted ; as, ναω or vafca. 6. Nouns in αων } whether they increase short or long ; as, όπαων, άονος • Ποσειδάων, άωνος • Except Φαων and a few others. 7. Most feminine proper names in αϊς • as, ΘαΙς, Άίαΐς. But masculines are short ; as, Τάνάϊς. 8. * Λαατος, άατος, noxious, αετός or αίετος, α^ρ, α'ϊσσω with its deriva- tives and compounds, as, αι'ξ, τριχαϊξ, aiy.i t , καταιγδην, &c, άκρααντος, αλια^ς and several other compounds of άω, αρχαϊκός, βονγα(ος, δαϊ,ρ, δαίος, Ιλαα, ελάίνος, ει'κρα^ς and other compounds of κεράω, κεράΐς, κραας, λαας and its derivatives, as, λαίγξ, &c, λαός, λαοτρόιρος, ναός, τιολνναος, παος, πραννω, πρανς, οννάορος with other compounds of ηορα the perfect middle of άείρω, χαίος, χάος, good, Άγϊλαος and other compounds of λαός, i Αμ- φιάραος, Αχαϊκός, Κνταϊκος, Λαέρτης, Σιψαεύς, Ταΰγετος, Χρνσαωρ. Λ is common in ααγι,ς, αάτω and αάω for ατω and αω, άείδω, α'ίδης, αΐδος gen. of αϊ?, αίω, αλαος, αορ or αορ, δαΐζω, ιλαος. I is long in 1. Nouns in ιων increasing short ; as, κτων, όνος • Άμφϊων, όνος. ΚρονΙων and ΊΙρίων are common. 2. Comparatives in mv i but in the Attic dialect only ; as, βελτϊων. 3. δΐος, -&ρϊαΙ, ϊάομαι, Ιάσιμος, Τατρος, Ίος, an arrow, poison, with its compounds, as, ϊοδόκος, &c. (but Xov, a violet, and its compounds, as, ϊοειδί,ς, are short), ϊωχμ'ος, κρϊος, μετακΤάϋω, παλϊυιξις, τιϊαίνω, πιαρ, 'Άμφϊος, Ιαπετος, Ίαπετϊονίδης, 'Ιασίων, "Ιασος, Ίονία, Ίω, Ταλαϊονίδης, Φϋιος !> Φλϊας, Χίος, of Chios, Chian, (but Χίος, Chios, is short). I is common in 1. Nouns in ia and vv • as, κονία. 2. Verbs in ιω • as, τίω. 3. The improper reduplication of verbs in μι • as, ϊημι. 4. ανιάΐω, ανιαρός, Ι'νδιος, r t ia, ϋριον or -θρίον, ία'ινω, ιερός, £η, an adverb of exclamation, ϊϋγξ, ίνζω, λίαν, μνιον ΟΓ μνίον, όμοίϊος, χλιαίνω, Λιώρηζ. QUANTITY. 209 Υ is long in αίσΰητ^ο, γεράνδρϋον, είλΰος or ίλΰος, Ιγνοη, μϋοδύχος, μΰων, παραφυας, πϋιτία, πυος, 'ϋετος, Λίβυ^της, Ένϋάλιος, Ένϋω, Θυϊχς, Γ ϊετί$. Υ is common in 1. Most verbs in υω • as, &ύω. 2. The oblique cases of some nouns in νς, vog • as, μυς, μυός. 3. μυελός, μνωψ, πύελος, Γηονων. 2. Before Single Consonants. IV. A doubtful vowel before a single consonant is short. Exceptions. Λ is long in 1. Nouns in αμα, ασις, ασιμος, ατός, ατηρ, ατής, ατεος, ατικος, derived from verbs in «ω pure and ραω • as, &ίν.μα, δρασις, Ιάσιμος, χτεατός, Ιατηρ, ϋ-ηραττ\ς, έατέος, πειρατικός. 2. The oblique cases of masculines in αν -ανος • as, Τιτάν, Τιτάνος • Also of K&Q, ψάρ, φρέαρ, κέρας, κράς, βλάξ } ΰαλάμαξ, 3-ώραξ, ίέραξ, κνώδαξ, κόρδαξ, λάβραξ, πόρπαξ, ράξ, στόμφαξ, σύρφαξ; φέναξ, οϊαξ } and all others in αξ pure. 3. Gentiles and proper names in ανος, ατής, and gentiles in ανις, ατις • as, Γερμανός, ' Ιουλιανός, Σπαρτιάτης, Ευφράτης, ΒρετανΙς, Σπαρτιάτις • Except the gentiles Λάρδανος, ΛαρδάνΙς, and some Others, as also Γαλάτης, Λαλμάτης, Σαρμάτης, Σαυρο- μάτης • likewise the proper names Αίβάνος and several more, with all those in κρατης, as also *Λντιφατης, Εύρυβάτης, and a few others. 4. Nouns in ανωρ, βαμος, βαμων • as, μεγανωρ, δίβαμος, Ιππο• βαμων. 5. Numerals in ακοσιοι • as, τριακόσιοι • with Συρακόσιος. 6. The third person plural in ασι of verbs; as, τετύφασι, τιϋέασι. Likewise the dative plural of nouns whose dative singular is long by position; as, γίγασι, τύψασι. 7. The first future in ασω, first aorist in «σα, and perfect in «κα, of verbs in αω pure and ραω • as, δράω, δράσω, έδρασα, δέδρακα. 8. The feminine in ασα of participles ; as, τύψασα. 9. Words which have a Doric for η ■ as, έφίλασα for έφίλησα. 18* 210 PROSODY. Λ is also long in the following words, before Γ' αγω,^ίο break, and its derivatives, with those of αγω, to lead, as, άαγίς, λοχαγετης, λοχαγός, ναναγιον, &C, δαγύς, δυσπραγίω, Ιθαγενής, κρά- γέτης, πράγος, ραγίζω, σιαγων, σφραγίζο, σφράγίς, ταγίω, ταγός, Τιμάγητος. In άγων a is common. J ' άδόλεσχος, αδω, to satiate, αν&αδης, κρεαδιον, οπαδός, ραδιξ, σπαδιζ, άαδων. Θ • τλαϋνμος, ΚράΌις. Κ' άκων for άέκων, unwilling, βλακικως, διάκονος, -θακΐω, -θακος, ΰ-ωρα- κιον, κνακων, λακέω, οίάκοστρόφος, τριακάς, τριάκοντα, φενακίζω, ώρακιάω ί Λακνδης, Λακων, Συρακοϋσαι. Λ ' *ΰλίζω, to collect, αναλίσκω, άναλωσις, δαλος, ίαλεμος, καλόν, wood, κοαλεμος, κοβάλ'ικενμα, κόβαλος,νεοϋαλ^ς, οεμίδάλις, σκιμάλίζω, ταλις, Έρνα- λος, ' Ιαλυσός, Μιμαλων, Σαρδανάπαλος, Στυμφαλος, Φαρσαλία. But α is common in άλαος, φάλαινα, as also in καλός. JVL ' αμύω, αμητηρ, άμναμος, ' Λπαμεια, Θηραμένης, Λάμαχος. Ν ' αΐανος or αίαν^ς, ανομαι, γελανης, δανός, δυσαιανης, ίανος, beautiful, ϋρανεΰω, ■θρανος, ΰράνι'σσω, ίκανω, καρανιστΙ,ρ, καρανύω, κάρβανος, κιχανω } κρανίον, λνσσαιιος, νεανίας, νεάνις, τρανός or τρανές, φανός, φασιανός, Γερ- μανικός, Γρανικος, Θεάνω, Κρανών, ΤιτανΙς, Φαίσανα. Άνιβ is common in the nominative singular, but long in the oblique cases : Likewise φϋάνω is long in Homer, but short in the Attic writers. IT' απνω, δραπέτης, ναπν, σαπέρδης, οίναπι, 3 ' Λναπος, Άπιδανός, % Λπις, Ίάπνζ, Μϊσσαπος, Πρίαπος, Σάράπις. ' Λπολλων is common. Ρ' άμαρακος, άναρίτης, ανιαρός, αρητ [ρ, άριστον, breakfast, βάρις, ευ μα- ρις, ϋνμαρί,ς, καραβος, καρίς, λαρινος, λαρος, agreeable, νάρος, πάραρος, τιά- ρα, φάρικον, φλναρος, -ψαρός, Λϊσαρος, 'Αρηνη, 'Άρητη, "Άρητος, Δαρείος, Ήνμαρης, Καρία, Κάρίων, Λαρις, Λαρισσα,Φάρις. The following are com- mon : άρα, prayer, imprecation, άρύομαι, φάρος or φάρος,*' Αρης. Σ' διαδρααιπολίτης, δρασείω, κοραπιον, φασιανός, 'Άμασις,^'Ασιος, Άσις, 'Ασωπός, Ίασων, Κασάνδρα, Μάσης, Πασιϋίη, Πασιφάη, Τιΰρασιος, Φασις. Τ' άκρατίζω, απλάτος, ατάω, άτη, ατω, 'ατερος for ό 'έτερος, αχάτης, βοάτις, γαγατης, διδυματόκος, 'έκατι Dor. for 'εκητι, ΰατερον for το 'έτερον, ίατορία, λατομία, πλατις, ποινατωρ, φράτηρ or φρατωρ," Λρατος, Δημάρα- τος, Καιρατος, Πτελεάτικός. Χ' ραχ'ια, τραχύς, Τραχ'ις. I is long in 1. Nouns in ιμα derived from verbs in mw • as, μήντμα. 2. The oblique cases of monosyllables, of nouns in ιξ -ιγος, in ις -ι&ος, and in ιν or ις -ινος • as, ρίψ, ρϊπός • μάστνξ, μάστιγος • ορνι,ς, ορνΤχτος • δελφίν and δελφίς, δελφίνος • Except Jig, Διός ■ &ρΙξ, τρϊχός • στίξ, στίχος • τϊς, τϊνός. 3. The oblique cases of the following nouns in ις -ιδος• άψΐς, βαλβίς, κηκίς, κηλϊς, κληΐς, κνημίς, κρψϊς, κρηπίς, νησΙς 9 QUANTITY. 211 σφραγϊς, σχοινί:, χειρίς, χντρϊς, ψηφίς, ΨωφΙς, &υμαΙΐς, κανονίς, μαγαδίς, πλοκίχμίς, ραφανίς, σισσμίς, ψαμα&Ις • Also of those in ιξ -ικος ■ άί'Ι, βέμβιξ, κόλλιξ, πέρδιξ, ράδιξ, σκάνδιξ, σπάδιξ, φοίνιξ. The oblique cases of καρίς, νεβρίς, βντραχϊς, are common. 4. Nouns in ινη, ινον , ινος • as, άξΐνη, σέλίνον, χαλινός • Except εϊλαπίνη, μυρσίνη, σατίνη, κόσκίνον, κρίνον } λίνον, σάτίνον } καρκίνος, κότΧνος, κόφΧνος, κρΧνος, κύτίνος, λίνος, μύρσΧνος, πΧνος, squalidness, σΧνος, sometimes σΐιος, σπίνος, Ασίνη, Αίνος, Μύρσί- νος, ΝΚνος • Except also adjectives of matter, time, and some Others ; as, κέδρΧνος, ίνη, ίνον • -d -ερίνός, Χνη, ίνόν • άλη&ίνός, Χνή, ίν6ν • but a few of those denoting time are sometimes long ; as, όπωρίνός, Xvi\, ίνον, sometimes όπωρίνός, τ^ή, ίνον. 5. Nouns in ντης, ιτις • as, πολίτης, Συβιχρίτης, πολΐπς^ Συβα- ρΐτις • Except y -ρίτής, κτίτης, and their compounds. 6. Diminutives in ίδιον, from genitives whose last syllable is pure ; as, ίματί-ου, ίματί-ίδιον, ίματίδιον. 7. Verbs in ιβω, ιγω, ι&ω, ινω, ινέω,. ιφω • as, Ό-λίβω, πντγο), βρί&ο), κλίνο), δίνέω, νίφω ■ Except τίνω and φ&Ινω, which are long in Homer, but short in the Attic writers. 8. The first future in ισω, and first aorist in *σα, of verbs in ΐ(ΰ • as, τ/ω, τΐσω, ετίσα. I is also long in the following words, before Β ' ακρίβί^, άκρίβόω, άλ^ετρίβανος, ύλίβαπτος, Ιρνσίβη, κιβωτός, κλίβανος ΟΓ κρίβανος, στίβη,'ΐβις, Ιβνκος. Γ• μαστίγίας, όρίγανον, πνίγος, ρίγεω, ρίγηλος, ρίγος, σϊγαλόεις, σίγάω, όίγΐ, Σίγειον. J ' γλνκνσίδη, Τδίω. ίδος, κνίδη, πίδαζ, πίδνω, χελίδων, Αίδω,^ΐδα, Ίδαι- ος, Ίδάλιον, "Ιδας, Ίδοιιενενς, Πίδι'της, Πολνίδυς, Ποτίδαια, Σίδονία, Σί- δών. These are common : ΰριδαξ or -Θρίδαξ, ϋριδακίνη, οίδη. Θ' αβρίϋ[ς, αγλί&ες, βρΐ&ος, δί&νραμβος, Ι'ρί&ος, ί&ννω, ί&νς, ϊ&νω, κρί&άω, κρί&Ι^ όρνί-9 άρχος and others from όρνις, Βί&ννοΊ, Έρίΰακίς, Τϊ&ωνός. Κ ' ccTxl•, ( ίκεσία,*ίκω, κίκαμον, κϊκνς, νικάω, νίκη, φρίκη, Βερενίκη, with many other compounds of νίκη, Ίκάριος,'" Ικαρος, Κύίκος, Νικίας, Σίκανία, Σίκελία, Φίκιον, Φοινίκη, Φρίκων. In μνρίκη ι is common. Λ ' 'ίλαος, 'ίλύσκω, 'ίλασμ'ος, 'ίλύω, ίλεος, ίλη, or ίλα, ίλιγγος, ίλνος ί Τλ.ύς, κατατίλ.άω, κονίλη, μαρίλη, μνστίλ.η, νευγίλος, όμίλΐοι, ομίλος, πέδίλον, πίλέω, πίλος, σίαίλος, σμιλ.αζ or σμΐλος, σμίλη, σπατίλ.η, στρόβιλος, φίλ/,της, φίλομαι, γίλιας, χίλιοι, χίλος, -φίλος, -ψίλόω, Ίλιας,^'ϊλιος, and*' Γλιον, Ίλι- ονενς, "ΐλισσος, ~Ιλος, Μ αρίλάδης , Μίλητος, Όίλεύς, Σίληνος, Χϊλων. Μίλων is common. ΆΙ ' ατίμος, βλίμάζω, βονλίμιάω, βρίμάω, βρίμη, δρίμνς, δρίμντης, 'ίμά- τιον, 'ίμείρυι/ίμεοος, ϊίρ&ΐμος, κλ.ίμαζ, λ.ίμος, μίιιέοιιαι, μϊΊιος, πίμελ} : , όίμος, τίμύω, τίμη, τίμωρος, φίμ'ος, ψΐμόω, Βρίμω, 'Ιμέρα, Σίμαί&α, Σίιιιχίδης, Σΐμος, Τίμαγόρας, and many more of the same beginning with this last But ίμας is common. 212 PROSODY. iV* ακρο&Τνιον, γΤνωΰκω, δΤνεΰω, ελϊννω, ερϊνεος or ίρϊνος, ΰρΤναζ, Trior, ινις, χαμΤνευτι,ρ, καμϊνω, κΤνητ^ρ, κΤνυμαι, ρϊνηλατεω, χαλΐνόω, Λί'γϊνα } 3 Εχϊνάδες, ΘρΤνακία,*' Ιναχος, Ίνω, Ίνωπος, Καμαρϊνα, Λακϊνιας, ΑακΊνιον ί Μϊνως, Μνρϊνα, ΤρΤνακρία, Φϊνενς, Ήκϊναρος. Π• γρΤπεύς, διΐπετ^ς, ΙνΤπη, κνίπος, κονϊπους^ λΤπαοεω, οινοπΤπης and others in πιπης, ρΤπη, ρϊπίζω, ρΤπίς, ρίπος, σκΤπων or σκήπων, Ένϊπενς, Εύρϊπίδης, Εϋρϊπος, r Ρ~ϊπη. ~ Ιπος or ϊπος, a mousetrap, is common. Ρ' *ϊρος for ίερος, λΐρος, βοΰσΤρις, Ίρη, ~Ιρις, ~Ιρος, Κάμϊρος, ΝΤρεύς } "Οσϊρις, Σεμίραμις, Σΐρις, ΤΖρυν&ος, Τϊρννς. Σ' βρΤσάρματος, κονΤσαλος, μϊαίω, μίσος, πΐσος, σϊσνμβριον, φ&ϊσήνωρ, 'ΛγχΊσης, ' Λμνίσος, Βρϊσεύς, Ίσαΐος, *' Ισανδρος, % Ισις, ~Ισος, Κηφϊσος, Νισα, Νισος, Νίσυρος, ΠΓσα, ΠΤσίας, Σίσυφος, ΤΤσιφόνη. These are com- mon : ίσος or ίσος, ίσάζω, Πισίδαι. Τ' άδηρΤτος, άκονΤτί, άκόνΤτον, αμήνΐτος, Ίτεα, κλίτος, κλϊτΰς, λϊτος, simple, mean, παγκόνΤτος, παράσιτος, ποΧϊτεία, σίτος, σϊτοφάγος, φϊτϋο), Αμφιτρίτη, Αφροδίτη, 'Ιταλία, Ίτυμονεύς, 'Ίτυτν, ΜϊλΤτος, Σϊτάλκης ΐ Τίταν, Τϊτυρος, Τρϊτων, Τρϊτωνίς. 'Ιταλός Άηά'Ίφιτος are common. Φ * γρίφος, δϊφάω, ίφι, ϊφιος, μηχανοδϊφνς, σϊφωνίζω, στίφος, τιφος, Αΐ- φιλος, 'Ιφιας, Ίφιάνασσα, with many others beginning with Ιφι } ΣέρΤφος } Σιφαεϋς, Τίφυς. Πιφαϋσκω and σίφων are common. Χ• ΐχωρ, κΤχορα, όμΤχΐω, ταρΊχεϋω, τάρϊχος, Ψϊχάρπαξ. Υ is long in 1. Nouns in υμα } υμος, ντηρ, ντωρ, υτος, ντης } ντις, derived from verbs in υω • as, κώλυμα, ρϋμος, μηνϋτήρ, λνιωρ, κωκϋτός, δακρϋτος, μηνυτής, πρεσβΰτις. But there are some exceptions, particularly of derivatives from verbs which shorten the penul- tima of the perfect passive ; as, ϊρϋμα ) ϋ-ϋτήρ, λυτό?, δϋτός. 2. The oblique cases of nouns in vv or υς -υνος • as, Φόρχνν and Φόρκυς, Φόρκϋνος ■ Also of βόμβυξ, δοίδυξ } κήρυξ, Κήνξ, κόκκυξ, δαγύς, κώμνς, γρύψ, γύψ. Βέβρυξ -υκος, is common. 3. Diminutives in νδιον } from genitives whose last syllable is pure ; as, Ιχ&ύ-ος, Ιχ&υ-ίδιον, Ιχ&ϋδιον. 4. Verbs in νκω 1 υνω } νρω, νχω • as, έρϋκω } Ι&ϋνω, κϋρω, βρϋχω. 5. The first future in νσω } and first aorist in υσα, of verbs in νω ' as, φύω, φϋσω, εφϋσα • But with some exceptions ; as, κΰω, κϋσω, εκϋσα, 6. The first and third singular and third plural present active of polysyllables in υμν • as, δείκνΰμν, δεικνΰσι • and in dissyllables throughout. 1" is also long in the following words, before Β' ήμιτΰβιον,'ΰβός. Γ' άμαρϋγη, &ρνγανάω } Ιϋγη, λ,νγαιος, μΰγαλε'η, 6λολΰγη } όλολϋ/ών, πνγί], QUANTITY. 213 τρϋγητίρ, τρύγων, φρΰγανον, φρυγω, Γϋγαίη λίμνη, Λαιστρϋγών. Γνγης IS common. Λ' βοτρϋδον, Ιρικϋδί,ς, κϋδαίνω, κϋδάλιμος, κύδος, μϋδαίνω, μϋδαλέος, )Όδον } "Λβϋδος 1 Θουκυδίδης, Λα ρεκϋδης. In ιίδωρ υ is common. ώρυδον,*Λβϋδος, Θουκυδίδης, Λακυδης, Λυδη, Λυδία, Λυδος, Τυδεύς, Φε- Ιη ν'δωρ υ Θ• Ιρϋβιάω, μυ&έομαι, μυ&ολογενω, μϋ&ος, πϋ&εδών, πΰ&ω, ψαίνυ&ος, ψιμϋ&ιον, Πυθαγόρας, Πυ&ω, Πϋδών. Κ ' ερίμϋκος, Ιρΰκάκω and ϊρϋκάνω, καρΰκη, κηρυκεχ'ω, μϋκάω, μνκη, σαμβΰκη, σϋκάμινος, σύκον, συκοφάντης, φϋχίς, φύκος. Κώρυκος is long in Dionys. Perieg. 855., but elsewhere it is alwaj^s short. Λ • οίΟΰλος, εμφΰλος, &ϋλακις, αύλακος, κένδϋλα, κΰβϋλις, μϋλιάω, σκΰ- λενω, σκύλον, στύλος, συλάω, σφοιδϋλη, τϋλη, Γ ϋλη, φύλον, φΰλοπις, χϋλος, Λϊγυλα, *' Λζϋλος, ' Εριφύλη, Κρεώφϋλος, Παμφϋλιοι, Πάμφΰλος, 'Ύλαιος, 'Ύλακίδης, 'Ύλη, Φϋλας, Φϋλενς, Φυλώ. Μ. ' α9νμος, άκΰμων, άμΰμων, άτρΰμων, δρυμός, ίπιΰΰμέω, ζνμη, δϋμαρέω, ■&ϋμιάω, -θυμός, •&ϋμόω, κρϋμός, κυμαίνω, λϋμαίνω, λΰμη, προθυμία, ρϋμη, 'ϋμεις,^ΰμέτερος, ''ΰμος, Λίσϋμη, 'Λμϋμωνη, Λΰμη, Κΰμη, Κϋμοδύκη, Κϋ- μο&όη, Στρϋμών, Στρϋμόδωρος, '"ϊμήν. In νώνυμος the penultima is common. Λ 7 "" βϋνέω, εύ&ΰνη, &ΰνέω, κίνδυνος, μννη, ζϋνος, ξϋνόω, ορκΰνος, σίγϋνος, Οτη&υνιον, τϋνη Dor. for σύ, υπεύθυνος, φρϋνη, φρϋνος, χελΰνη, Βι&ΰνοί, Γορτϋνις, Λίκτϋνα, ΘΌνη, Κύνος, 31αριανδΰνοί, Φρύνιχος. These are common : κορννη, λάγννος, σιγννη, τορννη, Πάχννος. Π• γ'ρΰπος, κΰπόω, λΰπέω, λϋπη, τανΰπονς, τρϋπατοψ, τρυπάω, 'Ρνπαιον. Ρ* αγκΰρα, αλιμϋρης, βοντΰρον, γέφυρα, γύρος, round, curved, γϋρος, a circle, γϋρόω, ισχυρός, κολλΰρα, κύρος, κϋρόω, λάφϋρον, λέπϋρον, μϋραινα, μϋρι'ας, μϋρίος, οϊζϋρός, ολϋρα, πάπυρος, πίτΰρον, πλημμύρα, πΰραμις, πϋρος, σϋριγξ, σϋρίζω, σφύρα, a hammer, τϋρος, τΰρόω, φΰράω, Τϋραί, Θεμίσκϋρα, Κέρκυρα, Νίσυρος, ΙΓϋραίχμης, Πϋραμος, ΪΙΰρασος, Πΰρηναΐον ορός, Πϋριλάμπης, Σκύρος, Τϋρώ. But πλημμνρίς and Κυρηνη are common. Σ ' βονλΰσιος, -d -αλνσια, λΰσίζωνος, λΰσιμελ^ς, λϋσιτελέω, οψαρτϋσία, ρϋσιάζω, ρϋσίδιφρος, ρΰσιον, ρϋσός, τρΰσίβιος, φύσα, φυσάω, φϋσιάω, φϋαί- ζοος, χρυσός, χρϋσόω, 3 Άμφρϋσος, Διόνυσος, Καμβύσης, Λύσανδρος, Λϋσιά- νασσα, Λυσίμαχος, Λύσιππος, Μϋσίς, Μϋσοί, Νύαα. Τ' ατρϋτώνη, άϋτέω, αϋτη, βουλϋτος, βρντον, γωρντος, πρεσβϋτιχος, πϋ τ ιν αΐο ς, ρ ϋ τα, the reins, a bridle, ρϋτη, σκϋτενς, σκϋτος, τρϋτάνη, φϋτα- λια, φϋτάω, Αρχύτας, Βηρυτός, Κωκϋτος, Πιδΰτης. Φ' είλϋφάζω, κέλυφος, κϋφος, κϋφων, στϋφω, σύφαρ,τΰφεδανος ) τϋφηρης ί τύφος, τνφω, τϋφών and τϋφώς. Χ• βρϋχάομαι, βρνχη, έμψυχος, Ιριβρϋχης, σάμψϋχον, τρνχος, τρνχόω, ψϋχη, ψύχος. 214 PROSODY. THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FINAL SYLLABLES. V. The doubtful vowels in the end of a word are short. Exceptions, A is long in 1. Nouns in δα, ρα, εα, ια, oa, and polysyllables in aia • as, Λήδα, χώρα, λύρα, \τέα, φιλία, στοά, έλαια • with Άίαυσικάα, Κισ- σαί&α, Σιμαί&ά, Τροία, and the adverbs λά&ρά, πέρα. But the following are short : verbals in τρία, as ψάλτρια• some proper names of more than two syllables in aia, as, Πλάταιά, 'Ρηναϊά' and nouns in ρα preceded by a diphthong, a long v, or ρ ρ, as, πείρα, γέφυρα, Πυρρά, with σκολόπενδρά, τάναγρά, except αϋρα, λαύρα, παλαίστρα, πλευρά, φρουρά, Αϊ'θ~ρα, Φαίδρα, 2. Duals of the first declension ; as, μούσα. 3. Feminine adjectives in « pure and ρα, from masculines in ος • as, δικαία, ημετέρα • Except δΐα, IU, μία, πότνιά. 4. Nouns in εια, if of two syllables, or from verbs in ευω • as, χρεία, δουλεία from δουλεύω. 5. Accusatives in εα from nouns in ευς • as, Ώηλέα from Πηλεύς. 6. Vocatives from proper names in ας • as, Αΐνεία, Παλλα. 7. Words in α Doric for η or ου • as, φάμα for φήμη, ΑΙνεία for Αίνειου • But those in a iEolic are short ; as, νύμφά φίλη, Horn. I is long in 1. The demonstrative additions of the Attics ; as, ταυτϊ, δευρΤ, ούτοσϊ, νυνί. 2. The names of letters ; as, ξι, ψϊ • with κρΐ. Υ is long in 1. The imperfect and second aorist of verbs in νμι• as, ϊδϋ. 2, The names of letters ; as, μϋ, νΰ • with γρύ • S is common. VI. Av, ccq, ιν, ις, w, νς, in the end of a word, are short. Exceptions. Av is long in 1. Masculines in av • as, Tixav • with nav t whose com- pounds are short, as, σύμπαν. QUANTITY. 215 2. Accusatives of the first declension, whose nominatives are long ; as, ΛΙνεΙαν, φιλίαΡ. 3. The adverbs άγαν, εϋαν, Uav, πέραν. Aq is long in Kag and ψαρ • γάρ is common. Iv is long in 1. Nouns in tv -ινος • as, ρηγμτν. 2. Words of two terminations ; as, δελφτν and δελφϊς, 3. Ίίμϊν and ύμΐν, when circumflexed. Ις is long in 1. Monosyllables; as, κτς • but τΧς is short. 2. Words of two terminations ; as, άκττς and άκττν. 3. Nouns in /c increasing long; as, κνημτς, μέρμϊς } πλοκαμτς. Yv is long in 1. Nouns in w -ννος • as, μόσνν. 2. Words of two terminations; as, Φόρκνν and Φόρκνς. 3. Accusatives in w from long nominatives in vg • as, ίλΰί'. 4. The imperfect and second aorist of verbs in νμν as, έδείκνυν ■ with i'Cv, but ^ΰν enclitic is short. Γς is long in 1. Monosyllables ; as, μνς • with κώμϋς. 2. Words of two terminations; as, Φόρκϋν and Φ6ξ>κϋ?. 3. Nouns accented on the last syllable, and declined in og pure ; as, Ιλνς • But some of them are common, as Ιχ&ΰς. 4. The second person singular, as also participles, of verbs in νμι • as, εδείκννς, δει,κννς. VII. Ας and vq final are long. Exceptions. Ας is short in 1 . Nouns increasing ; as, σέλας • except those in avog and ιχντος • as, τάλΰς, Βίας. 2. Accusatives plural of the third declension ; as, Τιτάνας • Likewise of the first in Doric ; as, τέχνάς εγείρει, Theocr. 3. Second persons singular of the first aorist active, and of the perfect active and middle ; as, ετυψάς τέτυφάς } τέτυπας. 4. Adverbs in ac, as, άτρέμας. H VIII The last syllable of every verse is common. 21G PROSODY. THE QUANTITY OF DERIVATIVE AND COM- POUND WORDS. I. Derivatives. tX. Derivatives follow the quantity of their primi tives; as, εκρϊνον, κρίνομαι, έκρϊνόμην, from κρίνω • κέκρϊκα, κέκρϊμαι, έκρϊ&ΐ]ν } from κρίνω • τέτντια from εινηον • κρίμα, κρΧσις, κρΧτος, from κέκρϊμαι, -σαι, -ται • τρΧβτ), τρΧβος, τριβών, from ετρΧβον, the second aorist of τρτβω. Exc. 1. In verbs of the fourth conjugation, the first aorist lengthens the short penultima of the first future ; as, εκρίνα. In verbs of the first and second conjugation, the penultima of the perfect is short, if the vowel in the penultima of the first future be long merely on account of the ψ or ξ following ; as, τέινφα, from τύψω. In some verbs also of the third conju- gation, the long vowel in the penultima of the first future is shortened in the perfect passive ; as, λέλνμαι from Ιΰσω. Exc. 2. In some verbs which are long in the penultima of the present, the perfect middle lengthens the short penultima of the second aorist active ; as, αγω, to break, εάγον, Μγα • κράζω, εκραγον, κεκραγα • πράσσω, επραγον, πέπραγα • βρί&ω, ϊβρΧ&ον, βέβρί&α • κρίζω, εκρΧγον, κέκρΊγα' ριγέω, ερρΧγον ί ερρΤγα- τρίζω, ετρΧγον, τ^τξ)Ι^« • φρίσσω, εφρΧκον, πέφρίκα • μυκάω, εμυκον, μέμνκα. Obs. A short doubtful vowel at the beginning of a verb becomes long in the augmented tenses ; as, 'Χκάνω, "τκανον. 2. Compounds. X. Compounds follow the quantity of the simple words which compose them ; as, πρό&ϋμος from &νμός • εντΤμος from τΤ«τ] • απύρος from πυρ, πυρός • παλιντρΧβτ]ς from ετρΧβον, the second aorist οΐ τρίβω• δυσπράγέω from πέπραγα, the perfect middle of πράσσω. Obs. The inseparable particles a privative, αρι, ερι, βρι, δυς,. ζα are short ; as, άτιμος, έρΧκυδψ, δύσελπις • Unless a be made long for the sake of measure before two short syllables ; as, α&άνατος - or before a consonant which may be supposed to have been doubled in pronunciation ; as, άληκτος, as if άλληκτος. VERSE. 217 VERSE. A verse is a certain number of long and short syllables dis- posed according to rule. Verses are divided into parts of two, three, or four syllables, called feet, of which the following are the most common. The Spondee, consisting of two long ; as, δούλους. Trochee, a long and a short ; as, δούλος. Iambus, a short and a long; as, λόγους. Pyrrhic, two short ; as, λόγος. Dactyle, a long and two short ; as, τύπτετε. Anapest, two short and a long; as, λέγεται,. Tribrachys, three short; as, λέγετε. When a single syllable is taken by itself, it is called a ccesura, which is commonly a long syllable. SCANNING. The measuring of verse, or the resolving of it into the several feet of which it is composed, is called scanning. When a verse has just the number of feet requisite, it is called versus acatalectus, or acatalecticus, an acatalectic verse : If a syllable be want- ing, it is called catalecticus ; if a foot, brachycatalecticus : If there be a syllable or foot too much, hyper catalecticus, or hypermeter. Frequently two vowels meeting together in different syllables are pronounced in scanning as one syllable, which is called synizesis, or synecphonesis ; as, Πηληϊάδεω 'Άχιλψς, Horn. ; χρύσεον σκψιτρον έχοντα, Id. ; ^ώ ούκ εμελλον, Soph. ; $) ούκ ένόησεν, Horn. In these examples, Πηληϊάδεω is pronounced as five syllables ; χρύσεον, as also εγώ ούκ, as two syllables ; and *) ούκ, as a monosyllable : thus, Πηληϊάδω, έγώύκ. DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. I. Hexameter. The hexameter or heroic verse consists of six feet. Of these the fifth is a dactyle, and the sixth a spondee ; all the rest may be either dactyles or spondees ; as, — vy v/ J — — I — v/ w|- — J — %j \j t — — κέκλυτέ μεν πάν-τες τε -fo-oi πα-σαί τε ΰέ-αιναν, Horn. A spondee is often admitted in the fifth place, whence the verse is called spondaic ; as, — — J — v/vy|— v_/\_/|— v/\y| "Εκτωρ δε ττροσέ-είΐτεν ά-μύμονα Πηλεί-ωνα, Horn. 19 218 PROSODY. What deserves particular attention in scanning hexameter verse is the ccesura. Caesura is when after a foot is completed, there remains a syllable in a word to begin a new foot. It is called triemimeris , penthemimeris, hephthemimeris , or enneemimeris, according as it falls on the third, fifth, seventh, or ninth half-foot of the hexameter verse in which it is found. All these different species of it sometimes occur in the same verse ; as, — v/vy| — "~| — ^ U — C\> |— v> \j I — — αύτάρ i -μοΐ πνοί-ην Ζεφύ-ρου προέ-ηκεν a~r\vav, Hom. But the most common and beautiful caesura is the pen- themim ; on which some lay a particular accent or stress of the voice in reading a hexameter verse thus composed, whence they call it the ccesural pause ; as, μψνν άειδε -^ε-ά, Πηληϊάδεω ^Λχιΐψς, Horn. When the caesura falls on a syllable naturally short, it ren- ders it long ; as, άγχοϋ δ' Ιστάμενος ετιεα τττερόεντα προσηύδα, Horn. II. Pentameter. The pentameter verse consists of five feet. Of these the two first are either dactyles or spondees ; the third, always a spondee ; and the fourth and fifth, anapests ; as, — V/ V> I — — I — — Jv> \J J \J \j> — πάντες δ-σονς -&νΐ]-τούς ψελιος κα&ορα, Solon. But this verse is more properly divided into two hemistichs or halves ; the former of which consists of two feet, either dactyles or spondees, and a caesura ; the latter, always of two dactyles and another caesura ; thus, πάντες ο-σονς -ΰνη-τούς ή^λί -og xa&o-Qa. III. Iambic. The iambic, trochaic, and anapestic verse, is measured by metres or pairs of feet, and is therefore called dimeter when consisting of four feet, and trimeter when consisting of six feet. On the other hand, the Latin names quaternarius and senarius refer to the number of feet. The iambic verse, which is most usually trimeter acatalectic, consisted originally of iambic feet only, but afterwards ad- VERSE. 219 mitted a tribrachys, spondee, dactyle, or anapest, in the odd places, that is, in the first, third, and fifth ; and a tribrachys, or sometimes an anapest, in the even places, that is, in the second and fourth, for the last foot must always be an iambus ; thus, -H- -II- -I - -II - -μ- ούχ ϊ-στιν οΰ-τω μώ -gog ος &ανεΐν έρά , Soph. - -| „ J «η- „4> -ιι μ- άλλ' ί) παραφρο-νεΐς έτε -dv^ ή χορυβαν-τιας, Aristoph. The tetrameter catalectic is also very common in the comic writers, and admits nearly the same variations as the senarius ; thus, _ - 1 ^ hi - - 1 —ιι -•_| „ -β ;- |- άλλ' ώς τάχι-στα προς πόλιν σπεύσω-μεν, ώ Φιλονρ-γε } Aristoph. IV. Trochaic. The most common trochaic verse is the tetrameter catalec- tic, consisting of seven trochees and a syllable, but admitting a tribrachys in the first, third, fifth, and seventh places ; and a tribrachys, spondee, or anapest, in the second, fourth, and sixth ; as, - „[- -|t-v| - -II - -I --II - -I - %v τε τοΐς "Ελ-Ιησυ και τοΐς βαρβά-ροισι παντα-χον } Aristoph. - υ| υ υ »_»|| — \>\ — — \\ \j \j c»| %J \j — 1| — \j | — κάμε παρεκά-λεις } τι δράσω ; τίνα δε πόρον εΰ-ρω πο-&έν ; Eurip. A dactyle of proper names is admitted in the first, second, third, fifth, and sixth places. V. Anapestic. The anapestic verse properly consists of anapests only, but admits a dactyle or spondee in all the places, though an ana- pest rarely follows a dactyle, on account of the concurrence of short syllables which would be thereby produced. The most common is the dimeter acatalectic ; as, « υ — | \j \j — 1| — \j o| — — οπόταν δνοφερά ννξ ύπο-λειφ&ή, Soph. The dimeter catalectic, called a paramiac, of which the third foot must be an anapest, closes a series of anapestic verses : as, \\j \j σί> δ 1 έμών ιιύ&ων έπάκου-σον, Soph. 220 PROSODY. The monometer acatalectic, called a base, for the most part precedes the paroemiac ; as, w w — J — — τα. γάρ έξ ήμων, ν ν 7 I" HI « ν - 1 - κα&αρως ϊσται βασιλεν-σνν, Eurip. The tetrameter catalectic is also frequently used by the comic writers ; as, ww — | || - - | w v- || |w w - Jj uw - 1 - διά τ\ν χρείαν, καΐ τήν πενίαν } ζητεΧν όπό&εν βίον εξ-ει, Aristoph. ww — J w w — II — w v|— — ||w w — I wv — IJvr w — Ι — ότι δει-λότατον τοντον k -ώρων, ελαφοι διά τοντ' έγένον-το } Aristoph. VI. Anacreontic. The Anacreontic verse is iambic dimeter catalectic, consist- ing of an iambus or spondee, two iambuses, and a syllable; as, ό ταν-ρος ού-τος, ώ 7tai f - -| „ -|| „ -| - Ζευς μον δοκεΐ τις εΐ-ναι, Anacr. Another kind of Anacreontic verse differs from the above by having an anapest in the first place ; as, w ο Η w- n ν -I - μεσονν-κτίοις nod''' ω-ραις, Anacr. But this last verse is also divided into a pyrrhic, two tro- chees, and a spondee ; thus, w ν] — H~ **■■ Ι — ~~ μεσο-νυκτί-οις 7T0&* ωραις. VII. SrAPPHIC AND ΑϋΟΝΙΑΝ. The Sapphic verse consists of five feet, a trochee, a spondee or a trochee, a dactyle, and two trochees ; as, - Π - - 1 - w π - Η- ° φαίνε-ταΐ μον κψος ΐ-σος d -ε-οΐσον, Sappho. An Adonian verse consists only of a dactyle and a spondee; — w «J — — δή σε κά-λημι } Sappho. ACCENTS. ACCENTS. 221 I. There are three accents, tne acute ('), the grave ( v ), and the circumflex (~), one of which must stand on some syllable of every word. Exc. The ten words 6, ή, οί, at, εϊ, είς, έν, έκ (or έξ), ού (οΰκ or ου/), ώ;, called atonies, have no accent : Unless they stand at the end of a sentence, or after a word to which they are naturally prefixed ; as, ηώς γάρ οϋ ; &εός ως, κακών εξ ■ or unless they precede an enclitic ; as, εϊ τις. Obs. An enclitic is a word which throws its accent on the last syllable of the preceding word, in which case alone can a word have more than one accent ; as, άν&ρωηος, but άνϋ-ρω- πός τις. II. The acute stands on one of the three last syllables ; the grave, on the last only ; and the circumflex on one of the two last. Obs. 1. The acute on final syllables is changed into the grave, when other words follow in connection, and in no other case is the grave expressed ; but when such final syllables are followed by an enclitic, or by any stop besides the comma (and, according to some, even by the comma), they retain the acute ; as, άγα&ος άνηρ έστι κοινον άγα&όν. Obs. 2. Words acuted on the last syllable are called by the Greek grammarians oxytona; on the penultima, paroxytona ; and on the antepenultima, pr op ar oxytona; ■Ά^,ϋ-εός,τετνμμένος, άγγελος. Those circumflexed on the last syllable are called perispomena ; and on the penultima, properispomena ; as, φ^λώ, σώμα. AH words which have no accent expressed on the last syllable are called barytona ; as, τνπτω, οίκος, S -έαμα • and hence the barytona comprehend the paroxytona, pro- paroxytona, and properispomena. III. The acute and the grave stand on long and short syllables ; the circumflex only on syllables long by nature ; as, δεντερος, χρυσός, ρήμα, Obs. Hence it appears that the « in μαλλον } πραξις, is long of itself, and not merely by position, as in άλλον, τάξις, 19* 222 ACCENTS. IV. The acute can stand on the antepenultima, and the circumflex on the penultima, only when the last syllable is short by nature ; as, ανύςωπος, but άνόρώπον • μονοα, but μονοης. Exc. The ω in the Ionic genitive in εω of the first declen- sion, and in the Attic terminations ως, ων, of the second and third declensions, as also in the compounds of γέλως, έρως, and κέρας, admits an acute on the antepenultima; as, δεσπότεω, άνώγεων, πόλεως from πόλις, φιλόγελως, χρυσόκερως. Obs. The terminations on and ov are considered as short in accentuation ; as, τΰπτομαι, αν&ρωποι, μονσαι. Except opta- tives ; as, φίλησαν, τετύφοο • and the adverb οϊκοι, at home, to distinguish it from οίκοι, houses. V. If the last syllable be short by nature, and the penultima long by nature and accented, the accent must be the circumflex ; as, χς>ήμα, τείχος, ψνχος. Obs. 1. This rule shows that the last syllable is short by nature in αύλαξ, πϊδαξ, and others increasing short, and long by nature in S -ώραξ, κήρυξ, and the like. Obs. 2. This rule does not apply to those cases where an enclitic forms a part of the word ; as, οίίτθ, ωσπερ, ψις • nor, according to the best critics, to those where a short syllable is made long by synaloepha ; as, κω'ψον for καΐ οψον. VI. Oxytons of the first and second declension cir- cumflex the last syllable of the genitives and datives ; as, S. τιμή, τιμής, τιμτ\, τιμήν, τιμή. D. τιμά, τιμαϊν. Ρ. τιμαι, τιμών, τιμαϊς, τιμάς, τιμαί. Exc. Attic oxytons of the second declension retain the acute in the genitive singular ; as, λεώς, λεώ. VII. Nouns of the first declension always cir- cumflex the last syllable of the genitive plural, whatever be the place of the accent in the other cases ; as, μονοαι, μονοών • ζχιδναι, έχιδνών. Exc. The feminine of baryton adjectives in ος accents the penultima of the genitive plural ; as, ξένη, ξένων • άγια, άγιων Likewise άφύη, Ιτησίαι, χλούνης, χρήστης. ACCENTS. 223 VIII. Monosyllables of the third declension ac- cent the last syllable of the genitives and datives, and the penultima of the other cases ; as, S. χειρ, χειρός, χειψ, %εϊρα. D• χεϊ$ε, χειροϊν. P. χείρες, χειλών, χεροί, χείρας. Exc. Participles and τις interrogative are accented on the penultima in the genitives and datives, as well as in the other cases; as, &εΙς, χτέντος, &έντα • ών, ΰντος. Likewise δας, δμώς, &ώς, κράς, λάς, παις, Τρως, φώς, a pustule, φώς, light, in the genitive plural ; ούς in the genitive dual and plural ; and πάς in the genitive and dative, dual and plural ; as, δάδων } δμώων. IX. Dissyllable and polysyllable nouns of the third declension retain the accent throughout upon the syllable on which . it stands in the nominative, when not prevented by the nature of the final syl lable; as, έλπϊς, ελπίδος' κόραξ, κόρακος, but κοράκων. Exc. 1. Λημήτηρ, εΐνάτηρ, &υγάτηρ, μήτηρ, are accented on the penultima in all the cases and numbers, except the three first in the vocative singular; as, Ό•υγατέρος ) ϋυγατέρι, θυ- γατέρα. Exc. 2. The following nouns throw the accent back as far as possible in the vocative singular, in which tlie last syllable of the nominative is shortened : άνήρ, γαστήρ, δαήρ, Λημψηρ, εΐνάτηρ, ϋ-υγάτηρ, πατήρ, σωτήρα Λ γ αμέμνων ,* Απόλλων , Ποσειδών y proper names in ης, and some other words ; as, άνερ, S -ύγατερ, "Λπολλον, Σωκρατες, βέλτιον, ενδαιμον, αϋταρκες. Likewise γυνή makes γύναι. Obs. Nouns which suffer syncope conform in some measure to the analogy of monosyllables ; as, κύων } κυνός, κυνί, κύνα • πατήρ, πατρός' as does also γυνή • as, γυναικός, γυναικί, γυναίκα. But the dative plural in ασι accents the penultima ; as, πατρά- σι. In the syncopated cases of ϋυγάτηρ, the accent is thrown upon the antepenultima of the nominative, accusative, and vocative ; as, \ϊύγατρα } &ύγατρε, χτύγατρες, χϊύγατρας. (See page 26.) X. A contracted syllable is circumflexed, when the former of the two syllables from which it re- 224 ACCENTS. suits is acuted; otherwise it remains as it was be- fore ; as, ψίλέω, φιλώ ■ ψίλεονοί, φιλονοι, ■ but (ρίλεε, cpilu • έοταώς, έστως. Exc. 1. In words compounded with nouns in οος, ους, the contracted syllable is not circumflexed ; as, άνόου, ανου, from άνοος, άνονς. So ά-θ-ρόος makes α&ςους. Also the accusative of feminine contracts in ω and ως of the third declension re tains the acute ; as, αΐδόα, αΙδώ. Exc. 2. Adjectives in εος } having an acute on the ante- penultima, circumflex the last syllable after contraction ; as, χρνσεος, χρυσούς. Also κάνεον when contracted becomes κανονν. XI. When prepositions are placed after their cases, or put instead of verbs compounded with them, they throw back the accent upon the penul- tima ; as, ειρήνης περί, έπι for επεοτι. Exc. "Ανά and διά retain the accent on the last syllable when placed after their cases, to distinguish them from &va t the vocative of αναξ-, and Λία } the accusative of Ζευς. XII. When oxytons lose their final accented vowel, the accent is thrown back upon the penul- tima ; as, δείν επη, for δεινά • πόλΧ εχω, for πολλά. Exc. Prepositions and the conjunction άλλα lose the accent with the final vowel ; as, nag" έμοϋ } άλλ" &γε. Obs. On the contrary, when verbs lose their initial accented syllable, the following syllable, if short, receives the acute, if long by nature, the circumflex, as, εβαν, βάν • ε&ηκε, &ψε. XIII. Compounds in ος of perfects middle with nouns, accent the penultima when their significa- tion is active, and the antepenultima when passive ; as, πρωτότοκος, that brings forth for the first time; πρωτότοκος, the first-born ; λαοτρόψος, feeding the people ; λαότροφος, fed by the people. Obs. If they are compounded with a preposition, they draw back the accent to the antepenultima ; as, κατάλογος ACCENTS. 225 XIV. Nouns compounded with α, εν, δνς, νπό, δι, throw the accent back as far as the last syllable will permit ; as, σοφός, αοοφος • παις, ενπαις • &νμός, δνσύνμος • έρνύρός, νπέρνύρος • λόγος, δίλογος. In like manner αντίχριστος, σννδονλος. περίεργος, κατάσκοπος, &c. To these may be added the compounds of two nouns ; as, φιλόσο- φος, δήμαρχος. Exc. Most adjectives in ης of the third declension, verbals in η, and many other compounds which cannot be reduced to particular rules, have the accent on the last syllable ; as, άψευδής, δυστυχής, περικαλλής, επιγραφή, σιτοποιός, παιδαγωγός, όβριμοεργός, άρχιπειρατής. Obs. The accent is likewise on the last syllable of verbals in τος, adjectives in ικος, diminutives, patronymics, and other derivative substantives in ις, as also of substantives in μος from the perfect passive ; as, ποιητός, -ηγεμονικός, νησίς Αητωΐς, βασιλίς, σπασμός. But compounds in τος draw back the ac- cent ; as, αόρατος • except those which are derived merely from a compound verb ; as, εκλεκτός. Verbals in τεος always accent the penultima ; as, γραπτέος, γραπτέα, γραπτίον. XV. Verbs generally throw the accent back as far as possible, but those of one or two syllables compounded with prepositions for the most part throw the accent upon the preposition ; as, τνπτω, τνπτομεν * ετνπτον, έτνπτομεν • τέτνφε, τετνφέτω • ες, αφες • &ες, κατάύες • δός, άπόδος • φεύγε, από- φευγε. Exc. 1. The temporal augment retains the accent ; as, άνάπτω, άνηπτον προσέχω, προσείχον. So κα&ενδον and καϋ-ην- δον or έκά&ευδον • κα&ψο or έκά-&ητο. Also the syllabic aug- ment ; as, Ισχον, προσέσχον. Exc. 2. The second aorist accents the last syllable of the infinitive and participle active and of the imperative middle, and the penultima of the infinitive middle; as, τυπεΐν, τυπών, τύπου, τυπέσϋ-αι. Also the last syllable of the imperatives είπε, έλ&ε, εύρε, ίδε, λαβε, to distinguish them from the second aorist in- dicative. But the second person singular only of the imperative 226 ACCENTS. middle has the accent on the last syllable, the other persons and numbers throwing it back as far as it will go ; as, τνπέσ-ίτω, τύπεσ&ε • as do also άφίκον } έπιλάχΤου, προσγένου, τράπου, even m the second person singular. Exc. 3. The second future active, the first and second aorist subjunctive passive, and the subjunctive of verbs in μι, are circumflexed on the last syllable.; as, τνπώ, τνφ&ώ, ίστώ. So the first future active of the fourth conjugation, as, σπερω, which, as also the second future, retains the circumflex on the same syllable through all the modes and participles of the active and middle voices, where the nature of the final syllable does not prevent; as, σπεροΐμι, σπερεϊν, σπερων } σπερονμαι, σπεροίμην, -οίο, -οϊτο, &c. The accent remains on the same syllable through all the persons and numbers ; as, τνπώ, τυπεΐς, τνπεϊ, τυποΰμεν, &,c. ; which is likewise the case in the present and second aorist optative, passive and middle, of verbs in μι • as, Ισταίμην, -αΐο, -αΐτο, -αίμε&ον, &,c. Exc. 4. All infinitives in vcu, with those of the first aorist active and perfect passive, are accented on the Denultima ; as, τετνφέναι, τνφ&ηναι, Ιστάναι, διδόναι, τνψαν, φιλήσαι, τετύφ&αι, ττεφιλησ&αι • Except the old or Doric infinitive in μεναι • as, έλ&έμεναι, διαβ-ήμεναι. Exc. 5. All participles in ως and εις, as also the participles active of verbs in μι, are accented on the last syllable, and the participle perfect passive on the penultima ; as, τετυφώς, τυ- φ&είς, ίστάς, τίχτείς, διδονς, δεικνύς, τετνμμένος. Exc. 6. Participles have the accent on the same syllable in the neuter as in the masculine ; as, φυλάττων, φνλάττον • τιμή- σων, τιμτ\σον. ENCLITICS. The following are enclitics. 1. The pronouns μου, μοί, με, σον, σοΙ, σε, οϊ>, οΐ, S, μΙν } vlv, σφέων, σφίσι, σφέας, σφε, with the indefinite τΙς, τϊ, through all its cases, as well as τον, τω, for τινός, τινί. 2. The verbs είμϊ, and φημί in the present indica- tive, except in the second person singular. 3. The adverbs tit], ποί, πού, πώ, πώς, ποχτί, πο&εν 1 ποτέ, which are distin- guished only by their enclitic accent from the corresponding interrogatives. 4. The conjunctions γε, τε, κε or κεν, &ήν 9 νν or ννν, περ, ρά, τοί, with the inseparable particle δε, as, δδε, τοϊόσδε } δόμονδε. ACCENTS. 227 XVI. Enclitics throw their accent as an acute on the last syllable of the preceding word, if that word have an acute on the antepenultima, or a circumflex on the penultima; as, ανύςωπός έοτι, σώμα μου. Exc. When the last syllable of the preceding word ends with a double consonant, the enclitic retains its accent ; as, όμηλιξ έσιί. XVII. Enclitics lose their accent after oxytons, which then resume the acute accent, and after words which have a circumflex on the last syllable ; as, άνήο τις, γυναικών τίνων. XVIII. Enclitic monosyllables lose their accent after words which have an acute on the penultima, but dissyllables retain it ; as, λόγος μου, λόγος εστί. XIX. If several enclitics succeed each other, the preceding always takes the accent of the following, so that the last only is unaccented ; as, u τις τινά ψηαί μοι. Obs. 1. Enclitics retain their accent in the beginning of a clause, as, σοΙ δώσο), and when they are emphatical, as, άλλ* ή ρίζα σε, Rom. xi. 18. Also the pronouns retain their accent after prepositions, and after ένεκα or $), as, παρά σφίσιν, ένεκα σον. Obs. 2. When εστί begins a sentence, is emphatical, or follows άλλ', εΐ, καί, ούχ, ώς, or τοϋτ\ its first syllable is ac- cented ; as, ούχ εστι>. DIALECTS. Ancient Greece, with its dependencies, comprehended, besides the different districts in Europe, part of Asia, and several islands in the Mediterranean. In these several coun- tries the inhabitants, besides the common language, had different dialects, of which four were principal, viz. the Attic, Ionic, Doric, and JEolic ; the last comprehending the Boeotic. The poetic style admitted all the dialects, and had certain peculiarities of its own. ATTIC DIALECT. The Attic dialect was the most refined, and peculiar to Athens and its neighborhood. It is admitted by the poets and writers in the Ionic and Doric dialects. PROPERTIES. I. Contraction. 1. Of syllables in the same word ; as, «a i ae ) into a. See Obs. 19, pa aat, \ εοα, > V 10. r t ai ) αει V 9. uo ω 11. αω ω 19. -ι; 4. 6. £« 6. 20. εε εο \ 6. 20. 7 ηο \ ου 11. 00 ) εω ω 5. To this dialect properly belong all contract nouns and verbs. ATTIC DIALECT. 229 2. Of syllables in different words by synalcepha, of whicn there are six species ; viz. r apocope, as τό αργύρων του ανδρός τω άγα&ω του ημετέρου τάργύρων. τάνδρός. τάγα&ω. ^ημετέρου. >-, ττ { ήμερα ■&ημέρα. Xi aphaeresis, as ή άγχουσα ηγχουσα. c3 τά ϊργα τάργα. α, 8 τω άντρω > Attic • τώντρω. *e3 οδ ένεκα ουνεκα. β synaeresis, as τό ίμάτων &οιμάτιον. Til crasis, as τό ελάχιστον τουλάχιστον. apocope and ) / as synaeresis, ) έμοί ύποδύνει έμούποδύνει, apocope and ) k crasis, J ί οί έμοί \ του άλγεος j ί ούμοί. , ( τωλγεος. Contractions of the article, the pronoun έγώ, the conjunction xal, and the preposition πρό. Article. ό > andj ol < >.<2 Ol I" 2 , δ άνεμος οί άρνες ό έμός ό ολυμπος οί έμοί οϊ έμοί ό οΐκότριψ τό ήμισυ τό οίκίδιον τό άλλο τό εμφανές τό όνομα του άπόλλωνος του ετέρου r ωνεμος. ωρνες. ούμός. ουλυμπο^, ούμοί. ούμοί. φκότριψ. &ωμισυ. τωκίδιον. τοϋλλο. τούμφανές τοϋνομα. τώπόλλωνος. &ατέρου. 1 Τ before ε makes sometimes < α 2 See Article in the Ionic dialect. ο έτερος, ατερος. 6 ελαφος, ωλαψος. 20 230 DIALECTS. *Εγώ. έγώ ο7δα ^ ^ έγωδα. έγώ όϊμαν (κ..• \ έγωμαι. μοϊ έδόκει ( AttlC 1 μούδόχει. μοί ϊχρησεν ) C μοϋχρησεν. Before < > into ο οι [V ι- Καί. ί καί άν ' \ καί είτα κα καΐ έγώ κτ] καΐ έν ί καΐ ΰνον 1 \ καΐ οΐνον κΐ] καΐ ημην • Attic (κάν? κο?τα. κάγώ. ί κτ,ν, κωνον. κωνον. ^ κτ^μην. Before an aspirate κ is changed into χ • as, καί ό \ καΐ ή \ Attic καί ή άγχουσα ) \ χτίγχουσα. Ιχτϊϊ Before ω, ου } Πρό. προώφειλες, πρσύφειλες προαυδαν > πρωυδαν. II. Change of letter or syllable ; as, into ι- ft as γλήχων, βλήχωρ. r, — t*M*S, μόγις. ρ, — κλίβανος, κρίβανος. σ } — πέφαμμαι, πέφασμαν. λ, — πνενμων, πλεύμων. &, — συς, &νς. ξ, — σνν, ξύν. ρ, — χταρσεΐν* -&αρρεΐν. ' \ πράσσω, τήμερον. πράττω. e, — λαό?, λεώς. Obs. 2. ( ΐλαα, ϊλεω. % ω, — / τά, Fem. Art. τώ. ( λαός, λεώς. % 5 3 Several of these contractions are more properly written without the ι subscript. See page 6., near the top. 4 Busby, after Joh. Gramniaticus, reverses this instance, making •&αρ- οειν for -fraQQuv ■ but greater authorities are against them. ATTIC DIALECT 231 6 into ο, as πέπεμφα, πέπομφα. 15. Ι Γ•, — εύφυη^ ενφυά. 4. V S — πησομαι. πείσομαι. 5 1 ίο, — πέπη&α, πέτιον&α. 16. s ω , — £?κα, Diphthong. εωχα. 17 at ?> — χλαίειν, χΧάειν. ει ft > — χλεϊδας, χλήδας. 6. οι ) ωι ) ί κλοίό?, χλωός. 2. Ρ» ήραϊνη. ου ω , — λαοΰ, Syllable. λεώ. 2. τωσαν ντων f — τνψάτωσαν, τνψάντων. 22. μι Ψ, — βοωμι, βοωην. 24 ησα ε , — γνοΙησαν 9 γνοΐεν. 27. Obs. 12. 14. 19. 20. 27. 23. III. Insertion of *, ο, and ω, in perfect tenses. Obs. 16. 17. 18. IV. Syncope. σ in the first future active and middle. Antepenultima of the first aorist. κ in the perfect, sometimes with the vowel or diphthong following. ι in the third plural pluperfect. η in the aorists optative, and verbs in μι. σα in σ&ωσαν, imperative passive and middle. V. Paragoge. γ ε in pronouns primitive ; as, %γωγε } σύγε. ow in pronouns and adverbs ; as, ότιονν, ουχοϋν χ οϋμενονν. ι and ν in pronouns demonstrative ; as, οΰτοσΖ, αυχηΧ^ του• rot, Ίουτουί' } ταντησϊ, τουτωΐ, τουτονϊ, ταυταί', ταύτόν for τό αυτό, τοϋτον for τοϋτο. There is sometimes an elision of ο and α • as, τουτί, ταυτί. ι in adverbs, conjunctions, and prepositions ; as, ούτωσΐ, vvvi t ουχί, μενϊ ) ivl. ■&a in the second person singular of verbs ; as, fo&a. η in the conjunction ότιή. s In common with the Basotic. 232 DIALECTS. VI. Apocope. xhx in the imperative active of verbs in μι • as, ΐστα and ϊστη, for ΐστα&ι, ϊστη&ι. OBSERVATIONS. 1. It makes the vocative like the nominative in all declen- sions. DECLENSIONS. 2. In the 2d, the vowel or diphthong in every termination is changed into ω • and the penultima of nouns in aog, if long, is changed into ε • as, λαός, λεώς, Ν. plur. Uaa, ϊλεο) } not other- wise; as, τάός, ταώς. See Clarke's Homer, a, 265. 3. Some words of the 3d in ης -ψος it declines after the 1st; and some in ώς -ωτος, ους -οδος } after the 2d. (Page 35.) Contracts of the Third Declension. 4. In the 1st form the accusative singular of adjectives in ης pure is contracted into « • as, ένδεέα, ένδεα. (Page 23.) Proper names of this form it declines after the first declen- sion ; and one appellative άκινάκης. (Page 35.) 5. In the 2d and 3d forms it makes the genitive singular in ως, contracting that from ευς pure ; as, χοέως, χοώς. 6. In the 3d form it contracts the accusative singular into η, and the N. A. V. plural into ης • but ενς pure has both accusa- tives in a • as, χοέα, χοα • χοέας, χοάς. τροφας also occurs. ADJECTIVES. 7. It forms comparisons by -ιστερος, -ιστατος • -αιτερος, -άπατος • and, in common with the Ionic, -εστερος, -εστατος. PRONOUNS. 8. See Rule V. on the preceding page. It uses εαυτού in the 2d person, and εαυτούς for αλλήλους. VERBS. 9. It contracts ζάω, διψάω, πεινάω, περιιρ&ω, and χράομαι, by η after the Doric manner. 10. It contracts ααι, εαι, ηαι, made by the Ionic syncope, into rj in the second person singular of the present indicative ATTIC DIALECT. 233 passive and middle of verbs in fw as, Ίστασαι, τί&εσαι, κάΰησαι, ϊστη, τί&η, κά&η. And sometimes in that of the perfect passive ofbarytons; as, μέμνησαι, μίμν^. (Page 110.) 11. It contracts the Ionic ao into ω • εο, j?o, oo, into ου, in the 2d person singular of the imperfect indicative ; and of the present and second aorist imperative passive and middle of verbs in μι' as, ιστω, έτί&υυ } έκά&ου, έδίδου. 12. In the first future of polysyllables in ιζω it drops σ • as, έλπιώ, middle έλπωνμαι. It does the same by those in ασω, «σω, οσω, which are afterwards contracted ; as, βιβώ. But έκχεω uncontracted occurs, Joel, ii. 28. (Page 76, bottom, and Obs. near the top of page 97.) 13. It affects the augment several different ways. (Page 73.) 14. It syncopates the first aorist ; as, ευοατο for εύοησατο. (Page 96.) 15. In dissyllable perfects in φα, χα, it changes e into o. (Page 78.) 16. It changes η into o, according to some grammarians, in the perfect active of obsolete verbs ; as, λήχω, λέλογχα, πή&ω, ninov&a, inserting ν. But they are better derived as in the List of Defective Verbs. 17. In the perfects active and passive &νεικα, άνεΐμαι, άφεΓκα, άφεϊμαι, and the middle εϊ&α, it changes ι into ω • as, άφέωκα, άφέωμαι, έ'ω#α, in which the ι is often retained ; as, εϊ'ω&α. According to some this is not a change, but an insertion of ω • an opinion which εϊ'ω&α seems to sanction. 18. In the reduplicated perfect αγηχα, from άγω, it inserts ο • as, άγτ\οχα. 19. In the perfect and pluperfect active it syncopates κ, as also the following vowel ; as, έστάκατο^, έστάκατε, εστάκεισαρ, ίστακίναι, εστα- τον, εστα- τε, εστα- σαν, εστά- ναι. Except in the third person plural perfect, and in the parti- ciple, which contract the two vowels; as, εστάκασι, εστακώς * εστασι, εστώς. 20. The Ionic εα, εες, 6 εε, for ειν, εις } ει, 1st, 2d, and 3d sing of the pluperfect active and middle, it contracts into η, ης, η • as, είλήφ-η, -ης, -η. 6 The contraction is used in the 2d person, though usually limited by grammarians to the 1st and 3d only. 20* 234 DIALECTS. It syncopates ι in the third plural of the same tense ; as, •ηδεσαν for ^δεισαν. 21. From the 2d person imperative active of verbs in μι it rejects the last syllable, ϊστα&ί. ΐστα. ϊστη •? τΐ&ετι? τΐ&η • δίδο&ι, δίδω. 22. It changes τωσαν into ντων in the third person plural of the imperative active, retaining the preceding vowel in the 1st aorist only of barytons, and in both the tenses peculiar to verbs in μι • in the rest ε is changed into o, except in the con- tracts, where a is changed into ω, ει into ου, and ου of the third remains; as, Barytons. 1st Aor. τυψ -άτωσαν, -άντων. Pres. τυτιτ \ Perf. τετυφ > -έτωσαν, -όντων. 2d Aor. τυπ ) Contracts. 1st Conj. βο \ -ά -ώντων. ττοι > -ει -τωσαν, -ούντων. χρυσ ) -ού -ούντων. Pres. 2d Α. Verbs in μι. ΙστάΛ ( Ιστά ϊ { τι&έ { διδό Ι (στή ( -ντων. 23. In the 3d plural of the imperative passive and middle it syncopates σα • as, Passive. Pres. τυπτέσ&ω Perf. τετύφ&ω ^-σα*>, -v. Middle. 1st Α. τυψάσ&ω 7 In this case the long vowel is restored, but it is not always in verbs from αω. 8 # in this place becomes τ by reason of the preceding #. ATTIC DIALECT. 235 24. In the optative active of barytons and contracts, μι is changed into ην ■ as, τύπτοιμι, τυητοίην. βοωμι, βοφην. ποιοΐμι, 9 ηοιοίην. The persons are varied in all the tenses as in the aorists passive of this mode : τυπτοί \ -ην, -ης, -η, βοω \ -ητον, -ψην, ηοιοβ ) -ημεν, -ητε, -ήσαν. 25. It uses the 2d and 3d singular, and the 3d plural of the iEolic aorist. (Page 71.) 26. It changes οι, the penultima of the optative active of verbs in μι from οω, into e>• as, διδοίην, διδωην. 27. It syncopates η in ειημεν, ειψε, of the aorists passive optative of barytons, and peculiar tenses of verbs in μι of the same mode, also in αιημεν, οιημεν, of the latter ; and, in both, changes ησα in the 3d plural into ε • as, Common. Attic. 1st Aor. τνφ&εΐ ' τνφ&εΐ ' 2d Aor. τυπεί τυπεϊ Pres. τι&εί τι&εΖ 2d Aor. d -εί &εΐ Pres. ίσταΐ ► -ημεν, -ητε, -ήσαν. Ισταΐ <■ -μεν, -τε, -εν. 2d Aor. στ αϊ σταΐ Pres. διδοί διδοΐ 2d Aor. dot WRITERS. dot J \ Thucydides, Lysias, Plato, Xenophon, Iscbus, Isocrates, Demosthenes, JBschines, Lucian. — JEschylus, Sophocles, Eu- ripides, Aristophanes. — This dialect was divided into ancient and more recent. Thucydides, Plato, and Aristophanes used the former. 9 The Doric moreover changes οι of tne penultima into «• as, φιλώην, "236 DIALECTS. IONIC DIALECT. The Ionic dialect was peculiar to the colonies of the Atheni- ans and Achaians in Asia Minor and the adjacent islands, the principal of which were Smyrna, Ephesus, Miletus, Teos, and Samos. It is admitted by writers of the Attic dialect, often by those of the Doric, but most frequently by the poets. PROPERTIES. It delights in a confluence of vowels; hence it is distin- guished from the common dialect by I. The resolution of diphthongs and contractions. &ώνμα. ώντός. ρηΐδιος. άλη&ηΐη. ρέε&ρον. έτετνφεε. τι&έασι. ■ψχομος. χρηίζω. τνπτεαι. τνπτηαι,. ΰϊς, (Maitt. ρ. 103. b.) φοβέο. άγα&οεργίη. λόγοιο, τοΐο. Obs. 5. *Αίδεω $ τέω. 4, 5. διδόασι. πατρώϊος. κατεαγηναι, έδέξαο. αν into ων ( αυτός α ει ι- ηϊ ί ράδιος \ άίψεια 61 _.; Ι εε ί ρεϊ&ρον \ έτετύφει { εα τι&εΐσι 6V ην εϋκομος (Ψ ^Τί'ζω V εαν τύπττ] Ι ηαι, τύπττ} 0* οϊ όϊς f εο φοβον i οε άγα&ονργία ου < ΟΙΟ λόγον, τον ' εω Άΐδου, του < οα διδονσι ω 1 ωϊ πατρώος κατηγηναι, V ω αο έδέξω II. Syncope of δ and τ in oblique cases. ε in many words ; particularly those in εια • as, Ιρός, άρχιρεύς, εύη&ϊη, προμη&Ιη, σνμπα&Ιη. ν in many words ; as, τέλεον, πλέων, μέζων, $ων for εϊων imperf. of έάω. σ in 2d persons of verbs. a in the perfect active. IONIC DIALECT. 237 111. Epenthesis of a before terminations of verbs. ε before terminations of nouns and verbs, of some in all cases; as, άδελφεός, κενεός, χαινεός. 1, 4. t in dual cases and many nouns; as, στεινός, ποίη for πόα. 5. ν ' as, πουλύς. αι before a and η ' as, σεληναΐα, Ά&ηναίη, άναγχαίη. IV. Prosthesis of ε before many words; as, εεις, έών. Reduplication in many tenses. V. Apharesis of ε ' as, όοτή, κείνος, σ ' as, κεδάζω, μίλαξ. τ • as, ^yavov. Augment. VI. Paragoge of α in the perfect middle ; as, ytyaa. σι in the third persons of verbs. VII. Change of letter or syllable : 12. 12. See, however, page 78. β \ C βάρα&ροί' ' ζέρε&ρον. 1 r > into ζ < πεφυγώς πεφνζώς. δ I ( δορκάδες ζορκάδες. & σσ βνϋ-ός βυσσός. V \ C νοείν κοεΧν. Tt \ κ \ ηοΐος ) ( ουδέποτε > Ionic < κοΐος. ούδέκοτε. σ δ όσμ^ν όδμήν. & τ καϋ -oqd κατορα. φ π άφικόμην άπικόμην. χ κ ί δέχομαι \ ουχί δέκομαι, ούκΐ. The smooth and aspirate mute reciprocally ; as, άκάν-θ-ίον ν , άχάντιον. βάτραχος ξ \ βά&ρακος. ένταϋ&α \ Ionic < έν&αντα. χπών V / κι&ών. χύτρα / V κύ&ρη. 1 Change of vowel and consonant. See onward. 2 The rough into the smooth. 238 ι ο ω α αυ ει, οα αν ην ειν into ί- DIALECTS. e βάρα&ρον V Ιατρός αε ά&λον εα ημάς ω χρεία α τέμνω η έπερωτέοντας ι εστίη ω ηλέω υ βίβλος ► Ιοί ω δενρο ζωή V βοά ω τραϋμα V είρίνεος ουν Λητόα ( "Άριστα^όραν εα } τελώνην ( έτετύφειν r βέρε&ρον. 9. ίητρός. 4. αε&λον. ήμέας. χρειώ. τάμνω. έπηρωτέοντας. ίστίη. πλώω. βύβλος. δεύρω. ζόη. β°ψ τρώμα. ήρίνεος. Λητοΰν. 8. 'Λρισταγόρεα 4. τελώνεα. 4. έτετύφεα. VIII. Contraction in a few instances. into ου 6 έτερος οΰτερος.' 3 C βόαξ βώξ. ■J ανοησία άνωσία. ( όγδοήκοντα όγδώκοντα. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. It inserts ε in all genitives plural. 2. It annexes ι to the dative plural of all parisyllabie nouns. 3. In the article, ο or τό before ε is contracted into ου • as, δ έτερος, ουτερος. DECLENSIONS 4. In the 1st it changes the a of all terminations (the dual and the N. A. V. plural excepted) into η, subscribing the subjunctive vowel ; ου of the genitive of nouns in «c and ης into εω, αν and ην of the accusative singular into εα, and ας of the plural into εας. — Ν. G. D. A. G. D. 1. Sing, βορέ-ης, -εω 4 , -η, -ην or -εα. PI. -έων, -ης or -rpv or A. N. G. D. A. G. D. -αισι, -εας. 2. Sing, βί-η, -ης, -η, -ην. PI. -έων, -ης or -ψι or -αισι. 3 See Article in the Attic Dialect. 4 BoQto), in Hesiod, by syncope for fioQtso) IONIC DIALECT. 239 5. In the 2d it changes ου of the genitive singular into oto (and in the article, which is of this declension, into εω, whose dative also is in εω ) and οι of the dual into οιϊ • G. G.D. G. D. G. Sing. Ιόγ-οιο, Dual. -ού>, PI. -εω*, -οισι. Sing, τοϊο & D. τε*ω, τε'ω. 6. In the 3d by syncopating δ and τ it makes -*?, -ιδος, -ας, -ατός, of the 2d and 5th forms of the contracts. Θέτ-ιδος, iog. Contracts of the Third Declension. 7. In the 1st and 2d forms, the genitive and dative sing., in the 3d form, all cases, have ε of the penultima changed into η. G. D. G. D. G. 1. Sing. "Λο-ψζ, -ψ. 2. πόλ-ηος, -ηϊ. 3. Sing, βασιλ-ψς, D. Α° ΝΑ. G.D. Ν. G. D. Α. ^ψ, -τ}α. Dual, -ηε, -ήοιν. Plur. -ψς, -ήων, -ησ*, -ηας. 8. In the 4th form it makes the accusative in ow • as, Λψονν. 9. In the 5th form it changes α of the penultima into ε • as, G. D. χέο-εος, -εϊ, &c. ADJECTIVES. 10. In the feminine εια from vg i ι is syncopated in every N. G. case ; as, όξ-έα or -έη, -έ<χς or -έης. PRONOUNS. 11. It inserts ε before every termination of ούτος and αύτύς with its compounds ; G. wmiov, D. αύτέω. Seldomer when av is changed into ωϋ • 5 Ν. ώϋτος, Α. ώϋτόν, particularly in the compounds ; D. σεωϋτω, έωϋΓω , but εωϋτέον, and its con- tracted form cbure'ou for αύτου, also occur. 12. It removes the augment syllabic and temporal; as, βεβρά- χει, αχούσε, εω&α • 6 Herodot. Sometimes the reduplication only ; as, εχτημαΐ' sometimes both; as, τεχνέαται, for τετέχνηνται,, and from the pluperfect both augments ; as, λύτο for έλέλυτο. On the contrary it reduplicates the present, imperfect, and both 5 See Rule I., Example 1st. 6 On the supposition that ω is an insertion and not a change of t. The augment of this verb is t. 240 DIALECTS. the futures and aorists ; as, κικλήσκω, ενένυπτε, ηεπι^τ ί σω ί κεκάμω, κεκρατηρισάμην f μέμαρτιον. 7 (Page 74.) 13. It forms the 1st, 2d, and 3d sing, and the 3d plur. of the imperfect, and both aorists active, by annexing κον, κες, κε ί to the 2d persons singular respectively, dropping the sub- junctive vowel in contracts, and shortening the long vowel in verbs in μι. Common. Ionic. ετυπτες, έτύπτ-εσ έποίεις, έποί-εσ έχρύσους, έχρύσ-οσ ίτί&ης, έτΙ&-εσ ετυψας, έτύψ-ασ ετυπες, έτύπ-εσ εστης, Ι'στ-ασ εδως, εδ-ος, the passive and middle τυπτ-εσκ6μην ) Imperf. 1st Aor. 2d Aor. ■κον, 8 κες } -κε, •xov. ■έσχεο. Hence in -έσκετο, -έσκοντο. 14. In the first future indicative active of the 4th, and the 2d future of every conjugation, it inserts ε before the three terminations sing, and 3d plural ; also in the infinitive and participle, resolving ει into εε and ου into εο in the dual and plural, except in the 3d plural and the participle feminine ; ψαλ-έω } -έεις, -έει • -έετοι> } -έετον • -έομεν 1 -έετε, -έονσι. Inf. ψαλέειν. Part. ψaL•έωv i -έουσα, -έον. In the middle voice it only resolves ου and ει • the latter in the 2d sing, indicative into εαι } subjunctive into ηαι ' as, τυπ-έομαι, -έαι, -έεται • -εόμε&ον, -έεσ&ον, -έεσ&ον • εόμε&α, -έεσ&ε, -έονται • τύπ-ωμαι } -ηαι. ηται. 15. In the perfect active it syncopates χ and shortens the penultima ; έστηκατε, εστέατε • τε&νηκώς, τε&νεώς. 16. In the pluperfect active and middle it changes ειν 1 εις, ει, into εα, εες$ εε. 17. It resolves y and ου in the 2d persons of passive and middle tenses into εαι, εο • in the subjunctive ηαι. (Page 88.) 18. To the 3d sing, of all tenses active, of the perfect middle, and of the aorists passive, of the subjunctive mode, it annexes σι • as. 7 Άνωΰαι retains the augment in the infinitive. Herodot. 8 This' form is more frequently found without the augment; as, τνπτεσκον. 9 See Attic dialect, p. 233., Note to Obs. 20. [ONIC DIALECT. 241 Active. Pres. τν7τττ}σι. Perf. τετνφτ]σι. 1st Aor. Jvtprjat. 2d Aor. τύπησι. Passive. 1st Aor. τυφϋ-ήσι.™ 2d Aor. τνηγοι. 10 Middle. ' Perf. τετύπησι. 19. In the 2d sing, of the 1st aorist middle it resolves ω into «o • as, έιύψ-ω, -ao. 20. In all tenses of the indicative and optative, whose 3d sing, ends in ται or το, it forms the 3d plur. by inserting « before those terminations respectively, and, of the next pre- ceding letters, shortening the long vowel, dropping the sub- junctive of the diphthong (except in the optative), changing the smooth mute into the rough, and σ into the characteristic of the 2d aorist, δ or & • as, Pres. & Perf. Sing. ηεφίλη κεχρύσω κεΐ κεκόλου ϊψαλ τέτυττ λέλεχ τιέφρασ ηέπλησ Plur. Imp. & Pluperf. Plur. τνπτέ Λ έτυτζτέ πεφιλέ έπεφιλέ κεχρυσό έκεχρνσό κέ έκέ κεκολό έκεκολό έψάλ ' έψάλ τετνφ έτετύφ λελέχ έλελέχ πεφράδ έπεφράδ πεπλά& ) έτιετιΧά^ ■ατο. When α precedes these terminations, instead of inserting another a after it, this dialect inserts an ε before it : as, 3d Sing. δύναται,, μηχανάται, άναπέπταταν. 3d Plur. δυνέαταί. μηχανέαται. άναπεπτέαται. 3d Sing. 3d Plur. έδύνατο, έδυνέατο. έμηχανατο, έμηχανέατο. άνεπέπτατο, άνεπεπτέατο. 21. In common with the Doric it contracts verbs in αω into η ' as, όρής, όρή, όρήν. 22. In the contract tenses of verbs in αω it inserts ε after contraction ; as, χρέωμαι, έμηχανεώμην • lmperat. χρέω • η but oftener changes a into ε • as, χρέομαι, δρέομαι. Sometimes in the present subjunctive passive of barytons ; as, κιεινέωνται, • 10 Also τνφ&ίγσι, τνπίψι. See Obs. 22. 11 Xqto occurs in Hippocrates, the Ionic of /gov, imperative of χςΐομαι for ypaouai. 21 242 DIALECTS. always in the aorists; as, τνφ&έω, τνπέω. Also in the 3d plur. of the present indicative of verbs in μι from αω and the present and 2d aorist subjunctive of those from «ω and ε ω, in the active voice ; as, ίστέασι, ίστέωσι, τι&έωσι, στέωσι, &έωσι. Sometimes in the 3d person middle voice ; as, -θ^έηται. 23. It syncopates σ in the 2d persons passive and middle of verbs in μι. (Page 110.) 24. In the 3d plural of the present active of verbs in μι from εω, οω, υω, it inserts a, syncopating the subjunctive vowel of diphthongs ; as, τι&εΖσι, τι&έασι • διδοϋσι, διδόασι • ζενγννσι, ζευγνύασι. 25. It contracts οη, from οαω, οεω } into ω • as, βοήσω, βώσω, έννοήσας, έννώσας • ένενόηντο, ένενωντο. Instead of the regular tenses of κεΐμαι and άνεϊμαι it uses those of their primitives κέω and άνέω • as, κέονται, άνέονται, κέωνται, &c. It makes λαμβάνω borrow its tenses as if from λαβέω and λάμβω. Καταλελάβηκε, λάμψομαι, λαμφ&είη, &c. occur in He- rodotus. WRITERS. Herodotus, Hippocrates, Arrian, Lucian, Aretceus, Homer, Hesiod, Theognis, Anacreon. DORIC DIALECT. This dialect was used first in Lacedcemon and Argos ; afterwards in Epirus, Magna Grcecia, Sicily, Crete, Rhodes, and Lybia. It is seldom used by Attic, but often by Ionic writers and the poets. PROPERTIES. I. Contraction of <5 and καϊ, when prefixed to vowels and diphthongs. Common. Doric. τά ^ματα, τάματα. δ ελαφος, ωλαφος. ό αΐπδλος, ω π όλος. ol αΐπόλοι, ώπόλοι. του άλγεος, τωλγεος. DORIC DIALECT. 243 του Ευβονλοιο, τω *υβούλοιο. τά άγκιστρα, τωγχιστρα. τά όστέα, τώστέα* καΐ έξαπίνης, κήξαπίνας. καΐ εϊπε, χ^πε. καί 6 "Λδωνις, χωδωνις. καΐ δ έκ, χω 'κ. Other contractions : αε into η έτίμης. > 0bg %% αει> τ] τιμής. ) εα η κρης, φρητί. εο ευ S -εϋς, *Λρευς, βασιλεύς, gen. 5. οα ω βωκας. II. Change of letter or syllable ; as, γ into δ δα, δάν. 1 * ί & ψύ&ος, 1 έπιμη^-ής, &άσος. \ τ χτέμιτος, *Λρτέμιτος. 4. ϊ συρίσδω, μασδός. γυμνάδω, ρέδω, by Metathesis 'ερδω. ί μάδδα, χρήδδω, also jEolic. \ 9. δρίτων. : συρίττω, φράττω, βλιμάττω. ανδηρα, Λνμβρις. Ζυμβραϊος. παρσένος, μυσίδδω^- σιός. 1 άνητον, κλαϊστρον 1 φήο, φλίβομαι. ί γ ωγηνος, εοιγμεν for έοίκαμεν. \ τ τεΐνος, τηνος. 1 , ί ν% βέντιστος, ήν&ον, κέντο for κέλετο* | φ φανρος. μ β βυρσίνη, βύρμαξ. 1 ν σ τΰπτομες, χαλάς, 1 μείς, also JEjoUc. π β , εμβολή, άμβλακία. ρ κ μικκος for μικρός. f δ πέφραδμαι. ~ \ τ τύ, φατί, ' Αρτα μίτων , Ποτείδαν. 23. y ντ ιύπτωντι, τι&έντι. 1 17. C ξ όνειδιξω, χλαξω, 1 ορνιξ. 11. 1 Words to which the figure l is affixed, undergo some change of an- other letter. 2 When τ or ^ follows. 3 See γίντο in the JEolic 244 DIALECTS. into πόκα, τόκα. 1 πόρρις. κράτος, also Ionic. πόρδαλις. ώγα&όν, ώριστος, &ρχομαι. τράφω, τράχω. τυψεΐτον. σώς 1 χάλκιος. μάν, φάμα, Ιίφαν, άδύ. άμον, εϊκασν. άνδρεφόνον. κωρος ) μώνος, &ρος, ωρα. 4 μαλακαίποδες. τυψενμες. 1 > τνψοϋμες 1 ) πρατος, &υραν, έπάξα, γελάν. ήγάπενν, γελενσα. γέα, νέειν. άρχεΐα ι. κλάδας, κλαξώ 1 γαμάν. κλαϊδα, κλαΐστρον, η&άϊον, %χον, \\Κκον. τέληος. Κρονίδα, Gen. λόγος, Accus. λόγως, Ace, ώρανός, ριγών. τίπτοισι, τύπτοισα, ύψοΐς. 1 ) τνπτευ, καλενσα. j Έλει&υια. Τρωαν, πωμενικός, ωμοί. ήροϊος. 2, 13, 16, 2. 3, 12. 16. 19. 17. 22. 24. 14. 24. 18. III. Syncope of & έσλός. μωα, παα. &άσ&ε® S^aaal•. τύπτες, τύπτεν, τι&έντιϊ διδόντν. 1 πράν for πρώην 1 15, 17. 17. 4 Plato says that ωραι was used for the ancient and Attic oqcci, δια το OQtttiv τους xaiqovq. 5 This seems to come from verbs in αω made εω by the Attic and ionic dialect. 6 By another syncope for ϋεάααα&ε. DORIC DIALECT. pen thesis of a V • σ ναυάται. χιχήλας. τυψεΐ-τον } -τε • τυψεΐται τυπτόμεσ&α. 245 τύψαις. 16. 20. V. Aphceresis of θ -e in λώ, λής, λή. OBSERVATIONS. Μ. F. 1. It makes the nominative plur. of the article τοί, τ«/. DECLENSIONS. 2. In the 1st it changes ου of the genitive singular, ω of the genitive plural, and η of every termination, into «. Sometimes also the genitive plural of the 2d and 3d ; as, N. G. D. A. V. G. τελών-ας, -or, -a, -up, -a. ) ρ] ^ ό^ετ-ά, -a£, -α, -άν, -ά. J 3. Proper names in αος have ο syncopated, and are declined N. G. after the 1st ; as, for Μενέλαος 9 Μενελάου, &,c. Μενέλ-ας, -α, D. A. V. "ft " α,/ , ~ α • In this declension it changes ov into ω, that of the accusa- tive plural sometimes into o, and rejects the c subscript of the dative ; as, G. D. G. A. Sing, λόγ-ω, -ω. Plur. -α»', 8 -ως or -ος. It also changes ου into ω in the N. and A. sing, and N. A. V. plur. contracted of the 3d ; as, Ν. βως, Α. βων. Plur. N. A. V. βως. 4. It changes δ into τ in nouns in ις -ιδος • as, Gen. &έμιτος, μέριτος, *Λρτέμιτος. Contracts of the Third Declension. 5. It changes η and ευ of the N. and V. of the 1st and 3d N. V. N. V. forms reciprocally ; as, "Λρευς, -ευ • βασιλ-τ\ς, -η. εο or ου of all genitives in εος into ευ • as, χείλενς, πόλενς, ' Οδυσεΰς? ov into 7 Third sing. 1st future middle. 8 This is infrequent. 9 Odys. ω'. 397. 21 * 246 DIALECTS. ω in the genitive sing, of the fourth form; as, G. *Λχΰς. εις of the nominative plural into ης without the subscript, εω of all genitives into a • This last but seldom. PRONOUNS. 6. To έγώ in the nom. sing, it annexes ν, νη, γα, νγα. In the penultima of the dual and plural it changes η into a, and often uses the singular accusative for the dual and plural. (See Table at the end of Dialects, page 255.) 7. In the pronoun of the 2d person it changes σ into τ, and annexes γα, νη. (See Table, page 256.) 8. In the 3d personal pronoun, for the accusative ε it uses the accusative of ΐς, G. Ιός, obsolete, with μ or ν prefixed ; as, μίν, vlv } which often stand not only for ε, but for αύτ-όν, -ήν, 6, and also for the plural αύτ-ονς, άς } ά. For the plural dative σφίσι it uses the dual σφίν, which by aphaeresis becomes φίν. For the plural accusative σφας it uses the dual σφέ, by meta- thesis φσε, hence ψέ. As the demonstrative αυτός is often used for the reflectives οϊ> and αύτον (contracted from εαυτοϋ), so φϊν and ψε are used respectively for αύτ-οΐς, -αΐς • αύτ-ούς, -άς, -ώ, in all genders ; ψε sometimes for the accusative singular αύτ-όν, -ήν, -ό. In the possessives it changes σός into τεός. 6 g Ιός. ημέτερος άμός. υμέτερος ύμός. σφέτερος σφός. VERBS. 9. It changes ζ the characteristic of the present into σδ, δ, δδ, τ, and ττ • as, σνρίσδω, γνμνάδω } ττοτόδδω } όρίτω, φράττω, συρίττω. 10. It makes new present tenses from perfects by changing a into ω • as, εσττ\κω } πεποί&έω, δεδοίκω } κεκλήγω, πεφρίκω, 10 πεφύκω, 11. It changes σ the future characteristic of verbs in ζ, and of some in ω pure, into I ■ as, άντιαξώ, γελαξω. 12. It changes ου in the penultima of the 1st future and 1st aorist of verbs in ω pure into οι • as, άκοίσώ, άκοισον. 10 From nkpor/.a for πΐιγςιχα. DORIC DIALECT. 247 13. It changes η in the penultima of the 1st future and 1st aorist perfect and pluperfect, into « ■ as, φιλασω, έτίμασα, τέ&ναχα } μέμναμαι, έμεμνάμην. 14. It changes ει, the augment formed by annexing t, into η without a subscript ; as, \χον, \lnov. 15. It syncopates t, in the 2d and 3d persons sing, of the present indicative active, and in every tense of the infinitive ending in ειν • as, τύπτ-ες, -β, τύπτεν, τνψεν, τυπέν. 16. It circumflexes the first future active and middle, and forms it like the 2d ; as, . , ο.» ) „ . -°" ) Act. τυψ-ω, -εις, -ει • -ειτον, -ειτον • m \ μεν ^ -είτε, -ου > ντι, " -ευ ) Mid. τυψ-οϋμαι, -η, -εΐται • ούμε&ον, -εΐσ&ον, -εΐσ&ον, &C. 17. It changes ν into ς in the first person plural of all tenses indicative and subjunctive active, and of the aorists subjunctive passive ; also σ into ντ in the 3d plural, dropping the subjunc- tive vowel of the preceding diphthong, except in the futures ; as, τΰπτομες, έτύπτομες, τύψουμε ς, έτύψαμες, &C. τύπτοντι,^ 3 τυψοϋντι, 13 τετύφαντι, 13 τυποϋντι, 13 τι&έντι, 13 διδόντι, 13 τύπτωντι, τύψωντι. Pass, τυφ&ώντι, τυπωντι. 18. It changes οι into ω in the penultima of barytons and contracts of the optative active, whose termination μι the Attic had before changed into ην • as, Attic, τυπτοίην^ ποιοίην, χρυ- σοίην ' Doric, τνπτώην, ποιωην, χρυσωην. It also often changes ου of the penultima both of contracts and barytons into εν } sometimes into οι • as, Act. φιλ-εΰμες, -εϋντι. Imp. έφίλενν } τνψ-εϋμες } -εϋντι, τυπ-εϋμες, -οϋντι* 4 or -εϋντι or -οντι. Part, τύπτευσα, φιλεϋν. Pass, and Midd. φιλεϋ- μοιι. 1st Fut. άλεϋμαι. Imperat. φιλεϋ. — Also τύπτοισι, 1st Fut. τυψοϊσι. Particip. τύπτοισα. ε is sometimes inserted in the subjunctive; as, Ισορροπ-ωσι, -έωντι • συντι&-ωσι, .έωντι• Archimedes. 11 See Obs. 18, and note to the same, is See Obs. 18. 13 This person is like the dative plural of the participle of the same tense, but the Doric dialect makes it like the dative singular. 14 The 2d future commonly retains the v, if the penultima be not changed into ft• or ot, but not always. 248 DIALECTS. 19. It changes η into a in most tenses of the indicative and optative, passive and middle ; also of verbs in μι ending in ην • as, έτυπτόμαν, έτυψάμαν, έτύφ&αν, έτυφ&ήταν , τυπτοίμαν, εσταν, ϊβα. 20. It inserts σ in the 1st person plural passive ; as, τυπτό- μεσ&α. 21. In the perfect passive of verbs in ζω, making σ in the future, it changes σ into δ • as, πέφραδμαν, κέκαδμαι. 22. It contracts verbs in αω into 77, in common with the Ionic ; as, τιμ-^ς^ --£, ~yv • and changes the ω contracted into α • as, χαλάσι, particularly in participles ; as, πειναντι. 23. In verbs in μι it changes σ of the 3d person sing, present indicative active into τ • as, ΐστατ^ τί&ητι, &,c. 24. In the infinitive it sometimes changes ει, into a, and ου into ω • as, εύδαιμοναν, ριγών. 25. It also changes ν and ναι into μεν ) dropping the sub- junctive of the preceding diphthong ; as, τιμή χρυσού τετυφέ τυφ&η Ιστά- διδό- ζευγνύ &εΐ δοΰ τυπτέ τιμή φίλη χρυσό τετυφέ τυφ&η ίστά διδό ζευγνύ &έ δό -με ι 26. To this form it frequently annexes ui • as, τυπτέμεναι, τιμημένοι, φάήμεναι, χρυσόμεναι, 16 &C. These often occur in Ionic writers. PARTICIPLES. 27. It inserts ι after α in the masculine and feminine of participles ; as, τύψ-αις } -αισα. 15 iEolic for φιλειν. 16 Sometimes χονσόμμεναι after the iEolic manner of compensating the loss of the subjunctive vowel of the diphthong. See JEolic dialect. -SIOLIC DIALECT. 249 28. It changes via the feminine termination into ονσα, ac- cording to some grammarians ; as, μεμεναχοϋσα, άνεσταχοϋσα, έωραχοΰσα, but they rather belong to present tenses formed from perfects. See Obs. 10. WRITERS. Archimedes, Timceus, Pythagoras, Pindar, Theocritus, Bion, Moschus, Callimachus, and the tragedians in the choruses. iEOLIC DIALECT. This dialect was used in Bozotia, Lesbos, and jEolia in Asia Minor. It is a branch of the Doric, and has some changes in common with it. PROPERTIES. I. Change of the rough into the smooth breathing ; as, &πτω• and removal of the accent back, as, %γω, πόταμος. To compensate the loss of the aspirate it sometimes prefixes β to ρ, when the next syllable begins with ζ, χ, δ, or τ • as, βρίζα, βράχος, βρόδον, βρήτωρ. It sometimes prefixes γ to a vowel ; as, γέντο for εντο, Doric for ελτο, by syncope for ελετο, which is by the Ionic dialect for εϊλετο II. Change of letter or syllable, β into f Y ϊ άλαν0 $> γΜφ<*9<»>. " \ μ βάρμιτον. β β^^) 1 Βελφούς, βείφϊνες., ζ σ<5 2 τράπεσδα, Σδεύς. & φ φλίβω. ι ρ πέρροχος for περίοχος. μ ττ πέδα, οππατα, άλιππα for άλειμμα. See Rule IV. ν σ μεΐζ, 3 νόϊς, γελάϊς^ νψόϊς.3 ξ σκ 2 σχένος, σχίφος. ματεΐς, μα&οϋσα. Φερσεφόνα. 1 For δίλεαο. C ζ is δα ~ί ίσο 2 An ./Eolic resolution of < ξ — χσ > by metathesis < ox ζ-ψ — πα ) ( an 3 Words that undergo a complicated change. 250 DIALECTS. πτ into σσ πέσσω, δσσω, νίσσω ί ν τετύφων. \ ρ οίτορ, ϊππορ, ττ/σοο, 3 πόρ } σώρ3 for ούτος , ίππος, πί&ος, πους, Ό-εός. τ - — -— τι σπολήν, σπαλείς, πέμπε. Χ φ ανφένα. ψ σπ 2 σπέλλων, σπαλίδα. ζ ε λεγόμε&εν, φερόμε&εν, ν added. Λ ο μέμορ&αι, ϊφ&ορ&αι. J υ σύρκας. ν αι μέλαις, τάλαις] hence μέλαινα, τάλαινα. δ α βπισ&α. !αν S -ναίσκω, μιμναϊσκω, βλαιτή. ε* *Λτρεϊες. *> η νηλήτης, άκτήν, Καφήσιοςβ (ε έδόντα, έδύνη. υ ονυμα* ϋσδων% ' Τδνσσεύς. {ου -&ουγάτηρ } λιγουράν, οϋδωρ, κοΰμα > φονσα. V νηός. ι Ιψό&εν, ϊπαρ. ______ ί α διαπειναμες. \ ο ερος, G. -ου, γέλος, Ace. -ον. α αν βοάϊς, γελάϊ. !η τνπτην, καλψ>. rp ^πον. ου οι μοΐσα, Κρέοισα, Μέδοισα, όρ&όϊς. 3 διά ζα ζάβολος, ζαμενής. μετά πέδα πέδ* 'Λχιλλέα, πεδέρχομαι 9 πεδάμειψαν, πεδέχω, πεδάφρων. III. Prosthesis of β before ρ instead of the aspirate ; as, βρυτήρ. γ for the same purpose; as, γέντο. Also in other words ; as, γνοεΐν, γνόφος, γνω, γδονπον, whence έρίγδουπος, II. η'. 411. IV. Epenthesis. It transposes the letters in the syllable ρ*, changing ι into ε and doubling ρ • as, κόπρια, μέτριος 1 αλλότριος • JEolic, κόπερρα, μέτερρος, άλλότερρος. Epenthesis of a in the genitive plur. μουσάων. ι in μέλαις f τάλαις • participles in ας • also of the ι subscript. 4 ΓννΙ, and νμΐναιος are of iEolic extraction, from γονή and όμονοεΐν. 5 In the augment, according to Priscian. -EOLIC DIALECT. 251 v after α ' as, αύάταν, αϋως, αύή^, αύτάρ, δαυλός, Ι'αυχεν, φαύσχω. ν after ο • as, Ούδυσσέα. a consonant to compensate the loss of the aspirate ; as, &μμες, ϋμμες. a consonant when the vowel or diphthong preceding is shortened ; as, χτέννω, φ&έρρω, εμμα, έμμΐ, πεν&έσσης, τί&εμμι, άλιπηα. σ in futures in λω, ρω. β in άλιβδύειν, ϊβασον. V. Syncope of γ in όλίος, Γϋ|, φόρμιξ. σ — μώα, ττάα. * - — "Λχαος, πάλαος • also * subscript ; as, τύπτης. ο — μύσα, βυλή, *Ιλα. ν — ' Ορανός, Συράκοσσαι. VI. Paragoge of ν to the accusative sing, of the 4th form of contracts ; as, Λητών. OBSERVATIONS. DECLENSIONS. 1. It changes ης in the nominative of the first declension of nouns into « ■ as, ποί^τά, κομψά - and ου of the genitive sing, into ao ' as, Έομείοιο. It inserts a in the genitive plural of nouns of this declension ; as, αίχμητάων t μουσάων • and ι in the accusative plural of those in a and η • as, νύμφαις. 2. In the dative singular of the 2d it omits the subscript ; as, λόγω • and changes ους of the accusative plural into οις. 3. In the 1st form of the contracts it rejects σ from the vocative sing, in ες • as, Σώχρατε, Λημόσ&ενε. 4. In the fourth form it makes the genitive sing, in ως, and the accusative in ων • as, G. αίδ-ώς, Α. -ών. It makes of genitive cases a new nominative of another declension from which it forms its cases ; as, of γέροντος, the genitive, it makes a nominative, from which γερόντοις is the dative plural. So μελανού from μέλανος, and τίος, G. τίου, D. τίω, &,c. from the genitive τινός, which has sometimes the ν syncopated. It changes σ into ρ in the genitive sing, and accusative plur. of nouns in a and η of the 1st declension, the nominative sing, of the 2d, the nominative and genitive sing, of the 3d, 252 DIALECTS. the genitive and accusative sing, of the 1st form of the con- tracts, the genitive of the 2d form, and the accusative plural of all five ; as, 1st, G. άρετάρ, Α. άκοάρ. 2d, Ν. Τιμόΰεορ. 3d, σκλ/,οοτήο, G. χρώματορ • Plur. Α. ώδϊναρ. 1st form of contracts, G. μέλεορ, Α. κλέορ. 2d, G. πόΐιορ. VERBS. 5. It changes the ει of the 2d and 3d sing, of the pres- ent indicative active, and of the infinitive, into η • as, τύπτ-ης, -V, -Ψ> 6. It annexes #a to the 2d persons in ης • as, ήσ&α, τίπτησ&α. 7. It inserts σ in futures of the fourth conjugation in λω, ρω • as, τέλσω, δρσω. 8. It changes α of the penultima of the perfect passive into ο in the infinitive ; as, μέμορ&αι, εφ&ορ&αι. 9. It changes dv and οϋν in the infinitive of contracts into ccig and οις • as, βοάϊς, χρυσόϊς. 10. It gives many contracts the form of verbs in μν, both with and without a reduplication ; as, φίλημι, νίκημι, άλάλημι, άκάχημν hence the third plurals οΐκεντι, φίλεντι, Imperf. έφίλην and participles present νοείς, ποιείς, &c. 11. It changes η in the present of verbs in μι from αω, into «t • from εω into £, doubling μ • as, γέλαιμι, γέλαις, yalcu t &C. τΐ&εμμι, -ης, -ησι. 12. It often changes the short into the long vowel in these verbs ; as, τί&-ητον, -ημεν, τΐ&ητι, ϊστη&ι, δίδω&ι, ετι&ήμην. 13. In φημί it makes the 3d sing, φατί, and the 3d plural φαισί. WRITERS. AIccbus, Sappho. BCEOTIC DIALECT. Under the Molic is comprehended the Bczotic dialect, which has the following distinct peculiarities : It changes β into δ όδελός. γ β βάνα 1 for γυνή. ι The η which the Doric changes into a, the Bceotic does not change into si ■ and, on the contrary, what the Bceotic changes into it, the Doric BCEOTIC DIALECT. 253 χ into ξ σ ξ S 6 a < I* ΐξον,εΐξασι? Perf. Act. άηέκειξα. λεγόμε&εν, ν added. τρίπεζαν. Ιών, μείς* Θείβα&εν, τί&ειμι, εΐρωες. ήροΐος. εΐξασι? 1st Aor. Act. τέτνφαν. V ασι av OBSERVATIONS. 1. It inserts σα in the 3d plural of the imperfect and both aorists indicative active. Common. Baeotic. ϊτνπτον, έτύπτοσαν. ϊτνψαν, έτύψασαν. ϊτνπον, έτύποσαν. And in the imperfect of contracts ; as, Common. Bceotic. έβόων, έβοωσαν. έφίλονν, έφιλονσαν. έ χρίσου ν, έχρυσοϋσαν. 2. It sometimes makes the 3d plural of the 1st aorist in am, as, έτύψασι. 3. It sometimes makes the 3d plural of the perfect in av • as, τέτνφαν, πέφρικαν. 4. It makes the 2d aorist imperative active in ov like the first ; as, τίπ-ον, -άτω. 5. In the optative active it changes ε of the 3d plural into σα • as, Common. Boeotic. ίιητοι \ ύψαι \-6v f L<7t0l ) τνπτοι τύψ τύ does not change into a • as, t t Sv, Doric άδν, never ίίδύ, Basotic • ηρωης, Baeotic ΐϊρωες but not αρωε?, Doric. So Hort. Adonidis. Aldus. 1496. p. 209. But αοωα occurs in Pind. Pyth. Od. iii. v. 13. 2 Some grammarians make this the perfect by changing x into ξ, others the 1st aorist, by changing av into aoi. 22 254 POETIC PECULIARITIES. 6. In the 3d plural of both the aorists passive, and of the imperfect and 2d aorist active of verbs in μι, it syncopates σα, shortening the preceding long vowel ; as, Common. Bonotic. έτύφ&ησαν, ετυφ&εν. έτύπησαν, ϊτυπεν. ϊστασαν, ϊσταν. έτί&εσαν, ϊτν&εν. Ιδίδοσαν, 'έδιδον. 'έστησαν, εσταν. 7. It changes η, in the penultima of verbs in μι from ε ω, into ει • and uses the Ionic reduplication ; as, τέ&εφι, πεφίλειμι,. No Writers extant ; nor would this dialect have been known, nor the Cretan, Spartan, Macedonian, Tarentine, Pamphylian, and others, had not writers occasionally intro- duced them ; as, in Aristophanes we find a Bazotian woman speaking in her own dialect. Superadded to the use of all the dialects and figures of orthography and prosody, the POETS have a few peculi- arities : I. They make nouns indeclinable by adding φι to the nom- inative of parisyllabic nouns, and to the genitive of impari- syllabics, rejecting ν and σ from the terminations ; as, αύτόφι, δακρνόφι, χοτυληδορόφι, for αυτός, δάκρυον, κοτνληδ-ών , -όνος. Neuters of the 1st form of the contracts reject ο only from the genitive ; as, ορεος, ορεσφι. To the Attic genitive in ω they add ο • as, G. ΜΙνωο for Μίνω. II. They form the dative plural from the singular by chang- ing ι into εσι or εσσι • as, ηοωϊ, ήρώεσι or ήρώεσσι • and change oiv into ouv in the dative dual. III. In verbs they insert a before a contracted, and ω before ω, if the penultima be long ; but ο before ω if the penultima be short. Thus βοάεις, βοάς, — Poet, βοάας • πηδάω, πηδώ, — Poet, πηδώω • ι βοάω, βοω, — Poet. βοόω. IV. They redouble letters to make a short syllable long by position ; as, έτέλεσσα for έτέλεσα } 1st aorist active : and also 1 Hence 2d aor. act. subjunctive, δώ-ω, -ως, -ω- -ωτον, -ωτον -to^i*, •ωτε, -ωοι. DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS. 25•> change the quantity of vowels by inserting ι to form a diph- thong ; as, έμέο Ionice, έμεΐο po'etice ; and by changing ω into ο • as, τΰπτομεν for τύπιωμεν, subjunctive active. V. They change bar y tons into verbs in μι> • as, εχημι, βρί- &ημ*ί from εχω, βρί&ω. VI. From regular verbs in ω are formed by the poets verbs defective in α#ω, ε&ω } ειω, ησσω, ϊ/ω, οιαω, ουω, ξω, ο~γω, σ&ω, σκω, σπω, σω, ν&ω, νσσω, ωσω, ωσσω, ω&ω } ωω. Ν. G. D. Α. DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS. 'Εγώ. Singular. Ionic. Doric. ζ- έγώνη \ έγών j έγώνγα C έγώγα ( έμεϋ \ μεν έμίν ( άμε \ αμμε jEolic. Baotic. 'έγων Ιώ Ιώγα Ιώνγα έμεν Poetic. *μοΐο Ιμέο ( έμεΐο. / έμέο&εν, { έμέ&εν. Ν Α. G. D. Dual. αμμε άμμε νωι. νωϊν. Plural. Ν. G. D. Α. ήμέες ήμέων ήμέας αμες αμμε ς άμών άαέων ^ an μι ( άμες \ άμμες άμμων άμμέων aulv { < «ι α, αμμιν \μμι αμμας άμέ Ίμμε ήμείων 256 DIALECTS. Ν. G. D. A. N. A. G. D. N. G. D. G. D. A. Ionic. σοιο σέο ύμέες ύμέων ύμέας εο hoi h Singular Doric. τν τύγα τύνη ( σεν < τεϋ \ τεόϊι τοί, τίν, τείν ί τέ \τύ Dual. νμμε $μμι Plural. ύμες νμμε ς νμμιν νμμι {νμμας νμμε ύμε Singular. εΐ μίν 1 νϊν jEolic. σεν τεϋ ϋμμες ί ϋμμων \ ύμμέων ί ΰμμιν \ νμμι ί ϋμμας \ ίίμμε Poetic. σεΐο. σείο&εν. σέο&εν. σέ&εν, τίν. τεΐν. νμειες. ύμείων. ( εϊο. \ εο&εν. { &εν. 1 μιν and ν Ιν are both singular and plural, and of all genders. See Doric dialect, Obs. 8. DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS. 257 Dual. N. A. | Ionic. Doric. JEolic. ι Poetic. σφέε. 1 ' Plural. N. G. D. A. σφέες σφέων σφί σφέας σφίς σφεΐες, σφείων, ί σφί. \ σφίν, σφέ. φίν ψε ARTICLE .2 N. G. D. A. Singular* ά τω, τας τώ, τα τάν Dual. τέω τέω ταρ τόΐο. N. A. G. D. . Plural. N. G. τοΖ, ταΐ τάν τέω ν ί τοϊσι, ττ( ς \ τεοΧσι > τήσι τάων τοΐσδεσι&ι, τοΐσδεσσι. D. A. τώς τός τώρ τάρ The dialects, which by some are annexed to the relative bg t by others to the relative όστις , belong properly to δτο?, used for όστις. From οτος comes regularly the Gen. δτον, Ι. δτεω } D. δτεν, P. δττευ > δττθο, Dat. δτω, Ι. δτεω, P. δττεω, Plur. Gen. δτων } Ι. δτεων, Dat. δτοις } Ι. δτέοις, ότέοισι • δ,σσα and αττα are used by the Attics for ατινα. 2 To every case of the article the Attics also yt to the pronouns ίγω, σύ, &c. 22* add the particles δε and ys 258 DIALECTS. DIALECTS OF THE VERB SUBSTANTIVE ημί. INDICATIVE MODE. Sing. 1 2 Present Tense. Dual. 2 3 έμμΐ έσσί έντί 1 είμίν είμες έμέν Plur. 2 ί ϊα 3 Ι'ασ* Vaat. έντί. Movjl•. ίίασσ*. Α. Ι εσκον ' ) ϊσκε Imperfect Tense. ' { Τσκον **« { D. Ρ. •^α iff ϊησ&α %ην { ^σμει \ ήμες %στε %ατε | ϊσαν. ϊσκον. ϊσσαν. Α. Ι. D. ϊσει, ίσεαν Future. ίσεϊται ίσσεϊται τ . „ ( έσση εσσεταί Ρ. έσσομαι < ,. •' Γ \ έσσεαι ( έσσόμεσ&α,έσοννταν. Χ έσσόμε&α, έσσοΰνται, έσσόμε&α, 'έσσονται. Α. D. Ρ. ϊσσο IMPERATIVE MODE. Present Tense. Jjrw ϊστων} έσέσ&ων. Α. P. ης OPTATIVE MODE. Present Tense εϊμεν } είτε, είενβ 1 See σα syncopated in the Attic dialect, Obs. 27. 2 See η syncopated in the Attic dialect, Obs. 27. DIALECTS OF THE VERB SUBSTANTIVE είμΐ. DIGAMMA. 259 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Present Tense. I. % Ι'ωοί. D. P. ϊησί 7 ( (jJVII. INFINITIVE MODE. m Present Tense. I. ϊμεναι, Τίμμεναι. D. εμεναι, εμμεναι, εμεν, εμμεν, ήμεν, ήμες ί είμεν. Future. D. έσεΐσ&αι, ϊσσεϊσ&αι. P. εσσεσ&αι. PARTICIPLE. Present Tense. Ι. έών. Future. P. έσσόμενος. DIGAMMA. The ancient Greek language had a sound similar to that of a ν or a w, which was called the JEoIic Digamma, because it remained longest in use among the iEolians, and was de- noted by a character resembling two gammas, placed one above the other, thus, F or f. It was prefixed to several words beginning with a vowel, which in the more familiar dialect had the smooth or rough breathing, and was sometimes also inserted in the middle between two vowels. It is supposed that the digamma, which had the force of a consonant, was more or less frequently employed by Homer in certain words, of which ου, of, ε, εϊ'δοι, εοικα, είπεΐν, αναξ," Ιλιος, οϊνος, οίκος, $ργον } Ίσος, έκαστος, are some of the most common, but that it was neglected by the transcribers of his works. Hence the reason appears why such words so often have a hiatus before them ; as, αυτούς δε έλώοία for δΐ ^ελώρια, Άτρείδης τε άναξ for τε ϊάναξ • and also why they are so rarely preceded by long vowels or diphthongs shortened ; as, al μεν άρ* &λλατ ένδον for άλλαι ?ενδον ■ and so often by short syllables made long, as if by position, even where the caesura does not fall upon them; as, * Απόλλωνος έκάτοίο for "Απόλλωνος ^εκάτοιο, εΖ μίν τόξον οΐδα for τόξον J οΐδα. ABBREVIATIONS. ζω 3» 7) .χ ο 6ί i t ok Ό, ώ ΪΚ α,ττο αυ 7Η 77 8 ysv e? 7ξ ii & St hoc %> ει OT ϋ ς* in > iv i%l •I sv *> ψ 5" seal cm λλ vb» U€V ος ου πεξί ξΟ, QL ξ σσ στ *ζ ται ταυ της το του υν ύπο A TABLE, exhibiting the pages of the First Edition of the Grammar to which reference is made in the Notes appended to the Exercises, and the corresponding pages of the Second Edition. The large figures denote those Examples of the Exercises, which have notes referring to the Grammar; the small figures in the next column show the pages of the First Edition referred to in the respective notes ; and the small figures in the third column, the corresponding pages of the Second Edition. No. of Page, Page, No. of Page, Page, No. of Page, Page, Examp. la Eel. 2d Ed. Examp. 1st Ed. 2d Ed. Examp. 1st Ed. 2d Ed. 2 60 61 71.72 72 26 85 79 103 98 69 f- 70 C 79 98 3 64 76 27 22 26 71 108 127 4 64 76 62 74 74 5 5 65 77 63 75 77 61 73 5 60 72 28 10 10 7$ 60 72 61 72 11 12 79 117 1J6 110 129 29 35 40 81 ? 61 73 19 22 82 I 79 98 6 108 127 30 C 31 { 33^ 11 13 83 30 34 60 72 10 11 8 8 66 79 11 13 84 106 125 66 78 11 12 61 73 7 113 132 32 40 46 85? 79 98 67 79 22 26 87 ( 8 67 79.80 35 37 41 88 ' 75 91 9 91 110 17 20 89 63 75 11 60 72 36 41 46 62 74 74 90 37 40 " 48 61 72 12 60 72 38) 75 91 66 79 39 ( 43 50 94 62 74 72.73 88.89 40 ί 35 40 63 75 13 65 76 41 ) 102 109 128 60 72 43 37 41 63 74 16 67 79.80 110 129 61 72 17 67 79.80 44 35 43 103 62 74 20 68 80 61 73 104 62 74 67 79.80 45 41 49 63 75 77 78 95 96 46 114 35 133 40 105? 106 ( 117 136 77 95 39 46 108 63 75 197 216 47 42 49 62 74 21 62 74 49 72 85 9 10 115 134 35 40 111 60 72 24 110 129 52 37 43 112 > 15 17 106 125 53 42 49 115 ( 7 7 62 74 55 35 43 116 110 129 63 75 57 61 73 75 91 67 80 58 11 12 118? 61 73 25 116 135 110 129 119 ς 9 110 26 11 12 37 43 121 119 38 15 17 60 79 98 63 75 17 1 20 68 61 73 122 20 34 262 TABLE TO BE USED WITH THE EXERCISES. No. of Page, Page, No. of Page, Page, No. of Page, 1st Ed. Pasfe, Examp. 1st Ed. 2d Ed. Examp. 1st Ed. 2d Ed. Examp. 2d Ed. 122 19 22 231$ 2321 19 22 417 19 22 125 5 5 17 21 432 10 10 127 5 5 14 16 433 75 91 133 62 74 234 63 75 15 17 63 75 236 111 130 448 15 17 135 40 17 46 20 240 242) 62 19 73 22 449? 453 < 109 128 136 63 75 245 V 16 19 451 63 75 61 73 246) 11 12 463 117 136 140 62 74 247 119 138 475? 66 78 61 73 476 ( 16 19 141 86 104 248 19 22 480? 16 19 60 72 10 10 481 ( 15 17 94 113 254 96 115 485) 142? 15 18 255 61 73 486 V 17 20 143$ 19 22 74 90 487 S 144? 63 75 260 10 10 510? 512$ 15 17 145 < 9 9 19 23 146? 7 7 ' 20 23 150 ( 147 117 136 262 9 9 519 521' 19 22 62 74 263 63 74 113 132 154) 17 7 268 65 77 62 74 156 V 15 277) 15 17 59 71 157^ 7 279 V 9 9 547 61 73^ 159? 123 285^ 19 22 558 16 19 160 ( 107 295 5 5 560 106 125 163 > 113 132 298 63 75 61 73 169 21 25 9 9 578? 44 52 181) 300 108 127 579$ 43 50 183 V 184) 15 17 17 20 301 ? 303 J 85 103 588 596? 14 15 16 17 190 106 125 305 64 76 597$ 20 23 193 109 128 316 59 71 599) c 111 130 319 16 19 600 V 20 24 196 110 129 60 72 601) 198 < 106 125 322 117 136 615 14 17 199 68 80 118 137 623 7 7 76 92 65 77 633 15 17 204 Ϊ 333 63 75 65 76 205 1 344 110 129 637 61 73 207 f 209 J 210 65 76 113 132 639 16 19 358 107 126 15 18 66 78 374 85 103 645 ? 43 50 214 5 5 384 113 132 647$ 20 23 215 117 136 389 107 126 661 105 124 216 94 113 118 137 6Π4 43 51 219 115 134 398? 108 127 1 CyGQ ? 7 7 221 9 9 400$ 111 130 1 667 <; 414 20 23 684? 685$ 15 17 1 107 126 TABLE TO BE USED WITH THE EXERCISES. 263 No. of Page, Pago, No. of Page, Page, No. of Page, Page, Examp. 1st Ed. 2d Ed. Examp. 1st Ed. 21 Ed. Examp. 1st Ed. 2d Ed. 689 16 14 761 21 25 1008? 701 15 19 266? 1009 I 63 74 12 19 767 ( 20 23 1038 39 46 13 14 824 50 58 1043 32 36 714 78 96 868 20 24 1051 68 80 61 73 958 15 18 1063- 15 17 756 15 18 985 50 58 1208 85 103 g 1 POPULAR SERIES OF ARITHMETICS, ADAPTED TO ALL GRADES OF PUPILS; IN THREE BOOKS. BY BENJAMIN GREENLEAF, A. M. PRINCIPAL OF BRADFORD (MASS.) TEACHERS* SEMINARY. IMPROVED STEREOTYPE EDITIONS. The publisher invites the attention of Teachers and School Com- mittees to this valuable series of Arithmetics, and especially to the important improvements which have recently been made. I. MENTAL ARITHMETIC. This book, as its title indicates, is strictly mental, and designed for children ; and -while it is sufficiently simple and easy for "beginners," it advances with gradual steps till it presents to the learner all the Tables in simple and compound numbers, and many ingenious and practical questions under them, and also several sections in simple fractions, the whole being admirably adapted to the capacities of young scholars, and to prepare them for the next book of the series. II. INTRODUCTION TO THE NATIONAL ARITHMETIC. This book consists of mental and written Arithmetic, " on the Induc- tive Sststem, combining the Analytic and Synthetic Methods." The present edition has been thoroughly revised and entirely re- written, and nearly 150 pages of new matter have been added. The following are some of the prominent features of this work. 1. The arrangement is strictly progressive and philosophical, no prin- ciple being anticipated. 2. The language is simple, precise, and accurate, rendering the rules, definitions, and illustrations, intelligible to the pupil. 3. The examples are eminently practical, and adapted not only to illustrate and fix in the mind the principles which they involve, but also to interest the pupil, exercise his ingenuity, and inspire a love for the science. 4. The reasons for the operations have been shown, and the learner is led to look into the philosophy of the subject, rather than perform me- chanically operations which he does not understand. 5. The subject of Cancellation is more fully treated, it is believed, -B greenleaf's series of arithmetics. than in any other work of the kind. The principles upon which it de- pends, and the different modes of operation are fully developed, and its application and use are made perfectly clear to the scholar. G. Several subjects not in the former edition, have been added in this ; as, Ratio, Duties, Profit and Loss, Factors, Progression, Annuities, &c. ; and others, as, Notation and Numeration, Interest, Proportion, Extrac- tion of the Roots, and their application, have been greatly extended and improved, making the book sufficiently extensive for Common Schools. 7. Questions have been inserted at the bottom of the pages, designed to direct the attention of teachers and pupils to the most important prin- ciples of the science, and fix them in the mind. III. THE NATIONAL ARITHMETIC. This book is designed more particularly for advanced scholars in our Public Schools, High Schools, and Academies, and, like the Introduc- tion, combines the Analytic and Synthetic Methods. It was revised in 1847, and contains the most valuable modern improvements. In describing its prominent characteristics it may be remarked, — 1. That it is a complete system of itself, comprising all the elemen- tary Rules, as well as those pertaining to the higher branches of the science, together with a full illustration and demonstration of their principles, and contains, it is believed, a greater amount and variety of matter strictly arithmetical, than can be found in any other treatise of the kind. 2. It embraces a large amount of mercantile information not usually found in arithmetics, but important to those destined for the warehouse or counting room. 3. The Custom House business, carefully prepared by officers of the Boston Custom House, the Philosophical and Geometrical Problems, the articles on Banking and Exchange, are full, and have passed under the revision of those who are well acquainted with these respective de- partments. Of the entire Series of Arithmetics thus briefly described, we have ample testimony from many of the most intelligent School Com- mittees and Teachers in New England and elsewhere, that it is better adapted than any other before the public, to secure to the pupil mental discipline, thorough knowledge of the principles of the science, and. facil- ity in their application. The great popularity of Greenleaf's Arithmetic is indicated by the fact tha.t it is now in general use in the best schools throughout New England, including the several State Normal Schools, in Massa- chusetts, in New York City, and in hundreds of academies and select schools in various sections of the United States. Two editions of this Arithmetic, one containing the answers in the book, and the other without them, are now published. Comflete Keys to the Introduction and National Arithmetics, containing full solutions and explanations, are prepared for the con- venience of teachers only. Copies of the work will be furnished for examination, on application to the Publishers, Robert S. Davis & Co., 118 Washington Street, Boston, or to Sanborn & Carter, Exchange Street, Portland. RECOMMENDATIONS OF GREENLEAF'S ARITHMETIC. The attention of Teachers and Superintendents of Schools, is respectively invited to this popular si/stem of Arithmetic, which is well adapted to all classes of students. 05^" Copies of the work furnished for examination, on application to the Publisher. To those who have not had an opportunity to examine the work, the following testimo- nials from eminent teachers, indicating some of its peculiar excellences, are submitted: Phillips Academy, Andover, May 15, 184G. Yonr " National Arithmetic " has been used as a text book in this Institution for 6everal years. We had previously made trial of several different systems, and the comparison has satisfied us that your work possesses decided advantages over ail others now in use. One of the peculiar excellences of your book is, that the examples are so con- structed and diversified as to exhaust the subject. It would be almost impossible for a pupil to pei-form your examples in course, and remain ignorant of any of' the important principles of the science. Your work is also happily adapted to accom plish a still higher and more important object, — mental discipline. There are various other points to which I might allude, as the originality of your examples, their practical character, &c. ; but the crowning excellence of your'system is, that it works well in the school-room. We have used your " Introductory Arithmetic " in our preparatory department for the last two years, and find it to possess substantially the same valuable qualitier that characterize the larger work. W. H. Wells, B. Greenleaf, Esq. Instructor in English, Department. From Marshall Conant, Esq., Principal of Framingham Academy t — formerly a Teacher in one of the Public Schools, Boston. After giving Greenleaf 's Arithmetic and Introduction a pretty thorough examina- tion, I concluded to give them a ti-ial; and it has been attended with success. The definitions and rules, both in the National Arithmetic and Introduction, are stated with admirable clearness. A feature of these works, which pleases me much, is the selection of such examples as fully illustrate the principles, and teach a skilful applica- tion of the rides of arithmetic. The "Mental Arithmetic " by the same author, is well arranged and perspicuous, and goes so far as to prepare the pupil to enter with ease the next work of the series. I particularly like the tables, and the application of them in the latter part of the book. In publishing all the works of this author, I feel that you are doing good service to the cause of education. Framingham, Jidy 3, 1845. Marshall Conant. The Mental, Introductory, and National Arithmetics, by Mr. Greenleaf, have been for some time used in the school under my charge ; so that, from experience I can speak freely of their merits. The rules are given in clear and precise language ; illustrated where necessary by examples ; and furnished with so many questions, skilfully varied, as to render it impossible for any one, after fairly going through the series, to be without a competent knowledge of the subject. These observations apply particularly to the National Arithmetic. Its efficiency is acknowledged wherever it has been used. During the last six years I have had scholars in every stage of progress, and I have invariably found that it furnished all the information which they desired, while by its systematic arrangement the princi- ples of the science were acquired with pleasure and facility. It is superior, in my opinion, to any work now before the public. James B. Batcheller, Marblehead, April 11, 1S46. Principal of Centre SchooL After a careful examination of Greenleaf's Arithmetic, and comparing it with a library of Arithmetics which I am fortunate enough to possess, I am prepared to say, that as a practical and scientific work, it is the best I have seen ; and I can but regard it only as a valuable acquisition to this department of education. The pecu- liar excellences of the work, consist in the clearness of its arrangement and the omission of a mass of explanation, tending to confuse the pupil, and to defeat what I regard as one great object of education, the learning of the young to think. It is a work which should be introduced into all our schools, and I am persuaded that when its merits become known, it will supersede many works of more extensive circulation, but of far less merit. Having felt that an arithmetic prepared for the higher schools, and at the same time adapted to the comprehension of very young pupils, was a great desideratum, I have for a long time desired to see such a work as this which I have now in use in my school. Moses Woolson, Bangor, Me., June 15th, 1844. Principal oftlie Female High SehooL 3 RECOMMENDATIONS OF GREEELEAE'S ARITHMETIC. After a trial of several months, Greenleaf 's Arithmetics have been adopted as text- books for the classes in my department of instruction. The general arrangement of the introduction of several of the old modes of working problems omitted by so many of the present time, the numerous examples, the clearness and perspicuity of the rules, and the placing of the answers with the sums, are among the advantages pos- sessed by those works, which in my view justly entitle them to preference. New York, January 24, 1844. Wm. Taylor A. M., Instructor in Natural Philosophy and Mathematics, Washington Institute. Having had occasion to examine the several treatises upon Arithmetic used in our befit schools, and to select from them one for the use of the pupils of the Commer cial Department of the University Grammar School, I found Emerson's 3d part and Greenleaf 's National Arithmetic to possess apparently about equal degrees of merit. After having taken several large classes through Emerson's, and several others through Greenleaf's, I have adopted the latter as the permanent ai'ithmetic of my school. Isaac G. Hubbs, Commercial and Collegiate School. New York, April 9, 1844. After a careful and rigid examination of Greenleaf's Arithmetic, I do not hesitate to say that it is the very best work of the kind extant. I have introduced it into my school, and am delighted with the apparent satisfaction displayed by my pupils. W. King, Classical and English School, 639 Broadway. New York, October 2,1843. I have carefully examined Greenleaf's Introduction and National Arithmetic. They are, in my opinion, better adapted to the purposes of teaching than any other books in this department of science with which I am acquainted. I prefer them to Emerson's series, which I have used during the last eight years, and I have therefore introduced them into my school. Chas. W. Feeks, 649 Broadway, Ν. Y. New York, October 4, 1843. Classical and English School. I have examined with great care and attention " Greenleaf's National Arithme tic," and have no hesitation in saying, that I think it excels every other work of th«* kind with which I am acquainted. I have accordingly introduced it into " All Saints' Parochial School," and most cheerfully recommend it to others of my profession. Wm. A. Taylor, Principal of All Saints' Parochial School. New York, October 31, 1843. B. Greenleaf, Esq. Dear Sir : I thank you most heartily for the " National Arith- metic " you presented me some time ago. After a thorough and practical examina- tion of the work, I can truly say it pleases me more than any I have ever used. The youngest scholars are interested, and love to study it ; the oldest give evidence of a clearer and better understanding of the subject than they have ever shown be- fore. Having introduced it into my own school, I would cheerfully recommend it to others. Yours, very truly, John Jay Greenough. New York, September 12, 1843. I have not only examined Greenleaf's National Arithmetic faithfully, but I have tested its value by use ; and I do unhesitatingly pronounce it the best text-book of the kind, that has fallen under my notice, during my entire school-room experience. I shall, hereafter, use no other. ' Joseph McKee, Classical and English Teacher, Madame Chegaray^s School. Union Square, Neiv York, July, 1844. An attentive examination of Greenleaf's National Arithmetic and the Introduc- tion thereto, has confirmed the favorable opinion I had previously formed from re- port. The rules, simply yet accurately expresssed, the lucid illustrations and copious examples, in fact, the entire arrangement, show them to be works of no ordi- nary merit, and indicate that they have been prepared by one who is a complete master of the science. I have not the slightest hesitation in giving them a decided preference to any works of the kind I have hitherto seen. M. J. O'Donnell, Principal of Public School, No. 11. New York, November 22, 1844. I have examined, with some care, Mr. Greenleaf's Arithmetic, and, by that exam- ination, imperfect as it was, am forced to the conclusion, that on several accounts, it is preferable to most, if not all other works on that subject, that I have seen. James N. McElligott, Principal of the Mechanic Society School. New York, January, 1844. 9 RECOMMENDATIONS OF GREENLEAF'S ARITHMETIC. Gree.vle.af's National Arithmetic is now used as a text-book in the follow- ing important seminaries of learning, among others, which fact may be considered a high recommendation for the work. O^ The several State Normal Schools in Massachusetts, under the direction of the State Board of Education. The Normal Schoots in New York City ; Rutger's Female Institute, New York ; Brooklyn (Ν. Y.) Female Academy; Abbott Female Academy, and Phillips Acade- my, Andover; Chauncey Hall School, Boston; Bradford Female Seminary, (Mass.) Miss Hasseltine, Principal ; Phillips Academy, Exeter ; the Young Ladies' Iusti tute, Pittsfield ; Williams Academy, Stockbridge ; Worcester County High School, Worcester ; Catholic College, Worcester ; Wesleyan Academy, Wilbraham ; Amherst Academy ; Quaboag Seminary, Warren ; Framingham Academy; Hingham Acade my ; Portland Academy ; Peirce Academy, Middleborough ; Partridge Academy, Duxbury ; Lowell Academy ; Bristol Academy, Taunton ; New Bedford Academy ; Rev. D. Leach's Select School, Roxbury ; Putnam High School, Newburyport.; Friends' Academy, Providence; Kimball 'Union Academy, Meriden, (N. EL;) Pem- broke Academy ; New Hampton Academy ; Keene Academy ; Hillsboro' Academy ; Mount Caesar Seminary; Belfast Academy; Thetford Academy; Caledonia County Grammar School ; the* High Schools or Academies in Woodstock, Middlebury, Rut- land, Montpelier, Burlington, Bradford, and many other towns in Vt. ; the High Schools in Hailowell, Augusta, Waterville and Bangor, and many other distin- guished institutions in various parts of the United States ; and wherever the work has been introduced, it is still used with great success, — which is deemed a sufficient recommendation. The whole or a part of this series, has been recommended and adopted by the superintending school committees of the principal towns throughout New England, including Andover, Haverhill, Newburyport, Salem, Beverly, Lynn, Portsmouth, Worcester, Springfield, Northampton, Pittsfield, Taunton, Fall River, Pawtucket, Bristol, Marblehead, Duxbury, Kingston, Plymouth, Weymouth, Hingham, Milton, Barnstable, Ipswich, Danvers, Brookline, Newton, Watertown, Medford, Quincy, Dedham, Nashua, Manchester, Concord, Fitzwilliam, Keene, Portland, BangoV, Belfast, Hailowell, Augusta, Waterville, Hartford, Norwich, and in the best public and private schools in various sections of the United States. Greenleaf's Arithmetics are used in most of the Select Schools and Acade- mies (including the following) in New York City, which are of the first grade. Washington Institute, T. D. & T. W. Porter, Principals. Rutger's Female Institute, Charles E. West, Principal. Cornelius Institute, Rev. J. J. Owen, " All Saints'' Parochial School, Wm. A. Taylor, " Commercial and Collegiate School, Hubbs & Clarke, " Classical, Mathematical, and Com' I histitutwn, • •Η. Peugnet, " Classical and English School, Isaac F. Bragg, " Classical and English School, Charles Lyon, " New York Institute, E. H. Jenny, " Trijiity School, William Morris, " Boarding and Day School for Young Ladies, Madame Chegaray, " Mechanics' Institute School, Mr. Tracy, " English and Classical School, Aaron Rand, " Classical, Mathematical, and English Academy," J. F. Worth, " Select School for Boys, J.J. Greenough, " Classical, French, and English Scliool, Taylor & Foignet, '•' Scotch Presbyterian School, Robert H. Browne, " City Commercial School, J. B. Quick, " Academy for Young Gentlemen, E. L. Avery, α Commercial and Collegiate Institute, J. Fanning & H. Cady, " St. Luke's School, George A. Rogers, " Female Academy, Mrs. Page, " Classical a?id English School, James Larson, Brooklyn Female Academy, A. Crittenden, Select School for Young Ladies, (Brooklyn.) A. Greenleaf, " Collegiate and Commercial School, (Brooklyn,) James G. Russell, " Brooklyn Grammar School, Walter Chisholm, " D^=-This system of Arithmetic is also the text book in the "Normal Schools^ male and female.) under the supervision of the Public School Society, and in the Ward SchooL• in the City of New York, and in various parts of the State. 12 NEW ELOCUTIONARY WORKS, PUELISHED BY ROBERT S. DAVIS, BOSTON. THE PRACTICAL ELOCUTIONIST. Fourth Edition. THE NATIONAL SPEAKER. Tenth Ed. 12mo. pp. 360. Since the first edition of the above works was issued, a few months ago, they have met with a very favorable reception, and one or both have been adopted as text-books by School Committees or teachers in Roxbury, Cambridge, Charlestown, Salem, Lowell, Springfield, and in several other important places. RECOMMENDATIONS. From Rev. Thomas Hill, A. ./If., Member of the School Committee, Waltham, Mass. As I looked over the " Practical Elocutionist" of Mr. Maglathlin, I found my old Whateleian prejudices against rules for utterance vanish. The .practical, intelligible, and valuable nature of the rules in this little book makes it the only thing I have ever seen which I thought would help either teacher or scholar in our common schools in learning to read well. From Levi Reed, Principal of the Washington School, Roxbury, Mass., and President of the Norfolk County Teachers' Association. I have examined "The Practical Elocutionist" with much satisfac- tion, and am happy to say that I like its plan and matter. A brief manual of vocal culture, like this, has been much needed, and I have no doubt, that, in the hands of a skilful teacher, it may be used with the happiest results. From C. C. Chase, A. M., Principal of the High School, Loicell, Mass. I know of no work on the subject of Elocution which I can more highly recommend than " The Practical Elocutionist." From W. B. Wait, Principal, and Η. A. H. Wait, Preceptress, of Mel- rose Academy, near Boston, Mass. a The Practical Elocutionist " is, as it should be, brief; but being, throughout, definite, lucid, and thoroughly practical, it is abundantly full and comprehensive. It seems to us exactly adapted to supply our public schools and academies with what many excellent teachers have hitherto regarded as a great desideratum. Having introduced it into the institution under our charge, and had opportunity to test its merits by actual use, we are prepared to give the work our highest commen- dation. RECOMMENDATIONS. From Edwin W. Bartlett, A. M., Principal of the High School, Wo* burn, Mass. Having carefully examined " The National Speaker," I am happy to state, that it appears to me most admirably adapted to the purposes in- tended. The different parts of the work are well arranged, and the se- lections show that they have been very judiciously made. The elocutionary analysis is evidently the result of much labor, being concise, definite, and clear. It seems to contain all the necessary rules for good reading and speaking, illustrated by most appropriate examples. In short, I am much pleased with the whole work. From Franklin Crosby, A. M., Principal of the High School, South Reading, Mass. The arrangements and selections of " The National Speaker " are such as to commend it to all who are interested in elocution as a branch of school studies. An " Elocutionary Analysis " is certainly a new feature in an Amer- ican compilation. In my opinion, the selections are admirably adapted to insure that variety so necessary in a work of this nature. While a few of the most legible of the ancient landmarks are allowed to remain, I am glad to see that a desire for a change imparts to this book that .freshness of matter so essential to success. From J. Pearl, A. M., Principal of the College Street Female Semi- nary, New Haven, Ct. I have examined with much pleasure "The National Speaker," and am pleased with the arrangement, and the selection of its pieces ; I think the elocutionary analysis better adapted to promote correct enun- ciation and articulation than any work of the kind with which I am acquainted. From Charles R. Coburn, Esq., President of the New York State Teachers' Association, and Teacher in Oswego Academy, Ν. Y. Mr. Henry B. MagJathlin, — Sir, I am highly pleased with your works on elocution. They seem to be just such books as are required by every person who is engaged in teaching the elements of good read- ing and speaking. The "Elocutionist" contains what its title indicates, "the principles of elocution rendered easy and comprehensive," and is eminently prac- tical. Notwithstanding its brevity, I think it sufficiently full. " The National Speaker " is well arranged, and the selections, which embrace a suitable variety of style, are judiciously made; the most of them being taken from late eminent writers and speakers in Europe and America. From George Spencer, A. M., Author of Latin Lessons, and Principal of Utica Academy, Ν. Y. I have examined " The National Speaker " with some care, and an» pleased with it. Its "principles of elocution" are such as are sanc- tioned by nature and the most correct usage, and are expressed in clear and simple language. It will fully meet the want I have felt of a similar work for my classes in this branch of study. Robert S. Davis* Publications. LEVERETT'S CESAR AND FOLSOiM's CICERO. LEVERETT'S CtESAR'S COMMENTARIES. Caii Julii Cjb- saris Commentarii de Bello Gallico ad Codices Parisinos recensiti, a N. L. Achaintre et Ν. E. Lemaire. Accesserunt Notulae An- glicae, atque Index Historicus et Geographicus. Curavit F. P. Leverett. Editio stereotypa. From John J. Owen, Principal of Cornelms Institute, New York, and Editor of Xenophon's Anabasis. I have examined with some attention Caesar's Commentaries, edited by Leverett, and Cicero's Orations, edited by Folsom, and am happy to recom- mend them to classical teachers, as being, in my estimation, far superior to any other editions of those works, to which students in this country have general access. The typography is fair and accurate, and the general appear- ance of the books does honor to the enterprising publisher. I hope these editions will be extensively used in our Academies and High Schools. (Signed) John J. Owen, Cornelius Institute. New York, Nov. 22, 1843. I have attentively perused Leverett's Caesar. The neatness and accuracy of the Text, and the beautiful adaptation of the Notes, compel me to use it in preference to any other that I have seen. (Signed) Ε. H. Jenny, Principal of New York Institute. New York, Nov. 1, 1843. FOLSOM'S CICERO'S ORATIONS. M. T. Ciceronis Orationea Quaedam Selectae, Notis illustratae. [By Charles Folsom, A. M.] In Usum Academies Exoniensis. Editio stereotypa, Tabulis Ana• lyticis instructa. From Charles E. West, Principal of Rutgers Female Institute, New York. I take pleasure in commending to teachers the recent beautiful edition of Folsom's Cicero. The attractiveness of its text, notes, synoptical and ana- lytical tables, and typographical execution, led me to place it in the hands of a class of young ladies, who are reading it with delight. (Signed) Charles E. West, Principal of R. F. I. New York, Nov. 1, 1843. I have examined Cicero's Orations, edited by Charles Folsom, and prefer it to any other 1 have seen. The Synopsis and Analysis of each Oration are bo beautifully given, that it seems as a Rhetoric, as well as a Text Book for learning Latin. I shall use it exclusively in the institution under my charge. (Signed) Ε. H. Jenny, Principal of New York Institute New York, Nov. 1, 1843. I have carefully examined the recent editions of Leverett's Ceesar, and Folsom's Cicero, and fully concur in the opinions above expressed. (Signed) Wm. A. Taylor, Principal of All Saints Parochial School New York, Nov. 1843. These editions of Ccesar and Cicero are highly recommended by the following Teachers, who have recently adopted them, in preference to all others. Isaac F. Bragg, Principal of Male High School, New York. C. Tracy, " " English and Classical School, u B. F. Parsons, " " Female Classical School, " W. Marsh, " " Classical and English School, Lyceum, Brooklyn. Robert S. Davis'' Publications. FISK'S GREEK GRAMMAR, AND EXERCISES. A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, by Benjamin Franklin Fisk. Twenty-sixth stereotype edition. The requisites in a Manual of Grammar, are simplicity and lucidness of arrangement, condensation of thought, and accuracy of principle and expres- sion. These requisites Mr. Fisk appears to have attained in a considerable degree in his Greek Grammar, of which we have expressed approbation by introducing it into our School. Forrest and Wyckoff, Principals of Collegiate School, New York City. New York, October 3d, 1845. Τ have used for several years Fisk's Greek Grammar, and I regard it among the best, and perhaps the nest, now used in our Schools. Pupils instructed in it, encounter less difficulty than in others. E. H. Jenny, A. M., New York, October, 1843. Principal of" New York Institute." Mr. R. S. Davis, — I have examined Fisk's Greek Grammar, published by yourself. To all who will take the trouble to examine it, its own intrinsic merit will be its best recommendation. The Syntax I regard as decidedly superior. The rules are peculiarly clear and comprehensive, thereby relieving the student from a heavy tax upon his time and memory, to which he would otherwise be subjected, and from which, perhaps, he is not equally free in the use of any other work of the kind. C. Tracy, Principal of Select English and Classical School. New York City, October 28th, 1843. From Benjamin Greenleaf, Esq., author of the National Arithmetic, etc. Bradford, (Mass.,) Teacher's Seminary, October 16th, 1843. — For several years past, I have used Fisk's Greek Grammar in my seminary. I consider it a work of superior merit. It is well arranged ; and the rules are clear and per- spicuous. It is, in my opinion, better adapted to initiate pupils into the idiom of the Greek language, than any other treatise of the kind, that I have ex- amined. Fisk's Greek Exercises should be used in connexion with the Grammar. A work of this kind has long been needed. It is a production of great merit. Yours respectfully, Benjamin Greenleaf. Recommendations fully concurring with the above opinions, have beei. received from the following gentlemen, among many others, who have recently adopted this Grammar in preference to any other. Isaac F. Bragg, Principal of Male High School, New York. James N. McElligott, " " Mechanics' Society School, " Wm. A. Taylor, " " All Saints Parochial School, " Moore and Fish, " " the New England School, " Charles W. Feeks, " " Classical and English School, " Washington King, " " " » " J. Jay Greenough, " " Select School, " [ΠΡ Fisk's Greek Grammar is tised in Harvard university, and in man^ other Collegiate and Academic Institutions, in various parts of the United States. FISK'S GREEK EXERCISES. Greek Exercises; containing the substance of the Greek Syntax, illustrated by Passages from the best Greek Authors, to be written out from the words given in their simplest form ; by Benamin Franklin Fisk. " Consuetudo et exercitatio facilitatem maxime parit." — Quintil. Adapted to the Author's " Greek Grammar." Sixteenth stereotype edition. Fisk's Greek Exercises are well adapted to illustrate the rules of the Gra:r- «*ar, and constitute a very useful accompaniment thereto. (Signea) J. B. Kidder, Teacher of Select School, New York. Robert S. Davis 1 Publications. smith's class book of anatomy. THE CLASS BOOK OF ANATOMY, explanatory of the first principles of Human Organization, as the basis of Physical Educa- tion ; with numerous Illustrations, a full Glossary, or explanation of technical terms, and practical Questions at the bottom of the pase. By J. V. C. Smith, M. D., formerly Professor of General Anatomy and Physiology in the Berkshire Medical Institution. Seventh,lmproved Stereotype Edition. l£jr This work has received the highest testimonials of approbation from the most respectable sources, and has already been adopted as a text book in many schools and colleges in various sections of the United States. The estimation in which it is held in other countries may be inferred from the fact, that a translation of it has recently been made into the Italian lan- guage, at Palermo, under the supervision of the celebrated Dr. Placido Portel. It is also in the progress of translation into the Hawaiian language, by the American missionaries at the Sandwich Islands, to be used in the higher schools, among the natives ; and the plates are soon to be forwarded, with .eference to that object, by the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions ; which furnishes conclusive evidence of its value and utility. From Rev. Hubbard Winslow, Pastor ofBowdoin St. Churchy Boston. Boston, Nov. 7, 1836. I have examined the Class Book of Anatomy, by Dr. Smith, with very great satisfaction. For comprehensiveness, precision, and philosophical arrange- ment, it is surpassed by no book of the kind which I have ever seen. The study of Anatomy and Physiology, to some extent, is exceedingly interesting and useful as a branch of common education ; and it is to be desired that it should be more extensively adopted in all our higher schools. To secure this end, there is no other book before the public so wll prepared as the one under remark. It is also a convenient compend to lie upon the table of the scientific anatomist and physician, and a very valuable family book for reference, and for explanation of terms which often occur in reading. Η W s ow We are gratified to see the attempt to introduce a new subject to ordinary students. It is wonderful that civilized man has been so long willing to remain ignorant of the residence of his mind, and the instruments by which it operates^ The book before us abounds in information in which every adult reader will feel a deep interest, and from which all may derive valuab'e les- sons of a practical kind. We are gratified to see frequent references to the Great First Cause of life and motion. We cordially wish success to his ente prise in a path almost untrodden. — American Annals of Education. Copy of a Communication from Mr. C. H. Allen, of the Franklin Acade~i•' Andover, Mass. North Andover, Dec. 10, 1835. Mr. R. S. Davis. Dear Sir : During my vacation. I have had time to ex- amine Smith's Class Book of Anatomy, the second edition of which you have recently published. I do not hesitate to speak of it as the very work which the public have long demanded. It contains knowledge which should be widely diffused. The author is remarkably clear in h v sx^anations and des- criptions, and very systematic in his arrangement. Jbo that he has rendered his neglected branch of useful knowledge highly interesting to all classes. Yours, respectful Chas# h< a PARKER'S EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. The great popularity of this work has given it an introduction into almost every Academy and higher Seminary throughout the United States, England, and the British Provinces ; and its usefulness, as an aid in teaching this important branch of education; has been acknowledged by hundreds of eminent teachers who have used it. The School Committee of Boston authorized its introduction into the public schools of the city, soon after the first edition was issued, and it is now the only work on Composition used in them. The publisher trusts that the improvements contained in the present edition will render the work more acceptable, and give it a still wider circulation. The following recommendations have been selected from a large number of valuable notices from the most respectable sources : From J. W. Buikley, Esq., Teacher, Albany. I have examined " Parker's Exercises in Composition," and am delighted with the work. I have often felt the want of just that kind of aid that is here afforded. The use of this book will diminish the labor of the teacher, and facilitate the progress of the pupil in a study that has hitherto been attended with many trials to the teacher, and perplexities to the learner. If Mr. Parker has not strewed the path of the student with flowers, he has " removed many stumbling-blocks out of the way, made crooked things straight, and rough places smooth." It is certainly one of the happiest efforts that I have ever seen in this department of letters, — affording to the student a beautiful introduction to the most important principles and rules of rhetoric ; and I would add, that if carefully studied, it will afford a " sure guide " to written composition. I shall use my influence to secure its introduction to all our schools. From, Rev. Samuel P. Neivman, Professor of Rhetoric in Bowdoin College. I have examined " Progressive Exercises in English Composition," by R. G. Parker, with much care, and hesitate not to express an opinion that it is well adapted to the purpose for which it is designed. It is well fitted to call into exercise the ingenuity of the pupil, to acquaint him with the more important principles and rules of rhetoric, and to guide and aid his first attempts in the difficult work of composition. From Walter R. Johnson, Esq., Franklin Institute, Philadelphia. Having often felt the necessity of reducing to its simple elements the art of composition, and having been compelled, from the want of regular treatises, to employ graduated exercises expressly prepared for the purpose, and similar in many respects to those contained in this treatise, I can speak with confidence of their utility, and do not hesitate to recommend them to the attention of teachers. From Dr. Fox, Principal of the Boylston School, Boston. This little manual, by the simplicity of its arrangement, is calculated to destroy the repug- nance, and to remove the obstacles, which exist in the minds of young scholars to performing the task of composition. I think this work will be found a valuable auxiliary to facilitate the- progress of the scholar, and lighten the labor of the teacher. From Mr. C. Walker, Principal of the Eliot School Boston. This work is evidently the production of a thorough and practical teacher, and in my opin- ion it does the author much credit. By such a work, all the difficulties and discouragements which the pupil has to encounter, in his first attempts to write, are in a great measure removed; and he is led on progressively, in a methodical and philosophical manner, till he can express his ideas on any subject which circumstances or occasion may require, not only ■with sufficient distinctness and accuracy, but even with elegance and propriety. An elementary treatise on composition, like the one before me, is certainly much wanted at the present day. I think this work will have an extensive circulation ; and I hope the time is not distant, when this branch of education, hitherto much neglected, will receive that attention which in some degree its importance demands. We have seen no work which seems to us so useful as a guide to the teacher, and an aid to the pupil. — American Annals of Education and Instruction. The design of this work is unexcepfionably good. By a series of progressive exercises, the scholar is conducted from the formation of easy sentences to the more difficult and complex arrangement of words and ideas. ~He is, step by step, initiated into the rhetorical propriety of the language, and furnished with directions and models for analyzing, classifying, and writing down his thoughts in a distinct and comprehensive manner. — London Journal of Education. Published by ROBERT S. DAVIS, School-Book Publisher, No. 118 Washington Street, Boston, and sold by the Booksellers in all the principal cities and towns throughout the United States. / Jay δ ~φ ROBERT S. DAVIS & CO., PUBLISHERS AND BOOKSELLERS, NO. 118 WASHINGTON-STREET, BOSTON, Have for sale a large assortment of the Text Books used in the Common Schools, Academies, and Colleges in the United States, together with a variety of Books in the various departments of Literature and Science. Also, Stationery, including Paper, Steel Pens, Ink, Blank Account Books of all sizes and qualities. [CT Booksellers, Country Merchants, School Committees, and Teachers, sup- plied at the lowest cash prices. All orders promptly and faithfully attended to. Among their publications are the following valuable SCHOOL BOOKS, which are extensively used throughout the United States, viz. : ^ GREENLEAF'S SERIES OF MATHEMATICS. 1. MENTAL ARITHMETIC, upon the Inductive Plan ; designed for Primary and Intermediate Schools. Revised and enlarged edition. 144 pp. 2. INTRODUCTION TO THE NATIONAL ARITHMETIC ; or, COMMON SCHOOL ARITHMETIC. Improved stereotype edition. 324 pp. 3. THE NATIONAL ARITHMETIC, for advanced scholars in Common Schools and Academies. Improved stereotype edition. 360 pp. COMPLETE KEYS TO THE INTRODUCTION, AND NATIONAL ARITH- METIC, containing Solutions and Explanations, for Teachers only. 4. PRACTICAL ALGEBRA, for Academies and High Schools, and for advanced Students in Common Schools. New edition, revised and stereotyped. KEY TO THE PRACTICAL ALGEBRA, containing the Answers, and full Solutions and Explanations, for Teachers only. PARKER'S PROGRESSIVE EXERCISES IN ENGLISH COMPOSITION. New Stereotype Edition, revised, enlarged, and improved, from the fifty-fifth edition. 144 pp. 12mo, morocco back. [A text-book in all the principal Acad- emies and High Schools in the United States.] CLASS BOOK OF PROSE AND POETRY; Consisting of Selections from the best English and American Authors, designed as Exercises in Parsing ; for Common Schools and Academies. By Truman Rick- ard, A. M., and Hiram Orcutt, A. M. (Teachers.) New stereotype edition, enlarged and improved. 144 pp. Half morocco. THE NATIONAL SPEAKER; Containing Exercises, original and selected, in Prose, Poetry, and Dialogue, for Declamation and Recitation •, and an Elocutionary Analysis, exhibiting a clear explanation of principles, with rules for each element of Oral Expression, prac- tically illustrated in a systematic course of lessons. By Henry B. Maglathlin, A. M. Tenth edition, revised and enlarged. 360 pp. 12mo. [A new and pop- ular work, used either as a Rhetorical Reader, or Speaker.] FISK'S GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. By ~pp.nj a.nnin Franklin Fisk. Thirty-eighth stereotype edition. FISK'S GREEK EXERCISES. Greek Exercises, containing the substance of the Greek Syntax, illustrated by Passages from the best Greek Authors, to be written out from the words given in their simplest forms. Adapted to the Author's " Greek Grammar." LEVERETT'S CESAR'S COMMENTARIES. Caii Julii Cajsaris Commentarh de Bello Gallico ad Codices Parisinos recensiti, a N. L. Achaintre et N. E. Lemaire. Access,erunt Notulae Anglicae, atque Index Historicus et Geographicus. Curavit P. P. Leverett, A. M., Editor Latinitatis Lexicon, etc. FOLSOM'S CICERO'S ORATIONS. Μ. T. Ciceronis Orationes Quaedam Selectas, Notis illustratse. [By Charles Polsom, A. M.] In Usum Academies Exoniensis. Editio stereotypa, Tabulis Analyticis instructa. Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide Treatment Date: July 2006 PreservationTechnologies A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive Cranberry Township, PA 16066 (724) 779-21 11